Home

Dell PowerEdge Configuration Guide for the M I/O Aggregator 9.9(0.0)

1. SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 2 2 Hex STRING 00 01 E8 13 A5 C8 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 3 1 INTEGER 1107755009 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 3 2 INTEGER 1107755010 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 4 1 INTEGER SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 4 2 INTEGER 1 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 1 Hex STRING 00 00 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 2 Hex STRING 00 00 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 6 1 STRING Tengig 0 4 lt lt Channel member for Pol SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 6 2 STRING Tengig 0 5 lt lt Channel member for Po2 dot3aCommonAggFdbIndex SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 6 1 1 1107755009 1 INTEGER 1107755009 dot3aCommonAggFdbVlanId SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 6 1 2 1107755009 1 INTEGER 1 dot3aCommonAggFdbTagConfig SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 6 1 3 1107755009 1 INTEGER 2 Tagged 1 or Untagged 2 dot3aCommonAggFdbStatus SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 6 1 4 1107755009 1 INTEGER 1 lt lt Status active 2 status inactive If you learn the MAC address for the LAG the LAG status also displays dot3aCurAggVlanId SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 4 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 INTEGER 1 dot3aCurAggMacAddr SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 4 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Hex STRING 00 00 00 00 00 01 dot3aCurAggIndex SNMPv2 SMI enterpris
2. i Internal untagged I Internal untagged V VLT tagged NUM Status Description Active 1000 Active 1001 Active Dell Show LAG member ports utilization Dell show link bundle distribution Link bundle trigger threshold 60 LAG bundle 10 Utilization In Percent Interface Line Protocol Utiliz Te 0 41 Up Te 0 42 Up LAG bundle 11 Utilization In Percent Interface Line Protocol Utiliz Te 0 6 Up Dell Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs C Community r enable R Remote Port I Isolated d OpenFlow untagged O OpenFlow tagged VSN tagged tagged v VLT Ports U Pol0 Te 0 4 5 U Poll Te 0 6 T PolO Te 0 4 5 T Poll Te 0 6 0 Alarm State Inactive ation In Percent 0 0 0 Alarm State Inactive ation In Percent 0 Multiple Uplink LAGs with 40G Member Ports By default in IOA native 40G QSFP optional module ports are used in Quad 4x10G mode to convert Quad mode to Native 40G mode refer to the sample configuration Also note converting between Quad mode and Native mode and vice versa requires that you reload the system for the configuration changes to take effect The following sample commands configure multiple dynamic uplink LAGs with 40G member ports based on LACP 1 154 Convert the quad mode 4x10G ports to native 40G mode Dell configure Dell conf no stack unit 0 port 33 por Disabling quad mode on stack unit 0 po Te 0 33 Te 0 34 Te 0 35 Te 0 36
3. 4 show system stack ports status topology 248 Stacking Example of the show system brief Command Dell show system brief StStack MAC 00 1e c9 1 00 9b Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Ports 0 anagement online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 1 Standby online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 2 ember not present 3 ember not present 4 ember not present 5 ember not present Example of the show system Command Dell show system Stack MAC 00 le c9 1 00 9b Reload Type normal reload Next boot normal reload eng Unit Type Management Unit Status online Next Boot online Required Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL Current Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL aster priority 0 Hardware Rev Num Ports 56 Up Time 2 hr 41 min FTOS Version 8 3 17 46 Jumbo Capable yes POE Capable no Burned In MAC 00 1le c9 f1 00 9b No Of MACs 3 Unity Unit Type Standby Unit Status online Next Boot online Required Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL Current Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL aster priority 0 Hardware Rev Num Ports 56 Up Time 2 hr 27 min FTOS Version 8 3 17 46 Jumbo Capable yes POE Capable no Burned In MAC 00 1e c9 f1 04 82 No Of MACs 3 Unit 2 Unit Type Member Unit Status not present Required
4. ssssssssssssssssesseeeeeeeeeee nene nnns 98 Leaving and Staylng In GEOUDS reo dde ea er deeper n E VER enne ai 99 GMP Srooplng sa dete o e et eb ad o tatus 100 How IGMP Snooping is Implemented on an Aggregator ssssssseee eee 100 Disabling Multicast Floodirig uni m Re ER Rr dp Edda nd 101 Displayitig IGMP InfOkrflatiQEis sio det deter tert e pl teo bia esed 101 8 ICSAC CS at 103 Basic Interface Config ratlOnssss i e Dee dn C Red n Leo FE E EU Ue EE LES 103 Advanced Interface Configuration ccceccceccesceeseeseceseceeeceeesececeeseeeaeecseesaeesaeeeaeeeaesaeseneseeeteaneatens 103 Interface Auto Configuration essessssssssesseseseeeeenen nennen nennen nnn enes ennt rris eene nenne enne 103 Interface hy peste e er eur tete heed aida 104 Viewing Interface INformation cccccceecscceeeecceeeeeeeeeesececeeeceeaeeeeseaaeeeesaeeeeesaaneeeesneesessuaeeeeteneees Disabling and Re enabling a Physical Interface sssssssssssseem eee Layer Mode E Management Interfaces ci A i eere whi e Regens ACCESSING AM Aggregator et iret oce es tes deabus loba alta dt Configuring a Management Interface nemen rennes Configuring a Static Route for a Management Interface ssssssssssssssssssseen MEAN MembSetship s metere Nr ptt rd dte t e Ete t ur tut e tet Default VLAN te ix ae e aee rae Ra epa he ona eio dt e eire Ate tx eed ehh Port Based
5. e Auto Command e Privilege Levels After gaining authorization for the first time you may configure these attributes NOTE RADIUS authentication authorization is done for every login There is no difference between first time login and subsequent logins Idle Time Every session line has its own idle time If the idle time value is not changed the default value of 30 minutes is used RADIUS specifies idle time allow for a user during a session before timeout When a user logs in the lower of the two idle time values configured or default is used The idle time value is updated if both of the following happens The administrator changes the idle time of the line on which the user has logged in e The idle time is lower than the RADIUS returned idle time ACL Configuration Information The RADIUS server can specify an ACL If an ACL is configured on the RADIUS server and if that ACL is present the user may be allowed access based on that ACL If the ACL is absent authorization fails and a message is logged indicating this RADIUS can specify an ACL for the user if both of the following are true e If an ACL is absent e If there is a very long delay for an entry or a denied entry because of an ACL and a message is logged K NOTE The ACL name must be a string Only standard ACLs in authorization both RADIUS and TACACS are supported Authorization is denied in cases using Extended ACLs Auto Command You
6. 2 enero e Lt HIR HR RR re o Hr Pee eee 189 Important Points to Remember etre re e bred regt tete ee c et t 190 Port Monitoring x ceca ee de A ete e ete e a ad idee beet 191 LG SO rpg aiaia 193 Supported Modes e etit teen RR PR us 193 Understanding Banner SettingS cccccceesceesseeeeeeesenecenececesaeecaeeeaeesaeecaeseaeeeaeseaeseaecaeseneseneteeeritesas 193 Accessing the I O Aggregator Using the CMC Console Only 193 AAA Authentic Mirra A eene S beet t es 194 Configuration Task List for AAA Authentication 194 AAA A thornzatioh s at fel otter Us ooa ie ee e tee do en rate dts 196 Privilege Levels Overview cren nn 197 Configuration Task List for Privilege Levels ssssssssssssemeeeeeeeeennnn 197 RADIUS a letaisoh as ITE III LUI 201 RADIUS Authentication oce oen ane air de BAR ie WA ae t rt 202 Configuration Task Listfor RADIOS comicios ita 203 Boro er S DA MDC TENE 206 Configuration Task List for TACACS coi dre etti 206 TACACS Remote Authentication eene nnn ennt 207 Enabling SCP arnd SSEL 5 ade arn so n o T e ee P e xa ect ete e pe ent 209 Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image 210 Secure Shell Authentication nideien eene nnne retener ernst a Eeti 211 Troubleshooting SS Hien coe cect atte ERE Re IR e ba ER UR RR RE RUN 213 AAA A O IE HUE E eda ea tel ak tee al eoa i hid 214 VTY Line and Access Class Configuration 214 VTY Line Local Authentication and Autho
7. Example of the show qos dcb map map name Command Dell show qos dcb map dcbmap2 State Complete PfcMode ON PG 0 TSA ETS BW 50 PFC OFF Priorities 0 1245 67 PG 1 TSA ETS BW 50 PFC ON Priorities 3 Dell Data Center Bridging DCB 57 Example of the show dcb Command Dell show dcb stack unit 0 port set 0 DCB Status Enabled PFC Queue Count 7 2 Total Buffer lossy lossless in KB 2 3822 PFC Total Buffer in KB 3 1912 PFC Shared Buffer in KB 832 PFC Available Buffer in KB 1080 Example of the show interface pfc statistics Command Dell show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 3 pfc statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 Priority Rx XOFF Frames Rx Total Frames Tx Total Frames 1 0 014 C0 No P C QOOooOoooococc QeOoOoOoooococc QoOoOooOoooococc Example of the show interfaces pfc summary Command Dell show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 4 pfc summary Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 4 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Priority list is 4 Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Featur TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap
8. If FC Flex IO modules are installed the I O Aggregator does not perform FIP snooping because the FIP frames are terminated on the switch for NPIV operations On the Aggregator if the FC module is present the uplink ports are not automatically set up as FCF or bridge ports The FC Flex module cannot function as both an NPIV proxy gateway and a FIP snooping bridge at the same time Operation of the NPIV Proxy Gateway The NPIV application on the FC Flex IO module manages the FC functionalities configured in Dell Networking OS After the FC link comes up the gateway sends the initial FLOGI request to the connected switch using the switch and port WWN methods After a successful login the NPIV gateway sends a notification to inform the CNA that the FCF available to log in The source address of the FIP advertisement and FIP discovery advertisement response contain the MAC address of the FC Flex IO module port Depending on the number of login sessions on a particular FCF the NPIV gateway can load balance the login sessions from ENodes The NPIV application performs the FLOGI to FDISC conversion and sends the new FC frame on the associated FC ports After the external switch responds to the FLOGI request the NPIV gateway establishes the NPIV session and sends the frame to the FIP application The FIP application establishes virtual links to convert FCoE FLOGI accept messages into FIP FLOGI accept messages The corresponding ACL for the accept me
9. Supported Modes Standalone VLT PMUX Stacking How the LACP is Implemented on an Aggregator The LACP provides a means for two systems also called partner systems to exchange information through dynamic negotiations to aggregate two or more ports with common physical characteristics to form a link aggregation group K NOTE A link aggregation group is referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS A LAG provides both load sharing and port redundancy across stack units An Aggregator supports LACP for auto configuring dynamic LAGs Use CLI commands to display LACP information clear port channel counters and debug LACP operation for auto configured LAG on an Aggregator The Dell Networking OS implementation of LACP is based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802 3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD access method and physical layer specifications LACP functions by constantly exchanging custom MAC protocol data units PDUs across local area network LAN Ethernet links The protocol packets are only exchanged between ports that you configure as LACP capable K NOTE In Standalone VLT and Stacking modes you can configure a maximum of 16 members in port channel 128 In PMUX mode you can have multiple port channels with up to 16 members per channel 136 Link Aggregation Uplink LAG When the Aggregator power is on all uplink ports are configured in a single LAG LAG 128
10. When the bandwidth usage drops below the 80 threshold the system generates another syslog message shown in the following message and an SNMP trap SSTKUNITO M CP VLTMGR 6 VLT LAG ICL Overall Bandwidth utilization of VLT ICL LAG port channel 25 reaches below threshold Bandwidth usage 74 VLT show remote port channel status VLT and Stacking You cannot enable stacking with VLT If you enable stacking on a unit on which you want to enable VLT you must first remove the unit from the existing stack After you remove the unit you can configure VLT on the unit 284 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start up configuration they are not immediately enabled To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic The delay restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied then starts a configurable timer After the timer expires
11. om Server traffic is diverted over a backup link to upstream devices Uplink State Group i Backup Links B Uplink State Group C Primary Links Figure 33 Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink state group goes down a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link Down state You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink state group This calculation ensures that there is no traffic drops due to insufficient bandwidth on the upstream links to the routers switches By default if all upstream interfaces in an uplink state group go down all downstream interfaces in the same uplink state group are put into a Link Down state Using UFD you can configure the automatic recovery of downstream ports in an uplink state group when the link status of an upstream port changes The tracking of upstream link status does not have a major impact on central processing unit CPU usage 266 Uplink Failure Detection UFD UFD and NIC Teaming To implement a rapid failover solution you can use uplink failure detection on a switch with network adapter teaming on a server For more information refer to Network Interface Controller NIC Teaming For example as shown previously the switch router with UFD detects the uplink failure and autom
12. Configuring and Verifying Isolated Network Settings Enable the isolated network functionality for a particular VLAN or a set of VLANs using below command Dell conf io aggregator isolated network vlan lt vlan range gt To disable the isolated network functionality use the no form of command Dell conf no io aggregator isolated network vlan lt vlan range gt To display the VLANs that are configured to be part of an isolated network on the Aggregator use the below command Dell show io aggregator isolated networks Isolated Network Enabled VLANs 5 10 Isolated Networks for Aggregators 135 11 Link Aggregation Unlike IOA Automated modes Standalone and VLT modes the IOA Programmable MUX PMUX can support multiple uplink LAGs You can provision multiple uplink LAGs The I O Aggregator auto configures with link aggregation groups LAGs as follows e All uplink ports are automatically configured in a single port channel LAG 128 e Server facing LAGs are automatically configured if you configure server for link aggregation control protocol LACP based NIC teaming Network Interface Controller NIC Teaming No manual configuration is required to configure Aggregator ports in the uplink or a server facing LAG K NOTE Static LAGs are not supported on the SMUX Aggregator K NOTE In order to avoid loops only disjoint VLANs are allowed between the uplink ports uplink LAGs and uplink to uplink switching is disabled
13. Except for hybrid ports only a tagged interface can be a member of multiple VLANs You can assign hybrid ports to two VLANs if the port is untagged in one VLAN and tagged in all others K NOTE When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN using the no vlan tagged command it remains tagged only if it is a tagged interface in another VLAN If you remove the tagged interface from the only VLAN to which it belongs the interface is placed in the default VLAN as an untagged interface Adding an Interface to an Untagged VLAN To move an untagged interfaces from the default VLAN to another VLAN use the vlan untagged command as shown in the below figure Dell conf interface tengigabit 0 16 Dell conf if te 0 16 vlan untagged 4 Dell conf if te 0 16 exit Dell conf exit Dell 00 23 49 SSTKUNITO M CP SYS 5 CONFIG I Configured from console Dell show vlan id 4 Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated Q U Untagged T Tagged x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged C CMC tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports 4 Active U Pol Te 0 16 Po128 Te 0 33 39 51 56 T Te 0 1 15 17 32 3 3 Dell VLAN Configuration on Physical Ports and Port Channels Unlike other Dell Networking OS platforms IOA allows VLAN con
14. 00 23 52 SSTKUNITO state to up Group 3 CP Dell conf uplink sta Dell conf uplink sta Dell conf uplink sta Dell conf uplink sta Dell conf uplink sta te group 3 te group 3 fshow uplink state group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 SIFMGR 5 ASTATE _ UP config downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 2 5 9 11 12 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 4 Dell show running config uplink state group uplink state group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 2 5 9 11 12 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 4 Dell show uplink state group 3 Uplink State Group 3 Status Dell show uplink state group detail Dwn Up Interface up Uplink State Group 3 Status Interface down Enabled Up Dis Interface disabled Enabled Up Changed uplink state group Admin te group 3 downstream tengigabitethernet 0 1 2 5 9 11 12 te group 3 downstream disable links 2 upstream tengigabitethernet 0 3 4 te group 3 description Testing UFD feature Upstream Interfaces Te 0 3 Up Te 0 4 Up Downstream Interfaces Te 0 1 Up Te 0 2 Up Te 0 5 Up Te 0 9 Up Te 0 11 Up Te 0 12 Up lt After a single uplink port fails gt Dell show uplink state group detail Up Interface up Dwn Interface down Dis Interface disabled Uplink State Gr
15. 325 Table 30 show fcoe map Field Descriptions Field Fabric Name Fabric ID VLAN ID VLAN priority FC MAP FKA ADV period FCF Priority Config State Oper State Members Description Name of a SAN fabric The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded The dedicated VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic between servers and a fabric over the NPG The configured VLAN ID must be the same as the fabric ID FCoE traffic uses VLAN priority 5 This setting is not user configurable FCoE MAC address prefix value The unique 24 bit MAC address prefix that identifies a fabric Time interval in seconds used to transmit FIP keepalive advertisements The priority used by a server to select an upstream FCoE forwarder Indicates whether the configured FCoE and FC parameters in the FCoE map are valid Active all mandatory FCoE and FC parameters are correctly configured or Incomplete either the FC MAP value fabric ID or VLAN ID are not correctly configured Operational status of the link to the fabric up link is up and transmitting FC traffic down link is down and not transmitting FC traffic link wait link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer FC port or removed port has been shut down Aggregator with the FC ports which are members of the dedicated FCoE VLAN that carries storage traffic to the specified fabric show qos dcb map Command Examples PfcMode ON PG 0
16. Dell conf if po 21 portmode hybrid Dell 5 Show the port channel status Dell sh int port channel br Codes L LACP Port channel O OpenFlow Controller Port channel Dell conf int port channel 20 Dell conf if po 20 vlan tagged 1000 Dell conf if po 20 Dell conf if po 21 vlan tagged 1000 9 Link Aggregation Please save and reset unit 0 for the changes to take effect Disabling quad mode on stack unit 0 port 53 will make interface configs of Te 0 53 Te 0 54 Te 0 55 Te 0 56 obsolete after a save and reload Please save and reset unit 0 for the changes to take effect 01 05 48 SSTKUNITO M CP FILEMGR 5 FILESAVED Copied running config to conf interface range fortygige 0 33 fortygige 0 37 L L Dell conf if range fo 0 33 f0 0 37 port channel protocol lacp L L Dell conf if range fo 0 33 f0 0 37 lacp port channel 20 mode active Dell conf Dell conf int fortygige 0 49 Dell conf if fo 0 49 port channel protocol lacp Dell conf if fo 0 49 lacp port channel 21 mode active Dell conf if fo 0 49 lacp Configure the port mode VLAN and so forth on the port channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports L 20 L2 up 00 00 53 Fo 0 33 Up Fo 0 37 Up L 21 L2 up 00 00 02 Fo 0 49 Up Dell Error Same VLAN cannot be added to more than one uplink port LAG 155 156 Dell conf if po 21 vlan tagged 1001 Dell conf if po 21 Show the VLAN status Del
17. NOTE Although the show interface status command displays the Fiber Channel FC interfaces with the abbreviated label of Fc in the output if you attempt to specify a FC interface by using the interface fc command in the CLI interface an error message is displayed You must configure FC interfaces by using the interface fi command in CONFIGURATION mode Displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps Enter the brief keyword to display an overview of currently configured FCoE maps Enter the name of an FCoE map to display the FC and FCoE parameters configured in the map to be applied on the Aggregator with the FC ports Displays configuration parameters in a specified DCB map Displays information on FCoE and FC devices currently logged in to the NPG Displays the FC mode of operation and worldwide node WWN name of an Aggregator show interfaces status Command Example Dell show interfaces status Port Description Status Speed Duplex Vlan Te 0 1 Up 10000 Mbit Full 1 4094 Te 0 2 Down Auto Auto 1 1001 1003 4094 Te 0 3 Up 10000 Mbit Full 1 1001 1003 4094 Te 0 4 Down Auto Auto 1 1001 1003 4094 Te 0 5 Up 10000 Mbit Full 1 4094 Te 0 6 Up 10000 Mbit Full 1 4094 Te 0 7 Up 10000 Mbit Full 1 4094 Te 0 8 toB300 Down Auto Auto 1 1001 1003 4094 Fc 0 9 Up 8000 Mbit Full Fc 0 10 Up 8000 Mbit Full Te 0 11 Down Auto Auto e Te 0 12 Down Auto Auto 324 NPIV Proxy Gateway
18. NQOORWNE Applying an FCoE Map on fabric facing FC ports NOTE All these configurations are available only in PMUX mode and you cannot perform these configurations in Standalone mode Default Configurations in Standalone mode By default the following configurations are set in Standalone mode 1 All the FC port are applied with the default FCoE map 2 All the 10G server facing ports with the DCBX frames will have the default FCoE map and default DCB map assigned and without the DCBX frames DCB_MAP_PFC_OFF will be applied Default DCB map Dell conf tdo show qos dcb map SAN DCB MAP State Complete PfcMode O PG 0 TSA ETS BW 30 PFC OFF Priorities 012 5 6 7 PG 1 TSA ETS BW 30 PFC OFFE Priorities 4 PG 2 TSA ETS BW 40 PFC ON Priorities 3 Default FCoE map Dell conf tdo show fcoe map NPIV Proxy Gateway 517 Fabric Name SAN FABRIC Fabric Id 1002 Vlan Id 1002 Vlan priority 3 FC MAP Oefc00 FKA ADV Period 8 Fcf Priority 128 Config State ACTIVE Oper State UP Members Fc 0 9 Te 0 4 DCB_MAP_PFC_OFF Dell conf do show qos dcb map DCB MAP PFC OFF State In Progress PfcMode OFF Enabling Fibre Channel Capability on the Switch Enable the Fibre Channel capability on an Aggregator that you want to configure as an NPG for the Fibre Channel protocol When you enable Fibre Channel capability FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled on all VLANs on the switch using th
19. Oxle SFP 49 Length Copper 10m 0x00 SFP 49 Vendor Rev SFP 49 Laser Wavelength 850 nm SFP 49 CheckCodeBas 0x78 SFP 49 Serial Extended ID fields SFP 49 Options 0x00 0x12 SFP 49 BR max 0 SFP 49 BR min 0 SFP 49 Vendor SN P11COBO SFP 49 Datecode 020919 SFP 49 CheckCodeExt 0xb6 SFP 49 Diagnostic Information SFP 49 Rx Power measurement type Average SFP 49 Temp High Alarm threshold 100 000C SFP 49 Voltage High Alarm threshold 5 000V SFP 49 Bias High Alarm threshold 100 000mA SFP 49 TX Power High Alarm threshold 5 000mW SFP 49 RX Power High Alarm threshold 5 000mW SFP 49 Temp Low Alarm threshold 50 000 SFP 49 Voltage Low Alarm threshold 0 000V SFP 49 Bias Low Alarm threshold 0 000mA SFP 49 TX Power Low Alarm threshold 0 000mW SFP 49 RX Power Low Alarm threshold 0 000mwW SFP 49 Temp High Warning threshold 100 000C SFP 49 Voltage High Warning threshold 5 000V SFP 49 Bias High Warning threshold 100 000mA SFP 49 TX Power High Warning threshold 5 000mW SFP 49 RX Power High Warning threshold 5 000mW SFP 49 Temp Low Warning threshold 50 000 SFP 49 Voltage Low Warning threshold 0 000V SFP 49 Bias Low Warning threshold 0 000mA SFP 49 TX Power Low Warning threshold 0 000mW Debugging and Diagnostics 339 SFP 49 RX Power Low Warning threshold 0 000mW SFP 49 Temperature 40 844C SFP 49 Voltage 3 169V SFP 49 Tx Bias Current 0 000mA SFP 49
20. Server Facing LAGs Server facing ports are configured as individual ports by default If you configure a server NIC in standalone stacking or VLT mode for LACP based NIC teaming server facing ports are automatically configured as part of dynamic LAGs The LAG range 1 to 127 is reserved for server facing LAGs After the Aggregator receives LACPDU from server facing ports the information embedded in the LACPDU remote system ID and port key is used to form a server facing LAG The LAG port channel number is assigned based on the first available number in the range from 1 to 127 For each unique remote system id and port key combination a new LAG is formed and the port automatically becomes a member of the LAG All ports with the same combination of system ID and port key automatically become members of the same LAG Ports are automatically removed from the LAG if the NIC teaming configuration on a server facing port changes or if the port goes operationally down Also a server facing LAG is removed when the last port member is removed from the LAG The benefit of supporting a dynamic LAG is that the Aggregator s server facing ports can toggle between participating in the LAG or acting as individual ports based on the dynamic information exchanged with a server NIC LACP supports the exchange of messages on a link to allow their LACP instances to e Reach agreement on the identity of the LAG to which the link belongs e Attach the link to tha
21. Setting Port Speed Example Dell configure Dell conf interface tengig 0 1 speed 1000 Dell conf if te 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 no negotiation auto show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 no ip address speed 1000 duplex full no shutdown Setting Auto Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master forced slave after you enable auto negotiation A CAUTION Ensure that only one end of the node is configured as forced master and the other is configured as forced slave If both are configured the same that is both as forced master or both as forced slave the show interface command flaps between an auto neg error and forced master slave states Table 9 Auto Negotiation Speed and Duplex Settings on Different Optics Command speed 100 Interfaces Mode interface config mode 10GbaseT 10GSFP 1G SFP optics module Supported optics Not Not supported supported Error Error message is message is thrown Error thrown Speed 100 not Error supported on this Speed 100 interface config not ignored Te 0 49 Copper SFP Comments 1000baseT Error Speed 100 not supported on this interface 125 supported on this interface config ignored Te 0 49 speed auto interface Supported Not Not supported Not Error config supported supported messages not
22. To troubleshoot an under voltage condition check that the correct number of power supplies are installed and their Status light emitting diodes LEDs are lit The following table lists information for SNMP traps and OIDs which provide information about environmental monitoring hardware and hardware components Table 36 SNMP Traps and OIDs OID String OID Name Description Receiving Power 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 10 1 2 5 1 6 chSysPortXfpRecvPower OID displays the receiving power of the connected optics Transmitting power 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 10 1 2 5 1 8 chSysPortXfpTxPower OID displays the transmitting power of the connected optics Temperature 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 10 1 2 5 17 chSysPortXfpRecvTemp OID displays the temperature of the connected optics Debugging and Diagnostics 341 OID String OID Name Description Es NOTE These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable optic info update interval is enabled command Hardware MIB Buffer Statistics 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 16 1 1 4 fpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 3 16 1 1 5 fpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 16 1 1 6 fpStatsPerCOSTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer statistics per COS per port Buffer Tuning Buffer tuning allows you to modify
23. e Display lease information about the dynamic IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client interface EXEC Privilege show ip dhcp lease interface type slot port View the statistics about DHCP client interfaces with the show ip dhcp client statistics command and the lease information about the dynamic IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client interface with the show ip dhcp lease command Example of the show ip dhcp client statistics Command Dell show ip dhcp client statistics interface managementethernet 0 0 Interface Name Ma 0 0 essage Received DHCPOFFER 0 DHCPACK 0 DHCPNAK 0 essage Sent DHCPDISCOVER 1626 DHCPREQUEST 0 DHCPDECLINE 0 DHCPRELEASE 0 DHCPREBIND 0 DHCPRENEW 0 80 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCPINFORM 0 Dell Example of the show ip dhcp lease Command Dell show ip dhcp Interfac Lease IP Def Router ServerId State Expires At Lease Obtnd At Ma 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INIT NA Vl1 10 1 1 254 24 0 0 0 0 LQ 4 Ti BOUND 08 27 2011 04 33 39 Renew Time Rebind Time 08 26 2011 16 21 50 08 27 2011 01 33 39 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP IH NA 08 26 2011 04 33 39 Lease 81 FIP Snooping This chapter describes about the FIP snooping concepts and configuration procedures Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Fibre Channel over Ethernet Fibre Channe
24. ldpRemManAdarlfS ubtype ldpLocManAdarlfld ldpRemManAdarlfld ludpLocManAddrOID lidpRemManAddrOl D LLDP MIB Object lidpXdotiLocPortVla nld lldpXdotiRemPortVIl anld UldpXdotlLocProtoVI anSupported UdpXdotlRemProtoV lanSupported UldpXdotlLocProtoVI anEnabled UdpXdotlRemProtoV lanEnabled UldpXdotlLocProtoVI anld ludpXdotiRemProtoV lanid lldpXdotiLocVlanid lldpXdotiRemVlanid lldpXdotiLocVlanNa me lldpXdotiRemVlanN ame UdpXdotlLocVlanNa me lldpXdotiRemVlanN ame Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Table 20 LLDP MED System MIB Objects TLV Sub Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MED MIB Object 1 LLDP MED Capabilities 2 Network Policy Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Class Type Application Type Unknown Policy Flag Tagged Flag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP Value Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote lidpXMedPortCapSu pported ldpXMedPortConfig TLVsTx Enable lidpXMedRemCapSu pported lidpXMedRemConfig TLVsTxEnable lldpXMedLocDevice Class ildoXMedRemDevice Class lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyAppType UldpxXMedRemMedia PolicyAppType lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyUnknown lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyUnknown lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyTagged lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyTagged lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyV
25. si noe n EHE e Pee reU Ste uite evo Degli end e ERR EU eee Managing the MAC Address Table a tpe tenuia nates ee pe e te d TRA Ung uda Clearing the MAC Address ENtri8S ooooooocociinncccccocccccconancccccnnnss Displaying the MAC Address Table ssssssssssssssesesseseeeeeee nennen nnne nnns Network Interface Controller NIC Tearming ccceecceeseeeseeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeenereneesiresneeeneesneenaes 158 MAC Address Station MOVE sind ors eater gie adu erdt d eh t eee s 159 MAC Move Optimiza smart 160 13 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP eeseeeeeee 161 Supported MOodes 2 ins eer aec es ee eh etur eet ee ee ii 161 Protocol Data Units LOUER bete minu mte ua anten 161 O Murs 163 Related Configuration Tasks taire Tert noia 163 Important Points to Remember i butt ene ret ide bres ose tt f oa 163 CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations cccccccesceeseecceeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeneesneesieeeneestteens 163 ENABLING LLD Ritmos tae a ada lente bubulo 164 Disabling and Undoing LEDP usce rper ette dre pe RO ere e ete vente 164 Advertising TVS a tem e Eh ehe 164 Optional TVS sie da e a DU ML LM MA d UAI EM I e 166 Man JE MENTA Si cote e ve t Oe eed eie es 166 IEEE Organizationally Specific TEV S isse e a a tnnt 166 LEDP MED Capabilities Tl Mitra td a ENEE ae 168 ULDP MED NetworkPolici s TEM op rn a E E pedo 169 Extended Power via MDI TLV sssssssssssssssseeeeeee
26. 0 discarded Output Statistics 9124688 packets 3156959396 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 30 over 64 byte pkts 804 over 127 byte pkts 9123854 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 834 Multicasts 9123854 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 1 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 34 00 Mbits sec 12314 packets sec 0 36 of line rate Time since last interface status change Interface Range 0013257 An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range Bulk configuration excludes from configuring any non existing interfaces from an interface range A default VLAN may be configured only if the interface range being configured consists of only VLAN ports Interfaces 117 The interface range command allows you to create an interface range allowing other commands to be applied to that range of interfaces The interface range prompt offers the interface with slot and port information for valid interfaces The maximum size of an interface range prompt is 32 If the prompt size exceeds this maximum it displays at the end of the output K NOTE Non existing interfaces are excluded from interface range prompt K NOTE When creating an interface range interfaces appear in the order they w
27. 11 Virtual Link Trunking VLT in PMUX MOde ccccceccescesceceeeceeseceeeeeeeesecaeeeceseeeeeesaesseseeseeeeseeseeas 278 VET Terminology eta e de e ete td ce dos 280 Configure Virtual Link Lr nking o bbb rite t e no n p ttt 281 Verifying a VLT Configuration coi dee RR TERRE Ren 286 Additional VET Sample Configuration t Lt e ie fi ttes 288 Troubleshooting VET moe e Lp Map ML DA M Ia DAD DD E 289 24 FC Flex IO Modules cinc 292 FC Flex IO Modus a a e Nt UM o dus Legere aen D ge att 292 Understanding and Working of the FC Flex IO ModuleS ooooccccnconccnconccnnnnnnnncnnnononnnononancnnrnnonannnos 292 FC Flex IO Modules Overview nnne enne 292 FC Flex IO Module Capabilities and Operations sss 294 Guidelines for Working with FC Flex IO Modules issssssssssseseeeeneneeeeeene ns 294 Processing ofData Traffic hortis eut o e e e ER Pte 296 Installing and Configuring the Switch nnne 297 Interconnectivity of FC Flex IO Modules with Cisco MDS Switches 300 Fibre Channel over Ethernet for FC Flex IO Modules sesenta 501 23 FC REEXIO EPOR Diana ad 303 EC EBEXIGSEPO RIAL S in rt Ha cette Sesh whan le aret ges hares 303 Configuring Switch Mode to FCF Port Mode sse 304 Natme SerVe con etes t ed eee tere ur et eet rd eee 305 ECOE M ps in Seige eed tau aed o oe SS VA Sa et 306 Creating an ECOEMaApP o etitm ta e e e E ee dct lo n unte ats 306 ZOMOAG te oodd ene li
28. 244 Stacking Adding a Stack Unit You can add a new unit to an existing stack both when the unit has no stacking ports stack groups configured and when the unit already has stacking ports configured If the units to be added to the stack have been previously used they are assigned the smallest available unit ID in the stack To add a standalone Aggregator to a stack follow these steps 1 Power on the switch Attach QSFP or direct attach cables to connect 40GbE ports on the switch to one or more switches in the stack 3 Log onto the CLI and enter global configuration mode Login username Password Dell gt enable Dell configure 4 Configure the Aggregator to operate in stacking mode CONFIGURATION mode stack unit 0 iom mode stack 5 Reload the switch Dell Operating System automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adas it as member switch in the stack The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack EXEC Privilege mode reload If an Aggregator is already configured to operate in stacking mode simply attach QSFP or direct attach cables to connect 40GbE ports on the base module of each stacked Aggregator The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack Dell Networking OS Behavior When you add a new Aggregator to a stack e Ifthe new unit has been configured with a stack number that is already assigned to a stack member the stack avoi
29. CONFIGURATION mode snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded Select a User based Security Type Dell conf snmp server host 1 1 1 1 traps oid tree version 3 auth Use the SNMPv3 authNoPriv Security Level noauth Use the SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Security Level priv Use the SNMPv3 authPriv Security Level Dell conf tsnmp server host 1 1 1 1 traps oid tree version 3 noauth WORD SNMPv3 user name Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 219 Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP By default the Dell Networking system displays some unsolicited SNMP messages traps upon certain events and conditions You can also configure the system to send the traps to a management station Traps cannot be saved on the system Dell Networking OS supports the following three sets of traps e RFC 1157 defined traps coldStart warmStart linkDown linkUp authenticationFailure and egpNeighbborLoss e Force10 enterpriseSpecific environment traps fan supply and temperature e Force10 enterpriseSpecific protocol traps bgp ecfm stp and xstp To configure the system to send SNMP notifications use the following commands 1 Configure the Dell Networking system to send notifications to an SNMP server CONFIGURATION mode snmp server host ip address traps informs version 1 2c 3 community string To send trap messages enter the keyword traps To send informational messages enter th
30. EXEC mode show vlt statistics e Display the current status of a port or port channel interface used in the VLT domain EXEC mode show interfaces interface interface specify one of the following interface types Fast Ethernet enter fastethernet slot port 1 Gigabit Ethernet enter gigabitethernet slot port 10 Gigabit Ethernet enter tengigabitethernet slot port Port channel enter port channel 1 128 Example of the show vlt backup link Command Dell VLTpeerl show vlt backup link VLT Backup Link Destination 10 11 200 18 Peer HeartBeat status Up HeartBeat Timer Interval 1 286 PMUX Mode of the lO Aggregator HeartBeat Timeout UDP Port HeartBeat Messages Sent HeartBeat Messages Received VLT Backup Link Destination Peer HeartBeat status HeartBeat Timer Interval HeartBeat Timeout UDP Port HeartBeat Messag s Sent HeartBeat Messag Example of the show s Received 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell VLTpeer2 show vlt backup link 10 11 200 20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 vlt brief Command Dell show vlt br VLT Domain Brief Role Role Priority ICL Link Status HeartBeat Status VLT Peer Status Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay Restore timer Peer Routing Peer Routing Timeout timer Dell Delay Restore Abort Threshold Disabled ulticast peer routing timeout Example
31. High Capacity Alarm Table 64 bits The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for TIA TR41 4 Media Endpoint Discovery information The TACACS Protocol Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration statistics local system data and remote systems data components The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined discovery information LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOTS MIB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802 3 organizationally defined discovery information LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOTS MIB sFlow Version 5 sFlow Version 5 MIB Force10 Enterprise IF Extension MIB extends the Interfaces portion of the MIB 2 RFC 1213 by providing proprietary SNMP OIDs for other counters displayed in the show interfaces output Force10 Enterprise Link Aggregation MIB Force10 File Copy MIB supporting SNMP SET operation Force10 Monitoring MIB Force10 Product Object Identifier MIB Force10 S Series Enterprise Chassis MIB Force10 Structure of Management Information Force10 System Component MIB enables the user to view CAM usage information Force10 Textual Convention Force10 Trap Alarm MIB Force10 FIP Snooping MIB Based on T11 FCoE MIB mentioned in FC BB 5 Force10 DCB MIB Standards Compliance RFC Full Name IEEE 802 1Qaz Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined discovery information
32. In this way the VRRP priority of the router with the better metric automatically becomes master of the VRRP group Later if network conditions change and the cost of the default route in each router changes the mastership of the VRRP group is automatically reassigned to the router with the better metric Object Tracking 181 Router A Virtual IP 10 0 0 10 Router B Virtual IP 10 0 0 20 So Virtual IP 10 0 0 1 cz EI Figure 28 Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object such as an IPv4 IPv6 a route or interface you specify an object number to identify the object Optionally you can also specify e UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric Atime delay before changes in a tracked object s state are reported to a client Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line protocol state of a Layer 2 interface In this type of object tracking the link level operational status UP or DOWN of the interface is monitored When the link level status goes down the tracked resource status is considered to be DOWN if the link level status goes up the tracked resource status is considered to be UP For logical interfaces such as port channels or virtual local area networks VLANs the link protocol status is considered to be UP if any physical interface under the logical interface
33. Number of VLAN Notifications Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FLOGI Number of FDISC Number of FLOGO Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FLOGI Rejects 92 Description Number of FIP snooped VLAN request frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped VLAN notification frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped FDISC request frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped FLOGO frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped ENode keep alive frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped VN port keep alive frames received on the interface Number of FIP snooped multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of FIP snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface FIP Snooping Field Description Number of FDISC Number of FIP FDISC accept frames rec
34. Optional Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface OBJECT TRACKING mode delay up seconds down seconds Valid delay times are from O to 180 seconds The default is 0 3 Optional Identify the tracked object with a text description OBJECT TRACKING mode Object Tracking 185 description text The text string can be up to 80 characters 4 Optional Display the tracking configuration and the tracked object s status EXEC Privilege mode show track object id Examples of Configuring Object Tracking for an IPv4 or IPv6 Interface The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv4 interface Dell conf track 101 interface tengigabitethernet 7 2 ip routing Dell conf track 101 delay up 20 Dell conf track 101 description NYC metro Dell conf track 101 end Dell show track 101 Track 101 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7 2 ip routing Description NYC metro The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv6 interface Examples of Configuring Object Tracking for an IPv4 or IPv6 Interface Dell conf track 103 interface tengigabitethernet 7 11 ipv6 routing Dell conf track 103 description Austin access point Dell conf track 103 end Dell show track 103 Track 103 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7 11 ipv6 routing Description Austin access point Track an IPv4 IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks th
35. Table 29 show interfaces status Field Descriptions Field Description Port Server facing 10GbE Ethernet Te or fabric facing Fibre Channel FC port with slot port information Description Text description of port Status Operational status of port Ethernet ports up transmitting FCoE and LAN storage traffic or down not transmitting traffic Fibre Channel ports up link is up and transmitting FC traffic or down link is down and not transmitting FC traffic link wait link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer SW port or removed port has been shut down Speed Transmission speed in Megabits per second of Ethernet and FC ports including auto negotiated speed Auto Duplex Data transmission mode Full allows communication in both directions at the same time Half allows communication in both directions but not at the same time Auto auto negotiated transmission VLAN VLAN IDs of the VLANs in which the port is a member show fcoe map Command Examples Dell show fcoe map brief Fabric Name Fabric Id Vlan Id FC MAP FCF Priority Config State Oper State fid 1003 1003 1003 0e c03 128 ACTIVE UP fid 1004 1004 1004 Oefc04 128 ACTIVE DOWN Dell show fcoe map fid_1003 Fabric Name fid_1003 Fabric Id 1003 Vian Id 1003 Vlan priority 3 FC MAP 0e c03 FKA ADV Period 8 Fcf Priority 128 Config State ACTIVE Oper State UP Members Fc 0 9 Te 0 11 Te 0 12 NPIV Proxy Gateway
36. chSysCoresProcess OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 19 1 2 9 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 1 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 2 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 5 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 4 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 5 19 1 2 9 1 5 Description This is the table that contains the list of software core files generated by the system Entry number Stores the indexed information about the available software core files Contains the core file names and the file paths Contains the time at which core files are created Contains information that includes which stack unit or processor the core file was originated from Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System e To view the viewing the software core files generated by the system use the following command snmpwalk v2c c enterprises 6027 enterprises 6027 enterprises 6027 enterprises 6027 enterprises 6027 enterprises 6027 f10cp l2mgr 13110808 enterprises 6027 3 1 CO CO CO CO CO CO OOTO TG OGOGO public 192 168 60 120 758 NO NONO PO PN PN Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 10 1 2 10 IQ l l Ll l 1 10 1 1 1 2 2 10 1 1 1 3 3 10 1 1 2 1 1 10 1 2 1 1 CORE_DUMP_DIR flashmntr core gz 10 1 2 1 2 CORE DUMP DIR FTP STK MEMBER _Stkl acore g
37. displays in the output e Display the current configuration of all uplink state groups or a specified group EXEC mode or UPLINK STATE GROUP mode For EXEC mode show running config uplink state group group id For UPLINK STATE GROUP mode show configuration group id The values are from 1 to 16 Example of Viewing Uplink State Group Status S50 De lin lin lin lin lin lin O O 0 U0 U0 TU EA Ea pa pa ra L Dell Uplin Up Uplin Downs Uplin Downs 3 6 un Uplin Downs Uplin Downs Uplin Downs Uplin Downs ta ta ta ta ta ta ie ake oe oe oar a nan nn un Le Le Le Le te te Group 1 Group 3 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 1 114 show uplink state group Status Status Status Status Status 6 Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Up Up Down Up Up Upstream Upstream Upstream Upstream In show S k State Group Interface up k State Group Interfaces tream Interfaces k State Group Upstream Interfaces tream Interfaces Dwn uplink state group 16 16 Status 1 Status 3 Status Up k State Group Upstream Interfaces tream Interfaces 5 Status Te 13 13 Dis Te 13 14 Dis k State Group Interfaces tream Interfaces k State Group Interfaces tream Interfaces k State Group terfaces tream Interfaces Te 1
38. e If DCB is enabled as soon as a dcb map with PFC is applied on an interface DCBx starts exchanging information with PFC enabled peers The IEEE802 1Qbb CEE and CIN versions of PFC TLV are supported DCBx also validates PFC configurations received in TLVs from peer devices e To achieve complete lossless handling of traffic enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic and on all DCB egress port traffic e All 802 1p priorities are enabled for PFC Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap going down and coming up For PFC to be applied on an Aggregator port the auto configured priority traffic must be supported by a PFC peer as detected by DCBx e Adcb map for PFC applied to an interface may become invalid if dotlp queue mapping is reconfigured This situation occurs when the new dotip queue assignment exceeds the maximum number 2 of lossless queues supported globally on the switch In this case all PFC configurations received from PFC enabled peers are removed and re synchronized with the peer devices Dell Networking OS does not support MACsec Bypass Capability MBC Configuring Enhanced Transmission Selection ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802 1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic Different traffic types have different service needs Using ETS you can create groups within an 802 1p priority class to con
39. fabric login FLOGI between an ENode and an FCF All other FCoE traffic is dropped e Atleast one interface is auto configured for FCF FIP snooping bridge FCF mode on a FIP snooping enabled VLAN Multiple FCF trusted interfaces are auto configured in a VLAN e Amaximum of eight VLANs are supported for FIP snooping on an Aggregator FIP snooping processes FIP packets in traffic only from the first eight incoming VLANs FC MAP Value The FC MAP value that is applied globally by the Aggregator on all FCoE VLANs to authorize FCoE traffic is auto configured The FC MAP value is used to check the FC MAP value for the MAC address assigned to ENodes in incoming FCoE frames If the FC MAP values does not match FCoE frames are dropped A session between an ENode and an FCF is established by the switch bridge only when the FC MAP value on the FCF matches the FC MAP value on the FIP snooping bridge Bridge to FCF Links A port directly connected to an FCF is auto configured in FCF mode Initially all FCoE traffic is blocked only FIP frames are allowed to pass FCoE traffic is allowed on the port only after a successful FLOGI request response and confirmed use of the configured FC MAP value for the VLAN Impact on other Software Features FIP snooping affects other software features on an Aggregator as follows MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames which are denied by ACLs dynamically create
40. g GGED IN 00 Te 564 Fc 100 fid 10 0e 01 FDI 559 LOG VOLS SEL 0 12 0 10 3 1003 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 tc 08 0d 02 01 SC 3 GED_IN f9 dd ef f9 dd ef 94 10 18 Els 94 21 02 94 10 Cos co 02 21 c8 f1 94 20 01 22 co d9 9c cb d979cscd 02 Description Server CNA that has successfully logged in to a fabric over an Aggregator with the Ethernet port in ENode mode MAC address of a server CNA port Port number of a server facing Ethernet port operating in ENode mode NPIV Proxy Gateway Field Description FCF MAC Fibre Channel forwarder MAC MAC address of Aggregator with the FCF interface Fabric Intf Fabric facing Aggregator with the Fibre Channel port slot port on which FCoE traffic is transmitted to the specified fabric FCoE VLAN D of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic from a server CNA to a fabric and configured on both the server facing Aggregator with the server CNA port Fabric Map Name of the FCoE map containing the FCoE FC configuration parameters for the server CNA fabric connection Enode WWPN Worldwide port name of the server CNA port Enode WWNN Worldwide node name of the server CNA FCoE MAC Fabric provided MAC address FPMA The FPMA consists of the FC MAP value in the FCoE map and the FC ID provided by the fabric after a successful FLOGI In the FPMA the most significant bytes
41. map to access one SAN fabric You cannot use the same FCoE map to access different fabrics When you configure an Aggregator with the NPG FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled and configured using the parameters in the FCoE map applied to server facing Ethernet and fabric facing FC interfaces After you apply an FCoE map on an FC port when you enable the port no shutdown the NPG starts sending FIP multicast advertisements on behalf of the FC port to downstream servers in order to advertise the availability of a new FCF port on the FCoE VLAN The FIP advertisement also contains a keepalive message to maintain connectivity between a SAN fabric and downstream servers 316 NPIV Proxy Gateway Configuring an NPIV Proxy Gateway Prerequisite Before you configure an NPIV proxy gateway NPG on an Aggregator ensure that the following features are enabled e DCB is enabled by default on the Aggregator e Autonegotiated DCBx is enabled for converged traffic by default with the Ethernet ports on all Aggregators e FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled when you configure Fibre Channel on the Aggregator To configure an NPG operation on an Aggregator follow these general configuration steps Enabling Fibre Channel Capability on the Switch Creating a DCB map Applying a DCB map on server facing Ethernet ports Creating an FCoE VLAN Creating an FCoE map Applying an FCoE map on server facing Ethernet ports
42. priority TLV is received on the configuration source port the auto upstream and auto downstream ports use the internally propagated PFC priorities to match against the received application priority Otherwise these ports use their locally configured PFC priorities in application priority TLVs If no configuration source is configured auto upstream and auto downstream ports check to see that the locally configured PFC priorities match the priorities in a received application priority TLV e On manual ports an application priority TLV is advertised only if the priorities in the TLV match the PFC priorities configured on the port DCB Configuration Exchange On an Aggregator the DCBx protocol supports the exchange and propagation of configuration information for the following DCB features e Enhanced transmission selection ETS e Priority based flow control PFC DCBx uses the following methods to exchange DCB configuration parameters Asymmetric DCB parameters are exchanged between a DCBx enabled port and a peer port without requiring that a peer port and the local port use the same configured values for the configurations to be compatible For example ETS uses an asymmetric exchange of parameters between DCBx peers Symmetric DCB parameters are exchanged between a DCBx enabled port and a peer port but requires that each configured parameter value be the same for the configurations in order to be compatible For example PFC uses
43. priority traffic is automatically allocated The buffer size is allocated according to the number of PFC enabled priorities in the assigned map To apply a DCB map to an Ethernet port follow these steps 1 Enter interface configuration mode on an Ethernet port CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot port fortygigabitEthernet slot port Apply the DCB map on the Ethernet port to configure it with the PFC and ETS settings in the map for example INTERFACE mode dcb map name You cannot apply a DCB map on an interface that has been already configured for PFC using thepfc priority command or which is already configured for lossless queues pfc no drop queues command Dell interface tengigabitEthernet 0 0 Dell config if te 0 0 dcb map SAN_A dcb_map1 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to apply a DCB map to more than one port Configuring PFC without a DCB Map In a network topology that uses the default ETS bandwidth allocation assigns equal bandwidth to each priority you can also enable PFC for specific dot1p priorities on individual interfaces without using a DCB map This type of DCB configuration is useful on interfaces that require PFC for lossless traffic but do not transmit converged Ethernet traffic 1 Enter interface configuration mode on an Ethernet port CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot port fortygigabitEthernet slot port Enable PFC on specified priorities Range 0 7 Def
44. the VLT ports are enabled one by one in a controlled manner The delay between bringing up each VLT port channel is proportional to the number of physical members in the port channel The default is 90 seconds If you enable IGMP snooping IGMP queries are also sent out on the VLT ports at this time allowing any receivers to respond to the queries and update the multicast table on the new node This delay in bringing up the VLT ports also applies when the VLTi link recovers from a failure that caused the VLT ports on the secondary VLT peer node to be disabled VLT Routing VLT routing is supported on the Aggregator Layer 2 protocols from the ToR to the server are intra rack and inter rack No spanning tree is required but interoperability with spanning trees at the aggregation layer is supported Communication is active active with no blocked links MAC tables are synchronized between VLT nodes for bridging and you can enable IGMP snooping Spanned VLANs Any VLAN configured on both VLT peer nodes is referred to as a Spanned VLAN The VLT Interconnect VLTi port is automatically added as a member of the Spanned VLAN As a result any adjacent router connected to at least one VLT node on a Spanned VLAN subnet is directly reachable from both VLT peer nodes at the routing level Non VLT ARP Sync In the Dell Networking OS version 9 2 0 0 ARP entries including ND entries learned on other ports are synced with the VLT peer to support sta
45. 00 01 is used to send and receive pause frames To allow full duplex flow control stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address The pause frame is defined by IEEE 802 3x and uses MAC Control frames to carry the pause commands Ethernet pause frames are supported on full duplex only The only configuration applicable to half duplex ports is rx off tx off Note that if a port is over subscribed Ethernet Pause Frame flow control does not ensure no loss behavior The following error message appears when trying to enable flow control when half duplex is already configured Can t configure flowcontrol when half duplex is configure config ignored The following error message appears when trying to enable half duplex and flow control configuration is on Can t configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on config ignored Interfaces 121 Enabling Pause Frames Enable Ethernet pause frames flow control on all ports on a chassis If not the system may exhibit unpredictable behavior K NOTE If you disable rx flow control Dell Networking recommends rebooting the system The flow control sender and receiver must be on the same port pipe Flow control is not supported across different port pipes also refer to iSCSI Optimization Operation K NOTE After you disable DCB if link level flow control is not automatically enabled on an i
46. 1 2 3 3 3 Dell conf K NOTE In Dell Networking OS we support 4 data queues PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities ETS Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dotlp priority in a priority group Data Center Bridging Auto DCB Enable Mode On an Aggregator in standalone or VLT modes the default mode of operation for data center bridging on Ethernet ports is auto DCB enable mode In this mode Aggregator ports detect whether peer devices support CEE or not and enable ETS and PFC or link level flow control accordingly e Interfaces come up with DCB disabled and link level flow control enabled to control data transmission between the Aggregator and other network devices see Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames When DCB is disabled on an interface PFC and ETS are also disabled When DCBx protocol packets are received interfaces automatically enable DCB and disable link level flow control DCB is required for PFC ETS DCBx and FCoE initialization protocol FIP snooping to operate K NOTE Normally interfaces do not flap when DCB is automatically enabled DCB processes VLAN tagged packets and dot1p priority values Untagged packets are treated with a dotip priority of O For DCB to operate effectively ingress traffic is classified according to its dotip priority so that it maps to different data queues The dotip queue assignments used on an Aggregator are shown in Table 6 1 in dcb enable aut
47. 128 show config l interface Port channel 128 portmode hybrid switchport vlan tagged 10 15 vlan untagged 20 shutdown Dell conf if po 128 end Dell Show the VLAN configurations Dell show vlan Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated O Openflow Untagged T Tagged Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged OpenFlow untagged O OpenFlow tagged GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged Os QOxXG Interfaces 113 NUM Status Description Q Ports 1 Active U Te 0 3 10 Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 m Te 0 1 AT Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 12 Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 m Te 0 13 Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 m Te 0 1 14 Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 T Te 0 1 15 Active T Pol28 Te 0 4 5 m Te 0 1 20 Active U Po128 Te 0 4 5 U Te 0 1 Dell You can remove the inactive VLANs that have no member ports using the following command Dell configure Dell conf no interface vlan vlan id vlan id Inactive VLAN with no member ports You can remove the tagged VLANs using the no vlan tagged vlan range command You can remove the untagged VLANs using the no vlan untagged command in the physical port port channel Port Channel Interfaces On an Aggregator port channels are auto configured as follows e All LOGbE uplink interfaces ports
48. 130 148 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 SNMPv2 MIB sysDescr 0 STRING Dell Networking OS Operating System Version 1 0 Application Software Version E8 3 17 46 Series I O Aggregator Copyright c 1999 2012 by Dell Inc All Rights Reserved Build Time Sat Jul 28 03 20 24 PDT 2012 SNMPv2 MIB sysObjectID 0 OID SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 1 4 2 DISMAN EVENT MIB sysUpTimeInstance Timeticks 77916 0 12 59 16 SNMPv2 MIB sysContact 0 STRING SNMPv2 MIB sysName 0 STRING FTOS SNMPv2 MIB sysLocation 0 STRING SNMPv2 MIB sysServices 0 INTEGER 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 223 Displaying the Ports in a VLAN using SNMP Dell Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command Example of Identifying the VLAN Interface Index Number Dell conf do show interface vlan 10 Vlan 10 is down line protocol is down Address is 00 01 e8 cc cc ce Current address is 00 01 e8 cc cc ce Interface index is 1107787786 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 12 42 Queueing strategy fifo Time since last interface status change 00 12 42 To display the ports in a VLAN send an snmpget request for the object dotigStaticEgressPorts using the interface index as the instance number a
49. 2 priority group 1 maps to doti1p priority 3 priority group 2 maps to dotip priority 4 priority group 4 maps to dotlp priorities 5 6 and 7 Important Points to Remember 40 If you remove a dotlp priority to priority group mapping from a DCB map no priority pgid command the PFC and ETS parameters revert to their default values on the interfaces on which the DCB map is applied By default PFC is not applied on specific 802 1p priorities ETS assigns equal bandwidth to each 802 1p priority As a result PFC and lossless port queues are disabled on 802 1p priorities and all priorities are mapped to the same priority queue and equally share the port bandwidth To change the ETS bandwidth allocation configured for a priority group in a DCB map do not modify the existing DCB map configuration Instead first create a new DCB map with the desired PFC and ETS settings and apply the new map to the interfaces to override the previous DCB map settings Then delete the original dot1p priority priority group mapping If you delete the dotlp priority priority group mapping no priority pgid command before you apply the new DCB map the default PFC and ETS parameters are applied on the interfaces This change may create a DCB mismatch with peer DCB devices and interrupt network operation Data Center Bridging DCB Applying a DCB Map on a Port When you apply a DCB map with PFC enabled on an S6000 interface a memory buffer for PFC enabled
50. 20 Active U Po32 U Te 0 3 5 13 53 56 1002 Active T Te 0 3 13 55 56 Dell K NOTE A VLAN is active only if the VLAN contains interfaces and those interfaces are operationally up In the above example VLAN 1 is inactive because it does not contain any interfaces The other VLANs listed contain enabled interfaces and are active In a VLAN the shutdown command stops Layer 3 routed traffic only Layer 2 traffic continues to pass through the VLAN If the VLAN is not a routed VLAN that is configured with an IP address the shutdown command has no affect on VLAN traffic Adding an Interface to a Tagged VLAN The following example shows you how to add a tagged interface Tel 7 to a VLAN VLAN 2 Enter the vlan tagged command to add interface Te 1 7 to VLAN 2 which is as shown below Enter the show vlan command to verify that interface Te 1 7 is a tagged member of VLAN 2 Dell conf if te 1 7 vlan tagged 2 Dell conf if te 1 7 exit Interfaces 111 Dell conf exit Dell show vlan id 2 Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated Q U Untagged T Tagged x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged C CMC tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports 2 Active U Pol Te 0 7 18 T Po128 Te 0 50 51 T Te 1 7 Dell conf if te 1 7
51. 33 to 56 are auto configured to belong to the same 10GbE port channel LAG 128 e Server facing interfaces ports 1 to 32 auto configure in LAGs 1 to 127 according to the NIC teaming configuration on the connected servers Port channel interfaces support link aggregation as described in IEEE Standard 802 3ad K NOTE A port channel may also be referred to as a link aggregation group LAG Port Channel Definitions and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802 3ad as a method of grouping multiple physical interfaces into a single logical interface a link aggregation group LAG or port channel A LAG is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link according to IEEE 802 3ad In Dell Networking OS a LAG is referred to as a port channel interface A port channel provides redundancy by aggregating physical interfaces into one logical interface If one physical interface goes down in the port channel another physical interface carries the traffic 114 Interfaces Port Channel Benefits A port channel interface provides many benefits including easy management link redundancy and sharing Port channels are transparent to network configurations and can be modified and managed as one interface With this feature you can create larger capacity interfaces by utilizing a group of lower speed links For example you can build a 40 Gigabit interface by aggregating four 10 Gigabit Ethernet int
52. 4 ports are supported whereas 8 ports are supported with both FC Flex IO modules Each port can operate in 2G 4G or 8G Fiber Channel speed The topology wise FC Flex IOM is directly connected to a FC Storage In the following topology the FC flex IOM model offers local connectivity without a SAN switch or fabric FC FLEXIO FPORT 303 FC Storage HBA Lassie M1000 CE A with FC Flex IOM I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 y Adapter gt FCoE es FC h LAN Configuring Switch Mode to FCF Port Mode To configure switch mode to Fabric services use the following commands 1 Configure Switch mode to FCF Port CONFIGURATION mode feature fc fport domain id 2 NOTE Enable remote fault signaling rx off command in FCF FPort mode on interfaces connected to the Compellent and MDF storage devices 2 Create an FCoE map with the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric 304 FC FLEXIO FPORT CONFIGURATION mode fcoe map map name 3 Configure the association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic between servers and a SAN and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed FCOE MAP mode fabric id fabric num vlan vlan id 4 Configure the FCoE mapped address prefix FC MAP value which is used to identify FCoE traffic transmitted on the FCoE VLAN for the specified fabric FCOE MAP mode fc map fc map value 5 Configure
53. 8 15 68 SN nw O 0 H O OHO 0 H O iw o Il e H w 3 d m DR R AR 22852428 w o A Q n BK Nos DAV Ze U P Copy Config Command Completed m NMP OID oid RPMO P CP SN P 4 RMON FALLING THR rm from NMP OID oid SRPMO P CP SN P 4 RMON HC RISING T threshold alarm from SNMP OID oid 222 L S 602 5 956 TA T Timet 1 Pv2 MIB snmpTrap0ID 0 OID S Pv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 6 1 1 0 P CP SNMP 4 RMON RISING THRESHOLD ticks 14 8 m Be 330 El HRESHOLD 8 m m d j zo ECFM 5 ECFM REMOTE ALARM Remote CCM Defect detected by MEP 3 in Domain SECFM 5 ECFM RDI ALARM RDI Defect detected by MEP 3 in Domain customerl at 7406 4 07 54 06 ib 2 47 2 0 1 EGER 4 8564 4 08 05 64 ib 2 47 2 0 1 EGER 5 9064 4 08 10 64 ib 2 47 2 0 1 EGER 6 9568 Pv2 SMI mib 2 47 2 0 1 EGER 7 STACKUNITO rising threshold alarm SHOLD STACKUNITO falling threshold STACKUNITO high capacity rising Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Reading Managed Object Values You may only retrieve read managed object values if your management station is a member of the same community as the SNMP agent Dell Networking supports RFC 4001 Textual Conventions for Internet Work Addresses that defines values representing
54. Assign a static route to point to the management interface or forwarding router CONFIGURATION mode management route ip address mask forwarding router address ManagementEthernet slot port To view the configured static routes for the management port use the show ip management route command in EXEC privilege mode Dell show ip management route all Destination Gateway State 1 1 1 0 24 172 3131 250 Active 172 16 1 0 24 172 31 1 250 Active 172 31 1 0 24 ManagementEthernet 1 0 Connected Dell VLAN Membership A virtual LAN VLANs is a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a LAN in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group In Layer 2 mode VLANs move 108 Interfaces traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices Dell Networking OS supports up to 4093 port based VLANs and one default VLAN as specified in IEEE 802 1Q VLAN provide the following benefits Improved security because you can isolate groups of users into different VLANs e Ability to create one VLAN across multiple devices On an Aggregator in standalone mode all ports are configured by default as members of all 4094 VLANs including the default VLAN All VLANs operate in Layer 2 mode You can reconfigure the VLAN membership for individual ports by using the vlan taggedorvlan untagged commands in INTERFACE configuration mode Configuring VLAN Membership Physical Interfaces and
55. Configuration mode for example Dell conf interface range tengigabitethernet 0 2 4 Dell conf if range te 0 2 4 vlan tagged 5 7 10 12 Dell conf if range te 0 2 4 vlan untagged 3 20 Before You Start Uplink LAG The tagged VLAN membership of the uplink LAG is automatically configured based on the VLAN configuration of all server facing ports ports from 1 to 32 The untagged VLAN used for the uplink LAG is always the default VLAN Server Facing LAGs The tagged VLAN membership of a server facing LAG is automatically configured based on the server facing ports that are members of the LAG The untagged VLAN of a server facing LAG is configured based on the untagged VLAN to which the lowest numbered server facing port in the LAG belongs NOTE Dell Networking recommends configuring the same VLAN membership on all LAG member ports Where to Go From Here You can customize the Aggregator for use in your data center network as necessary To perform additional switch configuration do one of the following e For remote out of band management enter the OOB management interface IP address into a Telnet or SSH client and log in to the switch using the user ID and password to access the CLI e For local management using the CLI use the attached console connection e For remote in band management from a network management station enter the IP address of the default VLAN and log in to the switch to access the CLI In
56. Dell configure Dell conf int port channel 127 Dell conf if po 127 no shutdown Dell conf if po 127 end Configure the VLT domain Dell configure Dell conf vlt domain 1 gt VLT peer destination Dell conf vlt domain system mac mac address 00 01 09 06 06 06 Dell conf vlt domain unit id 0 Dell conf vlt domain end Dell conf vlt domain peer link port channel 127 Dell conf if po 127 channel member fortygige 0 33 37 Dell conf vlt domain back up destination 169 254 31 23 unit id 0 VLT Primary unit id 1 VLT Secondary PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator Configure the VLT port channel In the following example the local and remote VLT port channels are the same but you can also use different VLT port channels Dell configure Dell conf int port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 128 switchport Dell conf if po 128 vlt peer lag port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 link bundle monitor enable Dell conf if po 128 no shutdown Dell conf if po 128 end 4 Show the VLT peer status Dell show vlt br VLT Domain Brief Domain ID 1 Role Secondary Role Priority 32768 ICL Link Status Up HeartBeat Status Up VLT Peer Status Up Version 6 3 Local System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a e9 91 Remote System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a e9 76 Remote system version 6 3 Delay Restore timer 90 seconds Delay Restore A
57. FC Flex IO module is supported on I O Aggregator IOA The IOA switch installed with the FC Flex IO module functions as a top of rack edge switch that supports converged enhanced Ethernet CEE traffic Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE for storage Interprocess Communication IPC for servers and Ethernet local area network LAN IP cloud for data as well as FC links to one or more storage area network SAN fabrics Although the IOA can act as a FIP snooping bridge FSB to provide FCoE transit switch capabilities the salient and significant advantage of deploying the FC Flex IO module is to enable more streamlined and cohesive FCoE N port identifier virtualization NPIV proxy gateway functionalities The NPIV proxy gateway NPG provides FCoE FC bridging behavior The FC Flex IO module offers a rich comprehensive set of FCoE functionalities on the M1000e chassis by splitting the Ethernet and Fibre Channel FC traffic at the edge of the chassis The FC switches that are connected directly to the FC Flex IO module provide Fibre Channel capabilities because the FC Flex IO module does not support full fabric functionalities With the separation of Ethernet and FC packets performed at the edge of the chassis itself you can use the IOA that contains an FC Flex IO module to connect to a SAN environment without the need for a separate ToR switch to operate as NPIV proxy gateways The IOA can function in NPIV proxy gateway mode when an FC Flex IO
58. FCoE forwarders FCFs over transit FCoE enabled bridges Ethernet bridges commonly provide access control list ACLs that can emulate a point to point link by providing the traffic enforcement required to create a Fibre Channel level of robustness In addition FIP serves as a Layer 2 protocol to e Operate between FCoE end devices and FCFs over intermediate Ethernet bridges to prevent unauthorized access to the network and achieve the required security e Allow transit Ethernet bridges to efficiently monitor FIP frames passing between FCoE end devices and an FCF and use the FIP snooping data to dynamically configure ACLs on the bridge to only permit traffic authorized by the FCF FIP enables FCoE devices to discover one another initialize and maintain virtual links over an Ethernet network and access storage devices in a storage area network FIP satisfies the Fibre Channel 82 FIP Snooping requirement for point to point connections by creating a unique virtual link for each connection between an FCoE end device and an FCF via a transit switch FIP provides a functionality for discovering and logging in to an FCF After discovering and logging in FIP allows FCoE traffic to be sent and received between FCoE end devices ENodes and the FCF FIP uses its own EtherType and frame format The below illustration about FIP discovery depicts the communication that occurs between an ENode server and an FCoE switch FCF FIP performs the foll
59. IEEE data center bridging adds the following extensions to a classical Ethernet network e 802 1Qbb Priority based Flow Control PFC e 802 1Qaz Enhanced Transmission Selection ETS e 802 1Qau Congestion Notification Data Center Bridging Exchange DCBx protocol K NOTE In Dell Networking OS version 9 4 0 x only the PFC ETS and DCBx features are supported in data center bridging Priority Based Flow Control In a data center network priority based flow control PFC manages large bursts of one traffic type in multiprotocol links so that it does not affect other traffic types and no frames are lost due to congestion When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority it sends a pause frame for the 802 1p priority traffic to the transmitting device In this way PFC ensures that large amounts of queued LAN traffic do not cause storage traffic to be dropped and that storage traffic does not result in high latency for high performance computing HPC traffic between servers PFC enhances the existing 802 3x pause and 802 1p priority capabilities to enable flow control based on 802 1p priorities classes of service Instead of stopping all traffic on a link as performed by the traditional Ethernet pause mechanism PFC pauses traffic on a link according to the 802 1p priority set on a traffic type You can create lossless flows for storage and server traffic while allowing for loss in case of LAN traffic congestion o
60. Keep Alive 4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive 3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement 0 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement 0 Number of FLOGI Accepts 20 Number of FLOGI Rejects 20 Number of FDISC Accepts 20 Number of FDISC Rejects 20 Number of FLOGO Accepts 20 Number of FLOGO Rejects 20 Number of CVL 0 Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts 0 Number of VN Port Session Timeouts 0 Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config 20 show fip snooping statistics port channel Command Example Dell show fip snooping statistics interface port channel 22 Number of Vlan Requests 20 FIP Snooping umber umber umber umber Number Number Number Number umber umber umber umber umber Number Number Number umber umber umber umber of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of Vlan Notifications ulticast Discovery Solicits Unicast Discovery Solicits LOGI DISC LOGO node lt E o ey on U FLOGI FLOGI FDISC FDISC FLOGO FLOGO CVL Port Keep Alive ulticast Discovery Advertisement nicast Discovery Advertisement FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config Keep Alive Accepts Rejects Accepts Rejects Accepts Rejects QOO aie GE a GE a E ao G o G a DA aA E E aE E aS i E aa A aa A aae O ae TE ai aE are E ae AES show fip snooping statistics Command Description Field Number of Vlan Requests
61. LDP EXT DOT1 DCBX MIB IEEE 802 1Qbb Priority based Flow Control module for managing IEEE 802 1Qbb MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport https www force10networks com csportal20 KnowledgeBase Documentation aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL https www force10networks com csportal20 MIBs MIB OIDs aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login To request an iSupport account go to https www force10networks com CSPortal20 Support AccountRequest aspx If you have forgotten or lost your account information contact Dell TAC for assistance Standards Compliance 59
62. Last failover Reason None Last failover type None Last Data Block Sync Record Stack Unit Config succeeded Sep 03 1993 09 36 52 Start up Config succeeded Sep 03 1993 09 36 52 Latest sync of config Runtime Event Log succeeded Sep 03 1993 09 36 52 Stacking 251 Running Config succeeded Sep 03 1993 09 36 52 ACL Mgr succeeded Sep 03 1993 09 36 52 LACP no block sync done STP no block sync done SPAN no block sync done Example of the show hardware stack unit port stack Command Dell show hardware stack unit 1 stack port 53 Input Statistics 7934 packets 1049269 bytes 0 64 byte pkts 7793 over 64 byte pkts 100 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 7 over 511 byte pkts 34 over 1023 byte pkts 70 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 runts 0 giants O throttles 0 CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 438 packets 270449 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 57 over 64 byte pkts 181 over 127 byte pkts 54 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 146 over 1023 byte pkts 72 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 221 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wredDrops Rate info interval 45 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Failure Scenarios The following sections describe some of the common fault conditions that can happen in a switch stack and how they are resolved Stack Member Fails e Problem A unit that is not
63. Memory s usage drops below threshold MemUsage ETECT STN MOVE Station Move threshold exceeded for Mac s in vlan AM UTILIZATION Enable SNMP envmon CAM utilization traps QU envmon supply PRBLM Major alarm problem with power entry module s OK Major alarm cleared power entry module s is good JOR PS Major alarm insufficient power s JOR PS CLR major alarm cleared sufficient power NOR PS Minor alarm power supply non redundant NOR PS CLR Minor alarm cleared power supply redundant AGF AUR HHP 38 envmon temperature INOR_TEMP Minor alarm chassis temperature INOR TEMP CLR Minor alarm cleared chassis temperature normal s d temperature is within threshold of dC AJOR TEMP Major alarm chassis temperature high s temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of dC IAJOR TEMP CLR Major alarm cleared chassis temperature lower s d temperature is within threshold of dC envmon fan Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 221 FAN TRAY BAD Major alarm fantray d is missing or down FAN TRAY OK Major alarm cleared fan tray d present FAN BAD Minor alarm some fans in fan tray d are down FAN OK Minor alarm cleared all fans in fan tray d are good vlt Enable VLT traps vrrp Enable VRRP state change traps xstp S SPANMGR 5 STP NEW ROOT New Spanning Tree Root Bridge ID
64. SNMP Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges except for the dotidTpLearnedEntryDiscards object Introduction to Community based SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 Definitions of Managed Objects for Data Link Switching using SMlv2 IP Forwarding Table MIB Introduction and Applicability Statements for Internet Standard Management Framework Standards Compliance RFC 2571 2572 2574 2575 2576 2578 2579 2580 2618 3635 2674 2787 2819 2863 2865 3273 3416 Standards Compliance Full Name An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Management Frameworks Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 View based Access Control Model VACM for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Coexistence Between Version 1 Version 2 and Version 3 of the Internet standard Network Management Framework Structure of Management Information Version 2 SMIv2 Textual Conventions for SMlv2 Conformance Statements for SMlv2 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB except the following four counters radiusAuthClientInvalidServ
65. SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host This method uses SSH version 2 To configure host based authentication use the following commands 1 Configure RSA Authentication Refer to Using RSA Authentication of SSH 2 Create shosts by copying the public RSA key to the file shosts in the directory ssh and write the IP address of the host to the file cp etc ssh ssh_host_rsa_key pub ssh shosts Refer to the first example 3 Create a list of IP addresses and usernames that are permitted to SSH in a file called rhosts Refer to the second example 4 Copy the file shosts and rhosts to the Dell Networking system 5 Disable password authentication and RSA authentication if configured CONFIGURATION mode or EXEC Privilege mode no ip ssh password authentication Orno ip ssh rsa authentication 6 Enable host based authentication CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh hostbased authentication enable 7 Bind shosts and rhosts to host based authentication CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh pub key file flash filenameorip ssh rhostsfile flash filename Examples of Creating shosts and rhosts The following example shows creating shosts admin Unix client cd etc ssh admin Unix client ls moduli sshd_config ssh_host_dsa_key pub ssh_host_key pub ssh host rsa key pub ssh config ssh host dsa key ssh host key ssh host rsa key admin Unix client cat ssh host rsa key pub 212 Security ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaClyc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8KT7jLZRV
66. State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco 0 Input Conf TLV 0 Inpu TLV Tx Status is enabled Pkts 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Reco TLV Pkts 0 Output Reco TLV Pkts 0 Error Reco TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields Field Interface Max Supported TC Group Number of Traffic Classes Admin mode Admin Parameters Remote Parameters 62 Description Interface type with stack unit and port number Maximum number of priority groups supported Number of 802 1p priorities currently configured ETS mode on or off When on the scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a DCBx TLV from a peer can take effect on an interface ETS configuration on local port including priority groups assigned dotip priorities and bandwidth allocation ETS configuration on remote peer port including Admin mode enabled if a valid TLV was received or disabled priority groups assigned dot1p priorities and bandwidth allocation If the ETS Admin mode is enabled on the remote port for DCBx exchange the Willing bit received in ETS TLVs from the remote peer is included Data Center Bridging DCB Field Local Parameters Operational status local port ETS DCBx Oper status State Machine Type Conf TLV Tx Status Reco TLV Tx Status Input Conf TLV
67. The Aggregator operates in auto detection mode so that a DCBx port automatically detects the DCBx version on a peer port Legacy CIN and CEE versions are supported in addition to the standard IEEE version 2 5 DCBx A DCBx port detects a peer version after receiving a valid frame for that version The local DCBx port reconfigures to operate with the peer version and maintains the peer version on the link until one of the following conditions occurs e The switch reboots The link is reset goes down and up The peer times out e Multiple peers are detected on the link DCBx operations on a port are performed according to the auto configured DCBx version including fast and slow transmit timers and message formats If a DCBx frame with a different version is received a syslog message is generated and the peer version is recorded in the peer status table If the frame cannot be processed it is discarded and the discard counter is incremented 54 Data Center Bridging DCB DCBx Example The following figure shows how DCBx is used on an Aggregator installed in a Dell PowerEdge M I O Aggregator chassis in which servers are also installed The external 40GbE ports on the base module ports 33 and 37 of two switches are used for uplinks configured as DCBx auto upstream ports The Aggregator is connected to third party top of rack ToR switches through 40GbE uplinks The ToR switches are part of a Fibre Channel storage network The i
68. The module directly switches any non FCoE or non FIP traffic and only FCoE frames are processed and transmitted out of the Ethernet network When the external device sends FCoE data frames to the switch that contains the FC Flex IO module the destination MAC address represents one of the Ethernet MAC addresses assigned to FC ports Based on 296 FC Flex IO Modules the destination address the FCoE header is removed from the incoming packet and the FC frame is transmitted out of the FC port The flow control mechanism is performed using per priority flow control to ensure that frame loss does not occur owing to congestion of frames Operation of the FIP Application The NPIV proxy gateway terminates the FIP sessions and responses to FIP messages The FIP packets are intercepted by the FC Flex IO module and sent to the Dell Networking OS for further analysis The FIP application responds to the FIP VLAN discovery request from the host based on the configured FCoE VLANs For every ENode and VN Port that is logged in the FIP application responds to keepalive messages for the virtual channel If the FC link becomes inactive or a logging off of the switch occurs the FIP engine sends clear virtual link CVL messages to the host The FIP application also responds to solicited advertisements from the end device In addition the FIP application periodically sends advertisement packets to the end devices for each FCF that is part of the NPIV proxy gateway
69. With FC Flex IO modules on an IOA the following DCB maps are applied on all of the ENode facing ports e dcb map SAN_DCB_MAP e priority group O bandwidth 30 pfc off e priority group 1 bandwidth 30 pfc off e priority group 2 bandwidth 40 pfc on e priority pgid 00021000 e On I O Aggregators uplink failure detection UFD is disabled if FC Flex IO module is present to allow server ports to communicate with the FC fabric even when the Ethernet upstream ports are not operationally up FC Flex IO Modules 295 Ensure that the NPIV functionality is enabled on the upstream switches that operate as FC switches or FCoE forwarders FCF before you connect the FC port of the I O Aggregator to these upstream switches While storage traffic traverses through FC Flex IO modules and the Ethernet uplink port channel status changes with DCB enabled on an adjacent switch FCoE traffic is disrupted This problem does not occur if Ethernet traffic is not involved and only FCoE traffic is transmitted Also if DCB on the TOR switch is disabled traffic disruption does not occur Port Numbering for FC Flex IO Modules Even numbered ports are at the bottom of the I O panel and for modules odd numbered ports are at the top of the I O panel When installed in a PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure the I O Aggregator ports are numbered 33 to 56 from the bottom to the top of the switch The following port numbering convention applies to the FC Flex IO module e In
70. an symmetric exchange of parameters between DCBx peers Configuration Source Election When an auto upstream or auto downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer the port first checks to see if there is an active configuration source on the switch e If a configuration source already exists the received peer configuration is checked against the local port configuration If the received configuration is compatible the DCBx marks the port as DCBx enabled If the configuration received from the peer is not compatible a warning message is logged and the DCBx frame error counter is incremented Although DCBx is operationally disabled the port keeps the peer link up and continues to exchange DCBx packets If a compatible peer configuration is later received DCBx is enabled on the port e If there is no configuration source a port may elect itself as the configuration source A port may become the configuration source if the following conditions exist No other port is the configuration source The port role is auto upstream Data Center Bridging DCB 53 The port is enabled with link up and DCBx enabled The port has performed a DCBx exchange with a DCBx peer The switch is capable of supporting the received DCB configuration values through either a symmetric or asymmetric parameter exchange A newly elected configuration source propagates configuration changes received from a peer to the other auto c
71. and if used with network interface controller NIC teaming automatic recovery from a failed link A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices such as servers If a switch loses its upstream connectivity downstream devices also lose their connectivity However the devices do not receive a direct indication that upstream connectivity is lost because connectivity to the switch is still operational UFD allows a switch to associate downstream interfaces with upstream interfaces When upstream connectivity fails the switch disables the downstream links Failures on the downstream links allow downstream devices to recognize the loss of upstream connectivity For example as shown in the following illustration Switches S1 and S2 both have upstream connectivity to Router R1 and downstream connectivity to the server UFD operation is shown in Steps A through C e In Step A the server configuration uses the connection to S1 as the primary path Network traffic flows from the server to S1 and then upstream to R1 e In Step B the upstream link between S1 and R1 fails The server continues to use the link to S1 for its network traffic but the traffic is not successfully switched through S1 because the upstream link is down e In Step C UFD on S1 disables the link to the server The server then stops using the link to S1 and switches to using its link to S2 to send traffic upstream to R1 NOTE In Standalone and VLT modes the UFD group numb
72. and Definitions The following table describes the terms used in an NPG configuration on the Aggregator Table 27 Aggregator with the NPIV Proxy Gateway Terms and Definitions Term FC port F port N port ENode port CNA port DCB map Fibre Channel fabric FCF FC MAP FCoE map FCoE VLAN NPIV Proxy Gateway Description Fibre Channel port on the Aggregator that operates in autosensing 2 4 or 8 Gigabit mode On an NPIV proxy gateway an FC port can be used as a downlink for a server connection and an uplink for a fabric connection Port mode of an FC port connected to an end node N port on an Aggregator with the NPIV proxy gateway Port mode of an Aggregator with the FC port that connects to an F port on an FC switch in a SAN fabric On an Aggregator with the NPIV proxy gateway an N port also functions as a proxy for multiple server CNA port connections Port mode of a server facing Aggregator with the Ethernet port that provides access to FCF functionality on a fabric N port functionality on an FCoE enabled server port A converged network adapter CNA can use one or more Ethernet ports CNAs can encapsulate Fibre Channel frames in Ethernet for FCoE transport and de encapsulate Fibre Channel frames from FCoE to native Fibre Channel Template used to configure DCB parameters including priority based flow control PFC and enhanced transmission selection ETS on CEE ports Network of Fibre Ch
73. as a partial keyword because both the clock and class map commands begin with the letters cl You can enter clo however as a partial keyword because only one command begins with those three letters The TAB key auto completes keywords in commands Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command The UP and DOWN arrow keys display previously entered commands refer to Command History The BACKSPACE and DELETE keys erase the previous letter Key combinations are available to move quickly across the command line The following table describes these short cut key combinations Short Cut Key Action Combination CNTL A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line CNTL B Moves the cursor back one character CNTL D Deletes character at cursor CNTL E Moves the cursor to the end of the line CNTL F Moves the cursor forward one character CNTL I Completes a keyword CNTL K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line CNTL L Re enters the previous command CNTL N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL P or the UP arrow key CNTL P Recalls commands beginning with the last command CNTL U Deletes the line CNTL W Deletes the previous word CNTL X Deletes the line CNTL Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Esc D Deletes all characte
74. be the same Fabric and VLAN ID range 2 4094 For example fabric id 10 vlan 10 FCoE MAP mode 320 NPIV Proxy Gateway fabric id fabric num vlan vlan id Add a text description of the settings in the FCoE map Maximum 32 characters FCoE MAP mode description text Specify the FC MAP value used to generate a fabric provided MAC address which is required to send FCoE traffic from a server on the FCoE VLAN to the FC fabric specified in Step 2 Enter a unique MAC address prefix as the FC MAP value for each fabric Range OEFCOO OEFCFF Default None FCoE MAP mode fc map fc map value Configure the priority used by a server CNA to select the FCF for a fabric login FLOGI Range 1 255 Default 128 FCoE MAP mode fcf priority priority Enable the monitoring FIP keepalive messages if it is disabled to detect if other FCoE devices are reachable Default FIP keepalive monitoring is enabled FCoE MAP mode keepalive Configure the time interval in seconds used to transmit FIP keepalive advertisements Range 8 90 seconds Default 8 seconds FCoE MAP mode fka adv period seconds Applying an FCoE Map on Server facing Ethernet Ports You can apply multiple FCoE maps on an Ethernet port or port channel When you apply an FCoE map on a server facing port or port channel The port is configured to operate in hybrid mode accept both tagged and untagged VLAN frames The associated FCoE VLAN is enabled on the por
75. be up for a LAG bunale to be fully up perform the following steps Specify the minimum number of member interfaces of the uplink LAG 128 bundle that must be up for the LAG bundle to be brought up The default minimum number of member links that must be active for the uplink LAG to be active is 1 Enter the minimum links number command in the Port Channel Interface 128 Configuration mode to specify this value Dell conf interface port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 minimum links 4 Use the show interfaces port channel command to view information regarding the configured LAG or port channel settings The Minimum number of links to bring Port channel up is field in the output of this command displays the configured number of active links for the LAG to be enabled Dell show interfaces port channel 128 Port channel 128 is up line protocol is down minimum links not up Created by LACP protocol Hardware address is 00 01 02 03 04 05 Current address is 00 01 02 03 04 05 Interface index is 1107492992 inimum number of links to bring Port channel up is 4 Internet address is not set ode of IPv4 Address Assignment NONE DHCP Client ID 000102030405 TU 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed auto embers in this channel ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of Show interface counters 05 22 24 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics packets 0 bytes 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 127 byte pkts over 2
76. can configure the system through the RADIUS server to automatically execute a command when you connect to a specific line The auto command command is executed when the user is authenticated and before the prompt appears to the user 202 Security e Automatically execute a command auto command Privilege Levels Through the RADIUS server you can configure a privilege level for the user to enter into when they connect to a session This value is configured on the client system Seta privilege level privilege level Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS Defining a AAA Method List to be Used for RADIUS mandatory e Applying the Method List to Terminal Lines mandatory except when using default lists e Specifying a RADIUS Server Host mandatory Setting Global Communication Parameters for all RADIUS Server Hosts optional e Monitoring RADIUS optional For a complete listing of all Dell Networking OS commands related to RADIUS refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide K NOTE RADIUS authentication and authorization are done in a single step Hence authorization cannot be used independent of authentication However if you h
77. debug operations The privilege level is 15 which is unrestricted You can configure a password for this mode e CONFIGURATION mode allows you to configure security features time settings set logging and SNMP functions configure static ARP and MAC addresses and set line cards on the system Beneath CONFIGURATION mode are submodes that apply to interfaces protocols and features The following example shows the submode command structure Two sub CONFIGURATION modes are important when configuring the chassis for the first time INTERFACE submode is the mode in which you configure Layer 2 protocols and IP services specific to an interface An interface can be physical 10 Gigabit Ethernet or logical Null port channel or virtual local area network VLAN LINE submode is the mode in which you to configure the console and virtual terminal lines NOTE At any time entering a question mark displays the available command options For example when you are in CONFIGURATION mode entering the question mark first lists all available commands including the possible submodes The CLI modes are EXEC EXEC Privilege CONFIGURATIO INTERFACE 10 GIGABIT ETHERNET INTERFACE RANGE MANAGEMENT ETHERNET LINE CONSOLE VIRTUAL TERMINAL MONITOR SESSION Navigating CLI Modes The Dell prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode The followin
78. device that combines the functionality of a host bus adapter HBA with a network interface controller NIC Multiple adapters on different devices for several traffic types are no longer required Data center bridging satisfies the needs of the following types of data center traffic in a unified fabric LAN traffic consists of a large number of flows that are generally insensitive to latency requirements while certain applications such as streaming video are more sensitive to latency Ethernet functions as a best effort network that may drop packets in case of network congestion IP networks rely on transport protocols for example TCP for reliable data transmission with the associated cost of greater processing overhead and performance impact e Storage traffic based on Fibre Channel media uses the SCSI protocol for data transfer This traffic typically consists of large data packets with a payload of 2K bytes that cannot recover from frame loss 34 Data Center Bridging DCB To successfully transport storage traffic data center Ethernet must provide no drop service with lossless links Servers use InterProcess Communication IPC traffic within high performance computing clusters to share information Server traffic is extremely sensitive to latency requirements To ensure lossless delivery and latency sensitive scheduling of storage and service traffic and I O convergence of LAN storage and server traffic over a unified fabric
79. e YE end dee DCB Configuration ExGhanges et AA t HEB ES Configuration Source ElectlOn ener rtr rere ea rt E ga a EP ea nd nh Propagation of DCB Information Auto Detection of the DCBx Version DCBX Example aei a a tento a re otra ha de ie oae oe o ers DCBx Prer quisites arid RestriCtlOns 2 1 atero easi a ed Pe red Lee t Puri ri ieat 56 DGBx Error Messages ec ct lath Gv et e CO ERR 56 Debugging DCBx on an Interface de ee e teet de e tee a gera eie aa 56 Verifyingthe DEB Configura d n e ERR RR DERE RARO INR GREG EATER ee 57 QoS dotlp Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment ssssssssssseeem 67 Troubleshooting PFC ETS and DCBx Operation nnns 68 Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method eene nnns 69 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 71 Supported MOdES Auch nas ietes aan e dace Ra ae este te Ale 71 Assigning an IP Address using DHCP cccccccscecssscssecsecseeseeseesscessecssecseecsescseesstecstecseeseeenstenseesieens 71 Debugging DHEP Client Operation ete este ai P RR De a PHARA 73 DHCP Glientz seven ee de D di am ia ital o at eed tu nb 76 How DHCP Client is Implemented ieies ae nennen tnter tnn 76 DHCP Client on a Management Interface nnne nnns 77 DHCP GClientor VLAN inre eee tette metta detecte ete Tbe E 77 DHCP Packet Format and Options mn e ione pa n ttes ink p beds 77 A RU quu n ege Ca 79 Releasing and Renewing DHCP based IP Add
80. enne 244 Addinga Stack UME 1 Secs Age Sade anes SA ieee d tq etes 245 Res ttirigza Unit Ora Stack etr te edt eite ote de chee ett be d etes 245 Removing an Aggregator from a Stack and Restoring Quad Mode sss 246 Configuring the Uplink Speed of Interfaces as 40 Gigabit Ethernet sssssssseee 246 Merging Two Operational Stacks Verifying a Stack Configuration iie diced ree e pete eie e e avid e re eren e Pd edes doe USING Show Commands haters orte o LR Odds burn bebo tud Troubleshooting Switch Stack udine d ie one oe e i e RR ate 10 Failure cenas daa iii 252 Upgrading asSwitGh Stac kee a dete ode Pede ue eee cte tienes 254 Upgrading a Single Stack rit iie reticere eta ue a e EOD Re Stn 255 19 Storm Control hire iii 257 Configure Storm CODntlOL aout tere dida e red era ren 257 Configuring Storm Control from CONFIGURATION Mode sssseeemememen 257 Configuring Storm Control from INTERFACE Mode sssssssssseeeenneeeeennnns 258 20 Broadcast Storm Control eminere ect 259 Supported Modes e ERR ted OBI D OE ah adea 259 Disabling Broadcast Storm Coritrol ii diee teg te n etn tes ttr its 259 Displaying Broadcast Storm Control Status enne 259 Configuring St r Controla ferri ie e m ar undue te tib tendens 259 21 System Time and Date acento titi 260 Supported Modest E EA tee etes 260 Setting the Time for the Software Clock 260 Setting the TIMEZONE ee eee
81. expansion slot O the ports are numbered 41 to 44 e In expansion slot 1 the ports are numbered 49 to 52 Installing the Optics The following optical ports are supported on the FC Flex IO module using one of the supported breakout cables e 4Gor 8G Fibre Channel small form factor pluggable plus SFP optics module and LC connectors over a distance of 150 meters e 4Gor 8G Fibre Channel SFP optics module and LC connectors over a distance of 4 km A CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD damage can occur if the components are mishandled Always wear an ESD preventive wrist or heel ground strap when handling the FC Flex IO module and its components WARNING When working with optical fibres follow all the warning labels and always wear eye protection Never look directly into the end of a terminated or unterminated fibre or connector as it may cause eye damage 1 e Position the optic so it is in the correct position The optic has a key that prevents it from being inserted incorrectly e Insert the optic into the port until it gently snaps into place K NOTE 1 When you cable the ports be sure not to interfere with the airflow from the small vent holes above and below the ports Processing of Data Traffic The Dell Networking OS determines the module type that is plugged into the slot Based on the module type the software performs the appropriate tasks The FC Flex IO module encapsulates and decapsulates the FCoE frames
82. following sequence explains the operation for the attached N Port e N Port sends a Fabric Login FLOGI as it requests a unique 24 bit address from the Fabric Login Server e N Port sends FLOGI to address OxFFFFFE Upon success it obtains a valid address FCID e N Port sends a Port Login PLOGI to inform the Fabric Name Server of its personality and capabilities this includes WWNN WWPN e N_Port sends PLOGI to address OxFFFFFC to register this address with the name server FC FLEXIO FPORT 305 Command Description show fc ns Display all the devices in name server database of the switch switch show fc ns Displays the local name server entries brief version switch brief The following configurations are applicable only after configuring the switch mode to FCF Port mode using the feature fc fport domain id 2 command When you set Switch mode to FCF Port mode any previously configured fcoe map is removed FCoE Maps To identify the SAN fabric to which FCoE storage traffic is sent use an FCoE map Using an FCoE map an NPG operates as an FCoE FC bridge between an FC SAN and FCoE network by providing FCoE enabled servers and switches with the necessary parameters to log in to a SAN fabric An FCoE map applies the following parameters on server facing Ethernet and fabric facing FC ports e The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic e The FC MAP value used to generate a fabric provided MAC addre
83. have flow control Flow control can only be present on the physical interfaces if they are part of a port channel To view the interface s configuration enter INTERFACE mode for that interface and use the show config command or from EXEC Privilege mode use the show running config interface interface command When an interface is added to a port channel Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm To add a physical interface to a port use the following commands 1 Add the interface to a port channel INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode channel member interface This command is applicable only in PMUX mode The interface variable is the physical interface type and slot port information 2 Double check that the interface was added to the port channel INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode show config To view the port channel s status and channel members in a tabular format use the show interfaces port channel brief command in EXEC Privilege mode as shown in the following example Example of the show interfaces port channel brief Command Dell show int port brief LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports 1 12 up 00 06 03 Te 0 7 Up Te 0 8 Up 2 L2 up 00 06 03 Te 0 9 Up Te 0 10 Up Te 0 11 Up Dell The following example shows the port channel s mode L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2 port channel assigned to a routed VLAN the status and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel 14
84. into fabric discovery FDISC requests before being forwarded to the FC core switch Servers use CNA ports to connect over FCoE to an Ethernet port in ENode mode on the NPIV proxy gateway FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled and configured on the FX2 gateway to prevent unauthorized access and data transmission to the SAN network FIP is used by server CNAs to discover an FCoE switch operating as an FCoE forwarder FCF The NPIV proxy gateway aggregates multiple locally connected server CNA ports into one or more upstream N port links conserving the number of ports required on an upstream FC core switch while providing an FCoE to FC bridging functionality The upstream N ports on an FX2 can connect to the same or multiple fabrics Using an FCoE map applied to downstream server facing Ethernet ports and upstream fabric facing FC ports you can configure the association between a SAN fabric and the FCoE VLAN that connects servers over the NPIV proxy gateway to FC switches in the fabric An FCoE map virtualizes the upstream SAN fabric as an FCF to downstream CNA ports on FCoE enabled servers as follows e As soon as an FC N port comes online no shutdown command the NPG starts sending FIP multicast advertisements which contain the fabric name derived from the 64 bit worldwide name WWN of the principal SAN switch The principal switch in a fabric is the FC switch with the lowest domain ID e When you apply the FCoE map t
85. is 100 If priority group bandwidth use exceeds 100 all configured priority group bandwidth is decremented based on the configured percentage ratio until all priority group bandwidth use is 100 If priority group bandwidth usage is less than or equal to 100 and any default priority groups exist a minimum of 1 bandwidth use is assigned by decreasing 1 of bandwidth from the other priority groups until priority group bandwidth use is 100 For ETS traffic selection an algorithm is applied to priority groups using Strict priority shaping Data Center Bridging DCB 37 ETS shaping Credit based shaping is not supported e ETS uses the DCB MIB IEEE 802 1azd2 5 Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol DCBx The data center bridging exchange DCBx protocol is disabled by default on any switch on which PFC or ETS are enabled DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB enabled peers and exchange configuration information PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices DCBx capabilities include Discovery of DCB capabilities on peer device connections Determination of possible mismatch in DCB configuration on a peer link e Configuration of a peer device over a DCB link DCBx requires the link layer discovery protocol LLDP to provide the path to exchange DCB parameters with peer devices Exchanged parameters are sent in organizationally specific TLVs in LLDP data units For more in
86. is allowed For DCB ETS enabled interfaces traffic destined to queue that is not mapped to any dotlp priority are dropped Data Center Bridging DCB 67 dotip Value in the Incoming Frame 0 N DO 010 BW N e Egress Queue Assignment Pc O 19 WN N N N Troubleshooting PFC ETS and DCBx Operation Inthe show interfaces pfc ets dcbx output the DCBx operational status may be down for any of the reasons described in the following table When DCBx is down the following values display in the show output field for DCBx Oper status e PFC DCBx Oper status Down e ETS DCBx Oper status Down e DCBx Oper status Disabled Reason Port Shutdown LLDP Rx Tx is disabled Waiting for Peer Multiple Peer Detected Version Conflict Config source Down Unrecognized TLV received Admin Mode OFF Local Admin Mode OFF Remote 68 Description Port is shut down All other reasons for DCBx inoperation if any are ignored LLDP is disabled Admin Mode set to rx or tx only globally or on the interface Waiting for peer or detected peer connection has aged out Multiple peer connections detected on the interface DCBx version on peer version is different than the local or globally configured DCBx version Although DCBx parameters match in auto upstream or auto downstream port the configuration source elected dynamically or CLI configured is down Invalid TLV length TLV has been received In the case
87. its reachability an attempt is made to regenerate the ARP cache entry to see if the next hop address appears before considering the route DOWN By comparing the threshold for a route s metric with current entries in the route table The UP DOWN state of the tracked route is determined by the threshold for the current value of the route metric in the routing table To provide a common tracking interface for different clients route metrics are scaled in the range from O to 255 where 0 is connected and 255 is inaccessible The scaled metric value communicated to a client always considers a lower value to have priority over a higher value The resulting scaled value is compared against the configured threshold values to determine the state of a tracked route as follows If the scaled metric for a route entry is less than or equal to the UP threshold the state of a route is UP If the scaled metric for a route is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold or the route is not entered in the routing table the state of a route is DOWN The UP and DOWN thresholds are user configurable for each tracked route The default UP threshold is 254 the default DOWN threshold is 255 The notification of a change in the state of a tracked object is sent when a metric value crosses a configured threshold The tracking process uses a protocol specific resolution value to convert the actual metric in the routing table to a scaled metric in the r
88. membership is removed and the port is assigned only to default VLAN 1 You must configure additional VLAN membership as necessary e If you had manually configured an Aggregator port to belong to one or more VLANs non default in standalone mode the VLAN configuration is retained in stacking mode only on the master switch When you reconfigure an Aggregator from stacking to standalone mode e Aggregator ports that you manually configured for VLAN membership in stacking mode retain their VLAN configuration in standalone mode e To restore the default auto VLAN mode of operation in which all ports are members of all 4094 VLANs on a port enter the auto vlan command for example Dell conf interface tengigabitethernet 0 2 Dell conf if te 0 2 auto vlan 238 Stacking Stacking Port Numbers By default each Aggregator in Standalone mode is numbered stack unit O Stack unit numbers are assigned to member switches when the stack comes up The following example shows the numbers of the 40GbE stacking ports on an Aggregator Stacking 239 el ee T Stack Unit 0 Port 37 Stack Unit O Port 33 Figure 31 Stack Groups on an Aggregator 240 Stacking Stacking in PMUX Mode PMUX stacking allows the stacking of two or more IOA units This allows grouping of multiple units for high availability IOA supports a maximum of six stacking units NOTE Prior to configuring the stack group ensure the stacking ports ar
89. mismatch errors then use the show vlt brief command on each VLT peer to view the VLT version on the peer switch If the VLT PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 281 version is more than one release different from the current version in use the VLTi does not activate The chassis members in a VLT domain support connection to orphan hosts and switches that are not connected to both switches in the VLT core e VLT interconnect VLTi The VLT interconnect supports a maximum of two 10G ports n VLT mode port 55 and 37 are dedicated to VLT interconnect ports AVLT interconnect over 1G ports is not supported The port channel must be in Default mode not Switchport mode to have VLTi recognize it The system automatically includes the required VLANs in VLTi You do not need to manually select VLANs VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached to non VLT ports Port channel link aggregation LAG across the ports in the VLT interconnect is required individual ports are not supported Dell Networking strongly recommends configuring a static LAG for VLTi The VLT interconnect synchronizes L2 and L5 control plane information across the two chassis The VLT interconnect is used for data traffic only when there is a link failure that requires using VLTi in order for data packets to reach their final destination Unknown multicast a
90. mode thrown wherever it says not supported speed 1000 interface Supported Supported Supported Supported config mode speed 10000 interface Supported Supported Not Supported Not Error config supported messages not mode thrown wherever it says not supported negotiation interface Supported Not Not supported Not Error auto config supported supported messages not mode Should thrown some wherever it error says not message supported be thrown duplex half interface Supported CLI not CLI not available Invalid Input config available error CLI mode not available duplex full interface Supported CLI not CLI not available Invalid Input config available error CLI mode not available Setting Auto Negotiation Options Dell conf int tengig 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 neg auto Dell conf if autoneg end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode mode Specify autoneg mode no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show autoneg configuration information Dell conf if autoneg mode forced master Force port to master mode forced slave Force port to slave mode Dell conf if autoneg 126 Interfaces Viewing Interface Information Displaying Non Default Configurations keyword n EXEC The show ip running config interfaces configured command allows you to display only interfaces that have non default configurations are displayed The below example illustrates the possible
91. of an invalid PFC or ETS TLV the error displays in the show interfaces pfc ets output The show interfaces dcbx output displays PFC or ETS as down Local Admin Mode is disabled Remote Admin Mode is disabled Data Center Bridging DCB Reason Waiting for ACK from Peer Error Bit set Enabled with ETS Mismatch show interfaces dcbx output PFC is down show interfaces pfc output ETS is down show interfaces ets output Description For a legacy DCBx version a peer has not acknowledged the reception of a sent packet This reason displays only when a remote peer is willing to receive a DCB configuration For a legacy DCBx version a peer has sent packets with an error bit set This reason displays only when a remote peer is willing to receive a DCB configuration DCBx is enabled but an ETS validation failure error has occurred One of the following PFC specific errors has occurred e No MBC support e Configured PFC priorities exceed maximum PFC capability limit New dotip to queue mapping violates the allowed system limit for PFC Enable status per priority One of the following ETS specific errors occurred in ETS validation e Unsupported PGID e A priority group exceeds the maximum number of supported priorities e COSQ is mapped to more than one priority group e COSQ is mapped to more than one priority group Invalid or unsupported transmission selection algorithm TSA e Bandwidth is configu
92. of the show vlt detail Command Dell VLTpeerl show vlt detail Dell VLTpeer2 show vlt detail Example of the show vlt role Command Dell VLTpeerl show vlt role PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 1 Secondary 32768 Up Up Up 6 3 00 01 e8 8a e9 91 00 01 e8 8a e9 76 6 3 90 seconds 60 seconds 0 seconds 150 seconds Ocal LAG Id Peer LAG Id Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs Ocal LAG Id Peer LAG Id Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs 287 VLT Role VLT Role Primary System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a df bc System Role Priority 32768 Local System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a df bc Local System Role Priority 32768 Dell VLTpeer2 show vlt role VLT Role VLT Role Secondary System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a df bc System Role Priority 32768 Local System MAC address 00 01 e8 8a df e6 Local System Role Priority 32768 Example of the show running config vlt Command Dell VLTpeerl show running config vlt vlt domain 30 peer link port channel 60 back up destination 10 11 200 18 Dell VLTpeer2 show running config vlt vlt domain 30 peer link port channel 60 back up destination 10 11 200 20 Example of the show vlt statistics Command Dell VLTpeerl show vlt statistics VLT Statistics HeartBeat Messages Sent 987 HeartBeat Messages Received 986 ICL Hello s Sent 148 ICL Hello s Received 98 HeartBeat Messag
93. optimization feature includes auto provisioning support with the ability to detect directly connected Dell EqualLogic storage arrays and automatically reconfigure the switch to enhance storage traffic flows An Aggregator uses the link layer discovery protocol LLDP to discover Dell EqualLogic devices on the network LLDP is enabled by default For more information about LLDP refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP The following message displays the first time a Dell EqualLogic array is detected and describes the configuration change that are automatically performed SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 IFM ISCSI AUTO CONFIG This switch is being configured for optimal conditions to support iSCSI traffic which will cause some automatic configuration to occur including jumbo frames and flow control on all ports no storm control to be enabled on the port of detection The following syslog message is generated the first time an EqualLogic array is detected SSTKUNITO M CP LLDP 5 LLDP EQL DETECTED EqualLogic Storage Array detected on interface Te 1 43 e Atthe first detection of an EqualLogic array a maximum transmission unit MTU of 12000 is enabled on all ports and port channels if it has not already been enabled e Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface identified by LLDP ISCSI Optimization Operation When the Aggregator auto configures with iSCSI enabled the following occurs e Link level flow con
94. pair changes from 00 to 04 Example of Viewing VLAN Ports Using SNMP Port Assigned Dell Networking system output R5 conf do show vlan id 10 Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs Q U Untagged T Tagged 224 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Inactive U Tengig 0 2 Unix system output gt snmpget v2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 185 16 2 Le LT abeh S k 07181 78 6 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 17 7 1 4 3 1 2 1107787786 Hex STRING 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The value 40 is in the first set of 7 hex pairs indicating that these ports are in Stack Unit 0 The hex value 40 is 0100 0000 in binary As described the left most position in the string represents Port 1 The next position from the left represents Port 2 and has a value of 1 indicating that Port 0 2 is in VLAN 10 The remaining positions are O so those ports are not in the VLAN Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP The Aggregator supports the RFC 1493 dotld table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs NOTE The table contains none of the other information provided by the show vlan command such as port speed or whether the ports are tagged or untagged K NOTE The 802 1q Q BRIDGE MIB d
95. pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 836 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles 0 CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 9127965 packets 3157378990 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 133 over 64 byte pkts 3980 over 127 byte pkts 9123852 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 4113 Multicasts 9123852 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 1 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 34 00 Mbits sec 12318 packets sec 0 07 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 13 49 Port channel 128 is up Created by LACP protocol ardware address is 00 1e c9 f1 03 58 terface index is 1107755136 In q Internet address is not set ode of IP Address Assignment NONE DHCP Client ID 1ag128001ec9f10358 T i e line protocol is up Current address is 00 1e c9 f1 03 58 nimum number of links to bring Port channel up is 1 U 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit mbers in this channel Te 1 49 U ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 14 06 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 476 packets 33180 bytes 414 64 byte pkts 33 over 64 byte pkts 29 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 476 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles 0 CRC 0 overrun
96. port channels can be members of VLANs NOTE You can assign a static IP address to default VLAN 1 using the ip address command To assign a different VLAN ID to the default VLAN use the default vlan id vlan id command Following table lists out the VLAN defaults in Dell Networking OS Table 6 VLAN Defaults Feature Default Mode Layer 2 no IP address is assigned Default VLAN ID VLAN 1 Default VLAN When an Aggregator boots up all interfaces are up in Layer 2 mode and placed in the default VLAN as untagged interfaces Only untagged interfaces can belong to the default VLAN By default VLAN 1 is the default VLAN To change the default VLAN ID use the default vlan id 1 4094 gt command in CONFIGURATION mode You cannot delete the default VLAN Port Based VLANs Port based VLANs are a broadcast domain defined by different ports or interfaces In Dell Networking OS a port based VLAN can contain interfaces from different stack units within the chassis Dell Networking OS supports 4094 port based VLANs Port based VLANs offer increased security for traffic conserve bandwidth and allow switch segmentation Interfaces in different VLANs do not communicate with each other adding some security to the traffic on those interfaces Different VLANs can communicate between each other by means of IP routing Because traffic is only broadcast or flooded to the interfaces within a VLAN the VLAN conserves bandwidth Finally you can have multip
97. present in the I O Aggregator the software autoconfigures the DCB settings on the ports that support DCB and does not retrieve these settings from the ToR switch e Active fabric manager AFM is compatible with FC Flex IO modules All SNMP MIBs that are supported for I O Aggregator switches apply equally for FC Flex IO modules The interface MIB indicates the FC interface when you install the FC flex IO module The interface MIB statistical counters compute and display the FC interface metrics e When the Dell Networking OS sends FC frames the initial FLOGI or FLOGO messages or converts FLOGI to FDISC messages or processes any internally generated FC frames the software computes and verifies the FC cyclic redundancy check CRC value before sending the frame to FC ports Fabric worldwide name WWN verification is available for eight FC ports Single switching WWN capability is provided when the switch operates in NPIV mode e With FC Flex IO modules you can connect the IOA in Simple MUX mode to a single fabric e With FC Flex IO modules on an IOA the FC port speed is set to auto The following parameters are automatically configured on the ENode facing and FC ports Description SAN FABRIC e Fabric id 1002 e Fcoe vlan 1002 e Fc map OxOefcOO e Fcf priority 128 e Fka adv period 8000mSec e Keepalive enable e Vlan priority 3 e On an IOA the FCoE virtual local area network VLAN is automatically configured e
98. release dhcp interface managementethernet 0 0 ay 27 15 55 22 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 DHCP RELEASE CMD Received in state BOUND ay 27 15 55 22 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG PKT DHCP RELEASE sent in Interface Ma 0 0 ay 27 15 55 22 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 Transitioned to state STOPPED ay 27 15 55 22 SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 DHCP IP RELEASED CMD sent to FTOS in state STOPPED Dell renew dhcp interface tengigabitethernet 0 1 Dell May 27 15 55 28 SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 DHCP RENEW CMD Received in state STOPPED ay 27 15 55 31 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 Transitioned to state SELECTING ay 27 15 55 31 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG PKT DHCP DISCOVER sent in Interface Ma 0 0 med ay 27 15 55 31 SSTKUNITO M CP DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG PKT Received DHCPOFFER packet in Interface Ma 0 0 with Lease Ip 10 16 134 250 75 DHCP Client An Aggregator is auto configured to operate as a DHCP client The DHCP client functionality is enabled only on the default VLAN and the management interface A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server On an Aggregator the DHCP
99. request was received rather than flooding it on the entire VLAN The relay agent strips Option 82 from DHCP responses before forwarding them to the client To insert Option 82 into DHCP packets follow this step Insert Option 82 into DHCP packets CONFIGURATION mode int ma 0 0 ip add dhcp relay information option remote id Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 79 For routers between the relay agent and the DHCP server enter the trust downstream option Releasing and Renewing DHCP based IP Addresses On an Aggregator configured as a DHCP client you can release a dynamically assigned IP address without removing the DHCP client operation on the interface To manually acquire a new IP address from the DHCP server use the following command e Release a dynamically acquired IP address while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface EXEC Privilege mode release dhcp interface type slot port Acquire a new IP address with renewed lease time from a DHCP server EXEC Privilege mode renew dhcp interface type slot port Viewing DHCP Statistics and Lease Information To display DHCP client information enter the following show commands e Display statistics about DHCP client interfaces EXEC Privilege show ip dhcp client statistics interface type slot port Clear DHCP client statistics on a specified or on all interfaces EXEC Privilege clear ip dhcp client statistics all interface type slot port
100. running config to Proceed with power cycle Confirm yes no yes 256 Stacking 19 Storm Control The storm control feature allows you to control unknown unicast muticast and broadcast control traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces Dell Networking OS Behavior The Dell Networking OS supports broadcast control the storm control broadcast command for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic The minimum number of packets per second PPS that storm control can limit is two To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm control broadcast multicast unknown unicast pfc llfc interface command EXEC Privilege To view the storm control multicast configuration use the show storm control multicast interface command EXEC Privilege Example Dell show storm control multicast Tengigabitethernet 1 1 Multicast storm control configuration Interface Direction Packets Second Te 1 1 Ingress 5 Dell To display the storm control unknown unicast configuration use the show storm control unknown unicast interface command EXEC Privilege Configure Storm Control Storm control is supported in INTERFACE mode and CONFIGURATION mode Configuring Storm Control from CONFIGURATION Mode To configure storm control from CONFIGURATION mode use the following command You can configure storm control for ingress traffic in CONFIGURATION mode Do not apply per virtual local area network per VLAN quality of serv
101. show commands that have the available configured Dell show interfaces configured Dell show interfaces tengigabitEthernet 0 configured Dell show ip interface configured Dell show ip interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured Dell show ip interface brief configured Dell show running config interfaces configured Dell show running config interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured mode show interfaces switchportcommand displays only interfaces in Layer 2 mode and their relevant configuration information The show interfaces switchport command displays the interface whether the interface supports IEEE 802 1Q tagging or not and the VLANs to which the interface belongs show interfaces switchport Command Example Dell show interfaces switchport Name 802 101 TenGigabitEthernet 13 0 Tagged True Vlan membership Vlan Name 802 101 2 TenGigabitEthernet 13 1 Tagged True Vlan membership Vlan Name 802 101 2 enGigabitEthernet 13 2 Tagged True Vlan membership Vlan a Name 802 101 2 TenGigabitEthernet 13 3 Tagged True Vlan membership Vlan 2 zsMore Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command This command does not clear the counters captured by any SNMP program To clear the counters use the following command in EXEC Privilege mode Interfaces 127 1
102. software clock to the current time and date EXEC Privilege mode clock set time month day year time Enter the time in hours minutes seconds For the hour variable use the 24 hour format for example 17 15 00 is 5 15 pm month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year day Enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year year Enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 Example of the clock set Command Dell clock set 12 11 00 21 may 2012 Dell Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated UTC is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard commonly known as Greenwich Mean time When determining system time you must include the 260 System Time and Date differentiator between the UTC and your local timezone For example San Jose CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of 8 To set the clock timezone use the following command e Set the clock to the appropriate timezone CONFIGURATION mode clock timezone timezone name offset timezone name Enter the name of the timezone Do not use spaces offset Enter one of the following a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the timezone a minus sign then a n
103. supports 42 bytes for physical ports and 16 bytes for the LAG interfaces up to a maximum of 128 LAG interfaces 4 A59 byte buffer bitmap is supported and in that bitmap e First 42 bytes represent the physical ports e Next 16 bytes represent logical ports 1 128 e An additional 1 byte is reserved for future Fetching the Switchport Configuration and the Logical Interface Configuration Important Points to Remember The SNMP should be configured in the chassis and the chassis management interface should be up with the IP address e If a port is configured in a VLAN the respective bit for that port will be set to 1 in the specific VLAN e Inthe aggregator all the server ports and uplink LAG 128 will be in switchport Hence the respective bits are set to 1 The following output is for the default VLAN Example of dot1qVlanCurrentUntaggedPorts output snmpwalk Os c public v 1 10 16 151 151 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 4 2 1 5 mib 2 17 7 1 4 2 1 5 0 1107525633 Hex STRING FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 231 The last byte is free byte The bit for LAGs starts from 43 byte If server LAG 1 is created with server ports Te 0 6 and Te 0 7 the respective bit for the ports are unset and the bit for LAG 1 is set in default VLAN The corresponding outpu
104. switch one after another in as short a time as possible reload EXEC PRIVILEGE When the reload completes the base module ports comes up in 4x10GbE quad mode The switch functions in standalone mode but retains the running and startup configuration that was last synchronized by the master switch while it operated as a stack unit Configuring the Uplink Speed of Interfaces as 40 Gigabit Ethernet You can configure the I O Aggregator switch in standalone VLT and stack modes to operate with an uplink speed of 40 Gigabit Ethernet per second You can use the chassis management controller CMC interface to access the switch and specify the 40 GbE QSFP module ports to function in 40 GbE mode after the subsequent reload operation By default these QSFP modules function in 10GbE mode When you configure the native mode to be 40 GbE the CMC sends a notification to the Aggregator to set the default internal working of all of the ports to be 40 GbE after the switch reloads After you set this configuration you must enter the reboot command not pressing the Reset button which causes the factory default settings to be applied when the device comes up online from the CMC for the uplink speed to be effective This functionality to set the uplink speed is available from the CLI or the CMC interface when the Aggregator functions as a simple MUX or a VLT node with all of the uplink interfaces configured to be member links in the same LAG bundle You c
105. system brief Dell show system brief Stack MAC 00 1e c9 de 03 7b Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 Member not present 1 Management online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17 38 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 9 Member not present Dell Trace Logs In addition to the syslog buffer the Dell Networking OS buffers trace messages which are continuously written by various software tasks to report hardware and software events and status information Each trace message provides the date time and name of the Dell Networking OS process All messages are stored in a ring buffer You can save the messages to a file either manually or automatically after failover 336 Debugging and Diagnostics Auto Save on Crash or Rollover Exception information for MASTER or standby units is stored in the flash TRACE_LOG_DIR directory This directory contains files that save trace information when there has been a task crash or timeout e On a MASTER unit you can reach the TRACE_LOG_DIR files by FTP or by using the show file command from the flash TRACE_LOG_DIR directory e Ona Standby unit you can reach the TRACE_LOG_DIR files only by using the show file command from the flash TRACE_LOG_DIR directory Es NOTE Non management member units do not support this functionality Example of the dir flash Command Dell dir flash TRACE LOG DIR Directory of flash TRACE LOG D
106. table below lists out the various Layer 2 overheads found in Dell Networking OS and the number of bytes 122 Interfaces Table 8 Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU Layer 2 Overhead Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU Ethernet untagged 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN Stack Header 26 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANS are as follows Port Channels All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members For example if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000 the port channel s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU VLANs All members of a VLAN must have the same IP MTU value e Members can have different link MTU values Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag he VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the VLAN members For example the VLAN contains tagged members with a link MTU of 1522 and an IP MTU of 1500 and untagged members with a link MTU of 1518 and an IP MTU of 1500 The VLAN s Link MTU cannot be higher than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes Auto Nego
107. the first channel member That first interface may be the first interface that is physically brought up or was physically operating when interfaces were added to the port channel For example if the first operational interface in the port channel is a TenGigabit Ethernet interface all interfaces at 1000 Mbps are kept up and all 100 1000 10000 interfaces that are not set to 1000 Mbps speed or auto negotiate are disabled 1GbE and 10GbE Interfaces in Port Channels When both Gigabit and TenGigabitEthernet interfaces are added to a port channel the interfaces must share a common speed When interfaces have a configured speed different from the port channel speed the software disables those interfaces The common speed is determined when the port channelis first enabled At that time the software checks the first interface listed in the port channel configuration If that interface is enabled its speed configuration becomes the common speed of the port channeL If the other interfaces configured in that port channel are configured with a different speed Dell Networking OS disables them Interfaces 115 For example if four interfaces TenGig 0 1 0 2 0 3 and 0 4 in which TenGig 0 land TenGig 0 2 are set to speed 1000 Mb s and the TenGig 0 3 and TenGig0 4 are set to 10000 Mb s with all interfaces enabled and you add them to a port channel by entering channel member tengigabitethernet 0 1 4 while in port channel interface mode and the Dell Netwo
108. the default VLAN VLAN 1 The SNMP walk returns the values for dotidTpFdbAddress dotidTpFdbPort and dotidTpFdbStatus Each object is comprised of an OID concatenated with an instance number In the case of these objects the instance number is the decimal equivalent of the MAC address derive the instance number by converting each hex pair to its decimal equivalent For example the decimal equivalent of E8 is 252 and so the instance number for MAC address 00 01 e8 06 95 ac is 0 1 232 6 149 172 The value of dotidTpFdbPort is the port number of the port off which the system learns the MAC address In this case of TenGigabitEthernet 0 7 the manager returns the integer 118 Example of Fetching Dynamic MAC Addresses on the Default VLAN SY S ESMAS SR puce Dell show mac address table Vlanld Mac Address Type Interface State al 00 01 e8 06 95 ac Dynamic Tengig 0 7 Active aa rip E E Query from Management Station e c5 5 gt snmpwalk v 2c c techpubs 10 11 131 162 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 3 1 SNMPv2 8MI mib 2 17 4 3 1 1 0 1 232 6 149 172 Hex STRING 00 01 E8 06 95 AC Example of Fetching Dynamic MAC Addresses on a Non default VLANs In the following example TenGigabitEthernet 0 7 is moved to VLAN 1000 a non default VLAN To fetch the MAC addresses learned on non default VLANs use the object dotlqTpFdbTable The instance number is the VLAN number concatenated with the decimal conversion of the MAC address SVSGCM Sa Sa i
109. the show commands To display the default buffer profile use the show buffer profile summary detail command from EXEC Privilege mode Example of Viewing the Default Buffer Profile Dell show buffer profile detail interface tengigabitethernet 0 1 Interface tengig 0 1 Buffer profile Dynamic buffer 194 88 Kilobytes Queue Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets Kilobytes 0 2 50 256 1 2 90 256 2 2550 256 3 2 50 256 4 9 38 256 5 9 38 256 6 9 38 256 7 9 38 256 Example of Viewing the Buffer Profile Allocations Dell show running config interface tengigabitethernet 2 0 interface TenGigabitEthernet 2 0 no ip address mtu 9252 switchport no shutdown buffer policy myfsbufferprofile Example of Viewing the Buffer Profile Interface Dell show buffer profile detail int gi 0 10 Interface Gi 0 10 Buffer profile fsqueue fp Dynamic buffer 1256 00 Kilobytes Queue Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets Kilobytes 0 3 00 256 1 3 00 256 2 3 00 256 3 3 00 256 4 3 00 256 9 3 00 256 6 3 00 256 7 3 00 256 Example of Viewing the Buffer Profile Linecard Dell show buffer profile detail fp uplink stack unit 0 port set 0 Linecard 0 Port set 0 Buffer profile fsqueue hig Dynamic Buffer 1256 00 Kilobytes Queue Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets Kilobytes Debugging and Diagnostics 345 0 3 00 256 1 3 00 256 2 3 00 256 3 3 00 256 4 3 00 256 5 3 00 256 6 3 00 256 7 3 00 256 Using a Pre Defined Bu
110. the stack master fails in an operational stack Resolution If a stack member fails in a daisy chain topology a split stack occurs If a member unit fails in a ring topology traffic is re routed over existing stack links The following syslog messages are generated when a member unit fails Dell May 31 01 46 17 STKUNIT3 M CP IPC 2 STATUS target stack unit 4 not responding ay 31 01 46 17 SSTKUNIT3 M CP CHMGR 2 STACKUNIT DOWN Major alarm Stack unit 4 down IPC timeout Dell May 31 01 46 17 SSTKUNIT3 M CP SIFMGR 1 DEL PORT Removed port Te 4 1 32 41 48 Fo 4 49 53 Dell May 31 01 46 18 STKUNIT5 S CP SIFMGR 1 DEL PORT Removed port Te 4 1 32 41 48 Fo 4 49 53 Unplugged Stacking Cable Problem A stacking cable is unplugged from a member switch The stack loses half of its bandwidth from the disconnected switch Resolution Intra stack traffic is re routed on a another link using the redundant stacking port on the switch A recalculation of control plane and data plane connections is performed 252 Stacking Master Switch Fails Problem The master switch fails due to a hardware fault software crash or power loss Resolution A failover procedure begins 1 Keep alive messages from the Aggregator master switch time out after 60 seconds and the switch is removed from the stack 2 The standby switch takes the master role Data traffic on the new master switch is unint
111. these sessions receives priority treatment when forwarded on Aggregator hardware SAN Storage Network Aggregators Installed in M1000e Chassis Servers Installed in M1000e Chassis Figure 16 iSCSI Optimization Example Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets When you enable iSCSI optimization by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic iSCSI Optimization 131 You can configure the switch to monitor traffic for additional port numbers or a combination of port number and target IP address and you can remove the well known port numbers from monitoring Information Monitored in iSCSI Traffic Flows SCSI optimization examines the following data in packets and uses the data to track the session and create the classifier entries that enable QoS treatment e Initiator s IP Address e Target s IP Address e ISID Initiator defined session identifier e Initiator s IQN SCSI qualified name e Target s ION e Initiator s TCP Port e Target s TCP Port If no iSCSI traffic is detected for a session during a user configurable aging period the session data Clears Detection and Auto configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays The iSCSI
112. time after the IP address is granted that the client attempts to renew its lease with any server if the original server does not respond End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet Option 82 RFC 3046 the relay agent information option or Option 82 is used for class based IP address assignment The code for the relay agent information option is 82 and is comprised of two sub options circuit ID and remote ID Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client originated message is received Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received The value of this sub option is the MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 82 The DHCP relay agent inserts Option 82 before forwarding DHCP packets to the server The server can use this information to e track the number of address requests per relay agent Restricting the number of addresses available per relay agent can harden a server against address exhaustion attacks e associate client MAC addresses with a relay agent to prevent offering an IP address to a client spoofing the same MAC address on a different relay agent e assign IP addresses according to the relay agent This prevents generating DHCP offers in response to requests from an unauthorized relay agent The server echoes the option back to the relay agent in its response and the relay agent can use the information in the option to forward a reply out the interface on which the
113. to VLT being established use a spanning tree protocol 276 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator VLT provides Layer 2 multipathing creating redundancy through increased bandwidth enabling multiple parallel paths between nodes and load balancing traffic where alternative paths exist Virtual link trunking offers the following benefits e Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices e Eliminates STP blocked ports e Provides a loop free topology e Uses all available uplink bandwidth e Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails e Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol VRRP e Provides link level resiliency e Assures high availability CAUTION Dell Networking does not recommend enabling Stacking and VLT simultaneously If you enable both features at the same time unexpected behavior occurs As shown in the following example VLT presents a single logical Layer 2 domain from the perspective of attached devices that have a virtual link trunk terminating on separate chassis in the VLT domain However the two VLT chassis are independent Layer2 Layer3 L2 L3 switches for devices in the upstream network L2 L3 control plane protocols and system management features function normally in VLT mode Features such as VRRP and internet group management protocol IGMP snooping require state information coordinating between the two VLT chassis IGMP and VLT configurations must be identic
114. to forward FCoE traffic directly back and forth between the devices e The FC Flex IO module sends an FC or FCoE registered state change notification RSCN message to the upstream or downstream devices whenever an error occurs in the appropriate direction e AnF Portis a port on an FC switch that connects to an N Port of an FC device and is called a fabric port By default the NPIV functionality is disabled on the Cisco MDS switch enable this capability before you connect the FC port of the I O Aggregator to these upstream switches Data Center Bridging Fibre Channel over Ethernet and NPIV Proxy Gateway features are supported on the FC Flex IO modules For detailed information about these applications and their working see the corresponding chapters for these applications in this manual The following figures illustrate two deployment scenarios of configuring FC Flex IO modules 300 FC Flex IO Modules Compellent M10G0e chassis oncom caceble una EnenetLnia Finis Figure 36 Case 1 Deployment Scenario of Configuring FC Flex IO Modules CEE OCHO cacatia Emerner Lois Ethernet inks M1000e chassis POUS Figure 37 Case 2 Deployment Scenario of Configuring FC Flex IO Modules Fibre Channel over Ethernet for FC Flex IO Modules FCoE provides a converged Ethernet network that allows the combination of storage area network SAN and LAN traffic on a Layer 2 link by encapsulating Fibre Channel dat
115. transmit time of a queue after receiving a message to pause a specified priority e By default PFC is enabled on an interface with no dotlp priorities configured You can configure the PFC priorities if the switch negotiates with a remote peer using DCBX During DCBX negotiation with a remote peer DCBx communicates with the remote peer by link layer discovery protocol LLDP type length value TLV to determine current policies such as PFC support and enhanced transmission selection ETS BW allocation If the negotiation succeeds and the port is in DCBX Willing mode to receive a peer configuration PFC parameters from the peer are used to configured PFC priorities on the port If you enable the ink level flow control mechanism on the interface DCBX negotiation with a peer is not performed If the negotiation fails and PFC is enabled on the port any user configured PFC input policies are applied If no PFC dcb map has been previously applied the PFC default setting is used no priorities configured If you do not enable PFC on an interface you can enable the 802 3x link evel pause function By default the link level pause is disabled when you disable DCBx and PFC f no PFC dcb map has been applied on the interface the default PFC settings are used e PFC supports buffering to receive data that continues to arrive on an interface while the remote system reacts to the PFC operation e PFC uses the DCB MIB IEEE802 1azd
116. types of TLVs as shown in the below table All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs You can configure the inclusion of individual Optional TLVs Table 12 Type Length Value TLV Types Type TLV 0 End of LLDPDU 1 Chassis ID 2 Port ID 3 Time to Live Optional 162 Description Marks the end of an LLDPDU The Chassis ID TLV is a mandatory TLV that identifies the chassis containing the IEEE 802 LAN station associated with the transmitting LLDP agent The Port ID TLV is a mandatory TLV that identifies the port component of the MSAP identifier associated with the transmitting LLDP agent The Time To Live TLV indicates the number of seconds that the recipient LLDP agent considers the information associated with this MSAP identifier to be valid Includes sub types of TLVs that advertise specific configuration information These sub types are Management TLVs IEEE 802 1 IEEE 802 5 and TIA 1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Figure 21 LLDPDU Frame Configure LLDP Configuring LLDP is a two step process 1 2 Enable LLDP globally Advertise TLVs out of an interface Related Configuration Tasks Viewing the LLDP Configuration Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents Configuring LLDPDU Intervals Configuring a Time to Live Debugging LLDP Important Points to Remember LLDP is enabled by default Dell Netw
117. 0 tengigabitethernet 0 1 vlan 1 Dell conf if range te 0 5 10 te 0 1 v1 1 118 Interfaces Exclude a Smaller Port Range f the interface range has multiple port ranges the smaller port range is excluded from the prompt nterface Range Prompt Excluding a Smaller Port Range Dell conf ftinterface range tengigabitethernet 2 0 23 tengigab 2 1 10 Dell conf if range te 2 0 23 Overlap Port Ranges f overlapping port ranges are specified the port range is extended to the smallest start port number and argest end port number nterface Range Prompt Including Overlapping Port Ranges Dell conf inte ra tengig 2 1 11 tengig 2 1 23 Dell conf if range te 2 1 23 Commas The example below shows how to use commas to add different interface types to the range enabling all Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in the range 0 1 to 0 23 and both Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1 1 and 1 2 Multiple Range Bulk Configuration Gigabit Ethernet and Ten Gigabit Ethernet Dell conf if interface range tengigabitethernet 0 1 23 tengigabitethernet 1 1 2 Dell conf if range te 0 1 23 no shutdown Dell conf if range te 0 1 23 Monitor and Maintain Interfaces You can display interface statistics with the monitor interface command This command displays an ongoing list of the interface status up down number of packets traffic statistics and so on 1 View interface statistics Enter the type of interface a
118. 0 Link Aggregation Example of the show interface port channel Command Dell gt show interface port channel 20 Port channel 20 is up line protocol is up Hardware address is 00 01 e8 01 46 fa Internet address is 1 1 120 1 24 MTU 1554 bytes IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 2000 Mbit Members in this channel Gi 9 10 Gi 9 17 ARP type ARPA ARP timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 00 00 Queueing strategy fifo 1212627 packets input 1539872850 bytes Input 1212448 IP Packets 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 4857 64 byte pkts 17570 over 64 byte pkts 35209 over 127 byte pkts 69164 over 255 byte pkts 143346 over 511 byte pkts 942523 over 1023 byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles 42 CRC O IP Checksum 0 overrun 0 discarded 2456590833 packets output 203958235255 bytes 0 underruns Output 1640 Multicasts 56612 Broadcasts 2456532581 Unicasts 2456590654 IP Packets 0 Vlans 0 MPLS O throttles 0 discarded Rate info interval 5 minutes Input 00 01Mbits sec 2 packets sec Output 81 60Mbits sec 133658 packets sec Time since last interface status change 04 31 57 Dell When more than one interface is added to a Layer 2 port channel Dell Networking OS selects one of the active interfaces in the port channel to be the primary port The primary port replies to flooding and sends protocol data units PDUs An asterisk in the show interfaces port channel brief command indicates the pr
119. 00 01 01 O std mac deny any Dell conf Dell conf line vty 0 9 Dell config line vty access class sourcemac Dell config line vty end 216 Security 17 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements A datum of management information is called a managed object the value of a managed object can be static or variable Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base MIB MIBs are hierarchically structured and use object identifiers to address managed objects but managed objects also have a textual name called an object descriptor K NOTE An I O Aggregator supports standard and private SNMP MIBs including Get operations in supported MIBs Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Implementation Information The Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 as defined by RFC 1155 1157 and 1212 SNMP version 2c as defined by RFC 1901 Configuring the Simple Network Management Protocol K NOTE The configurations in this chapter use a UNIX environment with net snmp version 5 4 This is only one of many RFC compliant SNMP utilities you can use to manage the Aggregator using SNMP Also these configurations use SNMP version 2c Configuring SNMP version 1 or version 2 requires only a single step 1 Create a community K NOTE IOA supports only Read only mode Import
120. 02 3 interface s Dell show system stack unit 0 Command Example Dell show system stack unit 0 no more Unit 0 Unit Type Management Unit Status online Next Boot online Required Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL Current Type I O Aggregator 34 port GE TE XL aster priority 0 Hardware Rev Num Ports 56 Up Time 17 hr 8 min FTOS Version 8 3 17 15 Jumbo Capable yes POE Capable no Boot Flash A 4 0 1 0 booted B 4 0 1 0bt Boot Selector 4 0 0 0 emory Size 2147483648 bytes Temperature 64 Voltage ok Switch Power GOOD Product Name 1 0 Aggregator fg By DELL fg Date 2012 05 01 Serial Number TW282921F00038 Part Number ONVH81 Piece Part ID TW 0NVH81 28292 1F0 0038 PPID Revision Service Tag N A Expr Svc Code N A PSOC FW Rev Oxb ICT Test Date 0 0 0 ICT Test Info 0x0 ax Power Req 31488 Fabric Type 0x3 Fabric Maj Ver 0x1 Fabric Min Ver 0x0 SW Manageability 0x4 HW Manageability 0x1 Max Boot Time 3 minutes Link Tuning unsupported Auto Reboot enabled 334 Debugging and Diagnostics Burned In MAC 00 le c9 f1 03 42 No Of MACs 3 Dell Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels Level 0 Level 0 diagnostics c
121. 1 Enter LLDP mode CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Advertise one or more TLVs PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise dcbx appln tlv dcbx tlv dot3 tlv interface port desc management tlv med Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise e For management TLVs system capabilities system description e For8021 TLVs port protocol vlan id port vlan id e For 802 5 TLVs max f rame size For TIA 1057 TLVs guest voice guest voice signaling location identification power via mdi softphone voice streaming video video conferencing video signaling voice voice signaling In the following example LLDP is enabled globally R1 and R2 are transmitting periodic LLDPDUs that contain management 802 1 and 802 5 TLVs ni lidp amp ad doti tlv icont lidp max frame size R2 R1 Figure 22 Configuring LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 165 Optional TLVs The Dell Networking Operating System OS supports the following optional TLVs Management TLVs IEEE 802 1 and 802 3 organizationally specific TLVs and TIA 1057 organizationally specific TLVs Management TLVs A management TLV is an optional TLVs sub type This kind of TLV contains essential management information about the sender Organizationally Specific TLVs A professional organization or a vendor can define organizationally specific TLVs They have two mandatory fields as sho
122. 12 SSTKUNITO M CP IFMGR 5 ASTATE D Changed interface Admin state to down Te 0 2 00 10 12 SSTKUNITO M CP IFMGR 5 ASTATE D Changed interface Admin state to down Te 0 3 00 10 12 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Te 0 1 00 10 12 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Te 0 2 00 10 12 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Te 0 3 270 Uplink Failure Detection UFD 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed uplink state group state to down Group 3 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Downstream interface set to UFD error disabled Te 0 4 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Downstream interface set to UFD error disabled Te 0 5 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Downstream interface set to UFD error disabled Te 0 6 Dell conf if range te 0 1 3 do clear ufd disable uplink state group 3 Te 0 6 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Te 0 4 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Te 0 5 00 10 13 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down 00 11 50 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Downstream interface cleared from UFD e
123. 127 byte pkts over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts ulticasts 0 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 01 23 Outp 00000 000000o0 Examples of Viewing UFD Output Dell show running config uplink state group uplink state group 1 no enable downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 0 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 Dell Dell conf uplink state group 16 show configuration uplink state group 16 no enable description test downstream disable links all downstream TengigabitEthernet 0 40 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0 41 upstream Port channel 8 Sample Configuration Uplink Failure Detection The following example shows a sample configuration of UFD on a switch router in which you configure as follows e Configure uplink state group 3 e Add downstream links Gigabitethernet 0 1 0 2 0 5 0 9 0 11 and 0 12 e Configure two downstream links to be disabled if an upstream link fails e Add upstream links Gigabitethernet 0 3 and 0 4 e Adda text description for the group Verify the configuration with various show commands Uplink Failure Detection UFD 273 Example of Configuring UFD Dell conf uplink state group 3 Dell conf uplink state group 3
124. 1p priority and mapped to priority groups 36 Data Center Bridging DCB Ingress Traffic Types Bandwidth Allocation by dotip Priorities in Egress Queues 7 6 LAN mmm X 5 LAN i rye 4 3 A O SAN gt SAN ETS Priority Groups LAN dotip 0 1 2 5 6 7 SAN dotlp 3 IPC dotip 4 Figure 2 Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission Table 2 ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Priority group A group of 802 1p priorities used for bandwidth allocation and queue scheduling All 802 1p priority traffic in a group must have the same traffic handling requirements for latency and frame loss Group ID A 4 bit identifier assigned to each priority group The range is from 0 to 7 Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group Group transmission selection algorithm TSA Type of queue scheduling a priority group uses In the Dell Networking OS ETS is implemented as follows ETS supports groups of 802 1p priorities that have PFC enabled or disabled No bandwidth limit or no ETS processing Bandwidth allocated by the ETS algorithm is made available after strict priority groups are serviced If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups so that the sum of the bandwidth use
125. 2 5 and the PFC MIB IEEE802 1bb d2 2 If DCBx negotiation is not successful for example due to a version or TLV mismatch DCBx is disabled and you cannot enable PFC or ETS Enhanced Transmission Selection Enhanced transmission selection ETS supports optimized bandwidth allocation between traffic types in multiprotocol Ethernet FCoE SCSI links ETS allows you to divide traffic according to its 802 1p priority into different priority groups traffic classes and configure bandwidth allocation and queue scheduling for each group to ensure that each traffic type is correctly prioritized and receives its required bandwidth For example you can prioritize low latency storage or server cluster traffic in a traffic class to receive more bandwidth and restrict best effort LAN traffic assigned to a different traffic class Although you can configure strict priority queue scheduling for a priority group ETS introduces flexibility that allows the bandwidth allocated to each priority group to be dynamically managed according to the amount of LAN storage and server traffic in a flow Unused bandwidth is dynamically allocated to prioritized priority groups Traffic is queued according to its 802 1p priority assignment while flexible bandwidth allocation and the configured queue scheduling for a priority group is supported The following figure shows how ETS allows you to allocate bandwidth when different traffic types are classed according to 802
126. 2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 41 STRING 40G QSFP port SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 42 STRING Unit 0 Port 37 40G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 1 2 46 STRING Optional module 0 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 1 2 56 STRING Optional module 1 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 57 STRING 4 port 10GE 10BASE T XL SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 58 STRING Unit 0 Port 49 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 59 STRING Unit 0 Port 50 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 60 STRING Unit 0 Port 51 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 61 STRING Unit 0 Port 52 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 1 2 66 STRING PowerConnect I O Aggregator SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 67 STRING Module 0 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 68 STRING Unit 1 Port 1 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 69 STRING Unit Port 2 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 70 STRING Unit Port 3 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 71 STRING Unit Port 4 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 72 STRING Unit Port 5 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 73 STRING Unit Port 6 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 74 STRING Unit Port 7 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 75 STRING Unit Port 8 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 76 STRING Unit Port 9 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 77 STRING Unit Port 10 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 78 STRING Unit Port 11 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 79 STRING Unit Port 12 10G Level S
127. 218 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Configure the user with view privileges only no password or privacy privileges CONFIGURATION mode snmp server user name group name 3 noauth Configure an SNMP group with view privileges only no password or privacy privileges CONFIGURATION mode snmp server group group name 3 noauth auth read name write name e Configure an SNMPv3 view CONFIGURATION mode snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded K NOTE To give a user read and write view privileges repeat this step for each privilege type e Configure the user with an authorization password password privileges only CONFIGURATION mode snmp server user name group name 3 noauth auth md5 auth password e Configure an SNMP group password privileges only CONFIGURATION mode snmp server group groupname oid tree auth read name write name e Configure an SNMPv3 view CONFIGURATION mode snmp server view view name 3 noauth included excluded K NOTE To give a user read and write privileges repeat this step for each privilege type e Configure an SNMP group with password or privacy privileges CONFIGURATION mode snmp server group group name oid tree priv read name write name e Configure the user with a secure authorization password and privacy password CONFIGURATION mode snmp server user name group name oid tree auth md5 auth password priv des56 priv password e Configure an SNMPv3 view
128. 3 capable multicast routers address 224 0 0 22 Maximum Response Time Bit flag that when set to Query Interval derived Source addresses to be derived from this value 1 suppresses router query from this value filtered response timer updates Number of times thata Number of source addeesses Code 0x1 1 Membership Query router or receiver transmits to be filtered query or report to insure that it is received Figure 11 IGMP version 3 Membership Query Packet Format 0x12 IGMP version Membership Report Ox 16 IGMP version 2 Membership Report None defined in RFC 3376 Range 1 6 Number of source addresses Source addresses Code l Garem state isinckude tobe Shered tobe Shered Current state ic Exchude 3 State change to leude amp State change so fxctude 5 Allow new somrces and mo state change 6 Bloch old sources and no state change Figure 12 IGMP version 3 Membership Report Packet Format Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The below illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224 1 1 1 The host s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224 1 1 1 source 10 11 1 1 Include messages prevent traffic from all other sources in the group from reaching the subnet so before recording this request the querier send
129. 3 15 Dis 6 Status 7 Status 16 Status Tengig 0 41 Dwn Tengig 0 46 Up Te 13 0 Up Disabled Up Disabled Up Dell show uplink state group detail Interface down Ten Te 13 Enabled Enabled Dis 9 4 U U Interface disabled Enabled Up Enabled Up Tengig 0 47 Up Te 13 1 Up Enabled Down Tengig 0 0 Dwn Te 13 2 Dis Te 13 3 Up Te 13 5 Up Te ig 0 3 Dwn Tengig 0 5 Dwn Dis Te 13 11 Dis Te 13 12 Dis p p Disabled Up Tengig 0 40 Dwn Po 8 Dwn Example of Viewing Interface Status with UFD Information S50 Dell show interfaces gigabitethernet 7 45 TenGigabit Hardware is Forcel0 272 Ethernet 7 45 is up Eth line protocol is down address is 00 01 e8 32 7a 47 error disabled UFD Uplink Failure Detection UFD Current address is 00 01 e8 32 7a 47 Interface index is 280544512 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Mode auto Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 25 46 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics packets 0 bytes 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 127 byte pkts over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts ulticasts 0 Broadcasts runts 0 giants 0 throttles CRC 0 overrun O discarded t Statistics packets 0 bytes 0 underruns 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over
130. 32 10 200 LOL 3260 0 154 iSCSI Optimization 10 Isolated Networks for Aggregators An Isolated Network is an environment in which servers can only communicate with the uplink interfaces and not with each other even though they are part of same VLAN If the servers in the same chassis need to communicate with each other it requires a non isolated network connectivity between them or it needs to be routed in the TOR Isolated Networks can be enabled on per VLAN basis If a VLAN is set to be isolated all the packets of originating from the server ports for that VLAN Isolated Network will be redirected to uplink LAG including the packets destined for the server ports on the same blade ToR applies required ACLs and other necessary actions before sending the packet to destination If the packet is destined to server on the same IOA blade it is routed back on the uplink lag where it was received Traffic that hits at the uplink ports are regularly switched based on the L2 MAC lookup Unknown Unicast and Multicast packets from Uplink Port towards server port on an isolated network enabled VLAN is dropped The isolated network feature is supported only in the standalone mode Isolated network is currently not supported in the following modes e VLT mode e Stacking mode e PMUX mode K NOTE Isolated Networks is not enabled for FCOE VLANs and on default VLAN It can be managed via CLI or AFM For more information refer to AFM user manual
131. 5 96 hmac shal hmac shal 96 hmac sha2 256 hmac sha2 256 96 SSH server kex algorithms diffie hellman group exchange shal diffie hellman groupl shal diffie hellman groupl4 shal Password Authentication enabled Hostbased Authentication disabled RSA Authentication disabled Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP Using RSA Authentication of SSH The following procedure authenticates an SSH client based on an RSA key using RSA authentication This method uses SSH version 2 1 Onthe SSH client Unix machine generate an RSA key as shown in the following example Copy the public key id rsa pub to the Dell Networking system 3 Disable password authentication if enabled CONFIGURATION mode no ip ssh password authentication enable 4 Enable RSA authentication in SSH CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa authentication enable Security 211 5 Install User s public key for RSA authentication in SSH CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa authentication my authorized keys flash public_key Example of Generating RSA Keys admin Unix client ssh keygen t rsa Generating public private rsa key pair Enter file in which to save the key home admin ssh id_rsa home admin ssh id rsa already exists Overwrite y n y Enter passphrase empty for no passphrase Enter same passphrase again Your identification has been saved in home admin ssh id rsa Your public key has been saved in home admin ssh id rsa pub Configuring Host Based
132. 508 Creating Zone and Adding Members eis n RR adi 308 Creating Zone Alias and Adding Members eene 309 Creating Zonesets pau a ottiene tee bee adu ode ee tents 309 Activating a Zorieset oni nb leet bed b RE tede ihe Ree de Per ee Ret 309 Displaying the Fabric Parameters te ce eins sth ada de dl tada 310 26 NPIV Proxy GateWdgy ierit ipe tati 313 Supported Modes ctae treni ga eed A te PAR YET EC sexe uS iar an 313 NPIV Proxy Gateway Configuration nnne nre nnne 3515 NPIV Proxy Gateway Operations and Capabilities 313 NPIV Proxy Gateway Operation ne items et ee ere tee tr Pe et Be cm ete Pan d ne t 313 NPIV Proxy Gateway Protocol ServiCeS ooonocncnincccccnncnnonnconnnnn cono conc conca 314 NPIV Proxy Gateway Functional acia aa DE be tee DERE eben pe 314 NPIV Proxy Gateway Terms and Definitions eee 315 Configuring an NPIV Proxy Gateways a a a E N 317 Enabling Fibre Channel Capability on the Switch 318 Creating a DCB Maps oi ads 318 12 Applying a DCB Map on Server facing Ethernet Ports sssssssssss eee 319 Creating an ECoE VLAN e ra e s 320 Creating an FCOE Map ertt e EH B p un emere debes 320 Applying an FCoE Map on Server facing Ethernet Ports 321 Applying an FCoE Map on Fabric facing FC Ports 322 Sample GOMPighiratlons du asia ROME LL te ates EAE ETE Soar ey 323 Displaying NPIV Proxy Gateway Information 324 show interfaces status Command Example cccceecceececeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeee
133. 52 56 1 Standby online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17 52 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present Stack Unit in Card Problem State Due to Configuration Mismatch e Problem A stack unit enters a Card Problem state because there is a configuration mismatch between the logical provisioning stored for the stack unit number on the master switch and the newly added unit with the same number e Resolution From the master switch reload the stack by entering thereload command in EXEC Privilege mode When the stack comes up the card problem will be resolved Upgrading a Switch Stack To upgrade all switches in a stack with the same Dell Networking OS version follow these steps 1 Copy the new Dell Networking OS image to a network server 2 Download the Dell Networking OS image by accessing an interactive CLI that requests the server IP address and image filename and prompts you to upgrade all member stack units EXEC Privilege mode upgrade system flash ftp scp tftp usbflash partition Specify the system partition on the master switch into which you want to copy the Dell Networking OS image The system then prompts you to upgrade all member units with the new Dell Networking OS version The valid values are a and b 3 Reboot all stack units to load the Dell Networking OS image from the same partition on all switches in the stack CONFIGURATION mode boot sy
134. 55 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts Multicasts 0 Broadcasts runts 0 giants 0 throttles CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Statistics packets 0 bytes 0 underruns 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 127 byte pkts over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Outpu oo0oooofoooooo 146 Link Aggregation Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 05 22 28 Optimizing Traffic Disruption Over LAG Interfaces On IOA Switches in VLT Mode When you use the write memory command while an Aggregator operates in VLT mode the VLT LAG configurations are saved in nonvolatile storage NVS By restoring the settings saved in NVS the VLT ports come up quicker on the primary VLT node and traffic disruption is reduced The delay in restoring the VLT LAG parameters is reduced 90 seconds by default on the secondary VLT peer node before it becomes operational This makes sure that the configuration settings of the primary VLT node are synchronized with the secondary VLT peer node before the secondary VLT mode is up The traffic outage is less than 200 millisconds during the restart or switchover of the VLT peer nodes from primary to secondary Preserving
135. 60 abitEthernet 0 0 Groups is 4 c Classes is 8 TSA ETS Bandwidth 100 ty 3 4 5 6 7 Data Center Bridging DCB 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 13 ETS T 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Remote Parameters Remote is disabled Local Parameters Local is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 O71 27344757 677 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 ETS 5 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 13 ETS T 13 ETS 2 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example of the show interface ets detail Command Dell show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 4 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 4 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS Data Center Bridging DCB 2 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Remote Parameters Remote is disabled Local Parameters Local is enabled PG grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 05 1 2 35455 0671 100 ETS 1 ETS 2 0 ETS 5 ETS 4 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down
136. A authentication show crypto display the public part of the SSH host keys show ip ssh client pub keys display the client public keys used in host based authentication 210 Security e show ip ssh rsa authentication display the authorized keys for the RSA authentication Dell copy scp flash Address or name of remote host 10 10 10 1 Port number of the server 22 99 Source file name test cfg User name to login remote host admin Password to login remote host Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell SSH is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method Enabling SSH Authentication by Password Authenticate an SSH client by prompting for a password when attempting to connect to the Dell Networking system This setup is the simplest method of authentication and uses SSH version 1 To enable SSH password authentication use the following command e Enable SSH password authentication CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh password authentication enable Example of Enabling SSH Password Authentication To view your SSH configuration use the show ip ssh command from EXEC Privilege mode Dell conf tip ssh server enable Dell conf tip ssh password authentication enable Dell show ip ssh SSH server enabled SSH server version vl and v2 SSH server vrf default SSH server ciphers 3des cbc aes128 cbc aes192 cbc aes256 cbc aes128 ctr aes192 ctr aes256 ctr SSH server macs hmac md5 hmac md
137. AN packets and the Ethernet or LAN packets must be split within the chassis or by using a ToR switch to perform this splitting If you want to segregate the LAN and SAN traffic within the chassis you can employ switches such as the Dell M8428 k Converged 10GbE Switch or FC only switches such as the Dell M5424 switch module You can also use the 5000 Switch as a TOR switch to separate the LAN and SAN traffic at the ToR By using the FC Flex IO module you can optimally and effectively split the LAN and SAN traffic at the edge of the blade chassis itself You can deploy the FC Flex IO module can be deployed in the enterprise and data center switching networks to leverage and derive the advantages of a converged Ethernet network The FC Flex IO module is not an FCF switch but it offers FCoE capabilities from the server to the IOA and native FC capability in the uplink direction to the SAN switches Although the FC Flex IO module does not support all of the FCF characteristics such as full blown name services or zone parameters it presents the most flexible solution in interoperating with third party switches that enable the splitting of LAN and SAN traffic With the IOA being well established systems in the switch domain you can install the FC Flex IO module to enhance and increase the converged Ethernet network performance and behavior With the FC Flex IO module the IOA provide thirty two 1GbE or 10 GbE server facing ports and the option to add two F
138. AN used to carry FCoE traffic and SAN fabric where the storage arrays are installed Use a separate FCoE VLAN for each fabric to which FCoE traffic is forwarded Any non FCoE traffic sent on a dedicated FCoE VLAN is dropped 306 FC FLEXIO FPORT The FC MAP value used to generate the fabric provided MAC address FPMA The server uses the FPMA to transmit FCoE traffic to the fabric You can associate an FC MAP with only one FCoE VLAN and vice versa FCF priority a CNA server uses the priority to select an upstream FCoE forwarder FCF FIP keepalive FKA advertisement timeout The values for the FCoE VLAN fabric ID and FC MAP must be unique Apply an FCoE map on downstream server facing Ethernet ports and upstream fabric facing Fibre Channel ports 1 Create an FCoE map which contains parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric CONFIGURATION mode fcoe map map name Configure the association between the dedicated VLAN and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed FCoE MAP mode fabric id fabric num vlan vlan id The fabric and VLAN ID numbers must be the same The fabric and VLAN ID range is from 2 to 4094 For example fabric id 10 vlan 10 Add a text description of the settings in the FCoE map FCoE MAP mode description text The maximum is 32 characters Specify the FC MAP value used to generate a fabric provided MAC address which is required to send FCoE traffic fr
139. Aaa 32 Multiple Users in Configuration Mode cnr te pee aei eite ee keen ie tenen 33 4 Data Center Bridging DCB niter e rnit tinte nk e annu annus 34 Supported ModE S lisiti enaa e esaet cea feda ee dre ne P e e a eee P ib ut 34 Ethernet Enhancements in Data Center Bridging 34 Priority Based Flow Controlsi tede eie prete diee Ca non naman ee qu enin 55 Enliariced TransmissionSelectiopis n ci PURI RI D RU RERO UEM ER DE RARE ENS 36 Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol DCBX sse 58 Data Center Bridging in a Traffic FOW umis aoe ene a a ee ia ae aa r anaa Enabling Data Center Bridging 1 03 05 ca rre aid inici Configuring DCB Maps and its Attributes Data Center Bridging Default Configuration Data Center Bridging Auto DCB Enable Mode ccccecceeceeseeeseeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeneesneesneesneeenteeeeeteneeas 43 Configuring Priority Based Flow ControL essent nnne rennen 45 How Priority Based Flow Control is Implemented 48 Configuring Enhanced Transmission Selection ssssssssseee eene 48 How Enhanced Transmission Selection is Implemented ssssssse 49 EIS Operation with DG B a UNES d e EE 50 Hierarchical Scheduling in ETS Output Policies emen 50 DCBX Operatie etate iate eee Pa eh bed t o teh peo emt ee esee ebbe epe E DCBX Operati Mienie area te eet eb e Eee bebat ette Manatee a Portu BE data Beer e shea DGBX Port ROl6S iii bte wa be t o ein
140. After you power it on an Aggregator boots up with default settings and auto configures with software features enabled This chapter describes the default settings and software features that are automatically configured at startup To reconfigure the Aggregator for customized network operation use the tasks described in the other chapters Operational Modes IOA supports four operational modes Select the operational mode that meets your deployment needs To enable a new operational mode reload the switch Standalone mode stack unit unit iom mode standalone CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode standalone This mode is the default mode for IOA It is a fully automated zero touch mode that allows you to configure VLAN memberships Supported in CMC VLT mode stack unit unit iom mode vlt CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode vlt Select this mode to multihome server interfaces to different IOA modules This mode is a low touch mode where all configuration except VLAN membership is automated To enable VLAN configure the VLANs at the server port level In this mode port 9 link which is associated with LAG 127 is dedicated to VLT interconnect Programmable MUX mode stack unit unit iom mode programmable mux CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode programmable mux Before You Start 17 Select this mode to configure PMUX mode CLI commands For more information on the PMUX mode see
141. B disabled and flow control enabled use the dcb enable aut detect on next reload command 1 Globally enable auto detection of DCBx and auto enabling of DCB on all interfaces after switch reload CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable auto detect on next reload Enabling DCB To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces are DCB enabled and flow control disabled use the dcb enable command Disabling DCB To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces are DCB disabled and flow control enabled use the no dcb enable command dcb enable auto detect on next reload Command Example Dell dcb enable auto detect on next reload Configuring Priority Based Flow Control PFC provides a flow control mechanism based on the 802 1p priorities in converged Ethernet traffic received on an interface and is enabled by default when you enable DCB As an enhancement to the existing Ethernet pause mechanism PFC stops traffic transmission for specified priorities Class of Service CoS values without impacting other priority classes Different traffic types are assigned to different priority classes When traffic congestion occurs PFC sends a pause frame to a peer device with the CoS priority values of the traffic that is to be stopped Data Center Bridging Exchange protocol DCBx provides the link level exchange of PFC parameters between peer devices PFC allows network administrators to create zero loss links for Storage Area Network SAN traffic that req
142. C Flex IO modules that offer up to 8 8Gb Fibre Channel ports for uplink traffic in addition to the fixed two 40GbE ports on the IOA K NOTE When an FC Flex IO module is inserted into an I O Aggregator and the FC ports are in the operationally up state you can configure the port speed of these FC ports as 2 Gbps 4 Gbps or 8 Gbps In the chassis management controller CMC GUI the FC port link speed is always shown as 10 Gbps regardless of whether the port speed configured is 2 Gbps 4 Gbps or 8 Gbps You can configure one of the following upstream fabric facing FC ports e Two 40GbE and eight 8GB FC ports e Four 40GbE and four 8GB FC ports e Two 40GbE four 10GbE and four 8GB FC ports e Two 40GbE four 10GBASE T and four 8GB FC ports FC Flex IO Modules 293 FC Flex IO Module Capabilities and Operations The FC Flex IO module has the following characteristics e You can install one or two FC Flex IO modules on the I O Aggregator Each module supports four FC ports e Each port can operate in 2Gbps 4Gbps or 8Gbps of Fibre Channel speed e All ports on an FC Flex IO module can function in the NPIV mode that enables connectivity to FC switches or directors and also to multiple SAN topologies e t automatically senses the current speed when the port link is up Valid link speeds are 2 Gbps 4 Gbps and 8 Gbps e By default the FC ports are configured to operate in N port mode to connect to an F port on an FC switch i
143. C TLV Statistics Error PFC pkts 66 Description DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs Current operational state of DCBx protocol ACK or IN SYNC DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs received from peer device Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs received from peer device Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs received from peer device Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs received from peer device Number of DCBx frames sent from local port Number of DCBx frames received from remote peer port Number of DCBx frames with errors received Number of unrecognizable DCBx frames received Number of PFC TLVs received Number of PFC TLVs transmitted Number of PFC error packets received Data Center Bridging DCB Field PFC TLV Statistics PFC Pause Tx pkts PFC TLV Statistics PFC Pause Rx pkts PG TLV Statistics Input PG TLV Pkts PG TLV Statistics Output PG TLV Pkts PG TLV Statistics Error PG TLV Pkts Application Priority TLV Statistics Input Appin Priority TLV pkts Application Priority TLV Statistics Output Appln Priority TLV pkts Application Priority TLV Statistics Error Appln Priority TLV Pkts Description Number of PFC pause frames transmitted Number of PFC pause frames receive
144. CB Configuration To display DCB configurations use the following show commands Table 3 Displaying DCB Configurations Command show gos dotlp queue mapping show qos dcb map map name show dcb stack unit unit number show interface port type slot port pfc statistics show interface port type slot port pfc summary detail show interface port type slot port ets summary detail Output Displays the current 802 1p priority queue mapping Displays the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map Displays the data center bridging status number of PFC enabled ports and number of PFC enabled queues On the master switch in a stack you can specify a stack unit number The range is from O to 5 Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted by dotlp priority class on an interface Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface including priorities and link delay To clear PFC TLV counters use the clear pfc counters stack unit unit number tengigabitethernet slot port command Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation To clear ETS TLV counters enter the clear ets counters stack unit unit number command Example of the show qos dotip queue mapping Command Dell show qos dotlp queue mapping Dotlp Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 7 Queue 040 0 12 3 33 Dell
145. Cabling Redundancy Connect the units in a stack with two or more stacking cables to avoid a stacking port or cable failure Removing one of the stacked cables between two stacked units does not trigger a reset Cabling Procedure The following cabling procedure uses the stacking topology shown earlier in this chapter To connect the cabling 1 Connect a 40GbE base port on the first Aggregator to a 40GbE base port on another Aggregator in the same chassis 2 Connect a 40GbE base port on the second Aggregator to a 40GbE port on the first Aggregator The resulting ring topology allows the entire stack to function as a single switch with resilient fail over capabilities If you do not connect the last switch to the first switch Step 4 the stack operates in a daisy chain topology with less resiliency Any failure in a non edge stack unit causes a split stack Stacking 243 Accessing the CLI To configure a stack you must access the stack master in one of the following ways For remote out of band management OOB enter the OOB management interface IP address into a Telnet or secure shell SSH client and log in to the switch using the user ID and password to access the CLI For local management use the attached console connection to the master switch to log in to the CLI Console access to the stack CLI is available on the master only For remote in band management from a network management station enter the virtual local area net
146. Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VLANs and physical interfaces or selected ones Without an interface specified the command clears all interface counters OPTIONAL Enter the following interface keywords and slot port or number information e Fora Port Channel interface enter the keyword port channel followed by a number from 1 to 128 Fora 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot port numbers e For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094 EXEC Privilege mode clear counters interface When you enter this command you must confirm that you want Dell Networking OS to clear the interface counters for the interface refer to the below clearing interface example Clearing an Interface Dell clear counters tengig 0 0 Clear counters on TenGigabitEthernet 0 0 confirm Dell Enabling the Management Address TLV on All Interfaces of an Aggregator The management address TLV which is an optional TLV of type 8 denotes the network address of the management interface and is supported by the Dell Networking OS It is advertised on all the interfaces on an I O Aggregator in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP data units You can use the show running configuration command to verify that this TLV is advertised on all the configured interfaces and the show lldp neighbors detail command to view the value of this TLV Enhan
147. CoE gateway co Fibre Channel Storage Array Fibre Channel Aggregators Installed in M1000e Chassis Servers Installed in M1000e Chassis Figure 9 FIP Snooping on an Aggregator In tbe above figure DCBX and PFC are enabled on the Aggregator FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch On the FIP snooping bridge DCBX is configured as follows e Aserver facing port is configured for DCBX in an auto downstream role e An FCF facing port is configured for DCBX in an auto upstream or configuration source role 94 FIP Snooping The DCBX configuration on the FCF facing port is detected by the server facing port and the DCB PFC configuration on both ports is synchronized For more information about how to configure DCBX and PFC on a port refer to FIP Snooping After FIP packets are exchanged between the ENode and the switch a FIP snooping session is established ACLS are dynamically generated for FIP snooping on the FIP snooping bridge switch Debugging FIP Snooping To enable debug messages for FIP snooping events enter the debug fip snooping command 1 Enable FIP snooping debugging on for all or a specified event type where all enables all debugging options acl enables debugging only for ACL specific events error enables debugging only for error conditions ifmenables debugging only for IFM events info enables debugging only for information events e ipc enables debugging only for IPC events e r
148. D Dell conf if ma 0 0 4 no ip address Dell conf if ma 0 0 41w2d23h DHCLIENT DBG a 0 0 1w2d23h a 0 0 SDHC SDHCLI te START 11 release dhcp int Ma 0 0 TKUNITO M CP 9 6 DHCLIEN SDHCLI SDHCLI ENT 5 DHC ENT 5 DHC ENT 5 DHC 0G 0G 10G OG Mask OG OG OG as HC ENT I IOG SSTKUNITO M CP iT 9 X 6 ENT IOG 0G T 5 DHCLIENT 255 255 0 0 DHC ECTING DHC DHC 0G 0G DHC DHC DBG _ DBG DBG _ DBG _ Qi DBG DBG PKI DBG PKI EQU DBG TENT DBG El OG ENT_DBG ENT_DBG_ ENT DBG EVT EVT PKT PKT T EVT EVT MTS ni EVT DHCLIENT DBG PKT EVT DHCP R Interface Interface DHCP Received 0 Server Id Interface EST EQU Received EST sent in Interface DHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG Interface Interface DHCP Interface Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to state STOPPED 1w2d23h SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface a 0 0 D
149. D port subtype Local lidpLocPortidSubtyp e Remote lidpRemPortldSubty pe port ID Local UdpLocPortld Remote UdpRemPortld Port Description port description Local UdpLocPortDesc Remote UldpRemPortDesc System Name system name Local lidpLocSysName Remote ldpRemSysName System Description system description Local ldpLocSysDesc Remote ldpRemSysDesc System Capabilities system capabilities Local lidpLocSysCapSupp orted Remote lidpRemSysCapSupp orted Management enabled capabilities Local lldpLocSysCapEnabl Address ed Remote ldpRemSysCapEnab led management Local lldpLocManAdarLen address length Remote UdpRemManAddrLen management Local lidpLocManAdarSubt address subtype ype Remote lidpRemManAddrSu btype management Local lldoLocManAddr address Remote lldoRemManAddr Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 177 TLV Type Table 19 LLDP 802 1 Organizationally specific TLV MIB Objects TLV Type 127 127 127 178 TLV Name TLV Name Port VLAN ID Port and Protocol VLAN ID VLAN Name TLV Variable interface numbering subtype interface number OID TLV Variable PVID port and protocol VLAN supported port and protocol VLAN enabled PPVID VID VLAN name length VLAN name System Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote System Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote LLDP MIB Object ldpLocManAdarlfSu btype
150. DE copy scp flash 4 On Switch 2 in response to prompts enter the path to the desired file and enter the port number specified in Step 1 EXEC Privilege Mode 5 On the chassis invoke SCP CONFIGURATION mode copy scp flash Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch Other SSH related command include crypto key generate generate keys for the SSH server debug ip ssh enables collecting SSH debug information e ip scp topdir identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer e ip ssh authentication retries configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user ip ssh connection rate limit configure the maximum number of incoming SSH connections per minute ip ssh hostbased authentication enable enable host based authentication for the SSHv2 server e ip ssh key size configure the size of the server generated RSA SSHv1 key ip ssh password authentication enable enable password authentication for the SSH server e ip ssh pub key file specify the file the host based authentication uses ip ssh rhostsfile specify the rhost file the host based authorization uses ip ssh rsa authentication enable enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server e ip ssh rsa authentication add keys for the RS
151. Dell conf do show fc switch Switch Mode FPORT Switch WWN 10 00 aa 00 00 00 00 ac Dell conf 312 FC FLEXIO FPORT 26 NPIV Proxy Gateway The N port identifier virtualization NPIV Proxy Gateway NPG feature provides FCoE FC bridging capability on the Aggregator allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the Aggregator Supported Modes PMUX NPIV Proxy Gateway Configuration The Aggregator switches function as a top of rack edge switch that supports Converged Enhanced Ethernet CEE traffic Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE for storage Interprocess Communication IPC for servers and Ethernet local area network LAN IP cloud for data as well as FC links to one or more storage area network SAN fabrics The NPG provides FCoE FC bridging capability on the Aggregator This chapter describes how to configure and use an NPIV proxy gateway on the Aggregator in a SAN NPIV Proxy Gateway Operations and Capabilities Benefits of an NPIV Proxy Gateway The Aggregator functions as a top of rack edge switch that supports CEE traffic FCoE for storage IPC for servers and Ethernet LAN IP cloud for data as well as FC links to one or more SAN fabrics Using an NPG helps resolve the following problems in a storage area network e Fibre Channel storage networks typically consist of servers connected to edge switches which are connected to SAN core switches As the SAN grows it is necessa
152. Dell conf fc zone zl1l member all Dell conf fc zone z1 exit Creating Zonesets A zoneset is a grouping or configuration of zones To create a zoneset and zones into the zoneset use the following steps 1 Create a zoneset CONFIGURATION mode fc zoneset zoneset_name 2 Add zones into a zoneset ZONESET CONFIGURATION mode member zonename Example of Creating Zonesets Dell conf fc zoneset zsl Dell conf fc zoneset zs1 member z1 Dell conf fc zoneset zs1 Dell conf fc zoneset zs1 exit Dell conf fc zoneset zs1 Activating a Zoneset Activating a zoneset makes the zones within it effective On a switch only one zoneset can be active Any changes in an activated zoneset do not take effect until it is re activated FC FLEXIO FPORT 309 By default the fcoe map fabric map namedoes not have any active zonesets 1 Enter enter the c fabric command in fcoe map to active or de activate the zoneset Dell conf fcoe map fc fabric Example Dell conf fcoe map map Dell conf fcoe map fc fabric Dell conf fmap map fcfabric active zoneset set Dell conf fmap map fcfabric no active zoneset active zoneset Dell conf fmap map fcfabric no active zoneset lt cr gt Dell conf fmap map fcfabric no active zoneset 2 View the active zoneset show fc zoneset active Displaying the Fabric Parameters To display information on switch wide and interface specific fabric parameters use th
153. Dell config dcbx name priority group 2 bandwidth 20 pfc on Dell config dcbx name f priority group 4 strict priority pfc off Dell conf dcbx name priority pgid 00012444 2 Apply the DCB map on a downstream server facing Ethernet port Dell config if te 0 0 dcb map SAN DCB MAP 3 Create the dedicated VLAN to be used for FCoE traffic Dell conf interface vlan 1002 4 Configure an FCoE map to be applied on downstream server facing Ethernet and upstream core facing FC ports Dell config fcoe map SAN FABRIC A Dell config fcoe name fabric id 1002 vlan 1002 Dell config fcoe name description SAN FABRIC A Dell config fcoe name fc map O0efc00 Dell config fcoe name keepaliv Dell config fcoe name fcf priority 128 Dell config fcoe name fka adv period 8 5 Enable an upstream FC port Dell config if fc 0 no shutdown 6 Enable a downstream Ethernet port NPIV Proxy Gateway 323 Dell conf if te 0 no shutdown Displaying NPIV Proxy Gateway Information To display information on the NPG operation use the show commands in the following table Table 28 Displaying NPIV Proxy Gateway Information Command show interfaces status show fcoe map brief map name show qos dcb map map name show npiv devices brief show fc switch Description Displays the operational status of Ethernet and Fibre Channel interfaces on the Aggregator with the NPG K
154. Dell PowerEdge Configuration Guide for the M I O Aggregator 9 9 0 0 Notes cautions and warnings Es NOTE A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer A CAUTION A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem A WARNING A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death Copyright O 2015 Dell Inc All rights reserved This product is protected by U S and international copyright and intellectual property laws Dell and the Dell logo are trademarks of Dell Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions All other marks and names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies 2015 09 Rev AOO Contents TAboutthis Guide alot ene tuas aka dece cess aio cuuc ud 15 AUGICN CO iid c M 15 CONVENTOS iii tedio pe P Te o epa e Ee ec dere n ae e iecore 15 Information Symbols bed Ote RU mq edt sts 16 Related Documents su event a RE et E ERES 16 FES pcbesk c Ne 17 Operational Modes mtm te tret re Rr ER e E pe cen sate pag ra redd Te Os 17 Standalorie mode ir rte ete ete et e et et o ee bete t 17 MN 17 Programmable MUXimaode oc t at e itat e eus 17 Stackinigomiode ees eu tx SA SUL AMEN ME M M VEA 18 Default Settings c er EUR Ruta adhe idk ace 18 Other AutosConfig red Settltgsz eere ete E eb te EG B e ta cna iere 18 Data Ce
155. Diagnostics This chapter contains the following sections e Debugging Aggregator Operation e Software Show Commands e Offline Diagnostics Trace Logs e Show Hardware Commands Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Debugging Aggregator Operation This section describes common troubleshooting procedures to use for error conditions that may arise during Aggregator operation All interfaces on the Aggregator are operationally down This section describes how you can troubleshoot the scenario in which all the interfaces are down Symptom All Aggregator interfaces are down Resolution Ensure the port channel 128 is up and that the Aggregator facing port channel on the top of rack switch is correctly configured Steps to Take 1 Verify that uplink port channel 128 is up show interfaces port channel 128 brief command and display the status of member ports show uplink state group 1 detail command Dell show interfaces port channel 128 brief Codes L LACP Port channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports L 128 L2L3 up 17 36 24 Te 0 33 0 35 0 36 0 39 0 51 0 53 0 54 0 56 1H HHdBuzudWu e Ei E4371 3 d 0000000 uaddadaddd O S CO COCU CU CO CO Dell show uplink state group 1 detail Debugging and Diagnostics 331 Up Interface up Dwn Interface down Dis Interface disabled Uplink State Group Status Enabled Up Defer Timer 10 sec Upstream Interfaces Po 128 U
156. FACE mode storm control pfc llfc pps in shutdown NOTE PFC LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC LLFC packets It can be a result of a faulty NIC Switch that sends spurious PFC LLFC packets 258 Storm Control 20 Broadcast Storm Control On the Aggregator the broadcast storm control feature is enabled by default on all ports and disabled on a port when an iSCSI storage device is detected Broadcast storm control is re enabled as soon as the connection with an iSCSI device ends Broadcast traffic on Layer 2 interfaces is limited or suppressed during a broadcast storm You can view the status of a broadcast storm control operation by using the show io aggregator broadcast storm control status command You can disable broadcast storm control by using the no io aggregator broadcast storm control command Dell Networking OS Behavior If broadcast traffic exceeds 1000 Mbps the Aggregator limits it to 1000 Mbps per port pipe Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Disabling Broadcast Storm Control To disable broadcast storm control on an Aggregator use the no io aggregator broadcast storm control command from CONFIGURATION mode To re enable broadcast storm control enter the io aggregator broadcast storm control command Displaying Broadcast Storm Control Status To display the status of a current storm control operation use the show io aggregator broadcast stor
157. Gig 0 13 TenGig 0 33 rx 0 14 TenGig 0 34 rx 0 15 TenGig 0 35 Ux 0 16 TenGig 0 37 rx 0 17 TenGig 0 33 Dx interface interface interface interface interface Dell conf mon sess 300 Port based Port based Port based Port based Port based The following example shows ports 0 25 and 0 26 that belong to port pipe 1 with a maximum of four destination Dell conf mon sess 300 ports SessionID Source 100 110 300 Dell conf mon sess 300 m m m m m P 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 25 0 26 0 17 m m m m m m do show mon session Destination Direction Mode T rx interface Po rx interface Po rx interface Po rx interface Po TX interface Po tx interface Po EX interface Po ype rt based rt based rt based rt based rt based rt based rt based In the example below 0 25 and 0 26 belong to Port pipe 1 This port pipe has the same restriction of only four destination ports new or used Dell conf mon sess 300 do show mon session SessionID Source 0 m 10 m 20 T 30 T 100 T 110 E 300 T De A source port may only be monitored by one destination port enGig Destination Direction Mode Type 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 37 0 38 0 39 0 1 PenGig PenGig PenGig TenGig TenGig TenGig PenGig B 11 conf mon sess 300 tx interface interface interface interface interface interface interface Port based Port based Port base
158. HCP IP RELEASED CMD sent to FTOS in state STOPPED Dell renew dhcp int Ma 0 0 Dell 1lw2d23h SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 DHCP RENEW CMD Received in state STOPPED 1w2d23h SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG EVT Interface Ma 0 0 Transitioned to state SELECTING 1w2d23h SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG PKT DHCP DISCOVER sent in Interface Ma 0 0 1w2d23h SSTKUNITO M CP SDHCLIENT 5 DHCLIENT LOG DHCLIENT DBG PKT Received DHCPOFFER packet in Interface Ma 0 0 with Lease Ip 10 16 134 250 Mask 255 255 0 0 Server Id 10 16 134 249 The following example shows the packet and event level debug messages displayed for the packet transmissions and state transitions on a DHCP client interface when you release and renew a DHCP client DHCP Client Debug Messages Logged during DHCP Client Release Renew Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP ask 255 255 0 0 Server Id 10 16 134 249 Dell
159. IR 1 drwx 4096 Jan 17 2011 15 02 16 00 00 2 drwx 4096 Jan 01 1980 00 00 00 00 00 3 rwx 100583 Feb 11 2011 20 41 36 00 00 failure trace0 RPMO CP flash 2143281152 bytes total 2069291008 bytes free Using the Show Hardware Commands The show hardware command tree consists of commands used with the Aggregator switch These commands display information from a hardware sub component and from hardware based feature tables K NOTE Use the show hardware commands only under the guidance of the Dell Technical Assistance Center e View internal interface status of the stack unit CPU port which connects to the external management interface EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 cpu management statistics e View driver level statistics for the data plane port on the CPU for the specified stack unit EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 cpu data plane statistics This view provides insight into the packet types entering the CPU to see whether CPU bound traffic is internal IPC traffic or network control traffic which the CPU must process View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 buffer total buffer e View the modular packet buffers details per unit and the mode of allocation EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 buffer unit 0 1 total buffer e View the forwarding plane statistics conta
160. K KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK kk ck ck kk kk ck kk kk ck ko ke ko ko ko ko ko kocko Warning Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing E persistent settings stacking fanout etc After restoration the unit s will be powercycled immediately Proceed with caution E Ck ck ck ck ck kk kk kk kk Ck ck kk Ck Ck Sk KK KK kk Sk ck ck Ck ARA AAA Sk kk Sk KK AAA AA kk Ck Sk AAA KK AAA A Proceed with factory settings Confirm yes no yes Restore status Unit Nvram Config 0 Success Power cycling the unit s Debugging and Diagnostics 353 29 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products Es NOTE Unless noted when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking Operating System OS the system also supports predecessor standards One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http tools ietf org website Click Browse and search IETF documents enter an RFC number and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs IEEE Compliance The following is a list of IEEE compliance 802 1AB LLDP 802 1D Bridging 802 1p L2 Prioritization 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Double VLAN Tagging GVRP 802 3ac Frame Extensions for VLAN Tagging 802 3ad Link Aggregation with LACP 802 3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet LOGBASE W 10GBASE X 802 3ak 10 Gigabit Ethernet LOGBASE CX4 802 3i Et
161. LAG and Port Channel Settings in Nonvolatile Storage Use the write memory command on an I O Aggregator which operates in either standalone or PMUX modes to save the LAG port channel configuration parameters This behavior enables the port channels to be brought up because the configured interface attributes are available in the system database during the booting of the device With the reduction in time for the port channels to become active after the Switch is booted the loss in the number of packets that are serviced by these interfaces is minimized Enabling the LACP link fallback member By default the lacp link fallback member independent port channel 128 command is enabled on the Standalone mode This command is not available in the VLT mode To disable the LACP link fallback member use the no lacp link fallback member independent port channel 128 command The following log message appears when LACP link fallback is enabled Feb 26 15 53 32 SSTKUNITO M CP IFMGR 5 NO LACP PDU RECEIVED FROM PEER Connectivity to PEER is restricted because LACP PDU s are not received Verify the LACP configurations on PEER to bring up the Uplink LAG to attain better bandwidth The following log message appears when LACP link fallback is removed Feb 26 15 53 32 SSTKUNITO M CP SMUX 5 SMUX LACP PDU RECEIVED FROM PEER LACP PDU received from PEER and connectivity to PEER will be restored t
162. LI 1X Keywords and parameters within braces must be entered in the CLI X Keywords and parameters within brackets are optional xly Keywords and parameters separated by a bar require you to choose one option x ly Keywords and parameters separated by a double bar allows you to choose any or all of the options About this Guide 15 Information Symbols This book uses the following information symbols K NOTE The Note icon signals important operational information A CAUTION The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data A WARNING The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury Exception This symbol is a note associated with additional text on the page that is marked with an asterisk Related Documents For more information about the Dell PowerEdge M I O Aggregator MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module refer to the following documents e Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide for the M I O Aggregator Dell Networking OS Getting Started Guide for the M I O Aggregator e Release Notes for the M I O Aggregator 16 About this Guide 2 Before You Start To install the Aggregator in a Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure use the instructions in the Dell PowerEdge M O Aggregator Getting Started Guide that is shipped with the product The I O Aggregator also Known as Aggregator installs with zero touch configuration
163. Layer 3 configurations LLDP MED network policies TLV include VLAN ID VLAN tagged or untagged status Layer 2 priority DSCP value An integer represents the application type the Type integer shown in the following table which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined An individual LLDP MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the CLI XXAdvertising TLVs Es NOTE As shown in the following table signaling is a series of control packets that are exchanged between an endpoint device and a network connectivity device to establish and maintain a connection These signal packets might require a different network policy than the media packets for which a connection is made In this case configure the signaling application Table 16 Network Policy Applications Type Application 0 Reserved 1 Voice 2 Voice Signaling 3 Guest Voice Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Description Specify this application type for dedicated IP telephony handsets and other appliances supporting interactive voice services Specify this application type only if voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data Specify this application type for a separate limited voice service for guest users with their own IP telephony handsets and other appliances supporting interactive voice services 169 Type Application Description 4 Guest Voice Signalin
164. NFIGURATION mode feature fip snooping 2 Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode fip snooping enable FIP Snooping 87 Es By default FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs Configure the FC MAP value used by FIP snooping on all VLANs CONFIGURATION VLAN or INTERFACE mode fip snooping fc map fc map value The default is OXOEFCOO The valid values are from OEFCOO to OEFCFF Enter interface configuration mode to configure the port for FIP snooping links CONFIGURATION mode interface port type slot port By default a port is configured for bridge to ENode links Configure the port for bridge to FCF links INTERFACE or CONFIGURATION mode fip snooping port mode fcf K NOTE All these configurations are available only in PMUX mode NOTE To disable the FIP snooping feature or FIP snooping on VLANS use the no version of a command for example no feature fip snooping orno fip snooping enable Displaying FIP Snooping Information Use the show commands from the table below to display information on FIP snooping Table 4 Displaying FIP Snooping Information Command Output show fip snooping sessions interface Displays information on FIP snooped sessions on vlan vlan id all VLANs or a specified VLAN including the ENode interface and MAC address the FCF interface and MAC address VLAN ID FCoE MAC address and FCoE session ID number FC ID worldwide node nam
165. NFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode no multiplier Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 173 Example of the multiplier Command to Configure Time to Live R1 conf lldp show config protocol lldp advertise dotl tlv port protocol vlan id port vlan id advertise dot3 tlv max frame size advertise management tlv system capabilities system description no disable R1 conf lldp multiplier 2 10 Multiplier default 4 R1 conf lldp multiplier 5 R1 conf lldp show config protocol lldp advertise dotl tlv port protocol vlan id port vlan id advertise dot3 tlv max frame size advertise management tlv system capabilities system description multiplier 5 no disable R1 conf lldp no multiplier R1 conf lldp show config l protocol lldp advertise dotl tlv port protocol vlan id port vlan id advertise dot3 tlv max frame size advertise management tlv system capabilities system description no disable R1 conf 11dp Clearing LLDP Counters You can clear LLDP statistics that are maintained on an Aggregator for LLDP counters for frames transmitted to and received from neighboring devices on all or a specified physical interface To clear LLDP counters enter the clear 11dp counters command 1 Clear counters for LLDP frames sent to and received from neighboring devices on all Aggregator interfaces or on a specified interface interface specifies a 10GbE uplink port in the format tenGigabitEthernet slot port EXEC Privileg
166. NMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 80 STRING Unit Port 13 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 81 STRING Unit Port 14 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 82 STRING Unit Port 15 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 83 STRING Unit Port 16 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 84 STRING Unit Port 17 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 85 STRING Unit Port 18 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 86 STRING Unit Port 19 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 87 STRING Unit Port 20 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 88 STRING Unit Port 21 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 89 STRING Unit Port 22 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 90 STRING Unit Port 23 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 91 STRING Unit Port 24 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 92 STRING Unit Port 25 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 93 STRING Unit Port 26 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 94 STRING Unit Port 27 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 95 STRING Unit Port 28 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 96 STRING Unit Port 29 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 97 STRING Unit Port 30 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 98 STRING Unit Port 31 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 99 STRING Unit 1 Port 32 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 100 STRING 40G QSFP port SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 101 STRING Unit 1 Port 33 40G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 105 STRING 40G QSF
167. O Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts stack unit 1 stack port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled Priority list is Local is enabled Priority list is Link Delay 45556 pause quantum O Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts Data Center Bridging DCB 63 Example of the show stack unit all stack ports all ets details Command Dell show stack unit all stack ports all ets details Stack unit 0 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS T 2 i 3 i 4 5 6 z 7 E 8 E z Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS OO 73004 CO O0 ES CD Example of the show interface DCBx detail Command F Application priority for FCOE enabled f Application Priority for FCOE disabled Dell show interface tengigabitethernet 0 4 dcbx detail Dell show interface te 0 4 dcbx detail E ETS Configuration TLV enabled e ETS Configuration TLV disabled R ETS Recommendation TLV enabled r ETS Recommendation TLV disabled P PFC Configuration TLV enabled p PFC Configuration TLV disabled m m I Application priority for iSCSI enabled i Application Priority for iSCSI disabled I
168. OTE In VRRP object tracking the sum of the priority costs for all tracked objects and interfaces cannot equal or exceed the priority of the VRRP group Object Tracking Configuration You can configure three types of object tracking for a client e Track Layer 2 Interfaces e Track Layer 3 Interfaces e Track an IPv4 IPv6 Route Object Tracking 183 For a complete listing of all commands related to object tracking refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide Tracking a Layer 2 Interface You can create an object that tracks the line protocol state of a Layer 2 interface and monitors its operational status UP or DOWN You can track the status of any of the following Layer 2 interfaces e 1 Gigabit Ethernet Enter gigabitethernet slot portinthe track interface interface command see Step 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Enter tengigabitethernet slot port Port channel Enter port channel number where valid port channel numbers are from 1 to 128 e VLAN Enter vlan vlan id where valid VLAN IDs are from 1 to 4094 A line protocol object only tracks the link level UP DOWN status of a specified interface When the link level status goes down the tracked object status is DOWN if the link level status is up the tracked object status is UP To remove object tracking on a Layer 2 interface use the no track object id command To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface us
169. P port SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 106 STRING Unit 1 Port 37 40G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 L 2 110 STRING Optional module 0 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 111 STRING 4 port 10GE SFP XL SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 112 STRING Unit 1 Port 41 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 113 STRING Unit Port 42 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 114 STRING Unit 1 Port 43 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 115 STRING Unit 1 Port 44 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 120 STRING Optional module 1 230 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP Traps for Link Status To enable SNMP traps for link status changes use the snmp server enable traps snmp linkdown linkup command Standard VLAN MIB When the Aggregator is in Standalone mode where all the 4000 VLANs are part of all server side interfaces as well as the single uplink LAG it takes a long time 30 seconds or more for external management entities to discover the entire VLAN membership table of all the ports Support for current status OID in the standard VLAN MIB is expected to simplify and speed up this process This OID provides 4000 VLAN entries with port membership bit map for each VLAN and reduces the scan for 4000 X Number of ports to 4000 Enhancements 1 The dotiqVlanCurrentEgressPorts MIB attribute has been enhanced to support logical LAG interfaces Current status OID in standard VLAN MIB is accessible over SNMP 3 The bitmap
170. PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator Stacking mode stack unit unit iom mode stack CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode stack Select this mode to configure Stacking mode CLI commands For more information on the Stacking mode see Stacking Default Settings The I O Aggregator provides zero touch configuration with the following default configuration settings default user name root e password calvin e VLAN vlan1 and IP address for in band management DHCP e P address for out of band OOB management DHCP e read only SNMP community name public e broadcast storm control enabled in Standalone mode and disabled in VLT mode e IGMP multicast flooding enabled e VLAN configuration in Standalone mode all ports belong to all VLANs You can change any of these default settings using the CLI Refer to the appropriate chapter for details K NOTE You can also change many of the default settings using the chassis management controller CMC interface For information about how to access the CMC to configure the aggregator refer to the Dell Chassis Management Controller CMC User s Guide on the Dell Support website at http support dell com Other Auto Configured Settings After the Aggregator powers on it auto configures and is operational with software features enabled including e Ports Ports are administratively up and auto configured to operate as hybrid ports to transmit tagged and untagg
171. Port channel 128 is up line protocol is up Created by LACP protocol Hardware address is 8 b1 56 6e fc 59 Current address is 8 b1 56 6e fc 59 Interface index is 1258356736 nimum number of links to bring Port channel up is 1 ternet address is not set de of IPv4 Address Assignment NONE n i In o DHCP Client ID f8b1566efc59 T i e R U 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed 20000 Mbit mbers in this channel Te 0 11 U Te 0 12 U ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 194 packets 26975 bytes 40 64 byte pkts 47 over 64 byte pkts 83 over 127 byte pkts 24 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 160 Multicasts 34 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles O CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 1619 packets 212604 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 201 over 64 byte pkts 1376 over 127 byte pkts 42 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 1531 Multicasts 88 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 1 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 13 45 In the following port channel 128 is down As a result the downstream ports TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 8 are disabled by UFD Dell show interfaces tengigabitether
172. Priority 32768 Address 0001 e801 fc35 SPANMGR 5 STP TOPOLOGY CHANGE Bridge port TenGigabitEthernet 1 8 transitioned from Forwarding to Blocking state SPANMGR 5 MSTP NEW ROOT BRIDGE Elected root bridge for instance 0 SPANMGR 5 MSTP NEW ROOT PORT MSTP root changed to port Te 1 8 for instance 0 My Bridge ID 40960 0001 e801 f c35 Old Root 40960 0001 e801 fc35 New Root 32768 00d0 038a 2c01 SSPANMGR 5 MSTP TOPOLOGY CHANGE Mstp El ecfm oo tomerl at Level 7 VLAN 1000 Topology change BridgeAddr 0001 e801 fc35 Instance Id 0 port Te 1 8 transitioned from forwarding to discarding state ECFM 5 ECFM XCON ALARM Cross connect fault detected by MEP 1 in Domain ECFM 5 ECFM ERROR ALARM Error CCM Defect detected by MEP 1 in Domain ECFM 5 ECF AC STATUS ALARM MAC Status Defect detected by MEP 1 in Domain cus kerone at Level 7 VLAN 1000 ose at Level 4 VLAN 3000 Caer at Level 7 VLAN 1000 Level 7 VLAN 1000 entity Enable entity change traps Trap SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Time Pv2 MIB snmpTrapOID 0 OID SN Pv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 6 1 ap SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Time Pv2 MIB sn rapO SN Pv2 SMI enterpris p SNMPv2 MIB sysU n n I M jou nn ime D SN 3 d m w Pv2 MIB s TrapO Pv2 SMI enterpris p SNMPv2 MIB sysU
173. RATION mode line aux 0 console 0 vty number end number Enable AAA login authentication for the specified RADIUS method list LINE mode login authentication method list name default This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists e To use the method list CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host you can set different communication parameters such as the UDP port the key password the number of retries and the timeout To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters use the following command Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host CONFIGURATION mode radius server host hostname ip address auth port port number retransmit retries timeout seconds key encryption type key Configure the optional communication parameters for the specific host auth port port number the range is from O to 65535 Enter a UDP port number The default is 1812 retransmit retries the range is from O to 100 Default is 3 timeout seconds the range is from O to 1000 Default is 5 seconds key encryption type key enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text and a string for the key The key can be up to 42 characters long This key must match the key configured on the RADIUS server host If you do not configure these optional parameters the global defa
174. SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 20 STRING Unit 0 Port 17 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 21 STRING Unit 0 Port 18 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 22 STRING Unit 0 Port 19 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 23 STRING Unit 0 Port 20 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 24 STRING Unit 0 Port 21 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 25 STRING Unit 0 Port 22 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 26 STRING Unit 0 Port 23 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 27 STRING Unit 0 Port 24 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 28 STRING Unit 0 Port 25 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 29 STRING Unit 0 Port 26 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 30 STRING Unit 0 Port 27 10G Level Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 229 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 31 STRING Unit 0 Port 28 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 32 STRING Unit 0 Port 29 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 33 STRING Unit 0 Port 30 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 34 STRING Unit 0 Port 31 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 35 STRING Unit 0 Port 32 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 36 STRING 40G QSFP port SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 37 STRING Unit 0 Port 33 40G Level SNMPv
175. SOSOOSOSSOOSSS 348 DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO DRO PS TOTAL PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS PS on on on on on on on on on on on on on coso COS1 COS2 COS3 COS4 COS5 COS6 COS7 COS8 COS9 COS10 COS11 COS12 QoOOooOooooocococ oo 0000000000 0000Oo Total Mmu Drops EgMac Drops Egress Dell show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 2 1 Debugging and Diagnostics HOL DROPS HOL DROPS HOL DROPS HOL DROPS HOL DROPS TxPurge Ce Aged Drops Egres L2MC Drops PKT Drops TX I m on on on on on 11 S D of ANY Condi Hg MacUnderflow Err PKT Counter Erfor counters Internal Mac Transmit Unknown Opcodes COS13 COS14 COS15 COS16 COS17 Err AC counters Egress FCS Drops Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR Dr IPv4 L3UC Aged amp Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops Internal Mac Receive Dataplane Statistics tions Errors Errors QoOoOoOoooocco Ops QoOOOOcO0c ooo The show hardware stack unit cpu data plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU The command output in the following example has been augmented providing detailed RX TX packet statistics on a per queue basis The objective is to see whether CPU bound traffic is internal so called party bus or IPC traffic o
176. Size on Flash Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory Table 23 MIB Objects for Displaying the Available Memory Size on Flash via SNMP MIB Object OID Description chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 19 1 2 8 1 6 Contains flash memory usage in percentage The chStackUnitUtilTable MIB table contains the chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil MIB object which contains the flash memory usage percent Viewing the Available Flash Memory Size To view the available flash memory using SNMP use the following command 232 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP snmpget v2c c public 192 168 60 120 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 9 1 5 1 The output above displays that 24 of the flash memory is used Gauge32 24 l239v6 2T 4 15460027 3 10 1 2 79 14 6 1 MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system The chSysSwCoresTable contains the list of software core files generated by the system The following table lists the related MIB objects Table 24 MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System MIB Object chSysSwCoresTable chSysCoresEntry chSysCoresInstance chSysCoresFileName chSysCoresTimeCreated chSysCoresStackUnitNumber
177. Status 127 Power via MDI Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Description Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device end station only or other Indicates the network address of the management interface The Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV On Dell Networking systems indicates the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs On Dell Networking systems indicates the tagged VLAN to which a port belongs and the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs if the port is in Hybrid mode Indicates the user defined alphanumeric string that identifies the VLAN Indicates the protocols that the port can process The Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate and whether the current settings are the result of auto negotiation This TLV is not available in the Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP but is available and mandatory non configurable in the LLDP MED implementation Dell Networking supports the LLDP MED protocol which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented and therefore Dell Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only 167 Type TLV Description 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated whether it is currently in a LAG and the port identification of the LAG The Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV 127 Maxim
178. TSA ETS PG 1 TSA ETS Priorities 3 326 State Complete BW 50 BW 50 Dell show qos dcb map dcbmap2 PFC OFF Priorities 0 124567 PFC ON NPIV Proxy Gateway Table 31 show qos dcb map Field Descriptions Field State PFC Mode PG TSA BW PFC Priorities Description Complete All mandatory DCB parameters are correctly configured In progress The DCB map configuration is not complete Some mandatory parameters are not configured PFC configuration in the DCB map On enabled or Off Priority group configured in the DCB map Transmission scheduling algorithm used in the DCB map Enhanced Transmission Selection ETS Percentage of bandwidth allocated to the priority group PFC setting for the priority group On enabled or Off 802 1p priorities configured in the priority group show npiv devices brief Command Example Dell show npiv devices brief Total NPIV Devices 2 ENode Intf ENode WWPN FCoE Vlan Fabric Intf Fabric Map LoginMethod Status Te 0 11 20 01 00 10 18 1 94 20 1003 Fc 0 9 fid 1003 FLOGI OGGED IN Te 0 12 10 00 00 00 c9 d9 9c cb 1003 Fc 0 10 fid_1003 FDISC jOGGED IN Table 32 show npiv devices brief Field Descriptions Field Total NPIV Devices ENode Intf ENode WWPN FCoE Vlan Fabric Intf NPIV Proxy Gateway Description Number of downstream ENodes connected to a fabric over the Aggregator with the NPG Aggregator wit
179. Te 0 44 U ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 11 50 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 182 packets 17408 bytes 92 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 90 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 182 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles 0 CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics Link Aggregation 149 2999 packets 383916 bytes 0 underruns 5 64 byte pkts 214 over 64 byte pkts 2727 over 127 byte pkts 53 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 2904 Multicasts 95 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 4 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 11 42 show lacp 128 Command Example Dell show lacp 128 Port channel 128 admin up oper up mode lacp Actor System ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e8el elc3 Partner System ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e88b 253d Actor Admin Key 128 Oper Key 128 Partner Oper Key 128 VLT Peer Oper Key 128 ACP LAG 128 is an aggregatable link ACP LAG 128 is a normal LAG A Active LACP B Passive LACP C Short Timeout D Long Timeout E Aggregatable Link F Individual Link G IN SYNC H OUT OF SYNC I Collection enabled J Collection di
180. Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss To troubleshoot packet loss use the following commands how hardware stack unit cpu data plane statistics how hardware stack unit cpu party bus statistics drops unit 0 0 port 1 56 stack port 33 56 how hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 counters details port stats detail register ipmc replication table dump how hardware stack unit how hardware stack unit how hardware layer3 gos stack unit 0 5 port set 0 0 how hardware system flow layer2 stack unit 0 5 port set 0 1 counters how hardware drops interfac range interfac how hardware stack unit lt id gt buffer stats snapshot unit lt id gt resource x id all buffer info roup id all queue ucast id all mcast id all all e U QU DH HH AH AHN 0 0 0 0 how hardware drops interface interface clear hardware stack unit 0 5 counters clear hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 counters clear hardware stack unit 0 5 cpu data plane statistics clear hardware stack unit cpu party bus statistics stack port 33 56 clear hardware stack unit Displaying Drop Counters To display drop counters use the following commands e Identify which stack unit port pipe and port is experiencing internal drops show hardware stack unit 0 11 drops unit 0 port 0 63 Display drop counters show har
181. Tx Power 0 000mw SFP 49 Rx Power 0 227mW SFP 49 Data Ready state Bar False SFP 49 Rx LOS state False SFP 49 Tx Fault state False Recognize an Over Temperature Condition An overtemperature condition occurs for one of two reasons the card genuinely is too hot or a sensor has malfunctioned Inspect cards adjacent to the one reporting the condition to discover the cause e If directly adjacent cards are not normal temperature suspect a genuine overheating condition e If directly adjacent cards are normal temperature suspect a faulty sensor When the system detects a genuine over temperature condition it powers off the card To recognize this condition look for the following system messages CHMGR 2 MAJOR TEMP Major alarm chassis temperature high temperature reaches r exceeds threshold of value C HMGR 2 TEMP SHUTDOWN WARN WARNING temperature is value C approaching hutdown threshold of value C 0 ODO 0 To view the programmed alarm thresholds levels including the shutdown value use the show alarms hreshold command ct NOTE When the ingress air temperature exceeds 61 C the Status LED turns Amber and a major alarm is triggered Example of the show alarms threshold Command Dell show alarms threshold Temperature Limits deg C Ingress Air Off Ingress Air Major Off Major Shutdown UnitO 58 61 84 86 90 Dell Troubleshoot an Over Temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over t
182. Type Example of the show inventory optional module Command Dell show inventory optional module Unit Slot Expected Inserted Next Boot Power Stacking 56 56 249 0 1 OSFP QSFP AUTO Good Mismatch Example of the show system stack unit stack group configured Command Dell show system stack unit 1 stack group configured Configured stack groups in stack unit 1 Example of the show system stack unit stack group Command Dell show system stack unit 1 stack group Stack group Ports Dell Example of the show system stack ports ring Command Dell show system stack ports Topology Ring Interface Connection Link Speed Admin Link Trunk Gb s Status Status Group 0 33 1 33 40 up up 0 37 1 37 40 up up 1 33 0 33 40 up up 1 37 0 37 40 up up Example of the show system stack ports daisy chain Command Dell show system stack ports Topology Daisy Chain Interface Connection Link Speed Admin Link Trunk Gb s Status Status Group 0 33 40 up down 0 37 1 37 40 up up 1 33 40 up down 1 37 0 37 40 up up Troubleshooting a Switch Stack To perform troubleshooting operations on a switch stack use the following commands on the master switch 1 Displays the status of stacked ports on stack units show system stack ports 2 Displays the master standby unit status failover configuration and result of the last master standby synchronization allows you to verify the readiness for a stack failover show redund
183. VLANs VLANs and Port Tagging Configuring VEAN Membership ertt ere ee aio Displaying VEAN Member SMD iere e oet t t te ete pe pes Adding an Interface to a Tagged VLAN Adding an Interface to an Untagged VLAN VLAN Configuration on Physical Ports and Port Channels Port Channel Interfaces ie dece ba Port Channel Definitions and Standards aissein rannani eene Port Channel Been t a e Da E de i e E EORR RE e dee Port Channel Implementation sess tenentes trennen nnne nnn 1GbE and 10GbE Interfaces in Port Channels ssssssssseeeeeeeeemeemeen nenne Uplink Port Channel VLAN Membership rettet bete feet bte ce ba t e og Server Facing Port Channel VLAN MemberShiP oooooccococoocccococcccccconnncncononcncnnnnnnnncnnnnccnnnnnncninnnns Displaying Port Channel INformations E a a e a a Interface Range erna aem dtr WR ERE IRR carne a n LO n SAE ESEE AETIA Bulk Configuration Examples eee oco e E ERE EP Monitor and Maintain Interfaces Maintenance Using DR uini ae tee ete ie DRE ELO P Ret ais Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames ocoonocccccnnccccncononcccnnonccnnnnnnnnnnnonn a a a Enabling Pause Frame S A A tede erret ete ge p ee e oS eene MTU SIZGe nih be pei e te bt ec HR e P deed reds Auto Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces sssssssssssssssssesssseeeeeneen nnnm nnnn nnn Setting Auto Negotiation Options rennen stie trer ntn nrns s intent n rennes Viewing Interface Information eaa e
184. a into Ethernet frames The Fibre Channel FC Flex IO module is supported on Dell Networking Operating System OS I O Aggregator IOA The IOA switch installed with the FC Flex IO module functions as a top of rack edge switch that supports converged enhanced Ethernet CEE traffic Fibre channel over Ethernet FCoE for storage Interprocess Communication IPC for servers and Ethernet local area network LAN IP cloud for data as well as FC links to one or more storage area network SAN fabrics FC Flex IO Modules 301 FCoE works with the Ethernet enhancements provided in Data Center Bridging DCB to support lossless no drop SAN and LAN traffic In addition DCB provides flexible bandwidth sharing for different traffic types such as LAN and SAN according to 802 1p priority classes of service DCBx should be enabled on the system before the FIP snooping feature is enabled All of the commands that are supported for FCoE on the I O Aggregator apply to the FC Flex IO modules Similarly all of the configuration procedures and the settings that are applicable for FCoE on the I O Aggregator are valid for the FC Flex IO modules 302 FC Flex IO Modules 25 FC FLEXIO FPORT FC FlexlO FPort is now supported on the Dell Networking OS FC FLEXIO FPORT The switch is a blade switch which is plugged into the Dell M1000 Blade server chassis The blade module contains two slots for pluggable flexible module With single FC Flex IO module
185. a type of internet address These values display for ipAddressTable objects using the snmpwalk command There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data Read the value of a single managed object snmpget v version c community agent ip identifier instance descriptor instance e Read the value of the managed object directly below the specified object snmpgetnext v version c community agent ip identifier instance descriptor instance e Read the value of many objects at once snmpwalk v version c community agent ip identifier instance descriptor instance In the following example the value 4 displays in the OID before the IP address for IPv4 For an IPv6 IP address a value of 16 displays Example of Reading the Value of a Managed Object gt snmpget v 2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 161 sysUpTime 0 DISMAN EVENT MIB sysUpTimeInstance Timeticks 32852616 3 days 19 15 26 16 gt snmpget v 2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 161 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 0 DISMAN EVENT MIB sysUpTimeInstance Timeticks 32856932 3 days 19 16 09 32 Example of Reading the Value of the Next Managed Object gt snmpgetnext v 2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 161 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysContact 0 STRING gt snmpgetnext v 2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 161 sysContact 0 SNMPv2 MIB sysName 0 STRING Example of Reading the Value of Many Managed Objects at Once snmpwalk v 2c c mycommunity 10 16
186. abled by default Queries are not accepted from the server side ports and are only accepted from the uplink LAG e Reports and Leaves are flooded by default to the uplink LAG irrespective of whether it is an mrouter port or not 100 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned unregistered frame the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN To disable multicast flooding on all VLAN ports enter the no ip igmp snooping flood command in global configuration mode When multicast flooding is disabled unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast router ports on all VLANs If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped Displaying IGMP Information Use the show commands from the below table to display information on IGMP If you specify a group address or interface e Enter a group address in dotted decimal format for example 225 0 0 0 e Enter an interface in one of the following formats tengigabitethernet slot port port channel port channel number orvlan vlan number Displaying IGMP Information Command Output show ip igmp Displays information on IGMP groups snooping groups group address detail detail interface group address detail show ip igmp Displays IGMP information on IGMP enabled interfa
187. al on both sides of the trunk to ensure the same behavior on both sides Setting up VLT The following figure shows the sample VLT topology Figure 34 Sample VLT Topology PMUX Mode of the lO Aggregator 277 Ports 33 and 37 are used as ICL links and these two 40G ports are connected back to back between the two Aggregators In PMUX VLT you can choose any uplink ports for configuring VLT K NOTE Ensure the connectivity to TOR from each Aggregator To enable VLT and verify the configuration follow these steps 1 Enable VLT in node 1 and 2 stack unit unit iom mode vlt CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode vlt Verify the VLT configurations show interface port channel brief EXEC mode Dell show interfaces port brief Codes L LACP Port channel O OpenFlow Controller Port channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports 127 52 up 00 18 22 Fo 0 33 Fo 0 37 L 128 L2 up 00 00 00 Fo 0 41 Virtual Link Trunking VLT in PMUX Mode VLT allows the physical links between two devices known as VLT nodes or peers within a VLT domain to be considered a single logical link to connected external devices Up ICL LAG Up Up Uplink LAG For VLT operations use the following configurations on both the primary and secondary VLT Ensure the VLTi links are connected and administratively up VLTi connects the VLT peers for VLT data exchange 1 278 Configure VLTi
188. ample the strict priority group whose traffic is mapped to one queue takes precedence over the strict priority group whose traffic is Mapped to two queues Therefore in this example scheduling traffic to priority group 1 mapped to one strict priority queue takes precedence over scheduling traffic to priority group 3 mapped to two strict priority queues DCBx Operation The data center bridging exchange protocol DCBx is used by DCB devices to exchange configuration information with directly connected peers using the link layer discovery protocol LLDP protocol DCBx can detect the misconfiguration of a peer DCB device and optionally configure peer DCB devices with DCB feature settings to ensure consistent operation in a data center network DCBx is a prerequisite for using DCB features such as priority based flow control PFC and enhanced traffic selection ETS to exchange link level configurations in a converged Ethernet environment DCBx is also deployed in topologies that support lossless operation for FCoE or iSCSI traffic In these scenarios all network devices are DCBx enabled DCBx is enabled end to end The following versions of DCBx are supported on an Aggregator CIN CEE and IEEE2 5 DCBx requires the LLDP to be enabled on all DCB devices DCBx Operation DCBx performs the following operations e Discovers DCB configuration such as PFC and ETS in a peer device e Detects DCB mis configuration in a peer devic
189. an SNMP trap are generated The VLT peer does not boot up The VLTi is forced to a down state A syslog error message is generated A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated A syslog error message is generated The peer with the VLT configured remains active Behavior During Run Time The VLT peer does not boot up The VLTi is forced to a down state A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated A syslog error message is generated N A A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated The VLT peer does not boot up The VLTi is forced to a down state A syslog error message is generated A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated A syslog error message is generated The peer with the VLT configured remains active Action to Take Verify the domain ID matches on both VLT peers Follow the correct upgrade procedure for the unit with the mismatched Dell Networking OS version Use the show vlt detail and show vlt brief commands to view the VLT port channel status information Verify that the unit ID of VLT peers is not the same on both units and that the MAC address is the same on both units Verify the unit ID is correct on both VLT peers Unit ID numbers must be sequential on peer units for example if Peer 1 is unit ID 0 Peer 2 unit ID must be 4 Verify the Dell Networking OS software versions on the VLT peers is compatib
190. an object changes K NOTE In Dell Networking OS release version 9 7 0 0 object tracking is supported only on VRRP Object Tracking Overview Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest monitor their state and report to a client when a change in an object s state occurs The following tracked objects are supported e Link status of Layer 2 interfaces Routing status of Layer 3 interfaces IPv4 and IPv6 e Reachability of IP hosts e Reachability of IPv4 and IPv6 routes e Metric thresholds of IPv4 and IPv6 routes e Tracking of IP Hosts In future releases environmental alarms and available free memory will be supported You can configure client applications such as VRRP to receive a notification when the state of a tracked object changes The following example shows how object tracking is performed Router A and Router B are both connected to the internet via interfaces running OSPF Both routers belong to a VRRP group with a virtual router at 10 0 0 1 on the local area network LAN side Neither Router A nor Router B is the owner of the group Although Router A and Router B use the same default VRRP priority 100 Router B would normally become the master for the VRRP group because it has a higher IP address You can create a tracked object to monitor the metric of the default route 0 0 0 0 0 After you configure the default route as a tracked object you can configure the VRRP group to track the state of the route
191. anager Online Help Understanding Banner Settings This functionality is supported on the Aggregator A banner is a note that is displayed when you log in to the system depending on the privilege level and the command mode into which the you log in You can specify different banners to be displayed as the message of the day MOTD as the opening quote in EXEC mode or as the beginning message in EXEC Privilege mode Setting up a banner enables you to display any important information or group level notification that needs to be communicated to all the users of the system A login banner message is displayed only in EXEC Privilege mode after entering the enable command followed by the password These banners are not displayed to users in EXEC mode When you connect to a system the message of the day MOTD banner is displayed first followed by the login banner and prompts After you log in to the system with valid authentication credentials the EXEC banner is shown You can use the MOTD banner to alert users of critical upcoming events so that they can plan and schedule their accessibility to the device You can modify the banner messages depending on the requirements or conditions Accessing the I O Aggregator Using the CMC Console Only This functionality is supported on the Aggregator You can enable the option to access and administer an Aggregator only using the chassis management controller CMC interface and prevent the usage of t
192. ancy 250 Stacking 3 Displays input and output flow statistics on a stacked port show hardware stack unit unit number stack port port number 4 Clears statistics on the specified stack unit The valid stack unit numbers are from O to 5 clear hardware stack unit unit number counters 5 Displays the current operational mode of the Aggregator standalone or stacking and the mode in which the Aggregator will operate at the next reload show system stack unit unit number iom mode Example of the show system stack ports Command Dell show system stack ports Topology Ring Interface Connection Link Speed Admin Link Trunk Gb s Status Status Group 0 33 1 33 40 up up 0 37 1 37 40 up up 1 33 0 33 40 up up 1 37 0 37 40 up up Example of the show redundancy Command Dell show redundancy Stack unit Status Mgmt ID 0 Stack unit ID 0 Stack unit Redundancy Role Primary Stack unit State Active Indicates Master Unit Stack unit SW Version E8 3 16 46 Link to Peer Up PEER Stack unit Status Stack unit State Standby Indicates Standby Unit Peer stack unit ID 1 Stack unit SW Version E8 3 16 46 Primary Stack unit mgmt id 0 Auto Data Sync Full Failover Type Hot Failover Failover type with redundancy force failover Auto reboot Stack unit Enabled Auto failover limit 3 times in 60 minutes Stack unit Failover Record Failover Count 0 Last failover timestamp None
193. ange from O to 255 The resolution value is user configurable and calculates the scaled metric by dividing a route s cost by the resolution value set for the route type For ISIS you can set the resolution in the range from 1 to 1000 where the default is 10 For OSPF you can set the resolution in the range from 1 to 1592 where the default is 1 The resolution value used to map static routes is not configurable By default Dell Networking OS assigns a metric of O to static routes The resolution value used to map RIP routes is not configurable The RIP hop count is automatically multiplied by 16 to scale it For example a RIP metric of 16 unreachable scales to 256 which considers a route to be DOWN Displaying Tracked Objects To display the currently configured objects used to track Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces and IPv4 and IPv6 routes use the following show commands To display the configuration and status of currently tracked Layer 2 or Layer 3 interfaces IPv4 or IPv6 routes use the show track command You can also display the currently configured per protocol resolution values used to scale route metrics when tracking metric thresholds Display the configuration and status of currently tracked Layer 2 or Layer 3 interfaces IPv4 or IPv6 routes instance show track object id brief interface brief ip route brief resolution brief Usethe show running config track command to display the trackin
194. annel devices and storage arrays that inter operate and communicate Fibre Channel forwarder FCoE enabled switch that can forward FC traffic to both downstream FCoE and upstream FC devices An NPIV proxy gateway functions as an FCF to export upstream F port configurations to downstream server CNA ports FCoE MAC address prefix The unique 24 bit MAC address prefix in FCoE packets used to generate a fabric provided MAC address FPMA The FPMA is required to send FCoE packets from a server to a SAN fabric Template used to configure FCoE and FC parameters on Ethernet and FC ports in a converged fabric VLAN dedicated to carrying only FCoE traffic between server CNA ports and a SAN fabric FCoE traffic must travel in a VLAN When you apply an FCoE map on a port FCoE is enabled on the port All non FCoE traffic is dropped on an FCoE VLAN 515 Term Description FIP FCoE Initialization Protocol Layer 2 protocol for endpoint discovery fabric login and fabric association FIP is used by server CNAs to discover an upstream FCoE switch operating as an FCF FIP keepalive messages maintain the connection between an FCoE initiator and an FCF NPIV N port identifier virtualization The capability to map multiple FCoE links from downstream ports to a single upstream FC link principal switch The switch in a fabric with the lowest domain number The principal switch accesses the master name database and the zone zone set database DCB Ma
195. annot configure the uplink speed to be set as 40 GbE if the Aggregator functions in programmable MUX mode with multiple uplink LAG interfaces or in stacking mode This is because CMC is not involved with the configuration of parameters when the Aggregator operates in either of these modes with the uplink interfaces being part of different LAG bundles 246 Stacking After you restart the Aggregator the 4 Port 10 GbE Ethernet modules or the 40GbE QSFP port that is split into four LOGbE SFP ports cannot be configured to be part of the same uplink LAG bundle that is set up with the uplink speed of 40 GbE In such a condition you can perform a hot swap of the 4 port 10 GbE Flex IO modules with a 2 port 40 GbE Flex IO module which causes the module to become a part of the LAG bundle that is set up with 40 GbE as the uplink speed without another reboot The Aggregator supports native 40 GbE mode for QSFP ports only in simple MUX mode and stacking mode of operation In stacking mode the base 40 GbE module ports are used for stacking and native 40 GbE uplink speed is enabled for only the QSFP ports on the optional 2 Port 40 Gigabit Ethernet QSFP FlexlO modules The following table describes the various speeds in different Aggregator modes If a 4x10G SFP ora 4x10BASE T module is plugged in and 40 GbE mode is configured it is in error disabled state Table 25 Speeds in Different Aggregator Modes Module Type Standalone Standalone Stacking 10G Stackin
196. ant Points to Remember e Typically 5 second timeout and 3 second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both local area network LAN and wide area network WAN applications If you experience a timeout with these values increase the timeout value to greater than 3 seconds and increase the retry value to greater than 2 seconds on your SNMP server Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 217 Setting up SNMP Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 which are community based security models The primary difference between the two versions is that version 2 supports two additional protocol operations informs operation and snmpgetbulk query and one additional object counter64 object Creating a Community For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 create a community to enable the community based security in the Dell Networking OS The management station generates requests to either retrieve or alter the value of a management object and is called the SNMP manager A network element that processes SNMP requests is called an SNMP agent An SNMP community is a group of SNMP agents and managers that are allowed to interact Communities are necessary to secure communication between SNMP managers and agents SNMP agents do not respond to requests from management stations that are not part of the community The Dell Networking OS enables SNMP automatically when you create an SNMP community and displays the following message You must specif
197. are the FC MAP the least significant bytes are the FC ID FC ID FC port ID provided by the fabric LoginMethod Secs State Method used by the server CNA to log in to the fabric for example FLOGI or FDISC Number of seconds that the fabric connection is up Status of the fabric connection logged in show fc switch Command Example Dell show fc switch Switch Mode NPG Switch WWN 10 00 5c f9 dd ef 10 c0 Dell Table 34 show fc switch Command Description Field Description Switch Mode Fibre Channel mode of operation of an Aggregator Default NPG configured as an NPIV proxy gateway Switch WWN Factory assigned worldwide node WWN name of the Aggregator The Aggregator WWN name is not user configurable NPIV Proxy Gateway 329 2 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version To upgrade your system type follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center You can reach Technical Support e On the web http support dell com e By email Dell Force10_Technical_SupportODell com By phone US and Canada 866 965 5800 International 408 965 5800 330 Upgrade Procedures 28 Debugging and
198. atically disables the associated downstream link port to the server To continue to transmit traffic upstream the server with NIC teaming detects the disabled link and automatically switches over to the backup link in order to continue to transmit traffic upstream Important Points to Remember When you configure UFD the following conditions apply You can configure up to 16 uplink state groups By default no uplink state groups are created in PMUX mode and uplink state group 1 is created in Standalone and VLT modes An uplink state group is considered to be operationally up if it has at least one upstream interface in the Link Up state An uplink state group is considered to be operationally down if it has no upstream interfaces in the Link Up state No uplink state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an Operationally Down state You can assign physical port or port channel interfaces to an uplink state group in PMUX mode You can assign an interface to only one uplink state group Configure each interface assigned to an uplink state group as either an upstream or downstream interface but not both You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group An uplink state group can contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself but not both If you assign a port channel as an upstream interface the port channel interface enters a Link Down state when the n
199. ation functions as follows e Auto detection of EqualLogic storage arrays the switch detects any active EqualLogic array directly attached to its ports Manual configuration to detect Compellent storage arrays where auto detection is not supported e Automatic configuration of switch ports after detection of storage arrays e f you configured flow control iSCSI uses the current configuration If you did not configure flow control iSCSI auto configures flow control 130 iSCSI Optimization e iSCSI monitoring sessions the switch monitors and tracks active iSCSI sessions in connections on the switch including port information and iSCSI session information e iSCSI QoS A user configured iSCSI class of service CoS profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic Classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given preferential QoS treatment over other data passing through the switch Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets e iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported The following figure shows SCSI optimization between servers in an M1000e enclosure and a storage array in which an Aggregator connects installed servers iSCSI initiators to a storage array iSCSI targets in a SAN network iSCSI optimization running on the Aggregator is configured to use dotip priority queue assignments to ensure that SCSI traffic in
200. ator with the FC port is associated with an Ethernet MAC address FCF MAC address When you enable a fabric facing FC port the FCoE map applied to the port starts sending FIP multicast advertisements using the parameters in the FCoE map over server facing Ethernet ports A server sees the FC port with its applied FCoE map as an FCF port 1 Configure a fabric facing FC port CONFIGURATION mode interface fibrechannel slot port 2 Apply the FCoE and FC fabric configurations in an FCoE map to the port Repeat this step to apply an FCoE map to more than one FC port INTERFACE FIBRE CHANNEL mode fabric map name Dell interface fi 0 9 Dell config if fc 0 9 fabric SAN FABRIC A Enable the port for FC transmission INTERFACE FIBRE CHANNEL mode no shutdown Important Points to Remember 322 NPIV Proxy Gateway You can apply a DCB or FCoE map to a range of Ethernet or Fibre Channel interfaces by using the interface range command for example Enter the keywords interface range followed by an interface type and port range A port range must contain spaces before and after the dash Separate each interface type and port range with a space comma and space as shown in the preceding examples Sample Configuration 1 Configure a DCB map with PFC and ETS settings Dell config dcb map SAN DCB MAP Dell config dcbx name priority group 0 bandwidth 60 pfc off Dell config dcbx name priority group 1 bandwidth 20 pfc on
201. ault None INTERFACE mode pfc priority priority range Maximum number of lossless queues supported on an Ethernet port 2 Separate priority values with a comma Specify a priority range with a dash for example pfc priority 3 5 7 Data Center Bridging DCB 41 You cannot configure PFC using the p c priority command on an interface on which a DCB map has been applied or which is already configured for lossless queues p c no drop queues commana Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface after you disable PFC mode in a DCB map and apply the map on the interface The configuration of no drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed but lossless traffic should egress from the interface Lossless traffic egresses out the no drop queues Ingress 802 1p traffic from PFC enabled peers is automatically mapped to the no drop egress queues When configuring lossless queues on a port interface consider the following points 42 By default no lossless queues are configured on a port A limit of two lossless queues are supported on a port If the number of lossless queues configured exceeds the maximum supported limit per port two an error message is displayed You must re configure the value to a smaller number of queues If you configure lossless queues on an interface that already has a DCB map with PFC enabled pfc on an error message is dis
202. ault method list User defined method lists take precedence over the default method list NOTE If a console user logs in with RADIUS authentication the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server if the privilege level is configured for that user in RADIUS whether you configure RADIUS authorization Configuration Task List for AAA Authentication The following sections provide the configuration tasks e Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines e Configuring AAA Authentication Login Methods Enabling AAA Authentication e Enabling AAA Authentication RADIUS For a complete list of all commands related to login authentication refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can assign up to five authentication methods to a method list Dell Networking OS evaluates the methods in the order in which you enter them in each list If the first method list does not respond or returns an error Dell Networking OS applies the next method list until the user either passes or fails the authentication If the user fails a method list Dell Networking OS does not apply the next method list Configuring AAA Authentication Login Methods To configure an authentication method and method list use the following commands Dell Networking OS Behavior If you use a method list on the console port in which RADIUS or TACACS is the last authen
203. ave configured RADIUS authorization and have not configured authentication a message is logged stating this During authorization the next method in the list if present is used or if another method is not present an error is reported To view the configuration use the show config in LINE mode or the show running config command in EXEC Privilege mode Defining a AAA Method List to be Used for RADIUS To configure RADIUS to authenticate or authorize users on the system create a AAA method list Default method lists do not need to be explicitly applied to the line so they are not mandatory To create a method list use the following commands e Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the method list you wish to use with the RADIUS authentication method CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login method list name radius e Create a method list with RADIUS and TACACS as authorization methods CONFIGURATION mode aaa authorization exec method list name default radius tacacs Typical order of methods RADIUS TACACS Local None Security 203 If RADIUS denies authorization the session ends RADIUS must not be the last method specified Applying the Method List to Terminal Lines To enable RADIUS AAA login authentication for a method list apply it to a terminal line To configure a terminal line for RADIUS authentication and authorization use the following commands e Enter LINE mode CONFIGU
204. ble interoperation for a robust effective deployment of the NPIV proxy gateway and FCoE FC bridging behavior In an environment that contains FC Flex IO modules and Cisco MDS switches perform the following steps e Insert the FC Flex IO module into any of the optional module slots of the I O Aggregator Switch and reload the switch When the device is reloaded NPIV mode is automatically enabled e Configure the NPIV related commands on I O Aggregator After you perform the preceding procedure the following operations take place e A physical link is established between the FC Flex I O module and the Cisco MDS switch e The FC Flex I O module sends a proxy FLOGI request to the upstream F Port of the FC switch or the MDS switch The F port accepts the proxy FLOGI request for the FC Flex IO virtual N Port The converged network adapters CNAs are brought online and the FIP application is run Discovery of the VLAN and FCF MAC addresses is completed e The CNA sends a FIP fabric login FLOGI request to the FC Flex IO module which converts FLOGI to FDISC messages or processes any internally generated FC frames and sends these messages to the SAN environment e When the FC fabric discovery FDISC accept message is received from the SAN side the FC Flex IO module converts the FDISC message again into an FLOGI accept message and transmits it to the CNA Internal tables of the switch are then programmed to enable the gateway device
205. bort Threshold 60 seconds Peer Routing Disabled Peer Routing Timeout timer 0 seconds ulticast peer routing timeout 150 seconds Dell 5 Configure the secondary VLT NOTE Repeat steps from 1 through 4 on the secondary backup destination and unit id l show vlt br Domain Brief Role Priority ICL Link Status HeartBeat Status VLT Peer Status Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay Restore timer Delay Restore Abort Threshold Peer Routing Peer Routing Timeout timer ulticast peer routing timeout Dell Disabled Dell show vlt detail Local LAG Id Peer Active VLANs LAG Id Local Status PMUX Mode of the lO Aggregator VLT ensuring you use the different i Secondary 32768 Up Up Up 6 3 00 01 e8 8a e9 91 00 01 e8 8a e9 76 6 3 90 seconds 60 seconds 0 seconds 150 seconds Peer Status 279 Dell 6 Show the running configurations on this port channel Dell conf if po 128 show config interface Port channel 128 portmode hybrid switchport vlan tagged 10 15 vlan untagged 20 shutdown Dell conf if po 128 fend Dell 7 Show the VLAN configurations Dell show vlan Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated O Openflow Q U Untagged T Tagged x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged o OpenFlow untagged O OpenFlo
206. cally configured based on the server facing ports that are members of the LAG The untagged VLAN of a server facing LAG is auto configured based on the untagged VLAN to which the lowest numbered server facing port in the LAG belongs e Allinterfaces are auto configured as members of all 4094 VLANs and untagged VLAN 1 All VLANs are up and can send or receive layer 2 traffic You can use the Command Line Interface CLI or CMC interface to configure only the required VLANs on a port interface e Aggregator ports are numbered 1 to 56 Ports 1 to 32 are internal server facing interfaces Ports 33 to 56 are external ports numbered from the bottom to the top of the Aggregator Interface Types The following interface types are supported on an Aggregator Table 5 Interface Types Interface Type Supported Default Mode Requires Default State Modes Creation Physical L2 10GbE uplink No No Shutdown enabled Management L3 L3 No No Shutdown enabled Port Channel L2 L2 No L2 No Shutdown enabled Default VLAN L2 and L3 L2 and L3 No L2 No Shutdown enabled L3 VLAN 1 No Shutdown enabled Non default VLANs L2 and L5 L2 and L3 Yes L2 No Shutdown enabled L3 VLANs 2 4094 No Shutdown enabled Viewing Interface Information To view interface status and auto configured parameters use show commands The show interfaces command in EXEC mode lists all configurable interfaces on the chassis and has options to display the int
207. case of a Dell upgrade you can check to see that an Aggregator is running the latest Dell version by entering the show versioncommand To download Dell version go to http support dell com For detailed information about how to reconfigure specific software settings refer to the appropriate chapter Deploying FN I O Module This section provides design and configuration guidance for deploying the Dell PowerEdge FN I O Module FN IOM By default the FN IOM is in Standalone Mode It consists of the following default settings Mode Default Settings Chassis Yes Management Controller Configuration Stacking and VLT Disabled Before You Start 21 Mode Default Settings Data Center Enabled Bridging Exchange Protocol DCBx FIP Snooping Enabled on FN 410S amp FN 410T Disabled on FN 2210S Bridge FSB NPIV Proxy Enabled in FN 2210S Disabled on FN 410S amp FN 410T Gateway Mode NPG iSCSI Optimization Enabled Broadcast Storm Enabled Control Internet Group Enabled Management Protocol IGMP Flood Restrict Network Time Enabled Protocol NTP Enable and Disable All port enabled by default Disable ports through Command Line Interface ports Uplink Failure Enabled Detection UFD TACACS RADIUS Disabled AAA Auth Acct Auth coming up DHCP Enabled n client only mode Internet Group Enabled Management Protocol IGMP v2 amp v3 Auto LACP LAG Enabled on all ports Uplink created by default bas
208. cated VLAN for FCoE traffic Range 2 4094 VLAN 1002 is commonly used to transmit FCoE traffic CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan id When you apply an FCoE map to an Ethernet port the port is automatically configured as a tagged member of the FCoE VLAN Creating an FCoE Map An FCoE map consists of e An association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic and the SAN fabric where the storage arrays are installed Use a separate FCoE VLAN for each fabric to which the FCoE traffic is forwarded Any non FCoE traffic sent on a dedicated FCoE VLAN is dropped The FC MAP value used to generate the fabric provided MAC address FPMA The FPMA is used by servers to transmit FCoE traffic to the fabric You can associate an FC MAP with only one FCoE VLAN and conversely associate an FCoE VLAN with only one FC MAP e FCF priority the priority used by a server CNA to select an upstream FCoE forwarder FCF e FIP keepalive FKA advertisement timeout The values for the FCoE VLAN fabric ID and FC MAP must be unique Apply an FCoE map on downstream server facing Ethernet ports and upstream fabric facing Fibre Channel ports 1 Create an FCoE map that contains parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric CONFIGURATION mode fcoe map map name 2 Configure the association between the dedicated VLAN and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed The fabric and VLAN ID numbers must
209. cceccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeceeneseeeeeeesneeeneees 340 Troubleshoot an Over Temperature Condition sss 340 Recognize an Under Voltage Condition 541 Troubleshoot an Under Voltage Condition 341 Buffer OO Deciding to kune Buffers adsain he ege no E Aad a Me E ee Sample Buffer Profile Configuration Troubleshooting Packet LOSS ce cr bete d t dd reet tr t eed CHEERS Displaying Drop COurlters e pta n a a OP MEE APER APER AR aia Dataplarie StatistICS sickens dede Gh e Le e aa Displaying Stack Port Statistics 15 Enabling Buffer StatisticS Tracking pesca A e e RR ED EUR 350 Restoring the Factory Default Settings enne nnne rennen enne nns 353 Important Points to Rememboer snun co tr t te cr me e REND A al 353 29 Standards COMpliQNCe cooooccconccconocccnoncnonncnonccnnnncnnnnnnnnnc cnn nnnnnen rana 354 JEEE Compllances itae oer id pee ec ddr edet td Aviv ee ias 354 REG and D Complian e mimi iain el ee 354 General Internet Protocols 3 3 nee trt them PO EET E PER teaa tie dade it DA ERR RAM epee 555 General PVA Protocol Suicida Le ie te di cab E EH e n OPE ae a a N due 555 Network Managernent cio e ete deuote debet ve ets Em n td 356 MIB Rere a E SA dad HAG ees easel Shae de lees 359 14 About this Guide This guide describes the supported protocols and software features and provides configuration instructions and examples for the Dell Networking M I O Aggregator running Dell Networking OS
210. ced Validation of Interface Ranges You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces separated by commas that you configure by using the interface range command For example if you enter a list of interface ranges such as interface range fo 2 0 1 te 10 0 gi 3 0 fa 0 0 this configuration is considered valid The comma separated list is not required to be separated by spaces in between the ranges You can associate multicast MAC or hardware addresses to an interface range and VLANs by using the mac address table static multicast mac address vlan vlan id output range interface command Enhanced Control of Remote Fault Indication Processing By default the M I O Aggregator module processes RFI errors transmitted by remote peers and brings down the interface when an RFI error is detected You must enter the interface configuration mode before configuring Remote Fault Indication RFI 128 Interfaces You can use the following CLI commands to enable or disable processing of received RFI events Dell conf if te 1 3 remote fault signaling rx on Enable off Disable The default is remote fault signaling rx on Interfaces 129 9 SCSI Optimization An Aggregator enables internet small computer system interface iSCSI optimization with default SCSI parameter settings Default iSCSI Optimization Values and is auto provisioned to support SCSI Optimization Operation To display information on iSCSI confi
211. ces snooping interface interface show ip igmp Displays information on IGMP enabled multicast router mrouter interfaces snooping mrouter vlan vlan number clear ip igmp Clears IGMP information for group addresses and IGMP enabled interfaces snooping groups group address interface show ip igmp snooping groups Command Example Dell show ip igmp snooping groups Total Number of Groups 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires Last Reporter 226 0 0 1 Vlan 1500 INCLUDE 00 00 19 ever Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 101 I D adm 22040 OL Vlan 1600 INCLUDE l2 121 2 Dell show ip igmp snooping groups detail Interface Vlan 1500 Group 226 0 0 1 Uptime 00 00 21 Expires Never Router mode INCLUDE Last reporter Lal 22 Last reporter mode INCLUDE Last report received IS INCL Group source list Source address Uptime Expires Tel LEZ 00 00 21 00 01 48 Member Ports Po 1 Interface Vlan 1600 Group 226 0 0 1 Uptime 00 00 04 Expires Never Router mode INCLUDE Last reporter LAA Z Last reporter mode INCLUDE Last report received IS INCL Group source list Source address Uptime Expires 1 1 1 2 00 00 04 00 02 05 Member Ports Po 1 Dell show ip igmp snooping interface Command Example Dell show ip igmp snooping interface Vlan 2 is up line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access group is not set Inter
212. cess Authentication Method VTY access class Username access class Remote authorization _ support support support Line YES NO NO Local NO YES NO TACACS YES NO YES with Dell Networking OS version 5 2 1 0 and later RADIUS YES NO YES with Dell Networking OS version 6 1 1 0 and later Dell Networking OS provides several ways to configure access classes for VTY lines including e VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization e VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the local database To use this feature 1 Create a username 2 Entera password Assign an access class 4 Enter a privilege level You can assign line authentication on a per VTY basis it is a simple password authentication using an access class as authorization Configure local authentication globally and configure access classes on a per user basis Dell Networking OS can assign different access classes to different users by username Until users attempt to log in Dell Networking OS does not know if they will be assigned a VTY line This means that 214 Security incoming users always see a login prompt even if you have excluded them from the VTY line with a deny all access class After users identify themselves Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the local database and applies it Dell Networking OS then can cl
213. change the order of the display to time day month year end day enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year end year enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 end time enter the time in hours minutes For the hour variable use the 24 hour format example 17 15 is 5 15 pm System Time and Date 261 offset OPTIONAL enter the number of minutes to add during the summer time period The range is from 1 to 1440 The default is 60 minutes Example of the clock summer time Command Dell conf clock summer time pacific date Mar 14 2012 00 00 Nov 7 2012 00 00 Dell con Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time Set a date and time zone on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a specific day every year If you have already set daylight saving for a one time setting you can set that date and time as the recurring setting with the clock summer time time zone recurring command To set a recurring daylight saving time use the following command Set the clock to the appropriate timezone and adjust to daylight saving time every year CONFIGURATION mode clock summer time time zone recurring start week start day start month start time end week end day end month end time offset time zone Enter the three letter name for the time zone This name displays in the s
214. cified port interface Display information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch enabled or disabled including the number of FCoE VLANs FCFs ENodes and currently active sessions Display information on the FCoE VLANs on which FIP snooping is enabled show fip snooping sessions Command Example Dell show fip snooping sessions Enode MAC Enode Intf FCF MAC FCF Intf VLAN aa bb cc 00 00 00 Te 0 42 aa bb cd 00 00 00 Te 0 43 100 aa bb cc 00 00 00 Te 0 42 aa bb cd 00 00 00 Te 0 43 100 aa bb cc 00 00 00 Te 0 42 aa bb cd 00 00 00 Te 0 43 100 aa bb cc 00 00 00 Te 0 42 aa bb cd 00 00 00 Te 0 43 100 aa bb cc 00 00 00 Te 0 42 aa bb cd 00 00 00 Te 0 43 100 FCOE MAC FC ID Port WWPN Port WWNN Oe fc 00 01 00 01 01 00 01 31 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 21 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 0e fc 00 01 00 02 01 00 02 41 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 21 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 0e c 00 01 00 03 01 00 03 41 00 0e fc 00 00 00 01 21 00 0e c 00 00 00 00 0e fc 00 01 00 04 01 00 04 41 00 0e fc 00 00 00 02 21 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 0e fc 00 01 00 05 01 00 05 41 00 0e fc 00 00 00 03 21 00 0e fc 00 00 00 00 show fip snooping sessions Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode ENode Interface Slot port number of the interface connected to the ENode FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF FCF Interface Slot port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session FIP Snooping 89 Field Descripti
215. client functionality is implemented as follows The public out of band management OOB interface and default VLAN 1 are configured by default as a DHCP client to acquire a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server You can override the DHCP assigned address on the OOB management interface by manually configuring an IP address using the CLI or CMC interface If no user configured IP address exists for the OOB interface exists and if the OOB IP address is not in the startup configuration the Aggregator will automatically obtain it using DHCP You can also manually configure an IP address for the VLAN 1 default management interface using the CLI If no user configured IP address exists for the default VLAN management interface exists and if the default VLAN IP address is not in the startup configuration the Aggregator will automatically obtain it using DHCP e The default VLAN 1 with all ports configured as members is the only L3 interface on the Aggregator When the default management VLAN has a DHCP assigned address and you reconfigure the default VLAN ID number the Aggregator Sends a DHCP release to the DHCP server to release the IP address Sends a DHCP request to obtain a new IP address The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is used for the new default management VLAN How DHCP Client is Implemented The Aggregator is enabled by default to receive DHCP server assigned dynamic IP addresses on an interface This setting persis
216. col DHCP 77 provide hosts specify the parameters that they require and the server sends only those parameters Some common options are shown in the following illustration Code Length Value Figure 6 DHCP packet Format The following table lists common DHCP options Option Subnet Mask Router Domain Name Server Domain Name IP Address Lease Time DHCP Message Type Number and Description Option 1 Specifies the client s subnet mask Option 5 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client s default gateway Option 6 Specifies the domain name servers DNSs that are available to the client Option 15 Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS Option 51 Specifies the amount of time that the client is allowed to use an assigned IP address Option 55 DHCPDISCOVER DHCPOFFER DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE DHCPACK DHCPNACK DHCPRELEASE DHCPINFORM AN aa KRWN FE Parameter Request Option 55 List 78 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Option Number and Description Clients use this option to tell the server which parameters it requires It is a series of octets where each octet is DHCP option code Renewal Time Option 58 Specifies the amount of time after the IP address is granted that the client attempts to renew its lease with the original server Rebinding Time Option 59 Specifies the amount of
217. col that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end stations hosts based on configuration policies determined by network administrators DHCP relieves network administrators of manually configuring hosts which can be a tedious and error prone process when hosts often join leave and change locations on the network and it reclaims IP addresses that are no longer in use to prevent address exhaustion DHCP is based on a client server model A host discovers the DHCP server and requests an IP address and the server either leases or permanently assigns one There are three types of devices that are involved in DHCP negotiation DHCP Server This is a network device offering configuration parameters to the client DHCP Client This is a network device requesting configuration parameters from the server Relay Agent This is an intermediary network device that passes DHCP messages between the client and server when the server is not on the same subnet as the host K NOTE The DHCP server and relay agent features are not supported on an Aggregator Supported Modes Stacking PMUX Standalone VLT Assigning an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network When a client joins a network 1 The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers This message includes the parameters that the client requires and
218. command Dell reload 5 Repeat the above steps for each member of the IOA in PMUX mode After system is up you can see the PMUX mode status Dell sh system stack unit 0 iom mode Unit Boot Mode Next Boot PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 275 0 programmable mux programmable mux The IOA is now ready for PMUX operations Configuring the Commands without a Separate User Account Starting with Dell Networking OS version 9 3 0 0 you can configure the PMUX mode CLI commands without having to configure a new separate user profile The user profile you defined to access and log in to the switch is sufficient to configure the PMUX mode commands The IOA PMUX Mode CLI Commands section lists the PMUX mode CLI commands that you can now configure without a separate user account Virtual Link Trunking VLT VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group LAG terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and by supporting a loop free topology VLT provides Layer 2 multipathing creating redundancy through increased bandwidth and enabling multiple parallel paths between nodes and load balancing traffic where alternative paths exist K NOTE When you launch the VLT link the VLT peer ship is not established if any of the following is TRUE e The VLT System MAC configured on both t
219. ctive before attempting DHCP connectivity Configuration Notes When you configure VLT the following conditions apply e VLT domain AVLT domain supports two chassis members which appear as a single logical device to network access devices connected to VLT ports through a port channel AVLT domain consists of the two core chassis the interconnect trunk backup link and the LAG members connected to attached devices Each VLT domain has a unique MAC address that you create or VLT creates automatically ARP tables are synchronized between the VLT peer nodes VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached on non VLT ports Onechassis in the VLT domain is assigned a primary role the other chassis takes the secondary role The primary and secondary roles are required for scenarios when connectivity between the chassis is lost VLT assigns the primary chassis role according to the lowest MAC address You can configure the primary role Ina VLT domain the peer switches must run the same Dell Networking OS software version Separately configure each VLT peer switch with the same VLT domain ID and the VLT version If the system detects mismatches between VLT peer switches in the VLT domain ID or VLT version the VLT Interconnect VLTi does not activate To find the reason for the VLTi being down use the show vlt statistics command to verify that there are
220. d R yea Record ee 2 M Muiticaez Across 274 Muticaet Ackirow 224 Source Adres 1 2 T MP Leva meyer Figure 14 IGMP Membership Queries Leaving and Staying in Groups IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping is auto configured on an Aggregator Multicast packets are addressed with multicast MAC addresses which represents a group of devices rather than one unique device Switches forward multicast frames out of all ports in a VLAN by default even if there are only a small number of interested hosts resulting in a waste of bandwidth IGMP snooping enables switches to use information in IGMP packets to generate a forwarding table that associate ports with multicast groups so that the received multicast frames are forwarded only to interested receivers How IGMP Snooping is Implemented on an Aggregator e IGMP snooping is enabled by default on the switch e Dell Networking OS supports version 1 version 2 and version 3 hosts Dell Networking OS IGMP snooping is based on the IP multicast address not on the Layer 2 multicast MAC address IGMP snooping entries are stored in the Layer 3 flow table instead of in the Layer 2 forwarding information base FIB e Dell Networking OS IGMP snooping is based on draft ietf magma snoop 10 A maximum of 2k groups and 4k virtual local area networks VLAN are supported e IGMP snooping is not supported on the default VLAN interface e Flooding of unregistered multicast traffic is en
221. d Number of PG TLVs received Number of PG TLVs transmitted Number of PG error packets received Number of Application TLVs received Number of Application TLVs transmitted Number of Application TLV error packets received QoS dotip Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment DCB supports PFC ETS and DCBx to handle converged Ethernet traffic that is assigned to an egress queue according to the following QoS methods Honor dotip Layer 2 class maps dotip priorities in ingress traffic are used at the port or global switch level dotip priorities are used to classify traffic in a class map and apply a service policy to an ingress port to map traffic to egress queues K NOTE Dell Networking does not recommend mapping all ingress traffic to a single queue when using PFC and ETS However Dell Networking does recommend using Ingress traffic classification using the service class dynamic dotip command honor dot1p on all DCB enabled interfaces If you use L2 class maps to map dotlp priority traffic to egress queues take into account the default dotlp queue assignments in the following table and the maximum number of two lossless queues supported on a port Although the system allows you to change the default dotip priority queue assignments DCB policies applied to an interface may become invalid if you reconfigure dot1p queue mapping If the configured dcb map remains valid the change in the dotip queue assignment
222. d Port based Port based Port based Port based mrror Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe but a destination port may monitor more than one source port Dell Networking OS Behavior All monitored frames are tagged if the configured monitoring direction is transmit TX regardless of whether the monitored port MD is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 port e If the MD port is a Layer 2 port the frames are tagged with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the MD belongs e fthe MD port is a Layer 3 port the frames are tagged with VLAN ID 4095 e If the MD port is in a Layer 3 VLAN the frames are tagged with the respective Layer 3 VLAN ID For example in the configuration source tengig 1 1 destination tengig 1 41 direction tx if the source port 1 1 is an untagged memberof any VLAN all monitored frames that the destination port 1 41 receives are tagged with the VLAN ID of the source port 192 Port Monitoring 16 Security The Aggregator provides many security features This chapter describes several ways to provide access security to the Dell Networking system For details about all the commands described in this chapter see the Security chapter in the Dell PowerEdge Command Line Reference Guide for the M I O Aggregator Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking NOTE You can also perform some of the configurations using the Web GUI Dell Blade lO Manager For more information see the Dell Blade IO M
223. d no dcb enable You can enable any number of 802 1p priorities for PFC Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap going down and coming up when you reconfigure the lossless queues for no drop priorities in a PFC input policy and reapply the policy to an interface To apply PFC a PFC peer must support the configured priority traffic as detected by DCBx To honor a PFC pause frame multiplied by the number of PFC enabled ingress ports the minimum link delay must be greater than the round trip transmission time the peer requres If you apply an input policy with PFC disabled no pfc mode on e You can enable link level flow control on the interface To delete the input policy first disable link level flow control PFC is then automatically enabled on the interface because an interface is by default PFC enabled e PFC still allows you to configure lossless queues on a port to ensure no drop handling of lossless traffic Es NOTE You cannot enable PFC and link level flow control at the same time on an interface When you apply an input policy to an interface an error message displays if e The PFC dotlp priorities result in more than two lossless port queues globally on the switch Link level flow control is already enabled You cannot be enable PFC and link level flow control at the same time on an interface e Ina switch stack configure all
224. d by FIP snooping in server facing ports in ENode mode e MTU auto configuration MTU size is set to mini jumbo 2500 bytes when a port is in Switchport mode the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch and the FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs Link aggregation group LAG FIP snooping is supported on port channels on ports on which PFC mode is on PFC is operationally up 86 FIP Snooping FIP Snooping Prerequisites On an Aggregator FIP snooping requires the following conditions e AFIP snooping bridge requires DCBX and PFC to be enabled on the switch for lossless Ethernet connections refer to Data Center Bridging DCB Dell recommends that you also enable ETS ETS is recommended but not required DCBX and PFC mode are auto configured on Aggregator ports and FIP snooping is operational on the port If the PFC parameters in a DCBX exchange with a peer are not synchronized FIP and FCoE frames are dropped on the port e VLAN membership The Aggregator auto configures the VLANs which handle FCoE traffic You can reconfigure VLAN membership on a port vlan tagged command Each FIP snooping port is auto configured to operate in Hybrid mode so that it accepts both tagged and untagged VLAN frames Tagged VLAN membership is auto configured on each FIP snooping port that sends and receives FCoE traffic and has links with an FCF ENode server or another FIP snooping bridge The default VLAN memb
225. d dynamic allocations can exceed the actual amount of available memory this allocation is called oversubscription If you choose to oversubscribe the dynamic allocation a burst of traffic on one interface might prevent other interfaces from receiving the configured dynamic allocation which causes packet loss You cannot allocate more than the available memory for the dedicated buffers If the system determines that the sum of the configured dedicated buffers allocated to the queues is more than the total available memory the configuration is rejected returning a syslog message similar to the following 00 04 20 S50N 0 SDIFFSERV 2 DSA DEVICE BUFFER UNAVAILABLE Unable to allocate dedicated buffers for stack unit 0 port pipe 0 egress port 25 due to unavailability of cells Dell Networking OS Behavior When you remove a buffer profile using the no buffer profile fp cs command from CONFIGURATION mode the buffer profile name still appears in the output of theshow buffer profile detail summary command After a stack unit reset the buffer profile correctly returns to the default values but the profile name remains Remove it from the show 544 Debugging and Diagnostics buffer profile detail summary command output by entering no buffer fp uplink csf stack unit port set buffer policy from CONFIGURATION mode and no buffer policy from INTERFACE mode To display the allocations for any buffer profile use
226. d from EXEC Privilege mode as shown in the following example The interface index is a binary number with bits that indicate the slot number port number interface type and card type of the interface The Dell Networking OS converts this binary index number to decimal and displays it in the output of the show interface command Starting from the least significant bit LSB e the first 14 bits represent the card type e the next 4 bits represent the interface type the next bits represent the port number the next 5 bits represent the slot number e the next 1 bit is O for a physical interface and 1 for a logical interface e the next 1 bit is unused For example the index 44634369 is 10101010010001000100000001 in binary The binary interface index for TenGigabitEthernet 0 41 of an Aggregator Notice that the physical logical bit and the final unused bit are not given The interface is physical so this must be represented by a 0 bit and the unused bit is always 0 These two bits are not given because they are the most significant bits and leading zeros are often omitted For interface indexing slot and port numbering begins with binary one If the Dell Networking system begins slot and port numbering from O binary 1 represents slot and port O In S4810 the first interface is 0 0 but in the Aggregator the first interface is 0 1 Hence in the Aggregator 0 Os Ifindex is unused and Ifindex creation logic is not changed Because Ze
227. dapter address fabric address interface or alias specifies S5000 supports using World Wide Port Name WWPN Fibre Channel ID FC ID or alias as members of a zone e WWPN End device s port WWN name e FC ID Switch assigned 24 bit device FC address e Alias User defined name of a zone member NOTE The M I O Aggregator does not support using WWNN or Domain Port as members of a zone Creating Zone and Adding Members To create a zone and add members to the zone use the following commands 1 Create a zone CONFIGURATION mode fc zone zonename 2 Add members to a zone ZONE CONFIGURATION mode member word The member can be WWPN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 port ID 000000 or alias name word Example of Creating a Zone and Adding Members Dell conf 4fc zone zl Dell conf fc zone z1 member 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 308 FC FLEXIO FPORT Dell conf fc zone zl1l member 020202 Dell conf fc zone z1 Htexit Creating Zone Alias and Adding Members To create a zone alias and add devices to the alias follow these steps 1 Create a zone alias name CONFIGURATION mode fc alias ZoneAliasName 2 Add devices to an alias ALIAS CONFIGURATION mode member word The member can be WWPN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 port ID 000000 or alias name word Example of Creating a Zone Alias and Adding Members Dell conf fc alias all Dell conf fc alias all member 030303 Dell conf fc alias all exit Dell conf fc zone z1
228. description of the input policy DCB INPUT POLICY mode description text The maximum is 32 characters Exit DCB input policy configuration mode Data Center Bridging DCB DCB INPUT POLICY mode exit 7 Enter interface configuration mode CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot port 8 Applythe input policy with the PFC configuration to an ingress interface INTERFACE mode dcb policy input policy name 9 Repeat Steps 1 to 8 on all PFC enabled peer interfaces to ensure lossless traffic service Dell Networking OS Behavior As soon as you apply a DCB policy with PFC enabled on an interface DCBx starts exchanging information with PFC enabled peers The IEEE802 1Qbb CEE and CIN versions of PFC Type Length Value TLV are supported DCBx also validates PFC configurations that are received in TLVs from peer devices By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic To achieve complete lossless handling of traffic also enable PFC on all DCB egress ports or configure the dotlp priority queue assignment of PFC priorities to lossless queues To remove a DCB input policy including the PFC configuration it contains use the no dcb input policy name command in INTERFACE Configuration mode To disable PFC operation on an interface use the no pfc mode on command in DCB Input Policy Configuration mode PFC is enabled and disabled as the global DCB operation is enabled dcb enable or disable
229. dle interfaces is automatically activated on all the port channels except the port channel that is configured as a VLT interconnect link during the booting of the switch This functionality is supported on I O Aggregators in PMUX Standalone and VLT modes By default this capability is enabled on all of the port channels set up on the switch You can use the show link bundle distribution port channel interface number command to display the traffic handling and utilization of the member interfaces of the port channel The following table describes the output fields of this show command Table 11 Output Field Descriptions for show link bundle distribution port channel Command Field Description Link bundle trigger threshold Threshold value that is the checkpoint exceeding which the link bundle is marked as being overutilized and alarm is generated LAG bundle number Number of the LAG bundle Utilization In Percent Traffic usage in percentage of the packets processed by the port channel Alarm State Indicates whether an alarm is generated if over utilization of the port channel occurred The value Active is displayed for this field 148 Link Aggregation Field Description Interface Slot and port number and the type of the member interface of the port channel Line Protocol Indicates whether the interface is administratively up or down Utilization In Percent Traffic usage in percentage of the packets processed by the partic
230. dp end R1 conf if te 1 31 do show lldp neighbors Loc PortID Rem Host Name Rem Port Id Rem Chassis Id Te 0 2 00 00 c9 b1 3b 82 00 00 c9 b1 3b 82 Te 0 3 B 00 00 c9 ad 6 12 00 00 c9 ad 6 12 Example of Viewing Details Advertised by Neighbors Dell show lldp neighbors detail Local Interface Te 0 2 has 1 neighbor Total Frames Out 16843 Total Frames In 17464 Total Neighbor information Age outs 0 Total Multiple Neighbors Detected O0 Total Frames Discarded 0 Total In Error Frames 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs 0 Total TLVs Discarded 0 Next packet will be sent after 16 seconds The neighbors are given below a a Remote Chassis ID Subtype Mac address 4 Remote Chassis ID 00 00 c9 b1 3b 82 Remote Port Subtype Mac address 3 Remote Port ID 00 00 c9 b1 3b 82 Local Port ID TenGigabitEthernet 0 2 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index 7 Remote TTL 120 Information valid for next 105 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor 1d21h56m Remote System Desc Emulex OneConnect 10Gb Multi function Adapter Existing System Capabilities Station only Enabled System Capabilities Station only Local Interface Te 0 3 has 1 neighbor Total Frames Out 39165 Total Frames In 40650 Total Neighbor information Age outs 0 Total Multiple Neighbors Detected 0 Total Frames Discarded 0 Total In Error Frames 0 172 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP To
231. ds a numbering conflict by assigning the new switch the first available stack number e fthe stack has been provisioned for the stack number that is assigned to the new unit the pre configured provisioning must match the switch type If there is a conflict between the provisioned switch type and the new unit a mismatch error message is displayed Resetting a Unit on a Stack Use the following reset commands to reload any of the member units or the standby in a stack If you try to reset the stack master the following error message is displayed Error Reset of master unit is not allowed To rest a unit on a stack use the following commands e Reload a stack unit from the master switch Stacking 245 EXEC Privilege mode reset stack unit unit number e Reset a stack unit when the unit is in a problem state EXEC Privilege mode reset stack unitunit number hard Removing an Aggregator from a Stack and Restoring Quad Mode To remove an Aggregator from a stack and return the 40GbE stacking ports to 4x10GbE quad mode follow the below steps 1 Disconnect the stacking cables from the unit The unit can be powered on or off and can be online or offline 2 Logon to the CLI and enter Global Configuration mode Login username Password Dell enable Dell configure 3 Configure the Aggregator to operate in standalone mode stack unit 0 iom mode standalone CONFIGURATION 4 Logon to the CLI and reboot each
232. dware stack unit drops unit port e Identify which interface is experiencing internal drops Debugging and Diagnostics how hardware layer2 layer3 eg acl in acl stack unit 0 5 port set 0 0 how hardware buffer inteface interface priority group id all queue how hardware buffer stats snapshot resource interface interface priority show hardware drops interface interface Example of the show hardware stack unit Command to View Drop Counters Statistics Del UNI d n d n d n d 3 d 3 3 3 3 3 d 3 3 3 d g 0000000000 H Del Por c K o0 Q e o 73004 CO O0 ES OOOO Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dro Ing IBP Por IPv l show hardware stack unit 0 drops T No O al Ingress Drops 0 al IngMac Drops 0 al Mmu Drops 0 al EgMac Drops 0 al Egress Drops 0 T No 1 al Ingress Drops 0 al IngMac Drops 0 al Mmu Drops 0 al EgMac Drops 0 al Egress Drops 0 l show hardware stack unit 0 drops unit 0 t Ingress Drops IngMac Drops 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ps in Interface Te 2 1 Ingress Drops ress Drops CBP Full Drops tSTPnotFwd Drops 4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP L2 L3 Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops Ingress MAC counters Ingress FCS Drops Ingress MMU Ingress TUExceeds Drops ira U Drops Li
233. e Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format A B C D e SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes e Display SSH connection information EXEC Privilege mode show ip ssh Specifying an SSH Version The following example uses the ip ssh server version 2 command to enable SSH version 2 and the show ip ssh command to confirm the setting Dell conf tip ssh server version 2 Dell conf do show ip ssh SSH server enabled SSH server version O oa SSH server vrf default SSH server ciphers 3des cbc aes128 cbc aes192 cbc aes256 cbc aes128 ctr aes192 ctr aes256 ctr SSH server macs hmac md5 hmac md5 96 hmac shal hmac shal 96 hmac sha2 256 hmac sha2 256 96 SSH server kex algorithms diffie hellman group exchange shal diffie hellman groupl shal diffie hellman groupl4 shal Password Authentication enabled Hostbased Authentication disabled RSA Authentication disabled Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP Dell conf 4 To disable SSH server functions usethe no ip ssh server enable command Security 209 Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy SCP to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another use the following commands 1 On Switch 1 set the SSH port number port 22 by default CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2 On Switch 1 enable SSH CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3 On Switch 2 invoke SCP CONFIGURATION MO
234. e WWNN and the worldwide port name WWPN Information on NPIV sessions is also displayed show fip snooping config Displays the FIP snooping status and configured FC MAP values show fip snooping enode enode mac Displays information on the ENodes in FIP address snooped sessions including the ENode interface 88 and MAC address FCF MAC address VLAN ID and FC ID FIP Snooping show fip snooping fcf fcf mac address clear fip snooping database interface vlan vlan id fcoe mac address enode mac address fcf mac address show fip snooping statistics interface vlan vlan id interface port type port slot interface port channel port channel number clear fip snooping statistics interface vlan vlan id interface port type port slot interface port channel port channel number show fip snooping system show fip snooping vlan Displays information on the FCFs in FIP snooped sessions including the FCF interface and MAC address FCF interface VLAN ID FC MAP value FKA advertisement period and number of ENodes connected Clears FIP snooping information on a VLAN for a specified FCoE MAC address ENode MAC address or FCF MAC address and removes the corresponding ACLs generated by FIP snooping Displays statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all interfaces including VLANs physical ports and port channels Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs a specified VLAN or a spe
235. e that is when DCB features are not compatibly configured on a peer device and the local switch Mis configuration detection is feature specific because some DCB features support asymmetric configuration e Reconfigures a peer device with the DCB configuration from its configuration source if the peer device is willing to accept configuration e Accepts the DCB configuration from a peer if a DCBx port is in willing mode to accept a peer s DCB settings and then internally propagates the received DCB configuration to its peer ports DCBx Port Roles The following DCBx port roles are auto configured on an Aggregator to propagate DCB configurations learned from peer DCBx devices internally to other switch ports Auto upstream The port advertises its own configuration to DCBx peers and receives its configuration from DCBx peers ToR or FCF device The port also propagates its configuration to other ports on the switch The first auto upstream that is capable of receiving a peer configuration is elected as the configuration source The elected configuration source then internally propagates the configuration to other auto upstream and auto downstream ports Data Center Bridging DCB 51 Auto downstream A port that receives an internally propagated configuration overwrites its local configuration with the new parameter values When an auto upstream port besides the configuration source receives and overwrites its configuration with
236. e 55 4c 4c 29 00 00 Domain Id 2 Switch Port 4 FC Id 02 04 03 Port Name 20 01 d4 ae 52 44 37 b2 Node Name 20 00 d4 ae 52 44 37 b2 Class of Service 8 Symbolic Port Name Broadcom PortO pWWN 20 01 d4 ae 52 44 37 b2 Symbolic Node Name Broadcom BCM57810 FCoE 7 6 3 0 7 6 59 0 WIN KBFI7FJ2FUH Port Type N Port Example of the show c ns switch brief Command Dell show fc ns switch brief Total number of devices 1 Intf Domain FC ID Enode WWPN Enode WWNN Fc 0 3 1 01 35 00 10008802 Tes t 175 8 01 20 00 8c 760 ff 17 8201 Dell Example of the show c zoneset Command Dell show fc zoneset ZoneSetName ZoneName ZoneMember fcoe srv fc tgt brcd sanb brcd cnal wwpnl sanb p2tgtl wwpn FC FLEXIO FPORT 511 Active Zoneset fcoe srv fc tgt ZoneName ZoneMember brcd sanb 10 200 8c27C6 5f 2135 8d 20 02 00 11 0d 03 00 00 Dell Example of the show fc zoneset active Command Dell show fc zoneset active Active Zoneset fcoe srv fc tgt ZoneNam ZoneMember brcd sanb i 10 00 8c 7c 21 5 8d 20 02 00 11 0d 03 00 00 Dell Example of the show fc zone Command Dell show fc zone ZoneNam ZoneMember brcd sanb brcd cnal wwpnl sanb p2tgtl wwpn Dell Example of the show fc alias Command Dell conf tdo show fc alias ZoneAliasName ZoneMember test 20 02 d4 ae 52 44 38 4f 20 34 78 2b cb 6f 65 57 Example of the show fc switch Command
237. e FTOS l enable password level 8 notjohn enable password FTOS username admin password 0 admin username john password 0 john privilege 8 The following example shows the Telnet session for user john The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8 In EXEC Privilege mode john can access only the commands listed In CONFIGURATION mode john can access only the snmp server commands Example of Privilege Level Login and Available Commands apollo telnet 172 31 1 53 Trying 172 3J2 1 53u4 Connected to 172 31 1 53 Escape character is Login john Password Dell show priv Current privilege level is 8 Dell configure Configuring from terminal disable Turn off privileged commands enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC no Negate a command show Show running system information terminal Set terminal line parameters traceroute Trace route to destination Dell confi Dell conf end Exit from Configuration mode Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines The user s privilege level is the same as the privilege level assigned to the terminal line unless a more specific privilege level is assigned to the user To specify a password for the terminal line use the following commands e Configure a custom privilege level for the terminal lines 200 Securi
238. e connected and in 40G native mode Configure stack groups on all stack units Dell Dell configure Dell conf stack unit 0 stack group 0 Dell conf 00 37 46 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 6 STACK PORTS ADDED Ports Fo 0 33 have been configured as stacking ports Please save and reset stack unit 0 for config to take effect Dell conf stack unit 0 stack group 1 Dell conf 00 37 57 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 6 STACK PORTS ADDED Ports Fo 0 37 have been configured as stacking ports Please save and reset stack unit 0 for config to take effect Dell conf end De11 00 38 16 SSTKUNITO M CP SYS 5 CONFIG I Configured from console Reload the stack units Dell reload Proceed with reload confirm yes no yes Show the units stacking status Dell show system brief Stack MAC 00 01 e8 el el c3 Reload Type normal reload Next boot normal reload Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 Management online I O Aggregator 1 0 Aggregator lt lt release version gt gt 56 1 Standby online 1 0 Aggregator 1 0 Aggregator lt lt release version gt gt 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present Dell Configuring a Switch Stack To configure and bring up a switch stack follow these steps 1 Connect the 40GbE ports on the base module of two Aggregators using 40G direct attach or QSFP fibre cables Con
239. e default FCoE transit settings 1 Enable the Fibre Channel capability on an Aggregator for the Fibre Channel protocol CONFIGURATION mode feature fc Creating a DCB Map Configure the priority based flow control PFC and enhanced traffic selection ETS settings in a DCB map before you apply them on downstream server facing ports on an Aggregator 1 Create a DCB map to specify PFC and ETS settings for groups of dotip priorities CONFIGURATION mode dcb map name 2 Configure the PFC setting on or off and the ETS bandwidth percentage allocated to traffic in each priority group Configure whether the priority group traffic should be handled with strict priority scheduling The sum of all allocated bandwidth percentages must be 100 percent Strict priority traffic is serviced first Afterward bandwidth allocated to other priority groups is made available and allocated according to the specified percentages If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups Restriction You can enable PFC on a maximum of two priority queues 318 NPIV Proxy Gateway Repeat this step to configure PFC and ETS traffic handling for each priority group for example priority group 0 bandwidth 60 pfc off priority group 1 bandwidth 20 pfc onpriority group 2 bandwidth 20 pfc onpriority group 4 strict priority p c off DCB MAP mode priority group group num bandwidth percentage stric
240. e image in the boot partition of the member unit from the corresponding partition in the master unit To upgrade an individual stack unit with a new Dell Networking OS version follow the below steps 1 Download the Dell Networking OS image from the master s boot partition to the member unit and upgrade the relevant boot partition in the single stack member unit EXEC Privilege mode upgrade system stack unit unit number partition 2 Reboot the stack unit from the master switch to load the Dell Networking OS image from the same partition Stacking 255 CONFIGURATION mode boot system stack unit unit number primary system partition 3 Save the configuration EXEC Privilege mode write memory 4 Reset the stack unit to activate the new Dell Networking OS version EXEC Privilege mode power cycle stack unit unit number Example of Upgrading a Single Stack Unit The following example shows how to upgrade an individual stack unit Dell l upgrade system stack unit 1 A Image upgraded to Stack unit 1 Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Jan configure conf end Jan 3 14 27 00 write memory 51 conf 4 boot system stack unit 1 primary system A PKUNITO M CP SYS 5 CONFIG I Configured from console 3 14 27 10 SSTKUNIJ startup config in flash by default Synchronizing data to peer Stack unit Dell l O M CP power cycle stack unit 1 SFILI EMGR 5 FII ESAV ED Copied
241. e keyword informs To send the SNMP version to use for notification messages enter the keyword version To identify the SNMPv1 community string enter the name of the community string 2 Specify which traps the Dell Networking system sends to the trap receiver CONFIGURATION mode snmp server enable traps Enable all Dell Networking enterprise specific and RFC defined traps using the snmp server enable traps command from CONFIGURATION mode Enable all of the RFC defined traps using the snmp server enable traps snmp command from CONFIGURATION mode 3 Specify the interfaces out of which Dell Networking OS sends SNMP traps CONFIGURATION mode Sump server Lrap source Example of RFC Defined SNMP Traps and Related Enable Commands The following example lists the RFC defined SNMP traps and the command used to enable each The coldStart and warmStart traps are enabled using a single command snmp authentication SNMP AUTH FAIL SNMP Authentication failed Request with invalid community string snmp coldstart SNMP COLD START Agent Initialized SNMP COLD START 220 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP WARM START Agent Initialized SNMP WARM START snmp linkdown PORT LINKDN changed interface state to down d snmp linkup PORT LINKUP changed interface state to up d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise specific SNMP traps using one of the following list
242. e mode clear lldp counters interface Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving To view the TLVs use the following commands View a readable version of the TLVs debug lldp brief View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU debug lldp detail 174 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 1 h l Figure 27 The debug lldp detail Command LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networkings OS supports all IEEE 802 1AB MIB objects The following tables list the objects associated with e Received and transmitted TLVs e LLDP configuration on the local agent e IEEE 802 1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs Received and transmitted LLDP MED TLVs Table 17 LLDP Configuration MIB Objects MIB Object LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description Category LLDP adminStatus ldpPortConfigAdminStatus Whether you enable the Configuration local LLDP agent for transmit receive or both msgTxHold ldpMessageTxHoldMultiplie Multiplier value r Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 175 MIB Object Category Basic TLV Selection LLDP Statistics 176 LLDP Variable msg TxInterval rxInfoTTL txInfoTTL mibBasicTLVsTxEnable mibMgmtAdarInstanceTxEn able statsAgeoutsTotal statsFramesDiscardedT otal statsFramesInErrorsTotal statsFramesInTotal statsFramesOutTotal statsTLVsDiscardedTotal statsTLVsUnr
243. e reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix length values Optionally for an IPv4 route you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding VRF table The next hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4 IPv6 route In order for an route s reachability or metric to be tracked the route must appear as an entry in the routing table A tracked route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix length match an entry in the table For example when configured as a tracked route 10 0 0 0 24 does not match the routing table entry 10 0 0 0 8 Similarly for an IPv6 address 3333 100 200 300 400 80 does not match routing table entry 3333 100 200 300 64 If no route table entry has the exact IPv4 IPv6 address and prefix length the tracked route is considered to be DOWN In addition to the entry of a route in the routing table you can configure the UP DOWN state of a tracked route to be determined in the following ways e By the reachability of the route s next hop router 186 Object Tracking The UP DOWN state of the route is determined by the entry of the next hop address in the ARP cache A tracked route is considered to be reachable if there is an ARP cache entry for the route s next hop address If the next hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for
244. e route table Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way If the state of an object changes back to its former UP DOWN state before the timer expires the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified If the timer expires and an object s state has changed a notification is sent to the client For example if the DOWN timer is running when an interface goes down and comes back up the DOWN timer is cancelled and the client is not notified of the event If you do not configure a delay a notification is sent when a change in the state of a tracked object is detected The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds VRRP Object Tracking As a client VRRP can track up to 20 objects including route entries and Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces in addition to the 12 tracked interfaces supported for each VRRP group You can assign a unique priority cost value from 1 to 254 to each tracked VRRP object or group interface The priority cost is subtracted from the VRRP group priority if a tracked VRRP object is in a DOWN state If a VRRP group router acts as owner master the run time VRRP group priority remains fixed at 255 and changes in the state of a tracked object have no effect N
245. e show commands in the following table Examples of these show commands follow this table Command Description show config Displays the fabric parameters show fcoe map Displays the fcoe map show fc ns switch Display all the devices in name server database of the switch D show fc ns switch isplay all the devices in name server database of the switch brief version brief show fc zoneset Displays the zoneset show fc zoneset Displays the active zoneset active show fc zone Displays the configured zone show fc alias Displays the configured alias show fc switch Displays the FC Switch mode and world wide name Example of the show config Command Dell conf fcoe SAN FABRIC show config fcoe map SAN FABRIC description SAN FABRIC fc map Oefc00 fabric id 1002 vlan 1002 fc fabric default zone allow all Dell conf fcoe SAN FABRIC 310 FC FLEXIO FPORT Example of the show fcoe map Command Dell conf do show fcoe map Fabric Name map Fabric Type Fport Fabric Id 1002 Vlan Id 1002 Vlan priority 3 FC MAP 0e c00 FKA ADV Period 8 Fcf Priority 128 Config State ACTIVE Oper State UP Switch Config Parameters DomainID 2 Switch Zoning Parameters Default Zone Mode Deny Active Zoneset set embers Fc 0 41 Te 0 29 Example of the show c ns switch Command Dell conf tdo show fc ns sw Total number of devices 1 Switch Name 28 4
246. e stack group for each stack unit CONFIGURATION mode stack unit unit no stack group stack group id Dell conf stack unit 0 stack group 0 Dell conf 02 26 05 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 6 STACK PORTS ADDED Ports Fo 0 33 have been configured as stacking ports Please save and reload for config to take effect Stack groups are easier to think of simply as stack ports For example using the stack group 0 command simply turns the lower port port 9 into a stacking port Similarly stack group 1 stack group 2 and stack group 3 commands correspond to ports 10 11 and 12 respectively K NOTE Stack group is supported only in PMUX mode 3 Continue to run the stack unit 0 stack group lt 0 3 gt command to add additional stack ports to the switch using the stack group mapping Cabling Stacked Switches Before you configure MXL switches in a stack connect the 40G direct attach or QSFP cables and transceivers to connect 40GbE ports on two Aggregators in the same or different chassis Cabling Restrictions The following restrictions apply when setting up a stack of Aggregators e Only daisy chain or ring topologies are supported star and full mesh topologies are not supported e Stacking is supported only on 40GbE links by connecting 40GbE ports on the base module Stacking is not supported on 10GbE ports or 4x10GbE ports e Use only QSFP transceivers and QSFP or direct attach cables purchased separately to connect stacking ports
247. e the following commands 1 Configure object tracking on the line protocol state of a Layer 2 interface CONFIGURATION mode track object id interface interface line protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535 2 Optional Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface OBJECT TRACKING mode delay up seconds down seconds Valid delay times are from O to 180 seconds The default is 0 3 Optional Identify the tracked object with a text description OBJECT TRACKING mode description text The text string can be up to 80 characters 4 Optional Display the tracking configuration and the tracked object s status EXEC Privilege mode show track object id Example of Configuring Object Tracking Dell conf track 100 interface tengigabitethernet 7 1 line protocol Dell conf track 100 4delay up 20 Dell conf track 100 4description San Jose data center 184 Object Tracking Dell conf track 100 end Dell show track 100 Track 100 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7 1 line protocol Description San Jose data center Tracking a Layer 3 Interface You can create an object that tracks the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 Layer 3 interface You can track the routing status of any of the following Layer 3 interfaces e Fora10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information Fora port channel interface enter the keyword
248. ecifies a range of untagged VLANs Separate VLAN IDs with a comma specify a VLAN range with a dash for example vlan tagged 3 5 7 When you delete a VLAN using the no vlan vlan id command any interfaces assigned to the VLAN are assigned to the default VLAN as untagged interfaces If you configure additional VLAN membership and save it to the startup configuration the new VLAN configuration is activated following a system reboot Dell Networking OS Behavior When two or more server facing ports with VLAN membership are configured in a LAG based on the NIC teaming configuration in connected servers learned via LACP the resulting LAG is a tagged member of all the configured VLANs and an untagged member of the VLAN to which the port with the lowest port ID belongs For example if port 0 3 is an untagged member of VLAN 2 and port 0 4 is an untagged member of VLAN 3 the resulting LAG consisting of the two ports is an untagged member of VLAN 2 and a tagged member of VLAN 3 Displaying VLAN Membership To view the configured VLANs enter the show vlan command in EXEC privilege mode Dell show vlan Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated Q U Untagged T Tagged x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports 1 Inactive E
249. ecognizedTota l LLDP MIB Object IdpMessageTxlnterval IdpRxinfoTTL IdpTxInfoTTL ldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnabl e UldpManAddrPortsTxEnable lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal lldpStatsRxPortFramesDisca rdedTotal ldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscard edTotal lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnreco gnizedTotal Description Transmit Interval value Time to live for received TLVs Time to live for transmitted TLVs Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports The management addresses defined for the system and the ports through which they are enabled for transmission Total number of times that a neighbor s information is deleted on the local system due to an rxInfoTTL timer expiration Total number of LLDP frames received then discarded Total number of LLDP frames received on a port with errors Total number of LLDP frames received through the port Total number of LLDP frames transmitted through the port Total number of TLVs received then discarded Total number of all TLVs the local agent does not recognize Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Table 18 LLDP System MIB Objects TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object 1 Chassis ID chassis ID subtype Local lidpLocChassisldSub type Remote lidpRemChassisldSu btype chassid ID Local lidpLocChassisld Remote lidpRemChassisld Port I
250. ed Next Boot Status Power On Off 1 0 SFP SFP AUTO Good On 1 1 QSFP QSFP AUTO Good On Mismatch Dell The status of the MIBS is as follows snmpwalk c public v 2c 10 16 130 148 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 2 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 1 1 1 2 1 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 1 2 2 STRING PowerConnect I O Aggregator SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 3 STRING Module 0 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 4 STRING Unit 0 Port 1 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 5 STRING Unit 0 Port 2 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 6 STRING Unit 0 Port 3 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 7 STRING Unit 0 Port 4 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 8 STRING Unit 0 Port 5 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 9 STRING Unit 0 Port 6 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 10 STRING Unit 0 Port 7 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 11 STRING Unit 0 Port 8 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 12 STRING Unit 0 Port 9 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 13 STRING Unit 0 Port 10 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 1 2 14 STRING Unit 0 Port 11 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 15 STRING Unit 0 Port 12 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 16 STRING Unit 0 Port 13 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 17 STRING Unit 0 Port 14 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 18 STRING Unit 0 Port 15 10G Level SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 47 L 2 19 STRING Unit 0 Port 16 10G Level
251. ed VLAN traffic Ports 1 to 32 are internal server facing ports which can operate in LOGbE mode Ports 33 to 56 are external ports auto configured to operate by default as follows The base module ports operate in standalone 4x10GbE mode You can configure these ports to operate in 40GbE stacking mode When configured for stacking you cannot use 40GbE base module ports for uplinks Ports on the 2 Port 40 GbE QSFP module operate only in 4x10GbE mode You cannot use them for stacking 18 Before You Start Ports on the 4 Port 10 GbE SFP and 4 Port LOGBASE T modules operate only in LOGbE mode For more information about how ports are numbered refer to Port Numbering Link aggregation All uplink ports are configured in a single LAG LAG 128 e VLANs All ports are configured as members of all 4094 VLANs All VLANs are up and can send or receive layer 2 traffic For more information refer to VLAN Membership e Data center bridging capability exchange protocol DCBx Server facing ports auto configure in auto downstream port roles uplink ports auto configure in auto upstream port roles Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE connectivity and FCoE initiation protocol FIP snooping The uplink port channel LAG 128 is enabled to operate in Fibre channel forwarder FCF port mode e Link layer discovery protocol LLDP Enabled on all ports to advertise management TLV and system name with neighboring devices e Interne
252. ed command options To enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise specific SNMP traps use the following command e Enable a subset of SNMP traps snmp server enable traps NOTE The envmon option enables all environment traps including those traps that are enabled with the envmon supply envmon temperature and envmon fan options Example of Dell Networking Enterprise specific SNMP Traps envmon CARD SHUTDOWN sLine card d down s CARD DOWN sLine card d down s LINECARDUP sLine card d is up CARD MISMATCH Mismatch line card d is type s type s required RPM STATE RPM1 is in Active State E RPMO is in Standby State RPM STATE RPM DOWN RPM 0 down hard reset RPM DOWN RPM 0 down card removed HOT FAILOVER RPM Failover Completed SFM DISCOVERY Found SFM 1 SFM REMOVE Removed SFM 1 MAJOR SFM Major alarm Switch fabric down MAJOR SFM CLR Major alarm cleared Switch fabric up MINOR SFM MInor alarm No working standby SFM MINOR SFM CLR Minor alarm cleared Working standby SFM present TASK SUSPENDED SUSPENDED svce d inst d task s RPMO P CP CHMGR 2 CARD PARITY ERR ABNORMAL TASK TERMINATION CRASH task s s CPU_THRESHOLD Cpu s usage above threshold Cpu5SecUsage d CPU THRESHOLD CLR Cpu s usage drops below threshold Cpu5SecUsage d EM THRESHOLD Memory s usage above threshold MemUsage d EM THRESHOLD CLR
253. ed on LACP PDU All VLANS Available on all server and uplink ports Configuration Examples Following are the configuration examples for common upstream switches To establish a functional uplink and bring the network ports on PowerEdge FC Series servers up FC830 FC630 FC430 FC 620 and FC420 use the following steps 1 Ensure that the FN IOM system is in Standalone Mode 2 Create a LACP LAG on the upstream top of rack switch 3 Verify the connection By default the network ports on the PowerEdge FC Series servers installed in the FX2 chassis is down until the uplink port channel is operational on the FN IOM system It is due to an Uplink Failure Detection by that when upstream connectivity fails the FN IOM disables the downstream links 22 Before You Start You can disable the UFD on a preconfigured FN IOM using the following commands Dell configure Dell conf uplink state group 1 Dell conf uplink state group 1 no enable Dell show uplink state group Uplink State Group 1 Status Disabled Down To re enable UFD use the following commands Dell configure Dell conf uplink state group 1 Dell conf uplink state group 1 enable Dell show uplink state group Uplink State Group 1 Status Enabled Up Sample FN IOM commands and outputs In the following port channel 128 is up The port channel consists of ports TenGigabitEthernet 0 11 and TenGigabitEthernet 0 12 Dell show interfaces port channel 128
254. eeeeeneeseeesteeeieeeneeetees 324 show fcoe map Command Examples cccccccceeeesceeeeceeeeeeaaeeeceeneeeeeseaaeeeescaeeecseteeeeeeseeeess show qos dcb map Command Examples show npiv devices brief Command Example sss 327 show npiv devices Command Example coi eye eee ee eters 328 show fc switch Command Example c cecceccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeceeeaeeaeseseeseeeeeeeeeeaes 329 27 Upgrade Proc ici caes 330 Get Help wit Upgrades viii A me tedio eo eis 330 28 Debugging and Diagnostics eese 331 Supported MOU ES csi at el 331 Debugging Aggregator Operation nennen enne nennen nns 331 All interfaces on the Aggregator are operationally down 331 Broadcast unknown multicast and DLF packets switched at a very low rate 332 Flooded packets on all VLANs are received on a server 332 Software show Commands o cer ede e pet be Lp a een di beth ird ru Offline Diagnostics s 3 ner oed re E ERE UR EU ERR T Fe a Pr pee aea Important Points to Remember Running Offline Diagnostics enne nnmn sten nnne nnne nennt enin nentes nnne Trace OO iii A e RE reple e dede ea aed or da dug ee e RAE VEN EEG Auto Save on Crash or Rollover Using the Show Hardware COMMands ceccceccceceseceeeeeeeeeeaeceaeceaeceneeeeecaeecseeeaeeseeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaaes 337 Environmental MOnitOring cheno ane ds dul aw daa 339 Recognize an Over Temperature COndition ccce
255. efines VLANs regarding 802 1d as 802 1d itself does not define them As a switchport must belong a VLAN the default VLAN or a configured VLAN all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN For this reason the Q Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query Moreover specific to MAC address query the MAC address indexes dot1dTpFdbTable only for a single forwarding database while dotiqTpFdbTable has two indices VLAN ID and MAC address to allow for multiple forwarding databases and considering that the same MAC address is learned on multiple VLANs The VLAN ID is added as the first index so that MAC addresses are read by the VLAN sorted lexicographically The MAC address is part of the OID instance so in this case lexicographic order is according to the most significant octet Table 22 MIB Objects for Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries in the Forwarding Database MIB Object OID MIB Description dotidTpFdbTable 1 5 6 1 2 1 17 4 5 Q BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on the default VLAN dotiqTpFdbTable 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 2 2 Q BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on non default VLANs dotSaCurAggFdb Table 1 5 6 1 4 1 6027 3 2 1 1 5 F10 LINK List the learned MAC AGGREGATION MIB addresses of aggregated links LAG Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 225 In the following example R1 has one dynamic MAC address learned off of port TenGigabitEthernet 0 7 which is a member of
256. egator stack unit 1 port 33 portmode quad Interfaces 105 stack unit 1 port 37 portmode quad zMore Disabling and Re enabling a Physical Interface By default all port interfaces on an Aggregator are operationally enabled no shutdown to send and receive Layer 2 traffic You can reconfigure a physical interface to shut it down by entering the shutdown command To re enable the interface enter the no shutdown command 1 Enter the keyword interface followed by the type of interface and slot port information e For a 10GbE interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot port numbers for example interface tengigabitethernet 0 5 e For the management interface on a stack unit enter the keyword ManagementEthernet followed by the slot port numbers for example interface managementethernet 0 0 CONFIGURATION mode interface interfac 2 Enter the shutdown command to disable the interface INTERFACE mode shutdown To confirm that the interface is enabled use the show config command in INTERFACE mode To leave INTERFACE mode use the exit command or end command You cannot delete a physical interface The management IP address on the D fabric provides a dedicated management access to the system The switch interfaces support Layer 2 traffic over the 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces These interfaces can also become part of virtual interfaces such as VLANs or port channels For more information ab
257. eived on the interface Accepts Number of FDISC Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface Rejects Number of FLOGO Number of FIP FLOGO accept frames received on the interface Accepts Number of FLOGO Number of FIP FLOGO reject frames received on the interface Rejects Number of CVLs Number of FIP clear virtual link frames received on the interface Number of FCF Number of FCF discovery timeouts that occurred on the interface Discovery Timeouts Number of VN Number of VN port session timeouts that occurred on the interface Port Session Timeouts Number of Session Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the failures due to interface Hardware Config show fip snooping system Command Example Dell show fip snooping system Global Mode Enabled FCOE VLAN List Operational 1 100 FCFs ee Enodes 22 Sessions s K NOTE NPIV sessions are included in the number of FIP snooped sessions displayed show fip snooping vlan Command Example Dell show fip snooping vlan Default VLAN VLAN FC MAP FCFs Enodes Sessions 1 qn 100 OXOEFCOO 1 2 ENS K NOTE NPIV sessions are included in the number of FIP snooped sessions displayed FIP Snooping 93 FIP Snooping Example The below illustration shows an Aggregator used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode server blade and an FCF ToR switch The ToR switch operates as an FCF and F
258. emaining units for a standby role After the former master switch recovers despite having a higher priority or MAC address it does not recover its master role but instead takes the next available role MAC Addressing All port interfaces in the stack use the MAC address of the management interface on the master switch The MAC address of the chassis in which the master Aggregator is installed is used as the stack MAC address The stack continues to use the master s chassis MAC address even after a failover The MAC address is not refreshed until the stack is reloaded and a different unit becomes the stack master Stacking LAG When you use multiple links between stack units Dell Networking Operating System automatically bundles them in a stacking link aggregation group LAG to provide aggregated throughput and redundancy The stacking LAG is established automatically and transparently by operating system without user configuration after peering is detected and behaves as follows e The stacking LAG dynamically aggregates it can lose link members or gain new links e Shortest path selection inside the stack if multiple paths exist between two units in the stack the shortest path is used Stacking VLANs When you configure an Aggregator to operate in stacking mode Configuring and Bringing Up a Stack VLANs are reconfigured as follows e If an Aggregator port belonged to all 4094 VLANs in standalone mode default all VLAN
259. emperature condition use the following information Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels 2 Check air flow through the system Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly 3 After the software has determined that the temperature levels are within normal limits you can re power the card safely To bring back the line card online use the power on command in EXEC mode In addition Dell Networking requires that you install blanks in all slots without a line card to control airflow for adequate system cooling 340 Debugging and Diagnostics NOTE Exercise care when removing a card if it has exceeded the major or shutdown thresholds the card could be hot to the touch Example of the show enivornment Command Dell show environment Unit Environment Status Unit Status Temp Voltage TempStatus 0 online 59C ok 2 Management Unit Thermal Sensor Readings deg C Unit Sensor0 Sensorl Sensor2 Dell Recognize an Under Voltage Condition If the system detects an under voltage condition it sends an alarm To recognize this condition look for the following system message CHMGR 1 CARD SHUTDOWN Major alarm Line card 2 down auto shutdown due to under voltage This message indicates that the specified card is not receiving enough power In response the system first shuts down Power over Ethernet PoE Troubleshoot an Under Voltage Condition
260. er This command is applicable only in PMUX mode 3 Add the interface to the second port channel INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode channel member interfac Example of Moving an Interface to a New Port Channel The following example shows moving the TenGigabitEthernet 0 8 interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3 Dell conf if po 4 show config l interface Port channel 4 channel member TenGigabitEthernet 0 8 no shutdown Dell conf if po 4 Dell conf if po 4 Dell conf if po 3 Dell conf if po 3 l no chann tengi 0 8 int port 3 channel tengi 0 8 sho conf interface Port channel 3 channel member TenGigabitEthernet 0 8 shutdown Dell conf if po 3 Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel LAG that must be in oper up status to consider the port channel to be in oper up status To set the oper up status of your links use the following command e Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in oper up status INTERFACE mode minimum links number The default is 1 142 Link Aggregation Example of Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel Dell config t Dell conf tint po 1 Dell conf if po 1 minimum links 5 Dell conf if po 1 Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel perform the following 1 Co
261. er and login server on an external FC switch e FC Flex IOM module is a field replaceable unit FRU Its memory type is electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM which enables it to save manufacturing information such as the serial number It is hot swappable assuming that the module that is removed is replaced by the same type of module in that same slot The FC Flex IO does not have persistent storage for any runtime configuration All the persistent storage for runtime configuration is on the I O Aggregator baseboard e With both FC Flex IO modules present in the I O Aggregator switches the power supply requirement and maximum thermal output are the same as these parameters needed for the M1000 chassis e Each port on the FC Flex IO module contains status indicators to denote the link status and transmission activity For traffic that is being transmitted the port LED shows a blinking green light 294 FC Flex IO Modules he Link LED displays solid green when a proper link with the peer is established If there is no connectivity the LEDs are not lit e The I O Aggregator switches continue to operate in FCoE Gateway mode even if connectivity to a TOR switch does not exist e The I O Aggregator examines whether the FC Flex IO module is inserted into the switch When the FC Flex IO module is present during the boot process the switch runs in FCoE NPIV gateway mode by default When an FC Flex IO module is
262. er is 1 by default and cannot be changed 264 Uplink Failure Detection UFD R1 R1 R1 st amp S2 1 L S2 S1 m 52 N e 3 N LJ e T X p Server Server Server A Switches 1 and 2 have upstream and downstream connections to Router1 and Server via primary Links B Upstream link between Switch1 and Router1 fails Downstream link to Server stays up temporarily C Switch1 disables downstream link to Server Server starts to connect with Router1 using backup link to Switch2 Switch2 starts to use the backup link to Router1 Figure 32 Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink state group An interface in an uplink state group can be a physical interface or a port channel LAG aggregation of physical interfaces An enabled uplink state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces Failure on an upstream interface results in the automatic disabling of downstream interfaces in the uplink state group As a result downstream devices can execute the protection or recovery procedures they have in place to establish alternate connectivity paths as shown in the following illustration Uplink Failure Detection UFD 265 Layer 3 Network When an upstream port channel link goes down UFD brings down a downstream link in the same uplink state group
263. er precedence over the same statically configured management route Static routes are not removed from the running configuration if a dynamically acquired management route added by the DHCP client overwrites a static management route e Management routes added by the DHCP client are not added to the running configuration NOTE Management routes added by the DHCP client include the specific routes to reach a DHCP server in a different subnet and the management route DHCP Client on a VLAN The following conditions apply on a VLAN that operates as a DHCP client e The default VLAN 1 with all ports auto configured as members is the only L3 interface on the Aggregator e When the default management VLAN has a DHCP assigned address and you reconfigure the default VLAN ID number the Aggregator Sends a DHCP release to the DHCP server to release the IP address Sends a DHCP request to obtain a new IP address The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is used for the new default management VLAN DHCP Packet Format and Options DHCP uses the user datagram protocol UDP as its transport protocol The server listens on port 67 and transmits to port 68 the client listens on port 68 and transmits to port 67 The configuration parameters are carried as options in the DHCP packet in Type Length Value TLV format many options are specified in RFC 2132 To limit the number of parameters that servers must Dynamic Host Configuration Proto
264. er than one screen at a time This is similar to the terminal length command except that the no more option affects the output of the specified command only The save command copies the output to a file for future reference NOTE You can filter a single command output multiple times The save option must be the last option entered For example Dell command grep regular expression except regular expression grep other regular expression find regular expression save Multiple Users in Configuration Mode Dell notifies all users when there are multiple users logged in to CONFIGURATION mode A warning message indicates the username type of connection console or VTY and in the case of a VTY connection the IP address of the terminal on which the connection was established For example e On the system that telnets into the switch this message appears 9 Warning The following users are currently configuring the system User lt username gt on line console0 e Onthe system that is connected over the console this message appears 9 Warning User lt username gt on line vty0 10 11 130 2 is in configuration mode If either of these messages appears Dell Networking recommends coordinating with the users listed in the message so that you do not unintentionally overwrite each other s configuration changes Configuration Fundamentals 33 4 Data Center Bridging DCB On an I O Aggregator data cente
265. erAddresses radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet like Interface Types Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base Ethernet Statistics Table Ethernet History Control Table Ethernet History Table Alarm Table Event Table Log Table The Interfaces Group MIB Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base for High Capacity Networks 64 bits Ethernet Statistics High Capacity Table Ethernet History High Capacity Table Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 357 RFC 3418 3434 ANSI TIA 1057 draft grant tacacs 02 IEEE 802 1AB IEEE 802 1AB IEEE 802 1AB sFlow org sFlow org FORCE10 IF EXTENSION MIB FORCE10 LINKAGG MIB FORCE10 COPY CONFIG MIB FORCE10 MONMIB FORCE10 PRODUCTS MIB FORCE10 SS CHASSIS MIB FORCE10 SMI FORCE10 SYSTEM COMPONENT MIB FORCE10 TC MIB FORCE10 TRAP ALARM MIB FORCE10 FIPS NOOPING MI B FORCE10 DCB MIB 358 Full Name Management Information Base MIB for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms
266. ere entered and are not sorted To display all interfaces that have been validated under the interface range context use the show range in Interface Range mode To display the running configuration only for interfaces that are part of interface range use the show configuration command in Interface Range mode You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces separated by commas that you configure by using the interface range command For example if you enter a list of interface ranges such as interface range fo 2 0 1 te 10 0 gi 3 0 fa 0 0 this configuration is considered valid The comma separated list is not required to be separated by spaces in between the ranges You can associate multicast MAC or hardware addresses to an interface range and VLANs by using the mac address table static multicast mac address vlan vlan id output range interface command Bulk Configuration Examples The following are examples of using the interface range command for bulk configuration e Create a Single Range e Create a Multiple Range e Exclude a Smaller Port Range Overlap Port Ranges e Commas Create a Single Range Creating a Single Range Bulk Configuration Dell conf interface range tengigabitethernet 0 1 23 Dell conf if range te 0 1 23 no shutdown Dell conf if range te 0 1 23 Create a Multiple Range Creating a Multiple Range Prompt Dell conf interface range tengigabitethernet 0 5 1
267. erface status IP and MAC addresses and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface If you configure a port channel interface the show interfaces command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel K NOTE To end output from the system such as the output from the show interfaces command enter CTRL C and the Dell Networking Operating System OS returns to the command prompt K NOTE The CLI output may be incorrectly displayed as O zero for the Rx Tx power values Perform an simple network management protocol SNMP query to obtain the correct power information The following example shows the configuration and status information for one interface Dell show interface tengig 1 16 TenGigabitEthernet 1 16 is up line protocol is up 104 Interfaces Hardware is DellForcel0Eth address is 00 01 e8 00 ab 01 Current address is 00 01 e8 00 ab 01 Server Port AdminState is Up Pluggable media not present Interface index is 71635713 Internet address is not set ode of IP Address Assignment NON DHCP Client ID tenG2730001e800ab01 TU 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 11 04 02 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 0 packets 0 bytes 0 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkt
268. erfaces together If one of the four interfaces fails traffic is redistributed across the three remaining interfaces Port Channel Implementation An Aggregator supports only port channels that are dynamically configured using the link aggregation control protocol LACP For more information refer to Link Aggregation Statically configured port channels are not supported The table below lists out the number of port channels per platform Table 7 Number of Port Channels Platform Port channels Members Channel M IO Aggregator 128 16 As soon as a port channel is auto configured the Dell Networking OS treats it like a physical interface For example IEEE 802 1Q tagging is maintained while the physical interface is in the port channel Member ports of a LAG are added and programmed into hardware in a predictable order based on the port ID instead of in the order in which the ports come up With this implementation load balancing yields predictable results across switch resets and chassis reloads A physical interface can belong to only one port channel at a time Each port channel must contain interfaces of the same interface type speed Port channels can contain a mix of 1000 or 10000 Mbps Ethernet interfaces The interface speed 100 1000 or 10000 Mbps used by the port channel is determined by the first port channel member that is physically up Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that do not match the interface speed set by
269. errupted Protocol traffic is managed by the control plane 3 A member switch is elected as the new standby Data traffic on the new standby is uninterrupted The control plane prepares for operation in Warm Standby mode Stack Link Flapping Error Problem Resolution Stacked Aggregators monitor their own stack ports and disable any stack port that flaps five times within 10 seconds If the stacking ports that flap are on the master or standby KERN 2 INT error messages note the units To re enable a downed stacking port power cycle the stacked switch on which the port is installed The following is an example of the stack link flapping error message Error Stack Port 49 has flapped 5 times within 10 seconds Shutting down this stack port now Error Please check the stack cable module and power cycle the stack 10 55 20 SSTKUNIT1I M CP SKERN 2 INT Error Stack Port 50 has flapped 5 times within 10 seconds Shutting down this stack port now 10 55 20 SSTKUNIT1 M CP SKERN 2 INT Error Please check the stack cable module and power cycle the stack 10 55 18 STKUNIT1 M CP SKERN 2 INT Error Stack Port 50 has flapped 5 times within 10 seonds Shutting down this stack port now 10 55 18 STKUNIT1 M CP SKERN 2 INT Error Please check the stack cable module and power cycle the stack Master Switch Recovers from Failure e Problem The master switch recovers from a failure after a reboo
270. ership of the port should continue to operate with untagged frames FIP snooping is not supported on a port that is configured for non default untagged VLAN membership FIP Snooping Restrictions The following restrictions apply to FIP snooping on an Aggregator e The maximum number of FCoE VLANs supported on the Aggregator is eight The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32 To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64 use the fip snooping max sessions per enodemac command This is configurable only in PMUX mode e Ina full FCoE N port ID virtualization NPIV configuration 16 sessions one FLOGI 15 NPIV sessions are supported per ENode In an FCoE NPV confguration only one session is supported per ENode The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping enabled VLAN is 12 Links to other FIP snooping bridges on a FIP snooping enabled port bridge to bridge links are not supported on the Aggregator Configuring FIP Snooping FIP snooping is auto configured on an Aggregator in standalone mode You can display information on FIP snooping operation and statistics by entering show commands You can enable FIP snooping globally on all FCoE VLANs on a switch or on an individual FCoE VLAN By default FIP snooping is disabled To enable FCoE transit on the switch and configure the FCoE transit parameters on ports follow these steps 1 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch CO
271. es 6027 3 2 1 4 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 INTEGER 1 dot3aCurAggStatus SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 4 1 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 INTEGER 1 lt lt Status active 2 status inactive For L3 LAG you do not have this support SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 8500842 23 36 48 42 SNMPv2 MIB snmpTrapOID 0 OID IF MIB linkDown IF MIB ifIndex 33865785 INTEGER 33865785 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 1 1 4 1 2 STRING OSTATE DN Changed interface state to down Tengig 0 1 2010 02 10 14 22 39 10 16 130 4 10 16 130 4 SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 8500842 23 36 48 42 SNMPv2 MIB snmpTrapOID 0 OID IF MIB linkDown IF MIB ifIndex 1107755009 INTEGER 1107755009 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 1 1 4 1 2 STRING OSTATE_DN Changed interface state to down Po 1 2010 02 10 14 22 40 10 16 130 4 10 16 130 4 SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 8500932 23 36 49 32 SNMPv2 MIB snmpTrapOID 0 OID IF MIB linkUp IF MIB ifIndex 33865785 INTEGER 33865785 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 1 1 4 1 2 STRING OSTATE UP Changed interface state to up Tengig 0 1 2010 02 10 14 22 40 10 16 130 4 10 16 130 4 SNMPv2 MIB sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 8500934 23 36 49 34 SNMPv2 MIB snmpTrapOID O OID IF MIB linkUp IF MIB ifIndex 1107755009 INTEGER 1107755009 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 1 1 4 1 2 STRING OSTATE_UP Changed interface state to up Po 1 22 8 Simple Network Ma
272. es Sent 994 HeartBeat Messages Received 978 ICL Hello s Sent 89 ICL Hello s Received 89 Additional VLT Sample Configurations To configure VLT configure a backup link and interconnect trunk create a VLT domain configure a backup link and interconnect trunk and connect the peer switches in a VLT domain to an attached access device switch or server Review the following examples of VLT configurations Configuring Virtual Link Trunking VLT Peer 1 288 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup link and interconnect trunk VLTi Dell VI Dell VI Dell VI Dell VI conf vlt domain 999 conf vlt domain peer link port channel 100 conf vlt domain back up destination 10 11 206 35 conf vlt domain exit Tpeerl Tpeerl Tpeerl Tpeerl n Li n Li Configure the backup link Configure the VLT interconnect VLTi Configure the port channel to an attached device Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN Configuring Virtual Link Trunking VLT Peer 2 Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup link VLT interconnect VLTi Dell VLTpeer2 Dell VLTpeer2 Dell VLTpeer2 Dell VLTpeer2 conf vlt domain 999 conf vlt domain peer link port channel 100 conf vlt domain back up destination 10 11 206 23 conf vlt domain exit a Li Li Li Li Configure the backup link Configure the VLT interconnect VLTi Configure
273. esponding server is configured for LACP based network interface controller NIC teaming Static LAGs are not supported K NOTE The recommended LACP timeout is Long Timeout mode Link Tracking By default all server facing ports are tracked by the operational status of the uplink LAG If the uplink LAG goes down the aggregator loses its connectivity and is no longer operational all server facing ports are brought down after the specified defer timer interval which is 10 seconds by default If you have configured VLAN you can reduce the defer time by changing the defer timer value or remove it by using the no defer timer command K NOTE If installed servers do not have connectivity to a switch check the Link Status LED of uplink ports on the aggregator If all LEDs are on to ensure the LACP is correctly configured check the LACP configuration on the ToR switch that is connected to the aggregator Configuring VLANs By default in Standalone mode all aggregator ports belong to all 4094 VLANs and are members of untagged VLAN 1 To configure only the required VLANs on a port use the CLI or CMC interface You can configure VLANs only on server ports The uplink LAG will automatically get the VLANs based on the server ports VLAN configuration When you configure VLANs on server facing interfaces ports from 1 to 32 you can assign VLANs to a port or a range of ports by entering the vlan tagged or vlan untagged commands in Interface
274. et Address Resolution Protocol 1027 Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 1035 DOMAIN NAMES IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION client 1042 A Standard for the Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks 1191 Path MTU Discovery 1305 Network Time Protocol Version 3 Specification Implementation and Analysis Standards Compliance 355 RFC 1519 Full Name Classless Inter Domain Routing CIDR an Address 1542 1812 2131 2338 3021 3046 3069 3128 Network Management Assignment and Aggregation Strategy Clarifications and Extensions for the Bootstrap Protocol Requirements for IP Version 4 Routers Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP Using 31 Bit Prefixes on IPv4 Point to Point Links DHCP Relay Agent Information Option VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation Protection Against a Variant of the Tiny Fragment Attack The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for network management protocol Table 39 Network Management RFC 1155 Full Name Structure and Identification of Management Information 1156 1157 1212 1215 1493 1901 2011 2012 2013 2024 2096 2570 356 for TCP IP based Internets Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP based internets A Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Concise MIB Definitions A Convention for Defining Traps for use with the
275. ew information on TACACS transactions use the following command e View TACACS transactions to troubleshoot problems EXEC Privilege mode debug tacacs TACACS Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS server Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes If you have configured remote authorization the system ignores the access class you have configured for the VTY line and gets this access class information from the TACACS server The system must know the username and password of the incoming user before it can fetch the access class from the server A user therefore at least sees the login prompt If the access class denies the connection the system closes the Telnet session immediately The following example demonstrates how to configure the access class from a TACACS server This configuration ignores the configured access class on the VTY line If you have configured a deny10 ACL on the TACACS server the system downloads it and applies it If the user is found to be coming from the 10 0 0 0 subnet the system also immediately closes the Telnet connection Note that no matter where the user is coming from they see the login prompt Security 207 When configuring a TACACS server host you can set different communication parameters such as the key password Example of Specifying a TACACS Server Host Dell conf Dell conf aaa authentication login
276. exit conf do show monitor session 0 Port Monitoring 189 SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Type 0 TenGig 1 1 TenGig 1 42 rx interface Port based Dell conf In the following example the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1 1 Port 1 1 is the monitored port and port 1 42 is the destination port which is configured to only monitor traffic received on tengigabitethernet 1 1 host originated traffic Host Traffic my Server Traffic Host 1 Server al Sniffer Figure 29 Port Monitoring Example Important Points to Remember Port monitoring is supported on physical ports only virtual local area network VLAN and port channel interfaces do not support port monitoring The monitored the source MD and monitoring ports the destination MG must be on the same Switch The monitored source interface must be a server facing interface in the format slot port where the valid slot numbers are O or 1 and server facing port numbers are from 1 to 32 The destination interface must be an uplink port ports 33 to 56 e In general a monitoring port should have no ip address and no shutdown as the only configuration the Dell Networking OS permits a limited set of commands for monitoring ports You can display these commands using the command Amonitoring port may not be a member of a VLAN There may only be one destination por
277. face IGMP group join rate limit is not set IGMP snooping is enabled on interface 00 00 02 IGMP Snooping query interval is 60 seconds IGMP Snooping querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP Snooping last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP snooping fast leave is disabled on this interface IGMP snooping querier is disabled on this interface Vlan 3 is up line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access group is not set Interface IGMP group join rate limit is not set IGMP snooping is enabled on interface IGMP Snooping query interval is 60 seconds IGMP Snooping querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP Snooping last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP snooping fast leave is disabled on this interface IGMP snooping querier is disabled on this interface More show ip igmp snooping mrouter Command Example Dell show ip igmp snooping mrouter Interface Router Ports Vlan 1000 Po 128 Dell Never 102 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 8 Interfaces This chapter describes 100 1000 10000 Mbps Ethernet 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface types both physical and logical and how to configure them with the Dell Networking Operating Software OS Basic Interface Configuration e Interface Auto Configuration e Interface Types e Viewing Interface Information e Disabling and Re enabling a Physical Interface e Layer 2 Mode e Management Interfaces e VLAN Membership e Po
278. ffer Profile The Dell Networking OS provides two pre defined buffer profiles one for single queue for example non quality of service QoS applications and one for four queue for example QoS applications You must reload the system for the global buffer profile to take effect a message similar to the following displays Info For the global pre defined buffer profile to tak ffect pleas save the config and reload the system Dell Networking OS Behavior After you configure buffer profile global 1Q the message displays during every bootup Only one reboot is required for the configuration to take effect afterward you may ignore this bootup message Dell Networking OS Behavior The buffer profile does not returned to the default 4Q If you configure 10 save the running config to the startup config and then delete the startup config and reload the chassis The only way to return to the default buffer profile is to remove the 1Q profile configured and then reload the chassis If you have already applied a custom buffer profile on an interface the bu fer profile global command fails and a message similar to the following displays Error User defined buffer profile already applied Failed to apply global pre defined buffer profile Please remove all user defined buffer profiles Similarly when you configure buffer profile global you cannot not apply a buffer profile on any single interface A message similar to
279. figuration task for TACACS functions e Choosing TACACS as the Authentication Method e Monitoring TACACS e TACACS Remote Authentication e Specifying a TACACS Server Host For a complete listing of all commands related to TACACS refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide Choosing TACACS as the Authentication Method One of the login authentication methods available is TACACS and the user s name and password are sent for authentication to the TACACS hosts specified To use TACACS to authenticate users specify at least one TACACS server for the system to communicate with and configure TACACS as one of your authentication methods To select TACACS as the login authentication method use the following commands 1 Configure a TACACS server host CONFIGURATION mode tacacs server host ip address host Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS server Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS server hosts 2 Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS authentication method CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login method list name default tacacs method3 The TACACS method must not be the last method specified 3 Enter LINE mode CONFIGURATION mode line aux 0 console 0 vty number end number 4 Assign the method list to the terminal line LINE mode l
280. figurations on port and port channel levels This allows you to assign VLANs to a port port channel 112 Interfaces NOTE In PMUX mode in order to avoid loops only disjoint VLANs are allowed between the uplink ports uplink LAGs and uplink to uplink switching is disabled nitialize the port with configurations such as admin up portmode and switchport Dell configure Dell conf int tengigabitethernet 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 no shutdown Dell conf if te 0 1 portmode hybrid Dell conf if te 0 1 switchport Configure the tagged VLANs 10 through 15 and untagged VLAN 20 on this port Dell conf if te 0 1 vlan tagged 10 15 Dell conf if te 0 1 vlan untagged 20 Dell conf if te 0 1 Show the running configurations on this port Dell conf if te 0 1 show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 portmode hybrid switchport vlan tagged 10 15 vlan untagged 20 no shutdown Dell conf if te 0 1 end Dell Initialize the port channel with configurations such as admin up portmode and switchport Dell configure Dell conf int port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 128 switchport Configure the tagged VLANs 10 through 15 and untagged VLAN 20 on this port channel Dell conf if po 128 vlan tagged 10 15 Dell conf if po 128 Dell conf if po 128 vlan untagged 20 Show the running configurations on this port channel Dell conf if po
281. figure different treatment for traffic with different bandwidth latency and best effort needs For example storage traffic is sensitive to frame loss interprocess communication IPC traffic is latency sensitive ETS allows different traffic types to coexist without interruption in the same converged link by e Allocating a guaranteed share of bandwidth to each priority group e Allowing each group to exceed its minimum guaranteed bandwidth if another group is not fully using its allotted bandwidth To configure ETS and apply an ETS output policy to an interface you must 48 Data Center Bridging DCB 1 Create a Quality of Service QoS output policy with ETS scheduling and bandwidth allocation settings 2 Create a priority group of 802 19 traffic classes Configure a DCB output policy in which you associate a priority group with a QoS ETS output policy 4 Apply the DCB output policy to an interface How Enhanced Transmission Selection is Implemented Enhanced transmission selection ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802 1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic Different traffic types have different service needs Using ETS groups within an 802 1p priority class are auto configured to provide different treatment for traffic with different bandwidth latency and best effort needs For example storage traffic is sensitive to frame loss interprocess communication IPC traffic is latency sensiti
282. figure each Aggregator to operate in stacking mode Reload each Aggregator one after the other in quick succession Stacking 241 Stacking Prerequisites Before you cable and configure a stack of MXL 10 40GbE switches review the following prerequisites e All Aggregators in the stack must be powered up with the initial or startup configuration before you attach the cables e All stacked Aggregators must run the same Dell Networking OS version The minimum Dell networking OS version required is 8 5 17 0 To check the version that a switch is running use the show version command To download a Dell Networking OS version go to http support dell com e Stacking is supported only with other Aggregators A maximum of six Aggregators are supported in a single stack You cannot stack the Aggregator with MXL 10 40GbE Switches or another type of switch A maximum of four stack groups 40GbE ports is supported on a stacked Aggregator e Interconnect the stack units by following the instructions in Cabling Stacked Switches e You cannot stack a Standalone IOA and a PMUX Master Selection Criteria A Master is elected or re elected based on the following considerations in order 1 The switch with the highest priority at boot time The switch with the highest MAC address at boot time A unit is selected as Standby by the administrator and a fail over action is manually initiated or occurs due to a Master unit failure No record of pre
283. fjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx AyWhVgJDOh39k8v3e8e0vLnHBIsqlL8jVy10HhUeb7GaD1JVEDAMzZ30myqO0bJgXBBRIWgBpLWwL doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChj k9hLiby8cYZP2kYS21nSyQWk admin Unix client ls id_rsa id_rsa pub shosts admin Unix client cat shosts 10 16 127 201 ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaClyc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8K7jLZRVfjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx AyW hVgJDOh39k8v3e8eQvLnHBISsqIL8jVylOHhUeb7GaDl1JVEDAMz30myqQbJgXBBRTWgBp LWwL doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChjk9hLl1by8cYZP2kYS2l1nSyOWk The following example shows creating rhosts admin Unix client ls id_rsa id_rsa pub rhosts shosts admin Unix client cat rhosts 10 16 127 201 admin Using Client Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client use the following command This method uses SSH version 1 or version 2 If the SSH port is a non default value use the ip ssh server port number command to change the default port number You may only change the port number when SSH is disabled Then use the p option with the ssh command e SSH from the chassis to the SSH client ssh ip address Example of Client Based SSH Authentication Dell ssh 10 16 127 201 Encryption cipher to use for v2 clients only 1 User name option m HMAC algorithm to use for v2 clients only p SSH server port option default 22 v SSH protocol version Troubleshooting SSH To troubleshoot SSH use the following information You ma
284. following port modes e ENode mode for server facing ports e FCF mode for a trusted port directly connected to an FCF You must enable FIP snooping on an Aggregator and configure the FIP snooping parameters When you enable FIP snooping all ports on the switch by default become ENode ports Dynamic ACL generation on an Aggregator operating as a FIP snooping bridge functions as follows e Global ACLs are applied on server facing ENode ports e Port based ACLs are applied on ports directly connected to an FCF and on server facing ENode ports e Port based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs e FCoE generated ACLs take precedence over user configured ACLs A user configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames The below illustration depicts an Aggregator used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network The ToR switch operates as an FCF for FCoE traffic Converged LAN and SAN traffic is transmitted between the ToR switch and an Aggregator The Aggregator operates as a lossless FIP snooping bridge to transparently forward FCoE frames between the ENode servers and the FCF switch 84 FIP Snooping SAN Network Fibre Channel Storage Traffic Ethernet LAN Traffic Installed ENode Server Aggregators Installed in M1000e Chassis Servers Installed in M1000e Chassis Figure 8 FIP Snooping on an Aggregator The following sections describes how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch that function
285. formation refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP The following LLDP TLVs are supported for DCB parameter exchange PFC parameters PFC Configuration TLV and Application Priority Configuration TLV ETS parameters ETS Configuration TLV and ETS Recommendation TLV Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface Ingress Traffic e Egress Traffic e M Figure 3 DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling 38 Data Center Bridging DCB Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet CEE in a data center network DCB is disabled by default It must be enabled to support CEE e Priority based flow control e Enhanced transmission selection Data center bridging exchange protocol e FCoE initialization protocol FIP snooping DCB processes virtual local area network VLAN tagged packets and dotlp priority values Untagged packets are treated with a dotip priority of O For DCB to operate effectively you can classify ingress traffic according to its dot1p priority so that it maps to different data queues The dotlp queue assignments used are shown in the following table To enable DCB enable either the SCSI optimization configuration or the FCoE configuration For information to configure iSCSI optimization refer to iSCSI Optimizatio
286. fter you configure other privilege levels enter those levels by adding the level parameter after the enable command or by configuring a user name or password that corresponds to the privilege level For more information about configuring user names refer to Configuring a Username and Password By default commands are assigned to different privilege levels You can access those commands only if you have access to that privilege level For example to reach the protocol spanning tree command log in to the router enter the enable command for privilege level 15 this privilege level is the default level for the command and then enter CONFIGURATION mode You can configure passwords to control access to the box and assign different privilege levels to users The Dell Networking OS supports the use of passwords when you log in to the system and when you enter the enable command If you move between privilege levels you are prompted for a password if you move to a higher privilege level Configuration Task List for Privilege Levels The following list has the configuration tasks for privilege levels and passwords e Configuring a Username and Password mandatory e Configuring the Enable Password Command mandatory e Configuring Custom Privilege Levels mandatory e Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege optional e Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels optional For a complete listing of all commands related to pr
287. g Specify this application type only if guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data 5 Softphone Voice Specify this application type only if guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data 6 Video Conferencing Specify this application type for dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video 7 Streaming Video Specify this application type for dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video 8 Video Signaling Specify this application type only if video control packets use a separate network policy than video data 9 255 Reserved 7 bits 9bks J octets 1 octet 1 octet 3 bits 12 bits 3 bits 6 bits Figure 25 LLDP MED Policies TLV Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP MED endpoints and network connectivity devices Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802 3af powered LLDP MED endpoint device Power Type there are two possible power types power source entity PSE or power device PD The Dell Networking system is a PSE which corresponds to a value of 0 based on the TIA 1057 specification e Power Source there are two possible power sources primary and backup The Dell Networking system is a primary power source which corresponds to a value of 1 based on t
288. g VLT 10G VLT 40G 10G mode 40G Mode Mode 40G mode Mode Mode Base module 10G 40G 40G HiGig 40G 40G Native 40G HiGig Native Optional 10G 40G 10G 40G 10G 40G module 2 40GbE Optional 10G Error 10G Error 10G Error modules 4 10GbE FC module 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G To configure the uplink speed of the member interfaces in a LAG bundle to be 40 GbE Ethernet per second for the Aggregator that operates in standalone stacking or VLT mode perform the following steps Specify the uplink speed as 40 GbE By default the uplink speed of the LAG bundle is set as 10 GbE You cannot configure the uplink speed if the Aggregator operates in programmable MUX mode The stack unit unit number iom mode stack standalone vlt 40G command is available in the CMC interface and the CLI interface CONFIGURATION stack unit unit number iom mode stack standalone vlt 40G You can use the show system stack unit unit number iom uplink speed command to view the uplink speed of the LAG bundles configured on the Flex IO modules installed on the Aggregator The value under the Boot speed field in the output of the show system stack unit command indicates the uplink speed that is currently effective on the LAG bundles whereas the value under the Next Boot field indicates the uplink speed that is applicable for the LAG bundle after the next reboot of the switch Depending on the uplink speed configured the fan out setting is designed accordingly dur
289. g config tacacs command in EXEC Privilege mode To delete a TACACS server host use the no tacacs server host hostname ip address command freebsd2 telnet 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2202 Trying 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2202 Connected to 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2202 Escape character is Login admin Password Dell Dell 208 Security Enabling SCP and SSH Secure shell SSH is a protocol for secure remote login and other secure network services over an insecure network Dell Networking OS is compatible with SSH versions 1 5 and 2 in both the client and server modes SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication SSH is enabled by default For details about the command syntax refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide Dell Networking OS SCP which is a remote file copy program that works with SSH K NOTE The Windows based WinSCP client software is not supported for secure copying between a PC and a Dell Networking OS based system Unix based SCP client software is supported To use the SSH client use the following command e Open an SSH connection and specify the hostname username port number encryption cipher HMAC algorithm and version of the SSH client EXEC Privilege mode ssh hostname l username p port number v 1 2 c encryption cipher m HMAC algorithm hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote devic
290. g configuration of a specified object or all objects that are currently configured on the router show running config track object id Object Tracking 187 Examples of Viewing Tracked Objects Dell show track Track 1 IP route 23 0 0 0 8 reachability Reachability is Down route not in route table 2 changes last change 00 16 08 Tracked by Track 2 IPv6 route 2040 64 metric threshold Metric threshold is Up STATIC 0 0 5 changes last change 00 02 16 Metric threshold down 255 up 254 First hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1 2 Tracked by VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2 30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050 64 reachability Reachability is Up STATIC 5 changes last change 00 02 16 First hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1 2 Tracked by VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2 30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1 4 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes last change 00 03 30 Tracked by Example of the show track brief Command Router show track brief ResId Resourc Parameter State LastChange T IP route reachability 10 16 0 0 16 Example of the show track resolution Command Dell show track resolution IP Route Resolution ISIS 1 OSPF 1 IPv6 Route Resolution ISIS 1 188 Object Tracking 15 Port Monitoring The Aggregator supports user configured port monitoring See Configuring Port Monitoring for the configuration commands to use Port monitoring copies all incoming
291. g or Disabling a Port Channel optional Creating a Port Channel You can create up to 128 port channels with eight port members per group on the Aggregator To configure a port channel use the following commands 1 Create a port channel CONFIGURATION mode interface port channel id number 2 Ensure that the port channel is active INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel you can place it in Layer 2 mode To configure an IP address to place the port channel in Layer 2 mode use the switchport command You can configure a port channel as you would a physical interface by enabling or configuring protocols or assigning access control lists Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis but must be the same physical type K NOTE Port channels can contain a mix of Gigabit Ethernet and 10 100 1000 Ethernet interfaces but Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that are not the same speed of the first channel member in the port channel Link Aggregation 139 You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal You can configure only the following commands on an interface if it is a member of a port channel e description e shutdown no shutdown e mtu e ip mtu if the interface is on a Jumbo enabled by default K NOTE A logical port channel interface cannot
292. g table lists the CLI mode its prompt and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode Move linearly through the command modes except for the end command which takes you directly to EXEC Privilege mode and the exit command which moves you up one command mode level NOTE Sub CONFIGURATION modes all have the letters conf in the prompt with more modifiers to identify the mode and slot port information Table 1 Dell Command Modes CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command EXEC Dell Access the router through the console or Telnet EXEC Privilege Dell e From EXEC mode enter the enable command e From any other mode use the end command 28 Configuration Fundamentals CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command CONFIGURATION Dell conf e From EXEC privilege mode enter the configure command e From every mode except EXEC and EXEC Privilege enter the exit command NOTE Access all of the following modes from CONFIGURATION mode 10 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell conf if te 0 1 4 interface INTERFACE modes Interface Range Dell conf if range f interface INTERFACE modes Management Ethernet Interface Dell conf if ma 0 0 interface INTERFACE modes MONITOR SESSION Dell conf mon sess monitor session CONSOLE Dell config line line LINE Modes console VIRTUAL TERMINAL Dell config line vty line LINE Modes The following example shows how to change the command mode from CONFIGURATION mode
293. glish You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year end day Enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year end year Enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 end time Enter the time in hours minutes For the hour variable use the 24 hour format example 17 15 is 5 15 pm 262 System Time and Date offset OPTIONAL Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer time period The range is from 1 to1440 The default is 60 minutes Example of the clock summer time recurring Command Dell conf clock summer time pacific recurring Mar 14 2012 00 00 Nov 7 2012 00 00 Dell con NOTE If you enter lt CR gt after entering the recurring command parameter and you have already set a one time daylight saving time date the system uses that time and date as the recurring setting Example of Clock Summer Time Recurring Parameters Dell conf clock summer time pacific recurring lt 1 4 gt Week number to start first Week number to start last Week number to start lt cr gt Dell conf clock summer time pacific recurring Dell con System Time and Date 263 22 Uplink Failure Detection UFD Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Feature Description UFD provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity
294. gned dynamic IP address is not displayed DHCP Client on a Management Interface These conditions apply when you enable a management interface to operate as a DHCP client e The management default route is added with the gateway as the router IP address received in the DHCP ACK packet It is required to send and receive traffic to and from other subnets on the external network The route is added irrespective of whether the DHCP client and server are on same or different subnets The management default route is deleted if the management IP address is released like other DHCP client management routes ip route for 0 0 0 0 takes precedence if it is present or added later e Management routes added by a DHCP client display with Route Source as DHCP in the show ip management route and show ip management route dynamic command output Management routes added by DHCP are automatically reinstalled if you configure a static IP route with the ip route command that replaces a management route added by the DHCP client If you remove the statically configured IP route using the no ip route command the management route is reinstalled Manually delete management routes added by the DHCP client e To reinstall management routes added by the DHCP client that is removed or replaced by the same statically configured management routes release the DHCP IP address and renew it on the management interface Management routes added by the DHCP client have high
295. guration and sessions use show commands iSCSI optimization enables quality of service QoS treatment for iSCSI traffic Supported Modes Stacking VLT SCSI Optimization Overview iSCSI is a TCP IP based protocol for establishing and managing connections between IP based storage devices and initiators in a storage area network SAN SCSI optimization enables the network switch to auto detect Dell s iSCSI storage arrays and triggers self configuration of several key network configurations that enables optimization of the network for better storage traffic throughput iSCSI optimization provides a means of monitoring iSCSI sessions and applying QoS policies on iSCSI traffic When enabled iSCSI optimization allows a switch to monitor snoop the establishment and termination of iSCSI connections The switch uses the snooped information to detect iSCSI sessions and connections established through the switch SCSI optimization allows you to reduce deployment time and management complexity in data centers In a data center network Dell EqualLogic and Compellent SCSI storage arrays are connected to a converged Ethernet network using the data center bridging exchange protocol DCBx through stacked and or non stacked Ethernet switches iSCSI session monitoring over virtual link trunking VLT synchronizes the iSCSI session information between the VLT peers allowing session information to be available in both VLT peers iSCSI optimiz
296. h the Ethernet interface slot port to which a server CNA is connected Worldwide port name WWPN of a server CNA port VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic to and from the fabric Fabric facing Fibre Channel port slot port on which FC traffic is transmitted to the specified fabric 327 Field Fabric Map Login Method Status Description Name of the FCoE map containing the FCoE FC configuration parameters for the server CNA fabric connection Method used by the server CNA to log in to the fabric for example FLOGI ENode logged in using a fabric login FLOGI FDISC ENode logged in using a fabric discovery FDISC Operational status of the link between a server CNA port and a SAN fabric Logged In Server has logged in to the fabric and is able to transmit FCoE traffic show npiv devices Command Example ENode 0 ENode MAC ENode Intf FCF MAC Fabric Intf FCoE Vlan Fabric Map ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC ID LoginMethod Secs Status ENode 1 ENode MAC ENode Intf FCF MAC Fabric Intf FCoE Vlan Fabric Map ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC ID LoginMethod Secs Status Table 33 show npiv devices Field Descriptions Field ENode number Enode MAC Enode Intf 328 00 Te SC Fc 100 fid 20 01 00 10 00 00 10 FC OSs OT 20 0e 01 559 Dell show npiv devices TOLE EL 0 11 0 9 3 1003 02 01 FLOGI
297. hat is in a UFD Disabled Error State so that it can send and receive traffic EXEC mode clear ufd disable interface interface uplink state group group id For interface enter one of the following interface types 10 Gigabit Ethernet enter tengigabitethernet slot port slot port range 40 Gigabit Ethernet enter fortygigabitethernet slot port slot port range Port channel enter port channel 1 512 port channel range Where port range and port channel range specify a range of ports separated by a dash and or individual ports port channels in any order for example tengigabitethernet 1 1 2 5 9 11 12 port channel 1 3 5 Acomma is required to separate each port and port range entry clear ufd disable interface interface uplink state group group id re enables all UFD disabled downstream interfaces in the group The range is from 1 to 16 Example of Syslog Messages Before and After Entering the clear ufd disable uplink state group Command S50 The following example message shows the Syslog messages that display when you clear the UFD Disabled state from all disabled downstream interfaces in an uplink state group by using the clear ufd disable uplink state group group id command All downstream interfaces return to an operationally up state 00 10 12 SSTKUNITO M CP IFMGR 5 ASTATE D Changed interface Admin state to down Te 0 1 00 10
298. he servers downstream are up Changed interface state to up Po 128 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error disabled Te 0 1 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error disabled Te 0 2 Downstream interface cleared from UFD error disabled Te 0 3 ELO Before You Start 25 26 To verify the status run the following commands Dell show interfaces port channe Port channel 128 is up line pro Dell show uplink state group Uplink State Group 1 Status 1 128 tocol is up Enabled Up Before You Start Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System OS command line interface CLI is a text based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes Different sets of commands are available in each mode and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels In Dell Networking OS after you enable a command it is entered into the running configuration file You can view the current configuration for the whole system or for a particular CLI mode To save the current configuration copy the running configuration to another location For more information refer to Save the Running Configuration K NOTE You can use the chassis management controller CMC out of band management interface to access and manage an Aggregator using the Dell Networking OS command line reference For more information about
299. he CLI interface of the device to configure and monitor settings You can configure the restrict access session command to disable access of the Aggregator using a Telnet or SSH session the device is accessible only using the CMC GUI You can use Security 193 the no version of this command to reactivate the Telnet or SSH session capability for the device Use the show restrict access command to view whether the access to a device using Telnet or SSH is disabled or not AAA Authentication Dell Networking OS supports a distributed client server system implemented through authentication authorization and accounting AAA to help secure networks against unauthorized access In the Dell Networking implementation the Dell Networking system acts as a RADIUS or TACACS client and sends authentication requests to a central remote authentication dial in service RADIUS or Terminal access controller access control system plus TACACS server that contains all user authentication and network service access information Dell Networking uses local usernames passwords stored on the Dell Networking system or AAA for login authentication With AAA you can specify the security protocol or mechanism for different login methods and different users In Dell Networking OS AAA uses a list of authentication methods called method lists to define the types of authentication and the sequence in which they are applied You can define a method list or use the def
300. he TIA 1057 specification Power Priority there are three possible priorities Low High and Critical On Dell Networking systems the default power priority is High which corresponas to a value of 2 based on the TIA 1057 specification You can configure a different power priority through the CLI Dell Networking also honors the power priority value the powered device sends however the CLI configuration takes precedence Power Value Dell Networking advertises the maximum amount of power that can be supplied on the port By default the power is 15 4W which corresponds to a power value of 130 based on the TIA 1057 specification You can advertise a different power value using the max milliwatts option with the power inline auto static command Dell Networking also honors the power value power requirement the powered device sends when the port is configured for power inline auto 170 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 7 bits 9 bits 3 octets 1 octet 2 bits 2 bits 4bits 2 octets Figure 26 Extended Power via MDI TLV LLDP Operation On an Aggregator LLDP operates as follows e LLDP is enabled by default e LLDPDUs are transmitted and received by default LLDPDUS are transmitted periodically The default interval is 50 seconds e LLDPDU information received from a neighbor expires after the default Time to Live TTL value 120 seconds e Dell Networking OS supports up to eight neighbors per interface Dell Network
301. he VLT peers do not match e The VLT Unit Id configured on both the VLT peers are identical e The VLT System MAC or Unit Id is configured only on one of the VLT peers The VLT domain ID is not the same on both peers If the VLT peer ship is already established changing the System MAC or Unit Id does not cause VLT peer ship to go down Also if the VLT peer ship is already established and the VLT Unit Id or System MAC are configured on both peers then changing the CLI configurations on the VLT Unit Id or System MAC is rejected if any of the following become TRUE e After making the CLI configuration change the VLT Unit Id becomes identical on both peers e After making the CLI configuration change the VLT System MAC do not match on both peers When the VLT peer ship is already established you can remove the VLT Unit Id or System MAC configuration from either or both peers However removing configuration settings can cause the VLT ports to go down if you configure the Unit Id or System MAC on only one of the VLT peers Overview VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge Access or top of rack ToR VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols STPs by allowing link aggregation group LAC terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and by supporting a loop free topology To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior
302. he server facing ports are tracked by the operational status of the uplink LAG If the uplink LAG goes down the aggregator loses its connectivity and is no longer operational All the server facing ports are brought down after the specified defer timer interval which is 10 seconds by default If you have configured VLAN you can reduce the defer time by changing the defer timer value or remove it by using the no defer timer command 1 View the Uplink status group EXEC Privilege mode show uplink state group Dell show uplink state group Uplink State Group 1 Status Enabled Down Enable the uplink group tracking UPLINK STATE GROUP mode enable Dell conf tuplink state group 1 Dell conf uplink state group 1 tenable To disable the uplink group tracking use the no enable command Change the default timer UPLINK STATE GROUP mode defer timer seconds Dell conf uplink state group 1 Dell conf uplink state group 1 defer timer 20 Dell conf uplink state group 1 show config uplink state group 1 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 32 upstream Port channel 128 defer timer 20 Configuring Uplink Failure Detection PMUX mode To configure UFD use the following commands 1 268 Create an uplink state group and enable the tracking of upstream links on the switch router CONFIGURATION mode uplink state group group id e group id values are from 1 to 16 To delete an uplink state group use the no uplink s
303. heck for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications In addition Level O diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board Level 1 A smaller set of diagnostic tests Level 1 diagnostics perform status self test access and read write tests for all the components on the board and test their registers for appropriate values In addition Level 1 diagnostics perform extensive tests on memory devices for example SDRAM flash NVRAM EEPROM wherever possible Level 2 The full set of diagnostic tests Level 2 diagnostics are used primarily for on board MAC level Physical level external Loopback tests and more extensive component diagnostics Various components on the board are put into Loopback mode and test packets are transmitted through those components These diagnostics also perform snake tests using virtual local area network VLAN configurations NOTE Diagnostic is not allowed in Stacking mode including member stacking Avoid stacking before executing the diagnostic tests in the chassis Important Points to Remember You can only perform offline diagnostics on an offline standalone unit You cannot perform diagnostics if the ports are configured in a stacking group Remove the port s from the stacking group before executing the diagnostic test Diagnostics only test connectivity not the entire data path Diagnostic results are stored on the flash of the unit on w
304. hernet 10BASE T 802 3u Fast Ethernet LOOBASE FX 100BASE TX 802 3x Flow Control 802 1Qaz Enhanced Transmission Selection 802 1Qbb Priority based Flow Control ANSI TIA 1057 LLDP MED MTU 12 000 bytes RFC and I D Compliance The Dell Networking OS supports the following standards The standards are grouped by related protocol The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard 354 Standards Compliance General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols Table 37 General Internet Protocols RFC Full Name 768 User Datagram Protocol 793 Transmission Control Protocol 854 Telnet Protocol Specification 959 File Transfer Protocol FTP 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 1350 The TFTP Protocol Revision 2 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP 1989 PPP Link Quality Monitoring 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol MP 1994 PPP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker 3164 The BSD syslog Protocol General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols Table 38 General IPv4 Protocols RFC Full Name 791 Internet Protocol 792 Internet Control Message Protocol 826 An Ethern
305. hich you performed the diagnostics When offline diagnostics are complete the unit or stack member reboots automatically Running Offline Diagnostics To run offline diagnostics use the following commands For more information refer to the examples following the steps 1 Place the unit in the offline state EXEC Privilege mode offline stack unit You cannot enter this command on a MASTER or Standby stack unit Debugging and Diagnostics 335 K NOTE The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete This is an automatic process The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack unit command Warning offline of unit will bring down all the protocols and the unit will be operationally down except for running Diagnostics Please make sure that stacking fanout not configured for Diagnostics execution Also reboot online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued Proceed with Offline confirm yes no Dell offline stack unit 0 Warning offline of unit will bring down all the protocols and the unit will be operationally down except for running Diagnostics Please make sure that stacking fanout not configured for Diagnostics execution Also reboot online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued Proceed with Offline confirm yes no yes Dell 2 Confirm the offline status EXEC Privilege mode show
306. higher throughput PMUX stacking allows the stacking of two or more IOA units This allows grouping of multiple units for high availability An Aggregator supports a maximum of six stacking units K NOTE Prior to configuring the stack group ensure the stacking ports are connected and in 40G native mode Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Stacking Aggregators A stack of Aggregators operates as a virtual chassis with management units primary and standby and member units The Dell Networking operating software elects a primary master and secondary standby management unit The forwarding database resides on the master switch the standby unit maintains a synchronized local copy Each unit in the stack makes forwarding decisions based on their local copy The following example shows how you can stack two Aggregators The Aggregators are connected to operate as a single stack in a ring topology using only the 40GbE ports on the base modules Stacking 235 SOIR RRS NU SHE HUND AIR 2 yde re sl Sl i pa ay j amp Jr dr Jr UP s wur 8 10GbE LAN Uplinks LAG 4 40GbE Stack Links Figure 30 A Two Aggregator Stack Stack Management Roles The stack elects the management units for the stack management e Stack master primary management unit e Standby secondary management unit The master holds the control plane and the other units maintain a local copy of the forwarding databa
307. hould lose the election Es NOTE In case of a stack when one unit member resets and joins the stack momentary drops will be observed which is recovered after few seconds Verifying a Stack Configuration The following lists the status of a stacked switch according to the color of the System Status light emitting diodes LEDs on its front panel Blue indicates the switch is operating as the stack master or as a standalone unit e Off indicates the switch is a member or standby unit e Amber indicates the switch is booting or a failure condition has occurred Using Show Commands To display information on the stack configuration use the show commands on the master switch e Displays stacking roles master standby and member units and the stack MAC address how system brief isplays the FlexIO modules currently installed in expansion slots O and 1 on a switch and the xpected module logically provisioned for the slot 00 0 how inventory optional module splays the stack groups allocated on a stacked switch The range is from 0 to 5 e g un show system stack unit unit number stack group configured e Displays the port numbers that correspond to the stack groups on a switch The valid stack unit numbers are from O to 5 show system stack unit unit number stack group e Displays the type of stack topology ring or daisy chain with a list of all stacked ports port status link peed and peer stack unit connection
308. how clock output start week OPTIONAL Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start day through end time week number Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time first Enter the keyword first to start daylight savings time in the first week of the month last Enter the keyword last to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month start month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year start day Enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year start year Enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 start time Enter the time in hours minutes For the hour variable use the 24 hour format example 17 15 is 5 15 pm end week If you entered a start week enter the one of the following as the week that daylight saving ends week number Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to end daylight saving time first Enter the keyword first to end daylight saving time in the first week of the month last Enter the keyword last to end daylight saving time in the last week of the month end month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in En
309. how to access the CMC to configure an Aggregator refer to the Dell Chassis Management Controller CMC User s Guide on the Dell Support website at http support dell com support edocs systems pem en index htm K NOTE You can also perform some of the configurations using the Web GUI Dell Blade IO Manager For more information see the Dell Blade IO Manager Online Help Accessing the Command Line Access the command line through a serial console port or a Telnet session Logging into the System using Telnet When the system successfully boots enter the command line in EXEC mode Logging into the System using Telnet telnet 172 31 1 53 Trying 172 31 1 53 Connected to 172 31 1 53 Escape character is Login username Password Dell CLI Modes Different sets of commands are available in each mode A command found in one mode cannot be executed from another mode except for EXEC mode commands with a preceding do command refer to the do Command section The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels e EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1 which is the most restricted level Only a limited selection of commands is available notably the show commands which allow you to view system information Configuration Fundamentals 27 EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations clear counters manage configuration files run diagnostics and enable or disable
310. hport Delliconf if te 4 31 4no shutdown R3 ty g R4 E OS e gt Backup Link m Dell conf if te 3 42 switchport Delliconf if te 4 32 switchport Dell conf if te 3 42 no shutdown Delliconf if te 4 32 no shutdown Figure 18 Redundant NOCs with NIC Teaming MAC Address Station Move When you use NIC teaming consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0 1 of the switch see figure below If the NIC fails the same MAC address is learned on Port 0 5 of the switch The MAC adaress is disassociated with one port and re associated with another in the ARP table in other words the ARP entry is moved The Aggregator is auto configured to support MAC Address station moves Layer 2 159 mac address table station move refresh arp configured at time of NIC teaming Figure 19 MAC Address Station Move MAC Move Optimization Station move detection takes 5000ms because this is the interval at which the detection algorithm runs 160 Layer 2 13 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Link layer discovery protocol LLDP advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN LLDP facilitates multi vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management The Dell Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801 1ab The starting point for u
311. ice QoS on an interface that you have enabled storm control either on an interface or globally Storm Control 257 Configure storm control CONFIGURATION mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed in the network CONFIGURATION mode storm control broadcast packets per second in Configure the packets per second pps of multicast traffic allowed on C Series and S Series networks only CONFIGURATION mode storm control multicast packets per second in Configure the packets per second of unknown unicast traffic allowed in or out of the network CONFIGURATION mode storm control unknown unicast packets per second in Configuring Storm Control from INTERFACE Mode To configure storm control use the following command You can only configure storm control for ingress traffic in INTERFACE mode If you configure storm control from both INTERFACE and CONFIGURATION mode the INTERFACE mode configurations override the CONFIGURATION mode configurations Configure storm control INTERFACE mode Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface ingress only INTERFACE mode storm control broadcast packets per second in Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on C Series or S Series interface ingress only network only INTERFACE mode storm control multicast packets per second in Shut down the port if it receives the PFC LLFC packets more than the configured rate INTER
312. igure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf dcb buffer threshold test DCB BUFFER THRESHOLD mode Dell conf dcb buffer thr priority 0 buffer size 52 pause threshold 16 resume offset 10 shared threshold weight 7 Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on stack ports CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf dcb policy buffer threshold stack unit all stack ports all test Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces This setting takes precedence over the default buffer threshold setting INTERFACE mode conf if te Dell conf if te 0 0 dcb policy buffer threshold test Create a QoS policy buffer and enter the QoS Policy Buffer Configuration mode to configure the no drop queues ingress buffer size buffer limit for pausing and buffer offset limit for resuming CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf qos policy buffer test Dell conf qos policy buffer queue 0 pause no drop buffer size 128000 pause threshold 103360 resume threshold 83520 Dell conf qos policy buffer f queue 4 pause no drop buffer size 128000 pause threshold 103360 resume threshold 83520 Data Center Bridging DCB 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP The Aggregator is auto configured to operate as a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP client The DHCP server DHCP relay agent and secure DHCP features are not supported The DHCP is an application layer proto
313. imary port As soon as a physical interface is added to a port channel the properties of the port channel determine the properties of the physical interface The configuration and status of the port channel are also applied to the physical interfaces within the port channel For example if the port channel is in Layer 2 mode you cannot add an IP address or a static MAC address to an interface that is part of that port channel Example of Error Due to an Attempt to Configure an Interface that is Part of a Port Channel Dell conf int port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 show config interface Port channel 128 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport fip snooping port mode fcf no shutdown link bundle monitor enable Dell conf if po 128 Link Aggregation 141 Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel An interface can be a member of only one port channel If the interface is a member of a port channel remove it from the first port channel and then add it to the second port channel Each time you add or remove a channel member from a port channel Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm for the port channel To reassign an interface to a new port channel use the following commands 1 Remove the interface from the first port channel INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode no channel member interface 2 Change to the second port channel INTERFACE mode INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL mode interface port channel id numb
314. ing OS supports a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum the system does not configure more than 8000 e LLDP is not hitless Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration use the following command e Display the LLDP configuration CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Example of Viewing LLDP Global Configurations Rl conf protocol lldp R1 conf lldp show config protocol lldp advertise dot3 tlv max frame size advertise management tlv system capabilities system description hello 10 no disable R1 conf lldp 4 Example of Viewing LLDP Interface Configurations R1 conf lldp exit R1 conf interface tengigabitethernet 0 3 R1 conf if te 0 3 4show config interface tengigabitEthernet 0 3 switchport no shutdown R1 conf if te 0 3 protocol lldp R1 conf if te 0 3 lldp show config Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 171 protocol lldp R1 conf if te 0 3 1lldp Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising use the following commands e Display brief information about adjacent devices show lldp neighbors e Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising show lldp neighbors detail Example of Viewing Brief Information Advertised by Neighbors R1 conf if te 1 31 ll
315. ing Port channel up is 1 nternet address is not set ode of IP Address Assignment NONE HCP Client ID lagl000le8elelcl T i e U 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes neSpeed 10000 Mbit mbers in this channel Te 0 12 U RP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 ast clearing of show interface counters 00 12 41 ueueing strategy fifo nput Statistics 112 packets 18161 bytes 0 64 byte pkts 46 over 64 byte pkts 37 over 127 byte pkts 29 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 59 Multicasts 53 Broadcasts 0 runts O giants 0 throttles O CRC O overrun 0 discarded utput Statistics 135 packets 19315 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 79 over 64 byte pkts 32 over 127 byte pkts 24 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 93 Multicasts 42 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops ate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate ime since last interface status change 00 12 38 how lacp 1 Command Example ell show lacp 1 ort channel 1 admin up oper up mode lacp ctor System ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e8el elc3 artner System ID Priority 65535 Address 24b6 fd87 d8ac ctor Admin Key 1 Oper Key 1 Partner Oper Key 33 VLT Peer Oper Key 1 ACP LAG 1 is an aggregatable link ACP LAG 1 is a normal LAG He m Ot D D Acti
316. ing the booting of the switch The following example displays the output of the show system stack unit unit number iom uplink speed command with the Boot speed field contained in it Dell show system stack unit 0 iom uplink speed Unit Boot speed Next Boot Stacking 247 Merging Two Operational Stacks The recommended procedure for merging two operational stacks is as follows 1 Always power off all units in one stack before connecting to another stack 2 Add the units as a group by unplugging one stacking cable in the operational stack and physically connecting all unpowered units 3 Completely cable the stacking connections making sure the redundant link is also in place Two operational stacks can also be merged by reconnecting stack cables without powering down units in either stack Connecting a powered up standalone unit to an existing stack leads to same behavior as when merging two operational stacks In such cases Manager re election is done and the Manager with the higher MAC address wins the election The losing stack manager resets itself and all its member units After the reset all the losing stack members join the winning stack to form a single stack The winning stack remains functional through the merge process If the stack merge is performed in this way then it is strongly recommended that the user set the admin management preference of the desired winner stack manager to a higher value than the stack manager that s
317. ining the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit EXEC Privilege mode Debugging and Diagnostics 337 show hardware stack unit 0 5 buffer unit 0 1 port 1 64 all buffer info View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer statistics per COS per port EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 buffer unit 0 1 port 1 64 queue 0 14 all buffer info View input and output statistics on the party bus which carries inter process communication traffic between CPUs EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 cpu party bus statistics View the ingress and egress internal packet drop counters MAC counters drop and FP packet drops for the stack unit on per port basis EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 drops unit 0 0 port 33 56 This view helps identifying the stack unit port pipe port that may experience internal drops View the input and output statistics for a stack port interface EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 stack port 33 56 View the counters in the field processors of the stack unit EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 counters View the details of the FP Devices and Hi gig ports on the stack unit EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 details Execute a specified bShel1 command from the CLI without going into the bShell EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 e
318. inng en e ptr ete etn e EG RU Lee ree Rede Ere ERG ATINA A Enabling the Management Address TLV on All Interfaces of an Aggregator 128 Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges tnt 128 Enhanced Control of Remote Fault Indication Processing sssssse 128 9 ISGSIl OptimiZatlOri ricco rne ratto Eni Ra ao c acia dct ad ud a rave aant ERE e Deere dread 130 Supported Modes acs eee ie tl al tel nee an o e temo 130 iSCSI Optimization Overview i iced i Reno meae Rem 130 Monitoring ISCSIT raptle FLOWS it A FRATRE ECRANS TE 131 Information Monitored in iSCSI Traffic Flows sss emere 132 Detection and Auto configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays sese m 132 ISCSL Optimization OperdatiOH iiie sce etre m e e t PR ORE i lev 132 Displaying SES Optimization format irradia 133 10 Isolated Networks for Aggregators esee 135 Configuring and Verifying Isolated Network Settings esses 155 TL Link PEO AC m n M Supported MOdGS itat ep ete re TT e n n ries How the LACP is Implemented on an Aggregator Uplink LA e EE Server Facing LAGS o ith ee ede au det e Ru e ote ed npe de c ge eius Beer M cabeedas three Auto Configured LACP Timeout iret t tet d t e malin e e e LACP Exampletst alia atte tte cete et tee inn De iba toda tege aud enh cias eaten eens Link Aggregation Control Pr
319. internally propagated information one of the following actions is taken e fthe peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration the link with the DCBx peer is enabled e If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration the link with the DCBx peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration The configuration received from a DCBx peer or from an internally propagated configuration is not stored in the switch s running configuration On a DCBx port in an auto upstream role the PFC and application priority TLVs are enabled ETS recommend TLVs are disabled and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled The port advertises its own configuration to DCBx peers but is not willing to receive remote peer configuration The port always accepts internally propagated configurations from a configuration source An auto downstream port that receives an internally propagated configuration overwrites its local configuration with the new parameter values When an auto downstream port receives and overwrites its configuration with internally propagated information one of the following actions is taken e If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration the li
320. ip report that contains the multicast address of the group it wants to join the packet is addressed to the same group If multiple hosts want to join the same multicast group only the report from the first host to respond reaches the querier and the remaining hosts suppress their responses for how the delay timer mechanism works refer to IGMP Snooping The querier receives the report for a group and adds the group to the list of multicast groups associated with its outgoing port to the subnet Multicast traffic for the group is then forwarded to that subnet Sending an Unsolicited IGMP Report A host does not have to wait for a general query to join a group It may send an unsolicited IGMP membership report also called an IGMP Join message to the querier Leaving a Multicast Group e Ahost sends a membership report of type 0x17 IGMP Leave message to the all routers multicast address 224 0 0 2 when it no longer cares about multicast traffic for a particular group e The querier sends a group specific query to determine whether there are any remaining hosts in the group There must be at least one receiver in a group on a subnet for a router to forward multicast traffic for that group to the subnet e Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism refer to IGMP Snooping If no hosts respond because there are none remaining in the group the querier waits a specified period and sends anothe
321. is 0x8 Dell show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 4 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 4 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Featur TLV Tx Status is enabled 58 Data Center Bridging DCB PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priority TLV Parameters FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts 1 Output TLV pkts 0 Error pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts 2 Input Appln Priority TLV pkts 0 Output Appln Priority TLV pkts 0 Error Appln Priority TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields Fields Description Interface Interface type with stack unit and port number Admin mode is on PFC Admin mode is on or off with a list of the configured PFC priorities When PFC Admin is enabled admin mode is on PFC advertisements are enabled to be sent and received from peers received PFC configuration takes effect The admin operational status for a DCBx exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled Remote is enabled Operational status enabled or disabled of peer device for DCBx exchange of PFC Pri
322. is UP Track Layer 3 Interfaces You can create an object that tracks the Layer 3 state IPv4 or IPv6 routing status of an interface e The Layer 3 status of an interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IP address The Layer 3 status of an interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down or the IP address is removed from the routing table 182 Object Tracking Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix length Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding VRF instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF The next hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object A tracked route matches a route in the routing table only if the exact address and prefix length match an entry in the routing table For example when configured as a tracked route 10 0 0 0 24 does not match the routing table entry 10 0 0 0 8 If no route table entry has the exact address and prefix length the tracked route is considered to be DOWN In addition to the entry of a route in the routing table you can configure how the status of a route is tracked in either the following ways e By the reachability of the route s next hop router e By comparing the UP or DOWN threshold for a route s metric with current entries in th
323. it id causes the link between the VLT peer switches to become disabled However removing the VLT system MAC address or the VLT unit id may disable the VLT ports if you happen to configure the unit ID or system MAC address on only one VLT peer at any time lf the link between VLT peer switches is established any change to the VLT system MAC address or unit id fails if the changes made create a mismatch by causing the VLT unit ID to be the same on both peers and or the VLT system MAC address does not match on both peers If you replace a VLT peer node preconfigure the switch with the VLT system MAC address unit id and other VLT parameters before connecting it to the existing VLT peer switch using the VLTi connection e VLT backup link 282 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator Inthe backup link between peer switches heartbeat messages are exchanged between the two chassis for health checks The default time interval between heartbeat messages over the backup link is 1 second You can configure this interval The range is from 1 to 5 seconds DSCP marking on heartbeat messages is CS6 In order that the chassis backup link does not share the same physical path as the interconnect trunk Dell Networking recommends using the management ports on the chassis and traverse an out of band management network The backup link can use user ports but not the same ports the interconnect trunk uses The chassis backup link does not carry con
324. ity 32768 Port Te 0 46 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle 150 Link Aggregation Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 i rl Port Te 0 47 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present Port Te 0 48 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 i rl HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 i Hl Port Te 0 49 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 i rl Port Te 0 50 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 1 D Port Te 0 51 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 23 191 Port Te 0 52 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lac
325. ity Map Application Priority TLV Remote ISCSI Priority Map PFC TLV Statistics Input TLV pkts PFC TLV Statistics Output TLV pkts PFC TLV Statistics Error pkts PFC TLV Statistics Pause Tx pkts PFC TLV Statistics Pause Rx pkts Input Appin Priority TLV pkts Output Appln Priority TLV pkts Error Appln Priority TLV pkts Description Status of ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from local DCBx port enabled or disabled Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs ity bitmap used by local DCBx port in ISCSI advertisements in application ty TLVs Prior priori Priority bitmap received from the remote DCBx port in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs Priority bitmap received from the remote DCBx port in iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs Number of PFC TLVs received Number of PFC TLVs transmitted Number of PFC error packets received Number of PFC pause frames transmitted Number of PFC pause frames received Number of Application Priority TLVs received Number of Application Priority TLVs transmitted Number of Application Priority error packets received Example of the show interface ets summary Command Dell show inter faces te 0 0 ets summary Interface TenGig Max Supported TC Number of Traffi Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priori 0 071 2
326. ity group 1 Assigns traffic to one priority queue with 2076 of the link bandwidth and strict priority scheduling Priority group 2 Assigns traffic to one priority queue with 5076 of the link bandwidth Priority group 3 Assigns traffic to two priority queues with 50 of the link bandwidth and strict priority scheduling In this example the configured ETS bandwidth allocation and scheduler behavior is as follows Unused bandwidth Normally if there is no traffic or unused bandwidth for a priority group the usage bandwidth allocated to the group is distributed to the other priority groups according to the bandwidth percentage allocated to each group However when three priority groups with different bandwidth allocations are used on an interface e f priority group 3 has free bandwidth it is distributed as follows 20 of the free bandwidth to priority group 1 and 30 of the free bandwidth to priority group 2 e If priority group 1 or 2 has free bandwidth 20 30 of the free bandwidth is distributed to priority group 3 Priority groups 1 and 2 retain whatever free bandwidth remains up to the 20 30 50 Data Center Bridging DCB Strict priority If two priority groups have strict priority scheduling traffic assigned from the groups priority group with the higher priority queue number is scheduled first However when three priority groups are used and two groups have strict priority scheduling such as groups 1 and 3 in the ex
327. ivilege levels and passwords refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide Configuring a Username and Password In the Dell Networking OS you can assign a specific username to limit user access to the system To configure a username and password use the following command Security 197 e Assign a user name and password CONFIGURATION mode username name access class access list name nopassword password encryption type password privilege level secret Configure the optional and required parameters name Enter a text string up to 63 characters long access class access list name Restrict access by access class nopassword Require password for the user to login encryption type Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text password Enter a string Specify the password for the user privilege level The range is from O to 15 secret Specify the secret for the user To view username use the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure the Dell Networking OS use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15 After entering the command the system requests that you enter a password Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level You can always change a password for any privilege level To change to a different privilege level enter the enable c
328. l over Ethernet FCoE provides a converged Ethernet network that allows the combination of storage area network SAN and LAN traffic on a Layer 2 link by encapsulating Fibre Channel data into Ethernet frames FCoE works with Ethernet enhancements provided in data center bridging DCB to support lossless no drop SAN and LAN traffic In addition DCB provides flexible bandwidth sharing for different traffic types such as LAN and SAN according to 802 1p priority classes of service For more information refer to the Data Center Bridging DCB chapter Ensuring Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network Fibre Channel networks used for SAN traffic employ switches that operate as trusted devices End devices log into the switch to which they are attached in order to communicate with the other end devices attached to the Fibre Channel network Because Fibre Channel links are point to point a Fibre Channel switch controls all storage traffic that an end device sends and receives over the network As a result the switch can enforce zoning configurations ensure that end devices use their assigned addresses and secure the network from unauthorized access and denial of service attacks To ensure similar Fibre Channel robustness and security with FCoE in an Ethernet cloud network the Fibre Channel over Ethernet initialization protocol FIP establishes virtual point to point links between FCoE end devices server ENodes and target storage devices and
329. l show vlan Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs R Remote Port Mirroring VLANs P Primary C Community I Isolated O Openflow U Untagged T Tagged Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged OpenFlow untagged O OpenFlow tagged GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged VLT tagged lt HQo x0o NUM Status Description Q Ports 1 Active U Po20 Fo 0 33 37 U Po21 Fo 0 49 1000 Active T Po20 Fo 0 33 37 1001 Active T Po21 Fo 0 49 Dell Link Aggregation 12 Layer 2 The Aggregator supports CLI commands to manage the MAC address table e Clearing the MAC Address Entries e Displaying the MAC Address Table The Aggregator auto configures with support for Network Interface Controller NIC Teaming Es NOTE On an Aggregator all ports are configured by default as members of all 4094 VLANs including the default VLAN All VLANs operate in Layer 2 mode You can reconfigure the VLAN membership for individual ports by using the vlan tagged orvlan untagged commands in INTERFACE configuration mode See VLAN Membership for more information Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking NOTE You can also perform some of the configurations using the Web GUI Dell Blade lO Manager For more information see the Dell Blade IO Manager Online Help Managing the MAC Address Table On an Aggregator in VLT and PMUX modes you can ma
330. lanID UdpXMedRemMedia PolicyVlanID lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyPriority UdpXMedRemMedia PolicyPriority lldpXMedLocMediaP olicyDscp UdpXMedRemMedia PolicyDscp 179 TLV Sub Type TLV Name TLV Variable Location Data System Local LLDP MED MIB Object 3 Location Identifier 4 Extended Power via MDI 180 Format Location ID Data Power Device Type Power Source Power Priority Power Value Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote UdpXMedLocLocatio nSubtype UdpXMedRemLocati onSubtype UdpXMedLocLocatio ninfo lldpXMedRemLocati oninfo UdpXMedLocxXPoED eviceType UdpXMedRemXPoED eviceType lidpXMedLocXPoEPS EPowerSource lldpXMedLocXPoEP DPowerSource UdpXMedRemXPoEP SEPowerSource UdpXMedRemXPoEP DPowerSource lldpXMedLocXPoEP DPowerPriority lidpXMedLocXPoEPS EPortPDPriority UdpXMedRemXPoEP SEPowerPriority UdpXMedRemXPoEP DPowerPriority lidpXMedLocXPoEPS EPortPowerAv lldpXMedLocXPoEP DPowerReq UdpXMedRemXPoEP SEPowerAv lldpXMedRemXPoEP DPowerReq Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 14 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes such as virtual router redundancy protocol VRRP to monitor tracked objects for example interface or link status and take appropriate action when the state of
331. le For more information refer to the Release Notes for this release Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator Description VLT LAG ID mismatch Behavior at Peer Up The VLT port channel is brought down A syslog error message is generated PMUX Mode of the lO Aggregator Behavior During Run Time The VLT port channel is brought down A syslog error message is generated Action to Take Perform a mismatch check after the VLT peer is established 291 24 FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic broad level description of the operations capabilities and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel FC Flex IO module FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic broad level description of the operations capabilities and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel FC Flex IO module Understanding and Working of the FC Flex IO Modules This chapter provides a generic broad level description of the operations and functionality of the Fiber Channel FC Flex IO module and contains the following sections e FCFlexIO Modules Overview e FC Flex IO Module Capabilities and Operations e Guidelines for Working with FC Flex IO Modules e Processing of Data Traffic e Installing and Configuring the Switch e Interconnectivity of FC Flex IO Modules with Cisco MDS Switches FC Flex IO Modules Overview The Fibre Channel
332. le VLANs configured on one switch thus segmenting the device Interfaces within a port based VLAN must be in Layer 2 mode and can be tagged or untagged in the VLAN ID VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN it must be in Layer 2 mode After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode it is automatically placed in the default VLAN Dell Networking OS supports IEEE 802 1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic When you enable tagging a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses The information that is preserved as the frame moves through the Interfaces 109 network The below figure shows the structure of a frame with a tag header The VLAN ID is inserted in the tag header Figure 15 Tagged Frame Format The tag header contains some key information used by Dell Networking OS e The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802 10 specifications 2 bytes e Tag control information TCI includes the VLAN ID 2 bytes total The VLAN ID can have 4 096 values but two are reserved 74 NOTE The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1518 bytes specified in the IEEE 802 5 standard Some devices that are not compliant with IEEE 802 5 may not support the larger frame size Information contained in the tag header allows the system to prioritize traffic and to forward information to port
333. ll conf if te 0 1 do show interface tengigabitethernet 0 1 TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 is up line protocol is down error disabled UFD Hardware is DellEth address is f8 b1 56 07 1d 8e Current address is f8 b1 56 07 1d 8e Server Port AdminState is Up Pluggable media not present Interface index is 15274753 144 Link Aggregation Internet address is not set ode of IPv4 Address Assignment DHCP Client ID f8b156071d8e MTU 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed auto Auto lag is disabled Flowcontrol rx on tx off ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 00 12 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics packets 0 bytes 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts ulticasts 0 Broadcasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles O CRC O overrun 0 discarded Statistics 0 packets 0 bytes 0 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts O Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts NONE 0 underruns O throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wr Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets se Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets s Time since last interface status change 00 11 36 Dell conf if te 0 1 Sample Configuration Dell config terminal Dell conf no io aggregator auto lag enable Dell conf end Dell show io aggregator auto lag status Auto LAG creati
334. m control status command from EXEC Privilege mode Configuring Storm Control The following configurations are available only in PMUX mode 1 To configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface use the storm control broadcast packets per second in command from INTERFACE mode 2 To configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on an interface use the storm control multicast packets per second in command from INTERFACE mode 3 To configure the percentage of unknown unicast traffic allowed on an interface use the storm control unknown unicast packets per second in command from INTERFACE mode Broadcast Storm Control 259 21 System Time and Date The Aggregator auto configures the hardware and software clocks with the current time and date If necessary you can manually set and maintain the system time and date using the CLI commands described in this chapter e Setting the Time for the Software Clock Setting the Time Zone Setting Daylight Savings Time Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Setting the Time for the Software Clock You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day month year You cannot delete the software clock The software clock runs only when the software is up The clock restarts based on the hardware clock when the switch reboots To set the software clock use the following command e Set the system
335. me vlan vlan id count dynamic interface static vlan address displays the specified entry aging time displays the configured aging time count displays the number of dynamic and static entries for all VLANs and the total number of entries dynamic displays only dynamic entries interface displays only entries for the specified interface static displays only static entries vlan displays only entries for the specified VLAN Network Interface Controller NIC Teaming NIC teaming is a feature that allows multiple network interface cards in a server to be represented by one MAC address and one IP address in order to provide transparent redundancy balancing and to fully utilize network adapter resources Support for NIC teaming is auto configured on the Aggregator including support for e MAC Address Station Move MAC Move Optimization The below fig shows a topology where two NICs have been teamed together In this case if the primary NIC fails traffic switches to the secondary NIC because they are represented by the same set of addresses 158 Layer 2 Redundant links create a switching loop Without STP broadcast storms occurs E D in E d Use backup interfaces to create redundant links in networks without STP Dell conf if te 3 41 switchport Delliconf if te 3 419 switchport backup gi 3 42 Delliconf if te 3 41 no shutdown Dell conf if te 4 31 4 switc
336. me Ports T L2 down 00 00 00 Te 0 16 Down Dell To display detailed information on a port channel enter the show interfaces port channel command in EXEC Privilege mode The below example shows the port channel s mode L2 for Layer 2 L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2 port channel assigned to a routed VLAN the status and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel In this example the Port channel 1 is a dynamically created port channel based on the NIC teaming configuration in connected servers learned via LACP Also the Port channel 128 is the default port channel to which all the uplink ports are assigned by default Dell show interface port channel Port channel 1 is up line protocol is up Created by LACP protocol Hardware address is 00 1e c9 f1 03 58 Current address is 00 1e c9 f1 03 58 Interface index is 1107755009 Minimum number of links to bring Port channel up is 1 Internet address is not set Mode of IP Address Assignment NONE 116 Interfaces DHCP Client ID 1ag1001ec9f10358 MTU 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed 50000 Mbit Members in this channel ARP type AR Te 1 2 U PA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Te Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 836 packets 108679 bytes 412 64 byte pkts 132 over 255 byte pkts 157 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 1 3 U Te 1 4 U Te 1 5 U Te 1 7 U Last clearing of show interface counters 00 13 56 135 over 127 byte
337. me time such as when some units are powered down just after reloading and powered up later to join the stack they do not participate in the election process even though the units that boot up late may have a higher priority configured This happens because the master and standby have already been elected hence the unit that boots up late joins only as a member Also when an up and running standalone unit or stack is merged with another stack based on election the losing stack reloads and the master unit of the winning stack becomes the master of the merged stack To ensure a fully synchronised bootup it is possible to reset individual units to force them to give up the management role or reload the whole stack from the command line interface CLI Example of Viewing Stack Members Dell show system brief Stack MAC 00 1e c9 1 00 9b Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 anagement online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17 46 56 1 Standby online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17 46 56 2 ember not present 3 ember not present 4 ember not present 2 ember not present Dell Failover Roles If the stack master fails for example powered off it is removed from the stack topology The standby unit detects the loss of peering communication and takes ownership of the stack management switching Stacking 237 from standby to master The lack of a standby unit triggers an election within the r
338. might include suggested values for those parameters 2 Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer 3 The client broadcasts a DHCPREQUEST message in response to the offer requesting the offered values 4 After receiving a DHCPREQUEST the server binds the clients unique identifier the hardware address plus IP address to the accepted configuration parameters and stores the data in a database called a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 71 binding table The server then broadcasts a DHCPACK message which signals to the client that it may begin using the assigned parameters There are additional messages that are used in case the DHCP negotiation deviates from the process previously described and shown in the illustration below DHCPDECLINE A client sends this message to the server in response to a DHCPACK if the configuration parameters are unacceptable for example if the offered address is already in use In this case the client starts the configuration process over by sending a DHCPDISCOVER DHCPINFORM A client uses this message to request configuration parameters when it assigned an IP address manually rather than with DHCP The server responds by unicast DHCPNAK A server sends this mes
339. module is present or in the FIP snooping bridge FSB mode when all the ports are Ethernet ports The FC Flex IO module uses the same baseboard hardware of the IOA and the M1000e chassis You can insert the FC Flex IO module into any of the optional module slots of the IOA and it provides four FC 292 FC Flex IO Modules ports per module If you insert only one FC Flex IO module four ports are supported if you insert two FC Flex IO modules eight ports are supported By installing an FC Flex IO module you can enable the IOA to directly connect to an existing FC SAN network The FC Flex IO module uses the existing slots on the IOA and provides four or eight FC ports up to speed of 8 GbE per second You can connect all of the FC ports to the same FC SAN fabric to yield FC bandwidth of up to 64GB It is possible to connect some of the ports to a different FC SAN fabric to provide access to multiple fabric devices In a typical Fibre Channel storage network topology separate network interface cards NICs and host bus adapters HBAs on each server two each for redundancy purposes are connected to LAN and SAN networks respectively These deployments typically include a TOR SAN switch in addition to a TOR LAN switch By employing converged network adapters CNAs that the FC Flex IO module supports CNAs are used to transmit FCoE traffic from the server instead of separate NIC and HBA devices In such a scenario you can determine whether the FC or S
340. n For information to configure FCoE refer to Fibre Channel over Ethernet To enable DCB with PFC buffers on a switch enter the following commands save the configuration and reboot the system to allow the changes to take effect 1 Enable DCB CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable 2 Set PFC buffering on the DCB stack unit CONFIGURATION mode dcb stack unit all pfc buffering pfc ports 64 pfc queues 2 NOTE To save the pfc buffering configuration changes save the configuration and reboot the system NOTE Dell Networking OS Behavior DCB is not supported if you enable link level flow control on one or more interfaces For more information refer to Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames Configuring DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map apply the configured DCB map to a port configure PFC without a DCB map and configure lossless queues DCB Map Configuration Procedure A DCB map consists of PFC and ETS parameters By default PFC is not enabled on any 802 1p priority and ETS allocates equal bandwidth to each priority To configure user defined PFC and ETS settings you must create a DCB map 1 Enter global configuration mode to create a DCB map or edit PFC and ETS settings CONFIGURATION mode Data Center Bridging DCB 39 dcb map name Configure the PFC setting on or off and the ETS bandwidth percentage allocated to traffic in each prio
341. n a fabric You can apply only one FCoE map on an FC port An N Port is a port on the node of an FC device and is called a node port e There should a maximum of 64 server fabric login FLOGI requests or fabric discovery FDISC requests per server MAC address before being forwarded by the FC Flex IO module to the FC core switch Without user configuration only 32 server login sessions are permitted for each server MAC address To increase the total number of sessions to 64 use the max sessions command e Adistance of up to 500 meters is supported at 8 Gbps for Fibre Channel traffic e Multiple domains are supported in an NPIV proxy gateway NPG e You cannot configure the I O Aggregator switches in Stacking mode if the switches contain the FC Flex IO module Similarly FC Flex IO modules do not function when you insert them in to a stack of 1 O Aggregator switches e fthe switch contains FC Flex modules you cannot create a stack and a log message states that stacking is not supported unless the switches contain only FC Flex modules Guidelines for Working with FC Flex IO Modules The following guidelines apply to the FC Flex IO module e All the ports of FC Flex IO modules operate in FC mode and do not support Ethernet mode e FCFlexIO modules are not supported in the chassis management controller CMC GUI The only supported FCoE functionality is NPIV proxy gateway Configure the other FCoE services such as name server zone serv
342. n installed server that you configured for LACP based NIC teaming Uplink LAG LAG 128 MT Server LAG X i tme 1 Server 1 Installed Server Blades Aaa Figure 17 LACP Operation on an Aggregator 138 Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The commands for Dell Networks s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol LACP for creating dynamic link aggregation groups LAGs known as port channels in the Dell Networking OS are provided in the following sections K NOTE For static LAG commands refer to the Interfaces chapter based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802 3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD access method and physical layer specifications Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces To configure a port channel LAG use the commands similar to those found in physical interfaces By default no port channels are configured in the startup configuration In VLT mode port channel configurations are allowed in the startup configuration These are the mandatory and optional configuration tasks e Creating a Port Channel mandatory Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel mandatory e Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel optional e Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel optional e Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces optional e Deletin
343. n the same physical interface The following illustration shows how PFC handles traffic congestion by pausing the transmission of incoming traffic with dotip priority 3 Receive Buffers dotip priorities as virtual transmit queues O NoRBROO Figure 1 Priority Based Flow Control In the system PFC is implemented as follows e PFC is supported on specified 802 1p priority traffic dot1p O to 7 and is configured per interface However only two lossless queues are supported on an interface one for Fibre Channel over Data Center Bridging DCB 55 Ethernet FCoE converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI storage traffic Configure the same lossless queues on all ports e A dynamic threshold handles intermittent traffic bursts and varies based on the number of PFC priorities contending for buffers while a static threshold places an upper limit on the transmit time of a queue after receiving a message to pause a specified priority PFC traffic is paused only after surpassing both static and dynamic thresholds for the priority specified for the port e By default PFC is enabled when you enabled DCB When you enable DCB globally you cannot simultaneously enable TX and RX on the interface for flow control and link level flow control is disabled e Buffer space is allocated and de allocated only when you configure a PFC priority on the port e PFC delay constraints place an upper limit on the
344. nable the buffer statistics tracking utility and enter the Buffer Statistics Snapshot configuration mode CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf buffer stats snapshot Dell conf no disable You must enable this utility to be able to configure the parameters for buffer statistics tracking By default buffer statistics tracking is disabled 3 To view the buffer statistics tracking resource information depending on the type of buffer information such as device level details queue based snapshots or priority group level snapshot in the egress and ingress direction of traffic use show hardware stack unit id buffer stats snapshot unit id resource x EXEC EXEC Privilege mode Dell show hardware stack unit 1 buffer stats snapshot unit 3 resource interface all queue mcast 3 Unit 1 unit 3 port 1 interface Fo 1 144 Unit 1 unit 3 port 21 interface Fo 1 164 Debugging and Diagnostics 351 Unit 1 unit 3 port 37 interface Fo 1 180 4 Use show hardware buffer stats snapshot resource interfac interface priority group id all queue ucast id all mcast id all all to view buffer statistics tracking resource information for a specific interface EXEC EXEC Privilege mode Dell show hardware buffer
345. nage the MAC address table by e Clearing the MAC Address Entries Displaying the MAC Address Table In the Standalone mode use the show cam mac stack unit 0 port set 0 command to view the mac addresses The Aggregator auto configures with support for Network Interface Controller NIC Teaming Clearing the MAC Address Entries Learned MAC addresses are entered in the table as dynamic entries which means that they are subject to aging For any dynamic entry if no packet arrives on the switch with the MAC address as the source or destination address within the timer period the address is removed from the table The default aging time is 1800 seconds in PMUX mode and 300 seconds in Standalone and VLT modes You can manually clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries To clear a MAC address table use the following command 1 Clear a MAC address table of dynamic entries EXEC Privilege mode Layer 2 157 clear mac address table dynamic address all interfaces vlan address deletes the specified entry e all deletes all dynamic entries interface deletes all entries for the specified interface e vlan deletes all entries for the specified VLAN Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table use the following command e Display the contents of the MAC address table EXEC Privilege mode K NOTE This command is available only in PMUX mode show mac address table address aging ti
346. nagement Protocol SNMP Entity MIBS The Entity MIB provides a mechanism for presenting hierarchies of physical entities using SNMP tables The Entity MIB contains the following groups which describe the physical elements and logical elements of a managed system The following tables are implemented for the Aggregator Physical Entity A physical entity or physical component represents an identifiable physical resource within a managed system Zero or more logical entities may utilize a physical resource at any given time Determining which physical components are represented by an agent in the EntPhysicalTable is an implementation specific matter Typically physical resources for example communications ports backplanes sensors daughter cards power supplies and the overall chassis which you can manage via functions associated with one or more logical entities are included in the MIB e Containment Tree Each physical component may be modeled as contained within another physical component A containment tree is the conceptual sequence of entPhysicallndex values that uniquely specifies the exact physical location of a physical component within the managed system It is generated by following and recording each entPhysicalContainedln instance up the tree towards the root until a value of zero indicating no further containment is found Example of Sample Entity MIBS outputs Dell show inventory optional module Unit Slot Expected Insert
347. ncrease refresh interval t Decrease refresh interval a Quit Maintenance Using TDR The time domain reflectometer TDR is supported on all Dell Networking switch routers TDR is an assistance tool to resolve link issues that helps detect obvious open or short conditions within any of the four copper pairs TDR sends a signal onto the physical cable and examines the reflection of the signal that returns By examining the reflection TDR is able to indicate whether there is a cable fault when the cable is broken becomes unterminated or if a transceiver is unplugged TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link that is when the link is flapping or not coming up Do not use TDR on an interface that is passing traffic When a TDR test is run on a physical cable it is important to shut down the port on the far end of the cable Otherwise it may lead to incorrect test results K NOTE TDR is an intrusive test Do not run TDR on a link that is up and passing traffic To test the condition of cables on 100 1000 10000 BASE T modules follow the below steps using the tdr cable test command 1 To test for cable faults on the TenGigabitEthernet cable e Between two ports you must not start the test on both ends of the cable e Enable the interface before starting the test e The port must be enabled to run the test or the test prints an error message 120 Interfaces EXEC Privilege mode tdr cable te
348. nd broadcast traffic can be flooded across the VLT interconnect MAC addresses for VLANs configured across VLT peer chassis are synchronized over the VLT interconnect on an egress port such as a VLT LAG MAC addresses are the same on both VLT peer nodes ARP entries configured across the VLTi are the same on both VLT peer nodes If you shut down the port channel used in the VLT interconnect on a peer switch in a VLT domain in which you did not configure a backup link the switch s role displays in the show vlt brief command output as Primary instead of Standalone When you change the default VLAN ID on a VLT peer switch the VLT interconnect may flap Ina VLT domain the following software features are supported on VLTi link layer discovery protocol LLDP flow control port monitoring jumbo frames and data center bridging DCB When you enable the VLTi link the link between the VLT peer switches is established if the following configured information is true on both peer switches the VLT system MAC address matches the VLT unit id is not identical K NOTE If you configure the VLT system MAC address or VLT unit id on only one of the VLT peer switches the link between the VLT peer switches is not established Each VLT peer switch must be correctly configured to establish the link between the peers Ifthe link between the VLT peer switches is established changing the VLT system MAC address or the VLT un
349. nd slot port information For a 10GbE interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot port numbers for example interface tengigabitethernet 0 7 EXEC Privilege mode monitor interface interface The information displays in a continuous run refreshes every two seconds by default Refer monitor interface command example below Use the following keys to manage the output e m Change mode e C Clear screen e Page up e a Page down e T Increase refresh interval by 1 second e t Decrease refresh interval by 1 second e q Quit Interfaces 119 monitor interface command example Dell monitor interface tengig 0 1 Dell Networking OS uptime is 1 day s 4 hour s 31 minute s Monitor time 00 00 00 Refresh Intvl 2s Interface Te 0 1 Disabled Link is Down Linespeed is 1000 Mbit Traffic statistics Current Rate Delta Input bytes 0 O Bps 0 Output bytes 0 0 Bps 0 Input packets 0 0 pps 0 Output packets 0 0 pps 0 64B packets 0 0 pps 0 Over 64B packets 0 0 pps 0 Over 127B packets 0 0 pps 0 Over 255B packets 0 0 pps 0 Over 511B packets 0 0 pps 0 Over 1023B packets 0 0 pps 0 Error statistics Input underruns 0 0 pps 0 Input giants 0 0 pps 0 Input throttles 0 0 pps 0 Input CRC 0 0 pps 0 Input IP checksum 0 0 pps 0 Input overrun 0 0 pps 0 Output underruns 0 0 pps 0 Output throttles 0 0 pps 0 m Change mode c Clear screen l Page up a Page down T I
350. neeeenee ntn nnne nennen tnnt 170 EEBP Operatiorns uices a lid 171 Viewing the LLDP Configuration cedem tette eter bete etenim es cem Pre rb tg 171 Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents sssssssseeeeeeeees 172 Configuring EEDPEDU Intervals x 3 erotic E em ede edo ae 175 Configuring a Time to Live cas Petr t ex Cre ede or e RR HEU UE a eR ehe pent 175 Cl dring LEDR COUNTE S miannan hath tle ea ected ee et e qa s 174 DEBUGGING LED Rs um tie Canal EUH uet cete te fero e t a e soa aat P E a MET 174 Relevant Management Objects ssssssssssssseeeseeene eene eterne innen innere tree entere nnne nns 175 14 Object prd taatai uig 181 Object Tracking OVA dl 181 Track Layer 2 dd a o da 182 Track Layer 3 Interfac s te ete odi b de auo lotes oue edes 182 Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes eren tnn nnne enne nnne nnns 183 Set T tacking Delays reip o ei Se A em S i ERU RO a 183 VRRP Object TEackilg utt bate aber barda ateo etd i al ted t het eer iem da tata 183 Object Tracking CONTIGUA ON ii A ae Waar ee sei ed cs 183 Tracking a Eayer 2 Iritelface aic bids haan ta 184 Tracking a Eayer S Int rface cech o t etna n RH aria 185 Track anlPv4 1Pv6 Route xit E ER C UAE M E e RS 186 Displaying Tracked ODJects a zii roh ite ete o oh teers 187 15 Port Monitoring idet tt data 189 S pported MOd s oo lom dob eb sss eosdebet nel edat t c ce ats a e ees 189 Configurinig Port Moriitoring
351. nel 128 is in hybrid trunk mode To bring up the downstream server ports on the FN IOM port channel 128 must be up When the Port channel 128 is up it is connected to a configured port channel on an upstream switch To enable the Port channel 128 connect any combination of the FN IOM s external Ethernet ports ports TenGigabitethernet 0 9 12 to the upstream switch The port channel may have a minimum of one and a maximum of four links Following example configures a port channel on an upstream switch e No configuration is required on the FN IOM system All configurations are done on the upstream switch Inthe example four interfaces are configured in the port channel Configure as many interfaces as you have connected Change the port numbers to match your switch e Any valid ID number can be used for the port channel number on the upstream switch Dell conf tinterface range tengigabitethernet 0 1 4 Dell conf if te 0 1 Hno shut Dell conf if te 0 1 port channel protocol lacp Dell conf if te 0 1 lacp port channel 128 mode active Dell conf interface port channel 128 Dell conf if po 128 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 128 switchport Dell conf if po 128 no shut Verifying the Configurations When the port channel of the upstream switch is configured the port channel on the FN IOM is up A series of messages is logged on the system indicating port channel 128 and the ports connected to t
352. net 0 1 TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 is up line protocol is down error disabled UFD Hardware is DellEth address is f8 b1 56 6e fc 59 Current address is f8 b1 56 6e fc 59 Before You Start 23 Server Port AdminState is N A Pluggable media not present Interface index is 1048580 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment NONE DHCP Client ID f8b1566efc59 MTU 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed auto Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interface counters 01 26 42 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 941 packets 98777 bytes 83 64 byte pkts 591 over 64 byte pkts 267 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 694 Multicasts 247 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 runts 0 giants 0 throttles O CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 1474 packets 238933 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 204 over 64 byte pkts 1071 over 127 byte pkts 175 over 255 byte pkts 24 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 1198 Multicasts 276 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 00 17 K NOTE For more information on Uplink Failure Detection and all other configuration settings see the Uplink Fail
353. nfig 4 Access the port CONFIGURATION mode interface interface slot port 5 Set the local port speed INTERFACE mode speed 100 1000 10000 auto 6 Optionally set full or half duplex INTERFACE mode duplex half full 7 Disable auto negotiation on the port If the speed is set to 1000 you do not need to disable auto negotiation INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto 8 Verify configuration changes INTERFACE mode show config Es NOTE The show interfaces status command displays link status but not administrative status For link and administrative status use the show ip interface interface brief configuration command 124 Interfaces show interface status Command Example Dell show interfaces status Description Port Te 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 IHHH e le ee lr BL 3 d 19H dei H Hn 3 d 000000000000 output omitted Status Speed Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Duplex Vlan Auto s Auto gt Auto Auto Auto Auto S3 Auto Auto aoe Auto oe Auto c Auto gt Auto Auto In the above example several ports display Auto in the speed field including port 0 1 Now in the below example the speed of port 0 1 is set to 100 Mb and then its auto negotiation is disabled
354. nfigure VLAN membership on individual ports NTERFACE mode Dell conf if te 0 2 vlan tagged 2 3 4 Use the switchport command in INTERFACE mode to enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface NTERFACE mode Dell conf if te 0 2 switchport This switchport configuration is allowed only in PMUX mode In all other modes it is automatically configured Verify the manually configured VLAN membership show interfaces switchport interface command EXEC mode Dell conf interface tengigabitethernet 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 switchport Dell conf if te 0 1 vlan tagged 2 5 100 4010 Dell show interfaces switchport te 0 1 Codes U Untagged T Tagged x Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagged G GVRP tagged M Trunk H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged Name TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 802 10Tagged True Vlan membership 0 Vlans dl 2 5 100 4010 Dell Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel To delete or disable a port channel use the following commands Delete a port channel CONFIGURATION mode no interface portchannel channel number Disable a port channel shutdown Link Aggregation 143 When you disable a port channel all interfaces within the port channel are operationally down also Configuring Auto LAG You can enable or disable auto LAG on the server facing interfaces By default auto LAG is enabled This functionality is s
355. ng examples ports 0 13 0 14 0 15 and 0 16 all belong to the same port pipe These ports mirror traffic to four different destinations 0 33 0 34 0 35 and 0 37 Another source port from the same port pipe for example 0 17 does not support a new destination for example 0 4 If you attempt to configure another destination an error message is displayed Error Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe However you can configure another monitoring session that uses one of previously configured destination ports Example of Number of Monitoring Ports Example of Number of Monitoring Ports Example of Viewing a Monitoring Session Dell show mon session SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Type 0 TenGig 0 13 TenGig 0 33 rx interface Port based 10 TenGig 0 14 TenGig 0 34 rx interface Port based 20 TenGig 0 15 TenGig 0 35 rx interface Port based 30 TenGig 0 16 TenGig 0 37 rx interface Port based Dell conf monitor session 300 Dell conf mon sess 300 source tengig 0 17 destination tengig 0 40 direction tx 9 Error Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe Dell conf mon sess 300 Dell conf mon sess 300 source tengig 0 17 destination tengig 0 33 direction tx Dell conf mon sess 300 do show monitor session SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Type Port Monitoring 191 0 10 20 30 300 Te Te Te Te Te nGig nGig nGig nGig n
356. ng responses e Access Accept the RADIUS server authenticates the user e Access Reject the RADIUS server does not authenticate the user If an error occurs in the transmission or reception of RADIUS packets you can view the error by enabling the debug radius command Transactions between the RADIUS server and the client are encrypted the users passwords are not sent in plain text RADIUS uses UDP as the transport protocol between the RADIUS server host and the client For more information about RADIUS refer to RFC 2865 Remote Authentication Dial in User Service Security 201 RADIUS Authentication Dell Networking OS supports RADIUS for user authentication text password at login and can be specified as one of the login authentication methods in the aaa authentication login command When configuring AAA authorization you can configure to limit the attributes of services available to a user When you enable authorization the network access server uses configuration information from the user profile to issue the user s session The user s access is limited based on the configuration attributes RADIUS exec authorization stores a user shell profile and that is applied during user login You may name the relevant named lists with either a unique name or the default name When you enable authorization by the RADIUS server the server returns the following information to the client Idle Time e ACL Configuration Information
357. nk with the DCBx peer is enabled e If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration the link with the DCBx peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration The internally propagated configuration is not stored in the switch s running configuration On a DCBx port in an auto downstream role all PFC application priority ETS recommend and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled Default DCBx port role Uplink ports are auto configured in an auto upstream role Server facing ports are auto configured in an auto downstream role Es NOTE You can change the port roles only in the PMUX mode Use the following command to change the port roles dcbx port role auto downstream auto upstream config source manual manual is the default port role 52 Data Center Bridging DCB K NOTE On a DCBx port application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows e The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port e On auto upstream and auto downstream ports Ifa configuration source is elected the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration source port When an application
358. nsitions on a DHCP client interface DHCP Client Debug Messages Logged during DHCP Client Enabling Disabling I I m CM sent to FTOS in sta De De In Dell 1w2d23 a 0 0 CMD Received in 1w2d23 a 0 0 to sta 1w2d23 DISCOVER sen Interface a 0 0 1w2d23 DHCPOFF Interface 10 16 134 2 1w2d23 a 0 0 LO sta 1w2d23 sent in In a 0 0 1w2d23 DHCPACK packet nterface a 0 0 with nterface Ma w2d23h a 0 0 to state BOUN D 1141w2d23h terface Ma 0 0 conf if h SSTKU a 0 0 ip NITO PAG D DHCP E NABLE S h SSTKU Transi te SEL h SSTKU ER E SSTKU ansi h NIT SE te h oo DK NIT h SSTKUNIT 0 0 D DHCP SSTKUNIT STK DHCP UNI 51 RE EASE E lw D 2 d23 Received in h SSTKUNIT RE EASE sent in Ma 0 0 1w2d23 Ma 0 0 74 h SSTKUNIT NITO tioned STING in Lease IF SSTKUNITO Transitioned EVT DISABLE Transitioned to state START 1w2d23h a 0 0 in wi l O M CE ro ro D CP TO M CP TO M CP DISABLED DHCP state BOUND TO M CP Interface TO M CP Transitioned MO Interface CMD Received in state SE IENT 5 DHC address dhc CLIENT 5 D 9 16 134 250 SDHCLIENT 5
359. nterface to enable flow control manually shut down the interface shutdown command and re enable it no shutdown command To enable pause frames use the following command e Control how the system responds to and generates 802 3x pause frames on 10 and 40 Gig ports INTERFACE mode flowcontrol rx off on tx off on negotiate rx on enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port rx off enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port tx on enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received tx off enter the keywords tx off so that flow control frames are not sent from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received negotiate enable pause negotiation with the egress port of the peer device If the negotiate command is not used pause negotiation is disabled K NOTE The default is rx off MTU Size The Aggregator auto configures interfaces to use a maximum MTU size of 12 000 bytes If a packet includes a Layer 2 header the difference in bytes between the link MTU and IP MTU must be enough to include the Layer 2 header For example for VLAN packets if the MTU is 1400 the link MTU must be no less than 1422 1400 byte IP MTU 22 byte VLAN Tag 1422 byte link MTU The MTU range is 592 12000 with a default of 1554 The
360. nterface TenGigabitEthernet 0 4 Remote Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 11 Port Role is Auto Upstream DCBX Operational Status is 64 Enabled Data Center Bridging DCB Is Configurati Local DCBX Compatibility mode Local DCBX Configured mode i Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted on Source TR Local DCBX Status DCBX Max Versi Peer DCBX Status Sequence Number Acknowledgment Number Protocol State DCBX Operational Version is 0 on Supported is 0 2 2 In Sync DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number 2 Acknowledgment Number 2 2 Input PFC TLV pkts 3 Output PFC TLV pkts 0 Error PFC pkts 0 PFC Pause Tx pkts O Pause Rx pkts 2 Input PG TLV Pkts 3 Output PG TLV Pkts 0 Error PG TLV Pkts 2 Input Appln Priority TLV pkts 0 Output Appln Priority TLV pkts 0 Error Appln Priority TLV Pkts Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 The following table describes the show interface DCBx detail command fields Field Interface Port Role DCBx Operational Status Configuration Source Local DCBx Compatibility mode Local DCBx Configured mode Peer Operating version Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted Data Center Bridging DCB Description Interface type with chassis slot and port number Configu
361. nternal ports ports 1 32 connected to the 10GbE backplane are configured as auto downstream ports On the Aggregator PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange link level configuration with DCBx peer devices SAN Storage Network FC or iSCSI Storage Array FC or iSCSI Storage Array ToR Switch FCF 10GbE Backplane Connections MXL Switches Installed in M1000e Chassis Servers Installed in M1000e Chassis Figure 4 DCBx Sample Topology Data Center Bridging DCB 55 DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions Th e following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port DCBx requires LLDP in both send TX and receive RX modes to be enabled on a port interface If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface LLDP is shut down The CIN version of DCBx supports only PFC ETS and FCOE it does not support iSCSI backward congestion management BCN logical link down LLD and network interface virtualization NIV DCBx Error Messages Th e following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs LDP MULTIPLE PEER DETECTED DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting mo pe re than one DCBx er on the port interface LDP_PEER AGE OUT DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx pe O in ve DS DC a DS DC a H er interface DSM DCBx PEER VERSION CONFLICT A l
362. ntetr Bridging Supporti deed eter on i Rita T E RE e net 19 FCoE Connectivity and FP SAGOPING imei let to ehe tbe ti bete ti Pea eenia 19 ISCSIOperatiome Le e tA a M CE Ld M Er laa el oa MUI 20 LincAggregatioto eot et id oq ede t tts 20 PIP Tracking estote eit hd evt M AE MIL AAT LES 20 Configuring VAN SA RR OC s 20 BIST QU soe ate arenes igs Aa hepsi iat cde ct V 21 Servers Facing l AGS ienee e a id da d hese eme v Rr ieee 21 Whereto Go From Here rin ceiii ed e eee be bees 21 lo Ra 21 Configuration Example ini een Av ch ace tp o ca Rel de tede aedi 22 Ensuring the FN IOM system is in Standalone MON ooccccccccccccocccccooocccccnoncnnnconnnnnnonancnccnnnncnninnns 24 Configure Interfaces and Port Channel eee ree nre 25 Verifying the Configurations tdt Er E edt E a Po Ue ev a bed aay 25 3 Configuration Fundamentals essent 27 Accessing the Command Line ssssssssssssssssese essen tantr EAAS nnt enn nint eth nnne nenne ennt Ennen 27 A it athe se ahi Airs eat ec te tetas te seh nach Soviet ie ies ieu equo reet d 27 Navigatinig CLMOd S stent e ees certs ve P et e deed etal es ae chewed eds 28 ThE do Command eect ies eene ede ce b edo ee a ee aaa 29 Undoing Gorimandss eot eter e doe ou am esee ones 30 Obtaininig Elelp O e tee te 30 Entering and Editing COMME D ede e ed 31 Command blister nuu e aoe ect acetate it eee a vade e teal e Ls 32 Filtering show Comrnand OUtpUts o aa east Aisle
363. o Uplink Port channel 128 Link Aggregation 147 Enabling the Verification of Member Links Utilization in a LAG Bundle To examine the working efficiency of the LAG bundle interfaces perform the following steps 1 The functionality to detect the working efficiency of the LAG bundle interfaces is automatically activated on all the port channels except the port channel that is configured as a VLT interconnect link during the booting of the switch 2 Usethe show link bundle distribution port channel interface number command to display the traffic handling and utilization of the member interfaces of the port channel The following sample output is displayed when you enter this show command EXEC Dell show link bundle distribution port channel Dell show link bundle distribution port channel 1 Link bundle trigger threshold 60 LAG bundle 1 Utilization In Percent 0 Alarm State Inactive Interface Line Protocol Utilization In Percent Te 0 5 Up 0 Te 0 7 Up 0 Monitoring the Member Links of a LAG Bundle You can examine and view the operating efficiency and the traffic handling capacity of member interfaces of a LAG or port channel bundle This method of analyzing and tracking the number of packets processed by the member interfaces helps you manage and distribute the packets that are handled by the LAG bundle The functionality to detect the working efficiency of the LAG bun
364. o a server facing Ethernet port in ENode mode ACLs are automatically configured to allow only FCoE traffic from servers that perform a successful FLOGI on the FC switch All other traffic on the VLAN is denied You can specify one or more upstream N ports in an FCoE map The FCoE map also contains the VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic between the SAN fabric and servers NPIV Proxy Gateway Protocol Services The Aggregator with the NPG provides the following protocol services e Fibre Channel service to create N ports and log in to an upstream FC switch e FCoE service to perform Virtualization of FC N ports on an NPG so that they appear as FCoE FCFs to downstream servers NPIV service to perform the association and aggregation of FCoE servers to upstream F ports on core switches through N ports on the NPG Conversion of server FLOGIs and FDISCs which are received over the Aggregator with the ENode ports are converted into FDISCs addressed to the upstream F ports on core switches NPIV Proxy Gateway Functionality The Aggregator with the NPG provides the following functionality in a storage area network e FIP Snooping bridge that provides security for FCoE traffic using ACLs 314 NPIV Proxy Gateway e FCoE gateway that provides FCoE to FC bridging N port virtualization using FCoE maps exposes upstream F ports as FCF ports to downstream server facing ENode ports on the NPG NPIV Proxy Gateway Terms
365. o detect on next reload Command Example QoS dotlp Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment Data Center Bridging DCB 43 When DCB is Disabled Default By default Aggregator interfaces operate with DCB disabled and link level flow control enabled When an interface comes up it is automatically configured with e Flow control enabled on input interfaces e ADCB MAP policy is applied with PFC disabled The following example shows a default interface configuration with DCB disabled and link level flow control enabled show interfaces Command Example DCB disabled and Flow Control enabled Dell show running config interface te 0 4 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 4 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport auto vlan flowcontrol rx on tx off dcb map DCB MAP PFC OFF l protocol lldp advertise management tlv management address system name dcbx port role auto downstream no shutdown Dell When DCB is Enabled When an interface receives a DCBx protocol packet it automatically enables DCB and disables link level flow control The dcb map and flow control configurations are removed as shown in the following example show interfaces Command Example DCB enabled and Flow Control disabled Dell show running config interface te 0 3 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport auto vlan protocol lldp advertise management tlv management address system name dcbx port role auto downstream no shutdo
366. o et et Un e ed eder bte tente bee Ete 260 Setting Daylight Savings TiIme i eee ee e drca ded een tee tede 261 Setting Daylight Saving Time Once nnne ennt 261 Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time 262 22 Uplink Failure Detection UFD eeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeennennne 264 Supported Modes ec ted A em m te eec 264 Feature Description xit cedet i dc e i eee ote betta 264 How Uplink Failure Detection Works entente nnns 265 UFD andiNIE Kea mag sop en M ttti uta et te tst 267 Important Points to Remember 5 e eere einer i egets 267 Uplink Failure Detection SMUX mode eene nnns 268 Configuring Uplink Failure Detection PMUX mode sssssssssssseneeeeeeeeneeee nns 268 Clearing a UFD Disabled Interface in PMUX mode 270 Displaying Uplink Failure Detection x t ertet e ten P ee me dr ebd 271 Sample Configuration Uplink Failure Detection ssssssssseeeeeeeeenns 275 23 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator eene 275 I O Aggregator IOA Programmable MUX PMUX Mode sseem mee 275 Configuring and Changing to PMUX Mode ssssssseeeeneeneneneerernrnere nennen 275 Configuring the Commands without a Separate User Account 276 Virtual Link Tr nking V LET tiet herein ftdt tao 276 OVeLVIBWis cioe sese LaL Pec LL a T moli ett Mil ie ee Atlant Abaca al frs 276 Setting Up VIT tes tances deed ies aaah ete he po de t pedi ati d RR d 277
367. obsole confirm yes no yes Please save and reset unit 0 for the c Dell conf no stack unit 0 port 37 por Disabling quad mode on stack unit 0 po Te 0 37 Te 0 38 Te 0 39 Te 0 40 obsole confirm yes no yes Please save and reset unit 0 for the c Dell conf no stack unit 0 port 49 por Te 0 49 Te 0 50 Te 0 51 Te 0 52 obsole confirm yes no yes tmode quad rt 33 will make interface configs of te after a save and reload hanges to take effect tmode quad rt 37 will make interface configs of te after a save and reload hanges to take effect tmode quad Disabling quad mode on stack unit 0 port 49 will make interface configs of te after a save and reload Link Aggregation Dell conf no stack unit 0 port 53 portmode quad confirm yes no yes Dell conf 2 Save the configuration Dell write memory startup config in flash by default Dell reload Proceed with reload confirm yes no yes 3 Configure the port channel with 40G member ports Dell configure Del Dell conf if range fo 0 33 f0 0 37 no shut Dell conf if fo0 0 49 no shut Dell configure Dell conf int port channel 20 Dell conf if po 20 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 20 switchport Dell conf if po 20 no shut Dell conf if po 20 ex Dell conf int port channel 21 Dell conf if po 21 switchport Dell conf if po 21 no shut Dell conf if po 21 end
368. ocal port expected to receive the IEEE CIN CEE version a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different conflicting DCBx rsion DCBx PFC PARAMETERS MATCH and DSM DCBx PFC PARAMETERS MISMATCH A local Bx port received compatible match or incompatible mismatch PFC configuration from a peer DCBx ETS PARAMETERS MATCH and DSM DCBx ETS PARAMETERS MISMATCH A local Bx port received compatible match or incompatible mismatch ETS configuration from a peer DP UNRECOGNISED DCBx TLV RECEIVED A local DCBx port received an unrecognized DC a Bx TLV from peer Debugging DCBx on an Interface To enable DCBx debug traces for all or a specific control paths use the following command 56 Enable DCBx debugging EXEC PRIVILEGE mode debug dcbx all auto detect timer config exchng fail mgmt resource sem tlv all enables all DCBx debugging operations auto detect timer enables traces for DCBx auto detect timers config exchng enables traces for DCBx configuration exchanges fail enables traces for DCBx failures mgmt enables traces for DCBx management frames resource enables traces for DCBx system resource frames sem enables traces for the DCBx state machine Data Center Bridging DCB tlv enables traces for DCBx TLVs Verifying the D
369. ogin authentication method list name default 206 Security Example of a Failed Authentication To view the configuration use the show config in LINE mode or the show running config tacacs command in EXEC Privilege mode If authentication fails using the primary method Dell Networking OS employs the second method or third method if necessary automatically For example if the TACACS server is reachable but the server key is invalid Dell Networking OS proceeds to the next authentication method In the following example the TACACS is incorrect but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method First bold line Server key purposely changed to incorrect value Second bold line User authenticated using the secondary method Dell conf Dell conf tdo show run aaa aaa authentication enable default tacacs enable aaa authentication enable LOCAL enable tacacs aaa authentication login default tacacs local aaa authentication login LOCAL local tacacs aaa authorization exec default tacacs none aaa authorization commands 1 default tacacs none aaa authorization commands 15 default tacacs none aaa accounting exec default start stop tacacs aaa accounting commands 1 default start stop tacacs aaa accounting commands 15 default start stop tacacs Dell conf Dell conf do show run tacacs tacacs server key 7 d05206c308f4d35b tacacs server host 10 10 10 10 timeout 1 Monitoring TACACS To vi
370. om a server on the FCoE VLAN to the FC fabric specified in Step 2 FCoE MAP mode fc map fc map value You must enter a unique MAC address prefix as the FC MAP value for each fabric The range is from OEFCOO to OEFCFF The default is none Configure the priority used by a server CNA to select the FCF for a fabric login FLOGI FCoE MAP mode fcf priority priority The range is from 1 to 255 The default is 128 Enable the monitoring FIP keep alive messages if it is disabled to detect if other FCoE devices are reachable FC FLEXIO FPORT 307 FCoE MAP mode keepalive The default is FIP keep alive monitoring is enabled 7 Configure the time interval in seconds used to transmit FIP keepalive advertisements FCoE MAP mode fka adv period seconds The range is from 8 to 90 seconds The default is 8 seconds Zoning The zoning configurations are supported for Fabric FCF Port mode operation on the MXL In FCF Port mode the fcoe map fabric map name has the default Zone mode set to deny This setting denies all the fabric connections unless included in an active zoneset To change this setting use the default zone allow command Changing this setting to all allows all the fabric connections without zoning Zoning is a mechanism to ensure only the nodes that are part of a zone can communicate with each other Zoning prevents unauthorized access of storage assets A zone consists of members which are nodes that the a
371. ommand then the privilege level If you do not enter a privilege level the default level 15 is assumed To configure a password for a specific privilege level use the following command e Configure a password for a privilege level CONFIGURATION mode enable password level level encryption mode password Configure the optional and required parameters level level Specify a level from O to 15 Level 15 includes all levels encryption type Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text password Enter a string To change only the password for the enable command configure only the password parameter To view the configuration for the enable secret command use the show running config command in EXEC Privilege mode In custom configured privilege levels the enable command is always available No matter what privilege level you entered you can enter the enable 15 command to access and configure all CLIs Configuring Custom Privilege Levels In addition to assigning privilege levels to the user you can configure the privilege levels of commands so that they are visible in different privilege levels Within the Dell Networking OS commands have certain privilege levels With the privilege command you can change the default level or you can reset their privilege level back to the default Assign the launch keyword for example configure for the keyword s command mode 198 Security To assign commands and passwords
372. on FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF FC ID Fibre Channel ID assigned by the FCF Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port Port WWNN Worldwide node name of the CNA port show fip snooping config Command Example Dell show fip snooping config FIP Snooping Feature enabled Status Enabled FIP Snooping Global enabled Status Enabled Global FC MAP Value OXOEFCOO FIP Snooping enabled VLANs VLAN Enabled FC MAP 100 TRUE OXOEFCOO show fip snooping enode Command Example Dell show fip snooping enode Enode MAC Enode Interface FCF MAC VLAN FC ID d4 ae 52 1b e3 cd Te 0 11 54 7 ee 37 34 40 100 62 00 11 show fip snooping enode Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode ENode Interface Slot port number of the interface connected to the ENode FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session FC ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF show fip snooping fcf Command Example Dell show fip snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC MAP FKA ADV PERIOD No of Enodes 54 7 ee 37 34 40 Po 22 100 0e fc 00 4000 2 show fip snooping fcf Command Description Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF FCF Interface Slot port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session FC MAP FC Map value advertised by the FCF 90 FIP Snooping Field Descripti
373. on ENode Interface Slot number of the interface connected to the ENode FKA_ADV_PERIOD Period of time in milliseconds during which FIP keep alive advertisements are transmitted No of ENodes Number of ENodes connected to the FCF FC ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF show fip snooping statistics VLAN and port Command Example Dell show fip snooping statistics interface vlan 100 Number of Vlan Requests Number of Vlan Notifications Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FLOGI Number of FDISC Number of FLOGO 20 Number of Enode Keep Alive 29021 Number of VN Port Keep Alive 23349 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement 24437 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FLOGO Rejects Number of CVL Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts S RNONOO Shayna NN Oo F F F F F F Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of Dell conf CO Co OOO OO RO ession failures due to Hardware Config Dell show fip snooping statistics int tengigabitethernet 0 11 Number of Vlan Requests sal Number of Vlan Notifications 0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits z1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits 0 Number of FLOGI Ball Number of FDISC 16 Number of FLOGO 0 Number of Enode
374. on VLT port channels For information about configuring IGMP Snooping in a VLT domain refer to VLT and IGMP Snooping All system management protocols are supported on VLT ports including SNMP RMON AAA ACL DNS FTP SSH Syslog NTP RADIUS SCP TACACS Telnet and LLDP Enable Layer 3 VLAN connectivity VLT peers by configuring a VLAN network interface for the same VLAN on both switches Dell Networking does not recommend enabling peer routing if the CAM is full To enable peer routing a minimum of two local DA spaces for wild card functionality are required Software features supported on VLT physical ports Ina VLT domain the following software features are supported on VLT physical ports 802 1p LLDP flow control port monitoring and jumbo frames Software features not supported with VLT Ina VLT domain the following software features are supported on non VLT ports 802 1x DHCP snooping FRRP IPv6 dynamic routing ingress and egress QOS Failure scenarios Ona link failover when a VLT port channel fails the traffic destined for that VLT port channel is redirected to the VLTi to avoid flooding When a VLT switch determines that a VLT port channel has failed and that no other local port channels are available the peer with the failed port channel notifies the remote peer that it no longer has an active port channel for a link The remote peer then enables data forwarding across the interconnect
375. on and authorization yield different results By default the system sets both to local 196 Security Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network However at times you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands In the Dell Networking OS you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system Every command in the Dell Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0 1 or 15 You can configure up to 16 privilege levels The Dell Networking OS is pre configured with three privilege levels and you can configure 13 more The three pre configured levels are e Privilege level 1 is the default level for EXEC mode At this level you can interact with the router for example view some show commands and Telnet and ping to test connectivity but you cannot configure the router This level is often called the user level One of the commands available in Privilege level 1 is the enable command which you can use to enter a specific privilege level e Privilege level 0 contains only the end enable and disable commands e Privilege level 15 the default level for the enable command is the highest level In this level you can access any command in the Dell Networking OS Privilege levels 2 through 14 are not configured and you can customize them for different users and access A
376. on on server port s is disabled Dell Dell config terminal Dell config interface tengigabitethernet 0 1 Dell config if te 0 1 no auto lag enable Dell config if te 0 1 show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport no auto lag enable protocol lldp advertis dcbx port role auto downstream no shutdown Dell Link Aggregation 53 127 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 127 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts eddrops c 0 00 ec 0 00 of line rate of line rate management tlv management address system name 145 Configuring the Minimum Number of Links to be Up for Uplink LAGs to be Active You can activate the LAG bundle for uplink interfaces or ports the uplink port channel is LAG 128 on the I O Aggregator only when a minimum number of member interfaces of the LAG bundle is up For example based on your network deployment you may want the uplink LAG bundle to be activated only if a certain number of member interface links is also in the up state If you enable this setting the uplink LAG bundle is brought up only when the specified minimum number of links are up and the LAG bundle is moved to the down state when the number of active links in the LAG becomes less than the specified number of interfaces By default the uplink LAG 128 interface is activated when at least one member interface is up To configure the minimum number of member links that must
377. ondary VLT Peers are supported on the Aggregator To prevent issues when connectivity between peers is lost you can designate Primary and Secondary roles for VLT peers You can elect or configure the Primary Peer By default the peer with the lowest MAC address is selected as the Primary Peer If the VLTi link fails the status of the remote VLT Primary Peer is checked using the backup link If the remote VLT Primary Peer is available the Secondary Peer disables all VLT ports to prevent loops If all ports in the VLTi link fail or if the communication between VLTi links fails VLT checks the backup link to determine the cause of the failure If the failed peer can still transmit heartbeat messages the Secondary Peer disables all VLT member ports and any Layer 3 interfaces attached to the VLAN associated with the VLT domain If heartbeat messages are not received the Secondary Peer forwards traffic assumes the role of the Primary Peer If the original Primary Peer is restored the VLT peer reassigned as the Primary Peer retains this role and the other peer must be reassigned as a Secondary Peer Peer role changes are reported as SNMP traps VLT Bandwidth Monitoring When bandwidth usage of the VLTi ICL exceeds 80 a syslog error message shown in the following message and an SNMP trap are generated SSTKUNITO M CP VLTMGR 6 VLT LAG ICL Overall Bandwidth utilization of VLT ICL LAG port channel 25 crosses threshold Bandwidth usage 80
378. onfiguration ports Ports receiving auto configuration information from the configuration source ignore their current settings and use the configuration source information Propagation of DCB Information When an auto upstream or auto downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch e If a configuration source is found the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source If the local configuration is compatible with the received configuration the port is enabled for DCBx operation and synchronization e If the configuration received from the peer is not compatible with the internally propagated configuration used by the configuration source the port is disabled as a client for DCBx operation and synchronization and a syslog error message is generated The port keeps the peer link up and continues to exchange DCBx packets If a compatible configuration is later received from the peer the port is enabled for DCBx operation K NOTE When a configuration source is elected all auto upstream ports other than the configuration source are marked as willing disabled The internally propagated DCB configuration is refreshed on all auto configuration ports and each port may begin configuration negotiation with a DCBx peer again Auto Detection of the DCBx Version
379. onfiguration protocol DHCP Accessing an Aggregator You can access the Aggregator using e Internal RS 232 using the chassis management controller CMC Telnet into CMC and do a connect b switch id to get console access to the corresponding Aggregator External serial port with a universal serial bus USB connector front panel connect using the Aggregator front panel USB serial line to get console access Labeled as USB B e Telnet ssh using the public IP interface on the fabric D interface e CMC through the private IP interface on the fabric D interface The Aggregator supports the management ethernet interface as well as the standard interface on any front end port You can use either method to connect to the system Configuring a Management Interface On the Aggregator the dedicated management interface provides management access to the system You can configure this interface with Dell Networking OS but the configuration options on this interface are limited You cannot configure gateway addresses and IP addresses if it appears in the main routing table of Dell Networking OS In addition the proxy address resolution protocol ARP is not supported on this interface For additional management access the Aggregator supports the default VLAN VLAN 1 L3 interface in addition to the public fabric D management interface You can assign the IP address for the VLAN 1 default management interface using the setup wizard or through
380. operating relative humidity is 8 percent to 85 percent non condensing with a maximum humidity gradation of 10 percent per hour Unpacking the Switch Package Contents When unpacking each switch make sure that the following items are included e One Dell Networking I O Aggregator module e One USB type A to DB 9 female cable e Getting Started Guide Safety and Regulatory Information e Warranty and Support Information Software License Agreement Unpacking Steps Before unpacking the switch inspect the container and immediately report any evidence of damage Place the container on a clean flat surface and cut all straps securing the container Open the container or remove the container top Carefully remove the switch from the container and place it on a secure and clean surface Remove all packing material OY Oc Wr P Inspect the product and accessories for damage After you insert a Flex IO module into an empty slot you must reload the I O Aggregator for the module If you remove an installed module and insert a different module type an error message displays to remind you that the slot is configured for a different type of Flex IO module You must reload the switch to make the Flex IO module operational FC Flex IO Modules 299 Interconnectivity of FC Flex IO Modules with Cisco MDS Switches In a network topology that contains Cisco MDS switches FC Flex IO modules that are plugged into the 1 O Aggregator switches ena
381. or outgoing packets on one port and forwards mirrors them to another port The source port is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MQ Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Configuring Port Monitoring To configure port monitoring use the following commands 1 Verify that the intended monitoring port has no configuration other than no shutdown as shown in the following example EXEC Privilege mode show interface 2 Create a monitoring session using the command monitor session from CONFIGURATION mode as shown in the following example CONFIGURATION mode monitor session 3 Specify the source and destination port and direction of traffic as shown in the following example MONITOR SESSION mode source K NOTE By default all uplink ports are assigned to port channel LAG 128 and the destination port in a port monitoring session must be an uplink port When you configure the destination port using the source command the destination port is removed from LAG 128 To display the uplink ports currently assigned to LAG 128 enter the show lag 128 command Example of Viewing Port Monitoring Configuration To display information on currently configured port monitoring sessions use the show monitor session command from EXEC Privilege mode Dell Dell Dell Dell conf monitor session 0 conf mon sess 0 source tengig 1 1 dest tengig 1 42 direction rx conf mon sess 0
382. ority list Remote configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities Willing status of peer Willing Status is device for DCBx exchange Willing bit received in PFC TLV enabled or disabled enabled Local is enabled DCBx operational status enabled or disabled with a list of the configured PFC priorities Operational status port state for current operational PFC configuration local port e Init Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with peer e Recommend Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from peer e Internally propagated PFC configuration parameters were received from configuration source PFC DCBx Oper Operational status for exchange of PFC configuration on local port match up or status mismatch down State Machine Type of state machine used for DCBx exchanges of PFC parameters Type e Feature for legacy DCBx versions e Symmetric for an IEEE version TLV Tx Status Status of PFC TLV advertisements enabled or disabled PFC Link Delay Link delay in quanta used to pause specified priority traffic Application Priority Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from local DCBx port TLV FCOE TLV Tx enabled or disabled Status Data Center Bridging DCB 59 Fields Application Priority TLV ISCSI TLV Tx Status Application Priority TLV Local FCOE Priority Map Application Priority TLV Local ISCSI Priority Map Application Priority TLV Remote FCOE Prior
383. orking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface Dell Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum the system does not configure more than 8000 INTERFACE level configurations override all CONFIGURATION level configurations LLDP is not hitless CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode which is a sub mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global that is they affect all interfaces on the system Configurations made at the INTERFACE level affect only the specific interface they override CONFIGURATION level configurations Example of the protocol 11dp Command CONFIGURATION Level Dell conf protocol lldp Dell conf 11dp advertise Advertise TLVs disable Disable LLDP protocol globally end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from LLDP configuration mode hello LLDP hello configuration Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 163 mode LDP mode configuration default rx and tx multiplier LDP multiplier configuration no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show LLDP configuration Dell conf lldp exit L Dell conf interface tengigabitethernet 0 3 L Dell conf if te 0 3 protocol lldp Dell conf if te 0 3 lldp ad
384. ort tengigabitethernet 0 1 Codes Untagged T Tagged Dot1x untagged X Dotlx tagged GVRP tagged M Trunk H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged U x G Name TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 802 10Tagged Hybrid SMUX port mode Admin VLANs enabled Vlan membership 0 Vlans U 1 T 2 5 100 4010 Native VlanId 1 Software show Commands Use the show version and show system stack unit 0 commands as a part of troubleshooting an Aggregator s software configuration in a standalone or stacking scenario Table 35 Software show Commands Command Description show version Display the current version of Dell Networking OS software running on an Aggregator show system stack unit O Display software configuration on an Aggregator in stacking mode Debugging and Diagnostics 333 show version Command Example Dell show version Dell Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version 1 0 Dell Forcel0 Application Software Version E8 3 17 24 Copyright c 1999 2014 by Dell Inc All Rights Reserved Build Time Thu Jul 5 11 20 28 PDT 2012 Build Path sites sjc work build buildSpaces build05 E8 3 17 SW SRC Cp_src Tacacs st sjc m1000e 3 72 uptime is 17 hour s 1 minute s System Type I O Aggregator Control Processor MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory 256M bytes of boot flash memory 1 34 port GE TE XL 56 Ten GigabitEthernet IEEE 8
385. ose the connection if a user is denied access NOTE If a VTY user logs in with RADIUS authentication the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server only if you configure RADIUS authentication The following example shows how to allow or deny a Telnet connection to a user Users see a login prompt even if they cannot log in No access class is configured for the VTY line It defaults from the local database Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on Access Class Retrieved from a Local Database Per User Dell conf user gooduser password abc privilege 10 access class permitall Dell conf user baduser password abc privilege 10 access class denyall Dell conf Dell conf aaa authentication login localmethod local Dell conf Dell conf tline vty 0 9 Dell config line vty login authentication localmethod Dell config line vty end VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the VTY line The Dell Networking OS takes the access class from the VTY line and applies it to ALL users Dell Networking OS does not need to know the identity of the incoming user and can immediately apply the access Class If the authentication method is RADIUS TACACS or line and you have configured an access Class for the VTY line Dell Networking OS immediately applies it If the access class is set to deny all or deny for the incoming subnet Dell Networking OS close
386. otocol LACP sssssssssssssssssseeneeeeneene eene nennen nnne nnn Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces ene eene 139 Creating a Port Channel OOO O O on 139 Adding a Physical Interface to a Port ChanneL ssssssssssssssseeee eene 139 Reassigning an Interface to a New Port ChaMel ooooocccccocccccccooccccconnncnnononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnans 142 Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port ChaMelinicccoconnccnnnccnincncnonnnann corn ccnon cnn 142 Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel Configuring AUtO LA iaa ee Configuring the Minimum Number of Links to be Up for Uplink LAGs to be Active 146 Optimizing Traffic Disruption Over LAG Interfaces On IOA Switches in VLT Mode 147 Preserving LAG and Port Channel Settings in Nonvolatile Storage sse 147 Enabling the LACP link fallback member eene 147 Enabling the Verification of Member Links Utilization in a LAG Bundle eene 148 Monitoring the Member Links of a LAG Bundle ssssssssseeeeeeemeeeennes 148 Verifying LACP Operation and LAG Configuration 149 Multiple UplinlebAGS ue o TAR AER Mr E a M A LU LL 155 Multiple Uplink LAGs with LOG Member Ports emere 155 Multiple Uplink LAGs with 40G Member Ports sssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeenennrennnnn 154 LAV ON 2 c Supported MOdGS
387. oup 3 Status Enabled Up Upstream Interfaces Te 0 3 Dwn Te 0 4 Up Downstream Interfaces Te 0 1 Dis Te 0 2 Dis Te 0 5 Up Te 0 9 Up Te 0 11 Up Te 0 12 Up 274 Uplink Failure Detection UFD 23 PMUX Mode of the lO Aggregator This chapter provides an overview of the PMUX mode I O Aggregator IOA Programmable MUX PMUX Mode IOA PMUX is a mode that provides flexibility of operation with added configurability This involves creating multiple LAGs configuring VLANs on uplinks and the server side configuring data center bridging DCB parameters and so forth By default IOA starts up in IOA Standalone mode You can change to PMUX mode by executing the following commands and then reloading the IOA After the IOA reboots the IOA operates in PMUX mode PMUX mode supports both stacking and VLT operations Configuring and Changing to PMUX Mode After the IOA is operational in the default Standalone mode 1 Connect the terminal to the console port on the IOA to access the CLI and enter the following commands Login username Password Dell enable Dell Dell show system stack unit 0 iom mode Unit Boot Mode Next Boot O standalone standalone Dell 2 Change IOA mode to PMUX mode Dell conf stack unit 0 iom mode programmable mux Where stack unit 0 defines the default stack unit number 3 Delete the startup configuration file Dell delete startup config 4 Reboot the IOA by entering the reload
388. out VLANs refer to VLANs and Port Tagging For more information about port channels refer to Port Channel Interfaces Dell Networking OS Behavior The Aggregator uses a single MAC address for all physical interfaces Layer 2 Mode On an Aggregator physical interfaces port channels and VLANs auto configure to operate in Layer 2 mode Following example demonstrates about the basic configurations found in Layer 2 interface Es NOTE Layer 3 Network mode is not supported on Aggregator physical interfaces port channels and VLANs Only management interfaces operate in Layer 3 mode Dell conf if te 0 1 show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport auto vlan 106 Interfaces protocol lldp advertise management tlv system name dcbx port role auto downstream no shutdown Dell conf if te 0 1 To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode Management Interfaces An Aggregator auto configures with a DHCP based IP address for in band management on VLAN 1 and remote out of band OOB management The Aggregator management interface has both a public IP and private IP address on the internal Fabric D interface The public IP address is exposed to the outside world for WebGUI configurations WSMAN and other proprietary traffic You can statically configure the public IP address or obtain the IP address dynamically using the dynamic host c
389. over 255 byte pkts 0 Multicasts 5 0 runts 0 CRC Output Statistics 1649714 packets 0 64 byte pkts 34 over 255 byte p 0 Multicasts O0 O throttles Rate info Dell 341 27271 over 64 byte pkts 56 over 511 byte pkts 0 giants 0 overrun O discarded interval 45 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec Output 00 06 Mbits sec 1731 bytes Broadcasts 0 throttles O discarded 1948622676 bytes 27234 over 64 byte pkts kts 504838 over Broadcasts 2 packets sec 8 packets sec 207 over 127 byte pkts 78 over 1023 byte pkts 0 underruns 107970 over 127 byte pkts 511 byte pkts 1009638 over 1023 byte pkts 1649714 Unicasts 0 collisions 0 00 0 00 of line rate of line rate Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking You can enable the tracking of statistical values of buffer spaces at a global level The buffer statistics tracking utility operates in the max use count mode that enables the collection of maximum values of counters To configure the buffer statistics tracking utility perform the following step 1 Enable the buffer statistics tracking utility and enter the Buffer Statistics Snapshot configuration mode 350 Debugging and Diagnostics CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf buffer stats snapshot Dell conf no disable You must enable this utility to be able to configure the parameters for buffer statistics tracking By default buffer statistics tracking is disabled 2 E
390. owing functions e FIP virtual local area network VLAN discovery FCoE devices Enodes discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic e FIP discovery FCoE end devices and FCFs are automatically discovered Initialization FCoE devices perform fabric login FLOGI and fabric discovery FDISC to create a virtual link with an FCoE switch e Maintenance A valid virtual link between an FCoE device and an FCoE switch is maintained and the link termination logout LOGO functions properly FCoE Initialization Protocol FIP VLAN Discovery All FCF MAC ENode VLAN Notification FCF 4 FCoE Switch Discovery Solicitation All FCF MAC Discovery Advertisement X m FIP FLOGI FLOGI Accept PLOGI SCR Connected FIP LOGOUT End Session Accept Clear Virtual Unk End Session Accept Figure 7 FIP Discovery and Login between an ENode and an FCF FIP Snooping 83 FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF Then using ACLs a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end device and an FCF An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge FSB On a FIP snooping bridge ACLs are created dynamically as FIP login frames are processed The ACLs are installed on switch ports configured for the
391. p Downstream Interfaces Te 0 1 Up Te 0 2 Up Te 0 3 Dwn Te 0 4 Dwn Te 0 5 Up Te 0 6 Dwn Te 0 7 Dwn Te 0 8 Up Te 0 9 Up Te 0 10 Up Te 0 11 Dwn Te 0 12 Dwn Te 0 13 Up Te 0 14 Dwn Te 0 15 Up Te 0 16 Up Te 0 17 Dwn Te 0 18 Dwn Te 0 19 Dwn Te 0 20 Dwn Te 0 21 Dwn Te 0 22 Dwn Te 0 23 Dwn Te 0 24 Dwn Te 0 25 Dwn Te 0 26 Dwn Te 0 27 Dwn Te 0 28 Dwn Te 0 29 Dwn Te 0 30 Dwn Te 0 31 Dwn Te 0 32 Dwn 2 Verify that the downstream port channel in the top of rack switch that connect to the Aggregator is configured correctly Broadcast unknown multicast and DLF packets switched at a very low rate Symptom Broadcast unknown multicast and DLF packets are switched at a very low rate By default broadcast storm control is enabled on an Aggregator and rate limits the transmission of broadcast unknown multicast and DLF packets to 1Gbps This default behavior is designed to avoid unnecessarily flooding these packets on all 4094 VLANs on all Aggregator interfaces default configuration Resolution Disable broadcast storm control globally on the Aggregator Steps to Take 1 Display the current status of broadcast storm control on the Aggregator show io aggregator broadcast storm control status command Dell show io aggregator broadcast storm control status Enabled Storm Control Broadcast Traffic limited to 1000 Mbps 2 Disable broadcast storm control no io aggregator broadcast s
392. p Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 SES Port Te 0 53 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 r Da Port Te 0 54 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 el Port Te 0 55 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 SI Port Te 0 56 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 HJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 Dd Link Aggregation 151 S D P C JE Jr D L A Q J O R T S D P A P A how interfaces port channel 1 Command Example ell show interfaces port channel 1 ort channel 1 is up line protocol is up reated by LACP protocol ardware address is 00 01l e8 el el cl Current address is 00 01 e8 el el cl nterface index is 1107755009 inimum number of links to br
393. p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled according to the default dot1p queue mapping dotip priorities within the same queue should have the same traffic properties and scheduling method A priority group consists of 802 1p priority values that are grouped together for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling and that share the same latency and loss requirements All 802 1p priorities mapped to the same queue should be in the same priority group By default All 802 1p priorities are grouped in priority group O 1007 of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0 The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 1576 The maximum number of priority groups supported in ETS output policies on an interface is equal to the number of data queues 4 on the port The 802 1p priorities in a priority group can map to multiple queues Adcb map is created to associate a priority group with a dcb map with scheduling and bandwidth configuration and applied on egress ports The ETS configuration associated with 802 1p priority traffic in a dcb map is used in DCBx negotiation with ETS peers Data Center Bridging DCB 49 When a dcb map is applied to an interface ETS configured scheduling and bandwidth allocation take precedence over any auto configured settings in the QoS output policies ETS is enabled by default with the default ETS configuration applied all do
394. pktsOutput Conf TLV pktsError Conf TLV pkts Input Reco TLV pktsOutput Reco TLV pktsError Reco TLV pkts Description ETS configuration on local port including Admin mode enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer priority groups assigned dotlp priorities and bandwidth allocation Port state for current operational ETS configuration e Init Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with peer e Recommend Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from peer e Internally propagated ETS configuration parameters were received from configuration source Operational status of ETS configuration on local port match or mismatch Type of state machine used for DCBx exchanges of ETS parameters e Feature for legacy DCBx versions e Asymmetric for an IEEE version Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements enabled or disabled Status of ETS Recommendation TLV advertisements enabled or disabled Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received and transmitted and number of ETS Error Configuration TLVs received Number of ETS Recommendation TLVs received and transmitted and number of ETS Error Recommendation TLVs received Example of the show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details Command Dell show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details stack unit 0 stack port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled Priority list is Local is enabled Priority list is Link Delay 45556 pause quantum
395. played Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot port fortygigabitEthernet slot port Open a DCB map and enter DCB map configuration mode INTERFACE mode dcb map name Disable PFC DCB MAP mode no pfc mode on Return to interface configuration mode DCB MAP mode exit Apply the DCB map created to disable the PFC operation on the interface INTERFACE mode dcb map name default Configure the port queues that still function as no drop queues for lossless traffic Range 0 3 Separate queue values with a comma specify a priority range with a dash for example pfc no drop queues 1 3 or pfc no drop queues 2 3 Default No lossless queues are configured INTERFACE mode Data Center Bridging DCB pfc no drop queues queue rang The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on a port is 2 You cannot configure PFC no drop queues on an interface on which a DCB map with PFC enabled has been applied or which is already configured for PFC using the pfc priority command Data Center Bridging Default Configuration Before you configure PFC and ETS on a switch see the priority group setting taken into account the following default settings DCB is enabled PFC and ETS are globally enabled by default The default dotip priority queue assignments are applied as follows Dell conf tdo show qos dotlp queue mapping Dotlp Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 0 0 0
396. po el UTI Dell show mac address table Vlanld Mac Address Type Interface State 1000 00 01 e8 06 95 ac Dynamic Tengig 0 7 Active HF ESSE Query from Management Station gt snmpwalk v 2c c techpubs 10 11 131 162 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 2 2 1 Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port Channel Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port channel The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port channel number SY St eMmS 2 252 222 53725 RS Dell conf do show mac address table Vlanld ac Address Type Interface State 1000 00 01 e8 06 95 ac Dynamic Po 1 Active RSS ee Query from Management Station gt snmpwalk v 2c c techpubs 10 11 131 162 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 2 1 1 5 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 1 1 1000 0 1 232 6 149 172 1 INTEGER 1000 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 1 2 1000 0 1 232 6 149 172 1 Hex STRING 00 01 E8 06 95 AC SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 1 3 1000 0 1 232 6 149 172 1 INTEGER 1 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 5 1 4 1000 0 1 232 6 149 172 1 INTEGER 1 226 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Deriving Interface Indices The Dell Networking OS assigns an interface number to each configured or unconfigured physical and logical interface Display the interface index number using the show interfacecomman
397. ps A Data Center Bridging DCB map is used to configure DCB functionality such as PFC and ETS on the Aggregator with the Ethernet ports that support CEE traffic and are DCBx enabled by default By default no PFC and ETS settings in a DCB map are applied to the Aggregator with the Ethernet ports when they are enabled On an Aggregator with the NPG you must configure PFC and ETS parameters in a DCB map and then apply the map to server facing Ethernet ports FCoE Maps An FCoE map is used to identify the SAN fabric to which FCoE storage traffic is sent Using an FCoE map an Aggregator with the NPG operates as an FCoE FC bridge between an FC SAN and FCoE network by providing FCoE enabled servers and switches with the necessary parameters to log in to a SAN fabric An FCoE map applies the following parameters on server facing Ethernet and fabric facing FC ports on the Aggregator e The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic The FC MAP value used to generate a fabric provided MAC address e The association between the FCoE VLAN ID and FC fabric ID where the desired storage arrays are installed Each Fibre Channel fabric serves as an isolated SAN topology within the same physical network The priority used by a server to select an upstream FCoE forwarder FCF priority e FIP keepalive FKA advertisement timeout NOTE In each FCoE map the fabric ID FC MAP value and FCoE VLAN must be unique Use one FCoE
398. r Ethernet FCoE encapsulates Fiber Channel frames over Ethernet networks On an Aggregator the internal ports support FCoE connectivity and connects to the converged network adapter CNA in servers FCoE allows Fiber Channel to use 10 Gigabit Ethernet networks while preserving the Fiber Channel protocol The Aggregator also provides zero touch configuration for FCoE connectivity The Aggregator auto configures to match the FCoE settings used in the switches to which it connects through its uplink ports Before You Start 19 FIP snooping is automatically configured on an Aggregator The auto configured port channel LAG 128 operates in FCF port mode SCSI Operation Support for iSCSI traffic is turned on by default when the Aggregator powers up No configuration is required When an aggregator powers up it monitors known TCP ports for SCSI storage devices on all interfaces When a session is detected an entry is created and monitored as long as the session is active The Aggregator also detects iSCSI storage devices on all interfaces and autoconfigures to optimize performance Performance optimization operations such as Jumbo frame size support and disabling storm control on interfaces connected to an iSCSI equallogic EQL storage device are applied automatically Link Aggregation All uplink ports are configured in a single LAG LAG 128 Server facing ports are auto configured as part of link aggregation groups if the corr
399. r bridging DCB features are auto configured in standalone mode You can display information on DCB operation by using show commands K NOTE DCB features are not supported on an Aggregator in stacking mode Supported Modes Standalone Stacking PMUX VLT Ethernet Enhancements in Data Center Bridging The following section describes DCB e The device supports the following DCB features Data center bridging exchange protocol DCBx Priority based flow control PFC Enhanced transmission selection ETS DCB refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single robust converged network to support multiple traffic types including local area network LAN server and storage traffic Through network consolidation DCB results in reduced operational cost simplified management and easy scalability by avoiding the need to deploy separate application specific networks For example instead of deploying an Ethernet network for LAN traffic additional storage area networks SANs to ensure lossless fibre channel traffic and a separate InfiniBand network for high performance inter processor computing within server clusters only one DCB enabled network is required in a data center The Dell Networking switches that support a unified fabric and consolidate multiple network infrastructures use a single input output I O device called a converged network adapter CNA A CNA is a computer input output
400. r network control traffic which the CPU must process Example of Viewing Dataplane Statistics Dell show hardware stack unit 2 cpu data plane statistics be pci driver statistics for device 0 rxHandle noMhdr noMbuf noClus recvd dropped recvToNe rxError rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx 2 w Fl CEL Ae EEE ET E T ee tg POE 0 UD 0 lg tg FO Fg tg U E t tapathErr transmitted txRequested noTxDesc txError txReqTooLarge txInternalError Debugging and Diagnostics o0o000000000000000000000000OoO 349 txDatapathErr txPkt COSO txPkt COS1 txPkt COS2 txPkt COS3 txPkt COS4 txPkt COS5 txPkt COS6 txPkt COS7 txPkt UNITO o0000000000o The show hardware stack unit cpu party bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus which carries inter process communication traffic between CPUs Example of Viewing Party Bus Statistics Dell show hardware stack unit 2 cpu party bus statistics Input Statistics 27550 packets 0 dropped Output Statistics 1649566 packets 0 errors 2559298 bytes 0 errors 1935316203 bytes Displaying Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack unit stack port command displays input and output statistics for a stack port interface Example of Viewing Stack Unit Statistics Dell show hardware stack unit 2 stack port 49 Input Statistics 27629 packets 0 64 byte pkts 17
401. r query If it still receives no response the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet IGMP Version 3 Conceptually IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2 However there are differences e Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source which helps the multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 97 To enable filtering routers must keep track of more state information that is the list of sources that must be filtered An additional query type the group and source specific query keeps track of state changes while the group specific and general queries still refresh existing state e Reporting is more efficient and robust Hosts do not suppress query responses non suppression helps track state and enables the immediate leave and IGMP snooping features state change reports are retransmitted to insure delivery and a single membership report bundles multiple statements from a single host rather than sending an individual packet for each statement To accommodate these protocol enhancements the IGMP version 3 packet structure is different from version 2 Queries shown below in query packet format are still sent to the all systems address 224 0 0 1 but reports shown below in report packet format are sent to all the IGMP version
402. r verte er iy e liada Enharicerrments bo b re iol a bes Ute rcr a ee ead Fetching the Switchport Configuration and the Logical Interface Configuration MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash sssssssse e Viewing the Available Flash Memory Size eene MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System ssssssssssee esed oM 255 Supported Modest andadas 235 Stackirnig Aggregators uice ce te get teta te pa ERE Ep a PO n e a Aia 255 Stack Management Roles eere 256 Stack Master Election c o ee ee ele hula venit abi eode edic ay 237 Failover Roles oie ete eee em e ental alec ad reci Beet te e Lene ete ite rete de da 237 MAC Addressitig eee th et e t at eed AA ee 258 Stacking LAG dete tes fos cet s tbe e Date ot b o eet ee odes 238 Stacking OA 238 Stacking Port Numbers geet ee hte a t cL ieee che nee ie ped 239 Stackingan PM UA Me AR 241 CONFIGURA SWITCH SK A a e eve A d eds 241 Stacking Prerequisites instalaste data exorare quo kf e ep e nienia 242 Master Selection Criteria o aco A e omes 242 Configuring Priority and StaCck QrOUP ccccccoonononccnnooncononnnononanonnnnnonnnnnonnonnnonnonnnnn nnn nnne ertet nna 242 Gablirig St cked Switches 4 ooo ec e EOD IR MIHI ER REOR 243 Accessing tie LIS cs canals A eaten entertain aimee tapas 244 Configuring and Bringing Up a Stack nennen enne
403. range te 0 41 42 lacp port channel 10 mode active Dell conf if range te 0 41 42 lacp end Dell L L L E Dell configure L L L L Dell conf int tengigabitethernet 0 43 Dell conf if te 0 43 port channel protocol lacp Dell conf if te 0 43 lacp port channel 11 mode active Dell conf if te 0 43 lacp end Dell 3 Show the LAG configurations and operational status Dell show interface port channel brief Codes L LACP Port channel O OpenFlow Controller Port channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports L 10 L3 up 00 01 00 Te 0 41 Up Te 0 42 Up L 11 L3 up 00 00 01 Te 0 43 Up Dell 4 Configure the port mode VLAN and so forth on the port channel Dell configure Dell conf tint port channel 10 Dell conf if po 10 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 10 switchport Dell conf if po 10 vlan tagged 1000 Dell conf if po 10 link bundle monitor enable Dell configure Dell conf tint port channel 11 Dell conf if po 11 portmode hybrid Dell conf if po 11 switchport Dell conf if po 11 vlan tagged 1000 Error Same VLAN cannot be added to more than one uplink port LAG Dell conf if po 11 vlan tagged 1001 Link Aggregation 153 Dell conf if po 11 link bundle monito Dell show vlan Codes Mirroring VLANs P Primary O Openflow Untagged T Tagged Dotlx untagged X Dotlx tagge Q3 QOxG GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H
404. red DCBx port role auto upstream or auto downstream Operational status enabled or disabled used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration The DCBx operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBx configuration source on the switch true yes or false no DCBx version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible In auto upstream mode a port can only received a DCBx version supported on the remote peer DCBx version configured on the port CEE CIN IEEE v2 5 or Auto port auto configures to use the DCBx version received from a peer DCBx version that the peer uses to exchange DCB parameters Transmission status enabled or disabled of advertised DCB TLVs see TLV code at the top of the show command output 65 Field Local DCBx Status DCBx Operational Version Local DCBx Status DCBx Max Version Supported Local DCBx Status Sequence Number Local DCBx Status Acknowledgment Number Local DCBx Status Protocol State Peer DCBx Status DCBx Operational Version Peer DCBx Status DCBx Max Version Supported Peer DCBx Status Sequence Number Peer DCBx Status Acknowledgment Number Total DCBx Frames transmitted Total DCBx Frames received Total DCBx Frame errors Total DCBx Frames unrecognized PFC TLV Statistics Input PFC TLV pkts PFC TLV Statistics Output PFC TLV pkts PF
405. red for an unconfigured priority group Total ETS bandwidth mapped in priority groups is not equal to 100 e Priorities mapped to a queue use different TSAs Total bandwidth assigned to priorities in one or more priority groups is not equal to 100 Or one of the following ETS failure errors occurred e Incompatible priority group ID PGID e Incompatible bandwidth BW allocation e Incompatible TSA e Incompatible TC BW e Incompatible TC TSA Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method To configure the dynamic buffer capability perform the following steps 1 interfaces Enable the DCB application By default DCB is enabled and link level flow control is disabled on all CONFIGURATION mode Data Center Bridging DCB 69 S6000 109 Dell conf dcbh enable Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported CONFIGURATION mode S6000 109 Dell conf dcb pfc shared buffer size 4000 S6000 109 Dell conf dcb pfc total buffer size 5000 Configure the number of PFC queues CONFIGURATION mode Dell conf dcb enable pfc queues 4 The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured will depend on the buffer For each priority you can specify the shared buffer threshold limit the ingress buffer size buffer limit for pausing the acceptance of packets and the buffer offset limit for resuming the acceptance of received packets Conf
406. resses 80 Viewing DHCP Statistics and Lease Information 80 6 FIP SIMOO PING ices ncaa cases iia 82 Supported Modes eo len eine eerie a ed 82 Fibre Channel overEthernet ni te re sm CE E e tae 82 Ensuring Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network ee 82 FIP Snooping on Ethiernet Bridges utet ce Dee ica eia o ie end He Ld 84 How FIP Snooping is Implemented sssssssssssssseseeeeeeee eene 86 FIP Smooping or VEANS dt od so oue ettet M e endet neus 86 FE MAP Value fne eccL bate hoe IIT Lt M AT T dm 86 Bridge to F GE Lbs iu A He e TRE ER E ER et 86 Impact on other Software Features nennen enter nnne nnne 86 EIP Snoopirig Prerequisites eie tee ct rr rm ire die pP OR taa 87 FIP Sricoping Restrictions sci retener E ELE DER TRI EUR ERRARE een ee TER REALE RE APER 87 Contiguririg FIP SriGOpllig e ave cure des eee ede ee oe re ne eee ere e rores 87 Displaying FIP Snooping Informatio Nani ae nennen nennen tns 88 FIP Snoopirig Example tm ierit te te teret petet buceo e tente tetro 94 Debugging FIP Snoopling eb e tdeo o ri er ete epa ederet 95 7 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 96 A sine La D E Na RI Ba IRR ee ea det 96 IGMP VetsiOn 2 ci e v c c m ML m UEM M mM MU MEE 96 Joining a Multicast GOL Parita A A e de e dea eA re dede eie 97 Leaving a Multicast Croma tt ee hem d Po tr Beh ec t o PU d rne 97 GMP Versioni S ti eae AO 97 Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources
407. ride the previous DCB map settings Then delete the original dotip priority to priority group mapping If you delete the dot1p priority to priority group mapping no priority pgid command before you apply the new DCB map the default PFC and ETS parameters are applied on the interfaces This change may create a DCB mismatch with peer DCB devices and interrupt the network operation Applying a DCB Map on Server facing Ethernet Ports You can apply a DCB map only on a physical Ethernet interface and can apply only one DCB map per interface 1 Enter CONFIGURATION mode on a server facing port or port channel to apply a DCB map You cannot apply a DCB map on a port channel However you can apply a DCB map on the ports that are members of the port channel CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot port Apply the DCB map on an Ethernet port or port channel The port is configured with the PFC and ETS settings in the DCB map NPIV Proxy Gateway 319 Repeat this step to apply a DCB map to more than one port or port channel INTERFACE mode dcb map name Dell interface tengigabitEthernet 0 0 Dell config if te 0 0 dcb map SAN DCB1 Creating an FCoE VLAN Create a dedicated VLAN to send and receive Fibre Channel traffic over FCoE links between servers and a fabric over an NPG The NPG receives FCoE traffic and forwards decapsulated FC frames over FC links to SAN switches in a specified fabric 1 Create the dedi
408. rity group or whether the priority group traffic should be handled with strict priority scheduling You can enable PFC on a maximum of two priority queues on an interface Enabling PFC for dotip priorities makes the corresponding port queue lossless The sum of all allocated bandwidth percentages in all groups in the DCB map must be 100 Strict priority traffic is serviced first Afterwards bandwidth allocated to other priority groups is made available and allocated according to the specified percentages If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups DCB MAP mode priority group group num bandwidth percentage strict priority pfc on off Example priority group 0 bandwidth 60 pfc off priority group 1 bandwidth 20 pfc on priority group 2 bandwidth 20 pfc on priority group 4 strict priority pfc off Repeat this step to configure PFC and ETS traffic handling for each priority group Specify the dotlp priority to priority group mapping for each priority Priority group range O to 7 All priorities that map to the same queue must be in the same priority group DCB MAP mode priority pgid dot1p0 group num dotlp1 group num dotip2 group num dotip3 group num dotlp4 group num dotip5 group num dotip6 group num dotlp7 group num Leave a space between each priority group number For example priority pgid 00012444 in which priority group O maps to dotip priorities O 1 and
409. rization ens 214 VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization sss eee 215 VTY MAGZSARilt r SUppOEt uie nec i re boca a abe ade awe or ete 215 17 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 217 Supported Modest arrollo ads aee Mec oid eis 217 Implementation nformatie Naas eet roter bc titu lead a re gres redeat ce dS 217 Configuring the Simple Network Management Protocol 217 Important Points to Remember ere Er dd rae ha Eee ee edes 217 Setting up SNMP toit to t S e Le Pn aret ea tate n tnos 218 Gr ating a Community sco d ERR RP EUR ER UPPER 218 Setting Up User Based Security SNMPv3 ssssssssssssssseeseseeeeenee enne nnne tnn 218 Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP ssssssssseeeeeeeees 220 Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps nnne nennen ner ertt 221 R ading Managed Object Values edid Ree ert RD E tr Rate ges Displaying the Ports in a VLAN using SNMP eem eene rennen nnne rne Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Deriving Interface Indices uiui rer ee cet da Lado il ete veta Yee Deer te to ede teen Monitor PortsChannels 5t ice cote ptio feudi las fa retener redet sae ett dese aai duet orga Enti MIBS at ada A thatthe e mca de M eL ALME SE E La Lo D Example of Sample Entity MIBS OUtpUtS oocoonccccccnnccccnnononcnccnonnccnnnnnccnnnanncnn a nnns SNMP Traps fori Link Stata ii A add Standard VLAN MIB ai ces he correre eee der eed t tee
410. rking OS determines if the first interface specified TenGig 0 0 is up After it is up the common speed of the port channel is 1000 Mb s Dell Networking OS disables those interfaces configured with speed 10000 Mb s or whose speed is 10000 Mb s as a result of auto negotiation In this example you can change the common speed of the port channel by changing its configuration so the first enabled interface referenced in the configuration is a 1000 Mb s speed interface You can also change the common speed of the port channel by setting the speed of the TenGig 0 1 interface to 1000 Mb s Uplink Port Channel VLAN Membership The tagged VLAN membership of the uplink LAG is automatically configured based on the VLAN configuration of all server facing ports ports 1 to 32 The untagged VLAN used for the uplink LAG is always the default VLAN 1 Server Facing Port Channel VLAN Membership The tagged VLAN membership of a server facing LAG is automatically configured based on the server facing ports that are members of the LAG The untagged VLAN of a server facing LAG is auto configured based on the untagged VLAN to which the lowest numbered server facing port in the LAG belongs Displaying Port Channel Information To view the port channel s status and channel members in a tabular format use the show interfaces port channel brief command in EXEC Privilege mode Dell show int port brief Codes L LACP Port channel LAG Mode Status Upti
411. ro is reserved for logical interfaces it starts from 1 For the first interface port number is set to 1 Adding it causes an increment by 1 for the next interfaces so it only starts from 2 Therefore the port number is set to 42 for 0 41 Example of Deriving the Interface Index Number Dell show interface tengig 1 21 TenGigabitEthernet 1 21 is up line protocol is up Hardware is Dell ForcelOEth address is 00 01 e8 0d b7 4e Current address is 00 01 e8 0d b7 4e Interface index is 72925242 output omitted Monitor Port Channels To check the status of a Layer 2 port channel use fLOLinkAggMib 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 2 In the following example Po 1 is a switchport and Po 2 is in Layer 5 mode NOTE The interface index does not change if the interface reloads or fails over If the unit is renumbered for any reason the interface index changes during a reload Example of SNMP Trap for Monitored Port Channels senthilnathan lithium snmpwalk v 2c c public 10 11 1 1 1 3 06 1 4 1 6027 3 2 1 1 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 INTEGER 1 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 INTEGER 2 SNMPv2 SMI enterprises 6027 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 Hex STRING 00 01 E8 13 A5 C7 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 227
412. rom the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup issue the following commands Example of Enabling Authentication from the RADIUS Server Dell config aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs Radius and TACACS server has to be properly setup for this Dell config radius server host x x x x key lt some password gt Dell config 4 tacacs server host x x x x key lt some password gt To use local authentication for enable secret on the console while using remote authentication on VTY lines issue the following commands Example of Enabling Local Authentication for the Console and Remote Authentication for VTY Lines Dell config 4 aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell config 4 line vty 0 9 Dell config line vty enable authentication mymethodlist Server Side Configuration e TACACS When using TACACS Dell Networking OS sends an initial packet with service type SVC_ENABLE and then sends a second packet with just the password The TACACS server must have an entry for username enable e RADIUS When using RADIUS authentication Dell Networking OS sends an authentication packet with the following Username Senab15 Password lt password entered by user gt Therefore the RADIUS server must have an entry for this username AAA Authorization The Dell Networking OS enables AAA new model by default You can set authorization to be either local or remote Different combinations of authenticati
413. router e level level the range is from O to 15 Levels O 1 and 15 are pre configured Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration command an Dell CLI keyword up to five keywords allowed e reset return the command to its default privilege mode To view the configuration use the show running config command in EXEC Privilege mode The following example shows a configuration to allow a user john to view only EXEC mode commands and all snmp server commands Because the snmp server commands are enable level commands and by default found in CONFIGURATION mode also assign the launch command for CONFIGURATION mode configure to the same privilege level as the snmp server commands Line 1 The user john is assigned privilege level 8 and assigned a password Line 2 All other users are assigned a password to access privilege level 8 Security 199 Line 3 The configure command is assigned to privilege level 8 because it needs to reach CONFIGURATION mode where the snmp server commands are located Line 4 The snmp server commands in CONFIGURATION mode are assigned to privilege level 8 Example of Configuring a Custom Privilege Level Dell conf username john privilege 8 password john Dell conf enable password level 8 notjohn Dell conf privilege exec level 8 configure Dell conf privilege config level 8 snmp server Dell conf end Dell show running config Current Configuration hostnam
414. rror disabled Te 0 4 00 11 51 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Downstream interface cleared from UFD error disabled Te 0 5 00 11 51 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Downstream interface cleared from UFD B error disabled Te 0 6 00 11 51 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Changed interface state to up Te 0 4 00 11 51 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Changed interface state to up Te 0 5 00 11 51 SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 OSTATE UP Changed interface state to up Te 0 6 Displaying Uplink Failure Detection To display information on the UFD feature use any of the following commands e Display status information on a specified uplink state group or all groups EXEC mode show uplink state group group id detail group id The values are 1 to 16 detail displays additional status information on the upstream and downstream interfaces in each group e Display the current status of a port or port channel interface assigned to an uplink state group EXEC mode show interfaces interface interface specifies one of the following interface types 10 Gigabit Ethernet enter tengigabitethernet slot port 40 Gigabit Ethernet enter fortygigabitethernet slot port Uplink Failure Detection UFD 271 Port channel enter port channel 1 512 If a downstream interface in an uplink state group is disabled Oper Down state by uplink state tracking because an upstream port is down the message error disabled UFD
415. rs from the cursor to the end of the word Configuration Fundamentals 31 Command History Dell Networking OS maintains a history of previously entered commands for each mode For example e When you are in EXEC mode the UP and DOWN arrow keys display the previously entered EXEC mode commands e When you are in CONFIGURATION mode the UP or DOWN arrows keys recall the previously entered CONFIGURATION mode commands Filtering show Command Outputs Filter the output of a show command to display specific information by adding except find grep no more save specified text after the command The variable specified textisthe text for which you are filtering and it IS case sensitive unless you use the ignore case sub option Starting with Dell Networking OS version 7 8 1 0 the grep command accepts an ignore case sub option that forces the search to case insensitive For example the commands show run grep Ethernet returns a search result with instances containing a capitalized Ethernet such as interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 show run grep ethernet does not return that search result because it only searches for instances containing a non capitalized ethernet show run grep Ethernet ignore case returns instances containing both Ethernet and ethernet The grep command displays only the lines containing specified text The following example shows this command used in combination with the sho
416. rsty and coming from several interfaces In this case e Reduce the dedicated buffer on all queues interfaces e Increase the dynamic buffer on all interfaces Debugging and Diagnostics 345 Increase the cell pointers on a queue that you are expecting will receive the largest number of packets To define change and apply buffers use the following commands Define a buffer profile for the FP queues CONFIGURATION mode buffer profile fp fsqueue e Define a buffer profile for the CSF queues CONFIGURATION mode buffer profile csf csqueue e Change the dedicated buffers on a physical 1G interface BUFFER PROFILE mode buffer dedicated e Change the maximum number of dynamic buffers an interface can request BUFFER PROFILE mode buffer dynamic e Change the number of packet pointers per queue BUFFER PROFILE mode buffer packet pointers Apply the buffer profile to a CSF to FP link CONFIGURATION mode buffer csf linecard Dell Networking OS Behavior If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non existent port pipe the system displays the following message DIFFSERV 2 DSA BUFF CARVING INVALID PORT SET Invalid FP port set 2 for linecard 2 Valid range of port set is 0 1 However the configuration still appears in the running config Configuration changes take effect immediately and appear in the running configuration Because under normal conditions all ports do not require the maximum allocation the configure
417. rt Channel Interfaces Advanced Interface Configuration e Monitor and Maintain Interfaces e Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames e MTU Size e Auto Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces e Viewing Interface Information NOTE You can also perform some of the configurations using the Web GUI Dell Blade lO Manager For more information see the Dell Blade IO Manager Online Help Interface Auto Configuration An Aggregator auto configures interfaces as follows e Allinterfaces operate as layer 2 interfaces at LOGbE in standalone mode FlexlO module interfaces support only uplink connections You can only use the 40GbE ports on the base module for stacking By default the two fixed 40GbE ports on the base module operate in 4x10GbE mode with breakout cables and support up to eight LOGbE uplinks You can configure the base module ports as 40GbE links for stacking Interfaces 103 The interfaces on a 40GbE QSFP FlexlO module auto configure to support only LOGbE SFP connections using 4x10GbE breakout cables e All LOGbE uplink interfaces belong to the same 10GbE link aggregation group LAG The tagged Virtual Local Area Network VLAN membership of the uplink LAG is automatically configured based on the VLAN configuration of all server facing ports ports 1 to 32 The untagged VLAN used for the uplink LAG is always the default VLAN 1 The tagged VLAN membership of a server facing LAG is automati
418. ry to add more ports and SAN switches This results in an increase in the required domain IDs which may surpass the upper limit of 239 domain IDs supported in the SAN network An NPG avoids the need for additional domain IDs because it is deployed outside the SAN and uses the domain IDs of core switches in its FCoE links e With the introduction of 10GbE links FCoE is being implemented for server connections to optimize performance However a SAN traditionally uses Fibre Channel to transmit storage traffic FCoE servers require an efficient and scalable bridging feature to access FC storage arrays which an NPG provides NPIV Proxy Gateway Operation Consider a sample scenario of NPG operation An FX2 server chassis configured as an NPG does not join a SAN fabric but functions as an FCoE FC bridge that forwards storage traffic between servers and core SAN switches The core switches forward SAN traffic to and from FC storage arrays NPIV Proxy Gateway 313 An FX2 chassis FC port is configured as an N node port that logs in to an F fabric port on the upstream FC core switch and creates a channel for N port identifier virtualization NPIV allows multiple N port fabric logins at the same time on a single physical Fibre Channel link Converged Network Adapter CNA ports on servers connect to the FX2 chassis Ten Gigabit Ethernet ports and log in to an upstream FC core switch through the N port Server fabric login FLOGI requests are converted
419. s 0 0 El ulticasts O Broadcasts runts 0 giants 0 throttles O CRC 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 14856 packets 2349010 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 4357 over 64 byte pkts 8323 over 127 byte pkts 2176 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 12551 Multicasts 2305 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions 0 wreddrops Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 11 01 23 3 To view only configured interfaces use the show interfaces configured command in EXEC Privilege mode To determine which physical interfaces are available use the show running config command in EXEC mode This command displays all physical interfaces available on the switch which is as shown in the following example Dell show running config Current Configuration Version E8 3 17 38 Last configuration change at Tue Jul 24 20 48 55 2012 by default boot system stack unit 1 primary tftp 10 11 9 21 dv m1000e 2 b2 boot system stack unit 1 default system A boot system gateway 10 11 209 62 redundancy auto synchronize full Service timestamps log datetime hostname FTOS l username root password 7 d7acc8aldcd4f698 privilege 15 mac address table aging time 300 stack unit 1 provision I O Aggr
420. s a group and source query to verify that there are no hosts interested in any other sources The multicast router must satisfy all hosts if they have conflicting requests For example if another host on the subnet is interested in traffic from 10 11 1 5 the router cannot record the include request There are no other interested hosts so the request is recorded At this point the multicast routing protocol prunes the tree to all but the specified sources 98 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The host s third message indicates that it is only interested in traffic from sources 10 11 1 1 and 10 11 1 2 Because this request again prevents all other sources from reaching the subnet the router sends another group and source query so that it can satisfy all other hosts There are no other interested hosts so the request is recorded Membership Reports Joining and Filtering y IGMP Group and Source V Specific Query n amp ertace Mulucast Group Fiir Source Source Querier i Non Quener Aides Timet Mode Tener Type 0x11 oe tr A lt 7 Group Address 244 1 1 1 E 4 rra m m Nurnber of Sources 1 gt ge Y Source Address 10 11 1 1 1 red 1 E t M PS Type 0x22 El Type 0x22 Number of Group Records 1 Number of Group Records 1 y Record Type 4 p dd Change to include 4 Record Type 3 A Mtro Sous 0 IGMP Join message Number of Sources 1 T r A Multicast Address 224 1 1 1 Mantica Addon 227111 So
421. s as a FIP snooping bridge so that it can perform the following functions e Performs FIP snooping allowing and parsing FIP frames globally on all VLANs or on a per VLAN basis Set the FCoE MAC address prefix FC MAP value used by an FCF to assign a MAC address to an ECoE end device server ENode or storage device after a server successfully logs in e Set the FCF mode to provide additional port security on ports that are directly connected to an FCF Check FIP snooping enabled VLANs to ensure that they are operationally active FIP Snooping 85 e Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses advertisements solicitations FLOGI FDISC requests and responses FLOGO requests and responses keep alive packets and clear virtual link messages How FIP Snooping is Implemented As soon as the Aggregator is activated in an M1000e chassis as a switch bridge existing VLAN specific and FIP snooping auto configurations are applied The Aggregator snoops FIP packets on VLANs enabled for FIP snooping and allows legitimate sessions By default all FCoE and FIP frames are dropped unless specifically permitted by existing FIP snooping generated ACLs FIP Snooping on VLANs FIP snooping is enabled globally on an Aggregator on all VLANs e FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs e FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual link initialization
422. s associated with a specific VLAN ID Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs while untagged interfaces can belong only to one VLAN Configuring VLAN Membership By default all Aggregator ports are member of all 4094 VLANs including the default untagged VLAN 1 You can use the CLI or CMC interface to reconfigure VLANs only on server facing interfaces 1 32 so that an interface has membership only in specified VLANs To assign an Aggregator interface in Layer 2 mode to a specified group of VLANs use the vlan tagged and vlan untagged commands To view which interfaces are tagged or untagged and to which VLAN they belong use the show vlan command Displaying VLAN Membership To reconfigure an interface as a member of only specified tagged VLANs enter the vlan tagged command in INTERFACE mode 1 Add the interface as a tagged member of one or more VLANs INTERFACE mode vlan tagged vlan id vlan range vlan id specifies a tagged VLAN number Range 2 4094 vlan range specifies a range of tagged VLANs Separate VLAN IDs with a comma specify a VLAN range with a dash for example vlan tagged 3 5 7 To reconfigure an interface as a member of only specified untagged VLANs enter the vlan untagged command in INTERFACE mode 1 Add the interface as an untagged member of one or more VLANs 110 Interfaces INTERFACE mode vlan untagged vlan id vlan range vlan id specifies an untagged VLAN number Range 2 4094 vlan range sp
423. s port channel then a number e Fora VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 For an IPv4 interface a routing object only tracks the UP DOWN status of the specified IPv4 interface the track interface ip routing command The status of an IPv4 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IP address e The Layer 3 status of an IPv4 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down for a Layer 5 VLAN all VLAN ports must be down or the IP address is removed from the routing table For an IPv6 interface a routing object only tracks the UP DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface the track interface ipv6 routing command The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address e The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down for a Layer 5 VLAN all VLAN ports must be down or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table To remove object tracking on a Layer 3 IPv4 IPv6 interface use the no track object id command To configure object tracking on the routing status of a Layer 3 interface use the following commands 1 Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 interface CONFIGURATION mode track object id interface interface ip routing ipv6 routing Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535 2
424. s shown in the following example Example of Viewing the Ports in a VLAN in SNMP gt snmpget v2c c mycommunity 10 11 131 185 l3 6 002wL 1 7 1 423 122411077971780 SNMPv2 SMI mib 2 17 7 1 4 3 1 2 1107787786 Hex STRING 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The table that the Dell Networking system sends in response to the snmpget request is a table that contains hexadecimal hex pairs each pair representing a group of eight ports Seven hex pairs represent a stack unit Seven pairs accommodate the greatest number of ports available on an Aggregator 56 ports The last stack unit is assigned eight pairs the eight pair is unused The first hex pair 00 in the previous example represents ports 1 to 7 in Stack Unit O The next pair to the right represents ports 8 to 15 To resolve the hex pair into a representation of the individual ports convert the hex pair to binary Consider the first hex pair 00 which resolves to 0000 0000 in binary e Each position in the 8 character string is for one port starting with Port 1 at the left end of the string and ending with Port 8 at the right end A O indicates that the port is not a member of the VLAN a 1 indicates VLAN membership All hex pairs are 00 indicating that no ports are assigned to VLAN 10 In the following example Port 0 2 is added to VLAN 10 as untagged the first hex
425. s the connection without displaying the login prompt The following example shows how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10 0 0 0 without displaying a login prompt The example uses TACACS as the authentication mechanism Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on Access Class Retrieved from the Line Per Network Address Dell conf tip access list standard deny10 Dell conf ext nacl permit 10 0 0 0 8 Dell conf ext nacl deny any Dell conf Dell conf aaa authentication login tacacsmethod tacacs Dell conf tacacs server host 256 1 1 2 key Forcel0 Dell conf Dell conf line vty 0 9 Dell config line vty login authentication tacacsmethod Dell config line vty Dell config line vty access class denyl10 Dell config line vty end same applies for radius and line authentication VTY MAC SA Filter Support Dell Networking OS supports MAC access lists which permit or deny users based on their source MAC address With this approach you can implement a security policy based on the source MAC address Security 215 To apply a MAC ACL on a VTY line use the same access class command as IP ACLs The following example shows how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10 0 0 0 without displaying a login prompt Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on MAC ACL for the Line Per MAC Address Dell conf mac access list standard sourcemac Dell config std mac permit 00 00 5e
426. sabled K Distribution enabled L Distribution disabled M Partner Defaulted N Partner Non defaulted O Receiver is in expired state P Receiver is not in expired state Port Te 0 41 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State ADEHJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State ACEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Port Te 0 42 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State ADEHJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State ACEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Port Te 0 43 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State ADEHJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State ACEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Port Te 0 44 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State ADEHJLMP Key 128 Priority 32768 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State ACEGIKNP Key 128 Priority 32768 Port Te 0 45 is disabled LACP is disabled and mode is lacp Port State Bundle Actor Admin State AD Oper State AD Partner is not present MP Key 128 Priority 32768 MP Key 128 Prior
427. sage to the client if it is not able to fulfill a DHCPREQUEST for example if the requested address is already in use In this case the client starts the configuration process over by sending a DHCPDISCOVER DHCPRELEASE A DHCP client sends this message when it is stopped forcefully to return its IP address to the server 72 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP Server 10 11 2 5 A Unicast e Broadcast Unicast t DHCP Server 10 11 1 5 ao M LI 4 Broadcast Unicast elf Sour Figure 5 Assigning Network Parameters using DHCP Dell Networking OS Behavior DHCP is implemented in Dell Networking OS based on RFC 2131 and 3046 Debugging DHCP Client Operation To enable debug messages for DHCP client operation enter the following debug commands e Enable the display of log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces EXEC Privilege no debug ip dhcp client packets interface type slot port e Enable the display of log messages for the following events on DHCP client interfaces IP address acquisition IP address release Renewal of IP address and lease time and Release of an IP address EXEC Privilege no debug ip dhcp client events interface type slot port Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 73 The following example shows the packet and event level debug messages displayed for the packet transmissions and state tra
428. ses From Stack master you can configure e System level features that apply to all stack members e Interface level features for each stack member The master synchronizes the following information with the standby unit Stack unit topology e Stack running configuration which includes LACP SNMP etc Logs The master switch maintains stack operation with minimal impact in the event of 236 Stacking e Switch failure e Inter switch stacking link failure Switch insertion e Switch removal If the master switch goes off line the standby replaces it as the new master K NOTE For the Aggregator the entire stack has only one management IP address Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on MAC address The unit with the higher MAC value becomes master To view which switch is the stack master enter the show system command The following example shows sample output from an established stack A change in the stack master occurs when e You power down the stack master or bring the master switch offline e A failover of the master switch occurs e You disconnect the master switch from the stack K NOTE When a stack reloads and all the units come up at the same time for example when all units boot up from flash all units participate in the election and the master and standby are chosen based on the priority on the MAC address When the units do not boot up at the sa
429. settings in the current Dell Networking OS session show iscsi Command Example Dell show iscsi iSCSI is enabled iSCSI session monitoring is enabled iSCSI COS dotlp is 4 no remark Session aging time 10 Maximum number of connections is 256 TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 show iscsi sessions Command Example Dell show iscsi sessions Session 0 Target iqn 2001 05 com equallogic 0 8a0906 0e70c2002 10a0018426a48c94 iom010 Initiator iqn 1991 05 com microsoft win x918v27yajg ISID 400001370000 iSCSI Optimization 133 Session 1 Target iqn 2001 05 com equallogic 0 8a0906 0 60c2002 0360018428d48c94 iom011 Initiator iqn 1991 05 com microsoft win x918v27yajg ISID 400001370000 show iscsi sessions detailed Command Example Dell show iscsi sessions detailed Session 0 arget ign 2010 11 com ixia ixload iscsi TGl Initiator iqn 2010 11 com ixia ixload initiator iscsi 2c Up Time 00 00 01 28 DD HH MM SS Time for aging out 00 00 09 34 DD HH MM SS ISID 806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10 10 0 44 33345 10 10 0 101 3260 0 Session 1 arget ign 2010 11 com ixia ixload iscsi TGl Initiator iqn 2010 11 com ixia ixload initiator iscsi 35 Up Time 00 00 01 22 DD HH MM SS Time for aging out 00 00 09 31 DD HH MM SS ISID 806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection ID IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort 10 10 0 53 334
430. sing LLDP is invoking LLDP with the protocol lldp command in either CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode The information LLDP distributes is stored by its recipients in a standard management information base MIB You can access the information by a network management system through a management protocol such as simple network management protocol SNMP An Aggregator auto configures to support the link layer discovery protocol LLDP for the auto discovery of network devices You can use CLI commands to display acquired LLDP information clear LLDP counters and debug LACP operation Supported Modes Standalone PMUX VLT Stacking Protocol Data Units Configuration information is exchanged in the form of type length value TLV segments The below figure shows the chassis ID TLV e Type Indicates the type of field that a part of the message represents e Length Indicates the size of the value field in byte e Value Indicates the data for this part of the message Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 161 1 octet fnCO0S7mp 1 255 octets Figure 20 Type Length Value TLV Segment TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit LLDPDU which is transmitted from one LLDP enabled device to its LLDP enabled neighbors LLDP is a one way protocol LLDP enabled devices LLDP agents can transmit and or receive advertisements but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements There are five
431. ss e The association between the FCoE VLAN ID and FC fabric ID where the desired storage arrays are installed Each Fibre Channel fabric serves as an isolated SAN topology within the same physical network e A server uses the priority to select an upstream FCoE forwarder FCF priority e FIP keepalive FKA advertisement timeout NOTE In each FCoE map the fabric ID FC MAP value and FCoE VLAN must be unique To access one SAN fabric use one FCoE map When you configure an M I O Aggregator as an NPG FCoE transit with FIP snooping is automatically enabled and configured using the parameters in the FCoE map applied to server facing Ethernet and fabric facing FC interfaces After you apply an FCoE map on an FC port when you enable the port using the no shutdown command the NPG starts sending FIP multicast advertisements on behalf of the FC port to downstream servers to advertise the availability of a new FCF port on the FCoE VLAN The FIP advertisement also contains a keepalive message to maintain connectivity between a SAN fabric and downstream servers After removing and reapplying the fabric map or after modifying the FCoE map the Fiber Channel FC devices do not re login To mitigate this issue you must first run the shut command and then the no shutdown command on each member interface after you alter the FCOE map Creating an FCoE Map An FCoE map consists of the following elements e Anassociation between the dedicated VL
432. ssage is then applied If a FIP timeout from ENode or VN_PORT occurs the NPIV application performs the FC fabric logout to the external FC switch The NPIV application manages the sessions between the FCoE and the FC domain Installing and Configuring the Switch After you unpack the I O Aggregator refer to the flow chart in the following figure for an overview of the steps you must follow to install the blade and perform the initial configuration FC Flex IO Modules 297 Piggire 35 Installing and Configuring Flowchart for FC Flex IO Modules FC Flex IO Modules To see if a switch is running the latest Dell Networking OS version use the show version command To download a Dell Networking OS version go to http support dell com Installation Site Preparation Before installing the switch or switches make sure that the chosen installation location meets the following site requirements e Clearance There is adequate front and rear clearance for operator access Allow clearance for cabling power connections and ventilation e Cabling The cabling is routed to avoid sources of electrical noise such as radio transmitters broadcast amplifiers power lines and fluorescent lighting fixtures Ambient Temperature The ambient switch operating temperature range is 10 to 352C 50 to 95 F p Decrease the maximum temperature by 1 C 1 8 F per 500 m 985 ft above 900 m 2955 ft 2 Relative Humidity The
433. st tengigabitethernet lt slot gt lt port gt 2 Displays TDR test results EXEC Privilege mode show tdr tengigabitethernet lt slot gt lt port gt Flow Control Using Ethernet Pause Frames An Aggregator auto configures to operate in auto DCB enable mode Refer to Data Center Bridging Auto DCB Enable Mode In this mode Aggregator ports detect whether peer devices support converged enhanced Ethernet CEE or not and enable DCBX and PFC or link level flow control accordingly Interfaces come up with DCB disabled and link level flow control enabled to control data transmission between the Aggregator and other network devices e When DCB is disabled on an interface PFC ETS and DCBX are also disabled e When DCBX protocol packets are received interfaces automatically enable DCB and disable link level flow control e DCB is required for PFC ETS DCBX and FCoE initialization protocol FIP snooping to operate Link level flow control uses Ethernet pause frames to signal the other end of the connection to pause data transmission for a certain amount of time as specified in the frame Ethernet pause frames allow for a temporary stop in data transmission A situation may arise where a sending device may transmit data faster than a destination device can accept it The destination sends a pause frame back to the source stopping the sender s transmission for a period of time The globally assigned 48 bit Multicast address 01 80 C2 00
434. stacked ports with the same PFC configuration Data Center Bridging DCB 47 A DCB input policy for PFC applied to an interface may become invalid if you reconfigure dotip queue mapping This situation occurs when the new dotip queue assignment exceeds the maximum number 2 of lossless queues supported globally on the switch In this case all PFC configurations received from PFC enabled peers are removed and resynchronized with the peer devices Traffic may be interrupted when you reconfigure PFC no drop priorities in an input policy or reapply the policy to an interface How Priority Based Flow Control is Implemented Priority based flow control provides a flow control mechanism based on the 802 1p priorities in converged Ethernet traffic received on an interface and is enabled by default As an enhancement to the existing Ethernet pause mechanism PFC stops traffic transmission for specified priorities CoS values without impacting other priority classes Different traffic types are assigned to different priority classes When traffic congestion occurs PFC sends a pause frame to a peer device with the CoS priority values of the traffic that needs to be stopped DCBx provides the link level exchange of PFC parameters between peer devices PFC creates zero loss links for SAN traffic that requires no drop service while at the same time retaining packet drop congestion management for LAN traffic PFC is implemented on an Aggregator as follows
435. stats snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 0 0 queue all Unit 0 unit 0 port 1 interface Fo 0 0 Q TYPE Qf TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS UCAST 0 0 UCAST 1 0 UCAST 2 0 UCAST 3 0 UCAST 4 0 UCAST 5 0 UCAST 6 0 UCAST 7 0 UCAST 8 0 UCAST 9 0 UCAST 10 0 UCAST tI 0 CAST 0 0 CAST 1 0 CAST 2 0 CAST 3 0 CAST 4 0 CAST 5 0 CAST 6 0 CAST 7 0 CAST 8 0 352 Debugging and Diagnostics Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring factory defaults deletes the existing NVRAM settings startup configuration and all configured settings such as stacking or fanout To restore the factory default settings use the restore factory defaults stack unit 0 5 all clear all nvram command in EXEC Privilege mode A CAUTION There is no undo for this command Important Points to Remember When you restore all the units in a stack all units in the stack are placed into stand alone mode When you restore a single unit in a stack only that unit is placed in stand alone mode No other units in the stack are affected e When you restore the units in stand alone mode the units remain in stand alone mode after the restoration e After the restore is complete the units power cycle immediately The following example shows the using the restore factory defaults command to restore the Factory Default Settings Restoring the Factory Default Settings Dell restore factory defaults stack unit 0 nvram KKK KKK KKK KK
436. stem stack unit all primary system partition 4 Save the configuration EXEC Privilege 254 Stacking write memory 5 Reload the stack unit to activate the new Dell Networking OS version CONFIGURATION mode reload Example of Upgrading all Stacked Switches The following example shows how to upgrade all switches in a stack including the master switch Dell upgrade system ftp A Address or name of remote host 10 11 200 241 Source file name FTOS XL 8 3 17 0 bin User name to login remote host ftp Password to login remote host PEEEPPP Lee bere T EE ee eee eee ee p p p p b p p b EE E E E E GB GB Gg 0g Gg 0g GE g g g g gg g gbll 31972272 bytes successfully copied System image upgrade completed successfully Upgrade system image for all stack units yes no yes erre rre rr rr E E E p p p p d p E E E EE E B b b E E E E E B B B B B GB Gg B GB Gg B g g g g gg Image upgraded to all Dell configure Dell conf boot system stack unit all primary system A Dell conf end Dell write memory Jan 3 14 01 48 SSTKUNITO M CP FILEMGR 5 FILESAVED Copied running config to startup config in flash by default Synchronizing data to peer Stack unit LILI Dell reload Proceed with reload confirm yes no yes Upgrading a Single Stack Unit Upgrading a single stacked switch is necessary when the unit was disabled due to an incorrect Dell Networking OS version This procedure upgrades th
437. t and all of the port channels in the VLT connected to the attached devices It is also associated to the configuration mode that you must use to assign VLT global parameters e VLT peer device One of a pair of devices that are connected with the special port channel known as the VLT interconnect VLTi VLT peer switches have independent management planes A VLT interconnect between the VLT chassis maintains synchronization of L2 L3 control planes across the two VLT peer switches The VLT interconnect uses either 10G or 40G user ports on the chassis A separate backup link maintains heartbeat messages across an out of band OOB management network The backup link ensures that node failure conditions are correctly detected and are not confused with failures of the VLT interconnect VLT ensures that local traffic on a chassis does not traverse the VLTi and takes the shortest path to the destination via directly attached links Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain backup link and VLT interconnect on both peer switches Important Points to Remember e VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports Dell Networking strongly recommends that the VLTi VLT interconnect be a static LAG and that you disable LACP on the VLTi e If the Lacp ungroup feature is not supported on the ToR reboot the VLT peers one at a time After rebooting verify that VLTi ICL is a
438. t LAG e Enable the transmission and reception functions in an orderly manner e Detach the link from the LAG if one of the partner stops responding LACP Modes The Aggregator supports only LACP active mode as the default mode of operation In active mode a port interface is considered to be not part of a LAG but rather in an active negotiating state A port in active mode automatically initiates negotiations with other ports by sending LACP packets If you configure server facing ports for LACP based NIC teaming LACP negotiations take place to aggregate the port in a dynamic LAG If you do not configure server facing ports for LACP based NIC teaming a port is treated as an individual port in active negotiating state Auto Configured LACP Timeout LACP PDUs are exchanged between port channel LAG interfaces to maintain LACP sessions LACP PDUs are transmitted at a slow or fast transmission rate depending on the LACP timeout value configured on the partner system The timeout value is the amount of time that a LAG interface waits for a PDU from the partner system before bringing the LACP session down The default timeout is long timeout 30 seconds and is not user configurable on the Aggregator Link Aggregation 137 LACP Example The below illustration shows how the LACP operates in an Aggregator stack by auto configuring the uplink LAG 128 for the connection to a top of rack TOR switch and a server facing LAG for the connection to a
439. t and rejoins the stack as the standby unit or member unit Protocol and control plane recovery requires time before the switch is fully online Resolution When the entire stack is reloaded the recovered master switch becomes the master unit of the stack Stack Unit in Card Problem State Due to Incorrect Dell Networking OS Version e Problem A stack unit enters a Card Problem state because the switch has a different Dell Networking OS version than the master unit The switch does not come online as a stack unit Resolution To restore a stack unit with an incorrect Dell Networking OS version as a member unit disconnect the stacking cables on the switch and install the correct Dell Networking OS version Then add the switch to the stack as described in Adding a Stack Unit To verify that the problem has been resolved and the stacked switch is back online use the show system brief command Dell show system brief Stack MAC 00 le c9 f1 00 9b Stacking 253 Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 Management online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17 46 56 1 Standby card problem I O Aggregator unknown 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present Card Problem Resolved Dell show system brief Stack MAC 00 1e c9 1 04 82 Stack Info Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 Management online I O Aggregator I O Aggregator 8 3 17
440. t in a monitoring session 190 Port Monitoring Asource port MD can only be monitored by one destination port MG If you try to assign a monitored port to more than one monitoring port the following message displays Dell conf mon ses 1 Dell conf mon sess 1 source tengig 0 1 destination tengig 0 33 direction both Dell conf mon sess 1 do show monitor session SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Type 1 TenGig 0 1 TenGig 0 33 both interface Port based Dell conf mon sess 1 mon ses 2 Dell conf mon sess 2 source tengig 0 1 destination tengig 0 33 direction both Error MD port is already being monitored NOTE There is no limit to the number of monitoring sessions per system provided that there are only four destination ports per port pipe If each monitoring session has a unique destination port the maximum number of session is four per port pipe Port Monitoring The Aggregator supports multiple source destination statements in a monitor session but there may only be one destination port in a monitoring session There may only be one destination port in a monitoring session Error Only one MG port is allowed in a session The number of source ports the Dell Networking OS allows within a port pipe is equal to the number of physical ports in the port pipe n Multiple source ports may have up to four different destination ports Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe In the followi
441. t or port channel When you enable a server facing Ethernet port the servers respond to the FIP advertisements by performing FLOGIs on upstream virtualized FCF ports The NPG forwards the FLOGIs as FDISC messages to a SAN switch 1 Configure a server facing Ethernet port or port channel with an FCoE map CONFIGURATION mode interface tengigabitEthernet slot port port channel num Apply the FCoE FC configuration in an FCoE map on the Ethernet port Repeat this step to apply an FCoE map to more than one port NPIV Proxy Gateway 321 INTERFACE or INTERFACE PORT_CHANNEL mode fcoe map map name Dell interface tengigabitEthernet 0 0 Dell config if te 0 0 fcoe map SAN FABRIC A Dell interface port channel 3 Dell config if te 0 0 dcb map SAN DCB1 Dell config if po 3 fcoe map SAN FABRIC A Dell interface fortygigabitEthernet 0 48 Dell config if fo 0 0 fcoe map SAN FABRIC A Enable the port for FCoE transmission using the map settings INTERFACE mode no shutdown Applying an FCoE Map on Fabric facing FC Ports The Aggregator with the FC ports are configured by default to operate in N port mode to connect to an F port on an FC switch in a fabric You can apply only one FCoE map on an FC port When you apply an FCoE map on a fabric facing FC port the FC port becomes part of the FCoE fabric whose settings in the FCoE map are configured on the port and exported to downstream server CNA ports Each Aggreg
442. t priority pfc on off Specify the priority group ID number to handle VLAN traffic for each dotip class of service 0 through 7 Leave a space between each priority group number For example priority pgid 0 0 01244 4 where dotlp priorities O 1 and 2 are mapped to priority group 0 dotlp priority 3 is mapped to priority group 1 dotip priority 4 is mapped to priority group 2 dotip priorities 5 6 and 7 are mapped to priority group 4 All priorities that map to the same egress queue must be in the same priority group DCB MAP mode priority pgid dot1p0 group num dotlp1 group num dotip2 group num dotip3 group num dotlp4 group num dotip5 group num dotlp6 group num dotip7 group num Important Points to Remember If you remove a dotlp priority to priority group mapping from a DCB map no priority pgid command the PFC and ETS parameters revert to their default values on the interfaces on which the DCB map is applied By default PFC is not applied on specific 802 1p priorities ETS assigns equal bandwidth to each 802 1p priority As a result PFC and lossless port queues are disabled on 802 1p priorities and all priorities are mapped to the same priority queue and equally share port bandwidth To change the ETS bandwidth allocation configured for a priority group in a DCB map do not modify the existing DCB map configuration Instead create a new DCB map with the desired PFC and ETS settings and apply the new map to the interfaces to over
443. t small computer system interface iSCSl optimization Internet group management protocol IGMP snooping e Jumbo frames Ports are set to a maximum MTU of 12 000 bytes by default Link tracking Uplink state group 1 is automatically configured In uplink state group 1 server facing ports auto configure as downstream interfaces the uplink port channel LAG 128 auto configures as an upstream interface Server facing links are auto configured to be brought up only if the uplink port channel is up e n VLT mode port 9 is automatically configured as VLT interconnect ports VLT domain configuration is automatic This includes peer link configured MAC backup link and setting every port channel as VLT port channel Data Center Bridging Support To eliminate packet loss and provision links with required bandwidth Data Center Bridging DCB enhancements for data center networks are supported The aggregator provides zero touch configuration for DCB The aggregator auto configures DCBX port roles as follows e Server facing ports are configured as auto downstream interfaces e Uplink ports are configured as auto upstream interfaces In operation DCBx auto configures uplink ports to match the DCB configuration in the ToR switches to which they connect The Aggregator supports DCB only in standalone mode FCoE Connectivity and FIP Snooping Many data centers use Fiber Channel FC in storage area networks SANs Fiber Channel ove
444. t will be as follows snmpwalk Os c public v 1 10 16 151 151 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 4 2 1 5 mib 2 17 7 1 4 2 1 5 0 1107525633 Hex STRING F9 FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 In the above example the 43rd byte is set to 80 The 43rd byte is for LAG IDs from 1 to 8 But only one LAG po 1 is set as switch port Hence the binary bits will be 10000000 If this converted to Hexadecimal the value will be 80 Similarly the first byte for Te 0 1 to Te 0 8 server ports as the 6th and 7th byte is removed from switch port the respective bits are set to 0 In binary the value is 11111001 and the corresponding hex decimal value is F9 In standalone mode there are 4000 VLANs by default The SNMP output will display for all 4000 VLANs To view a particular VLAN issue the snmp query with VLAN interface ID Dell show interface vlan 1010 grep Interface index Interface index is 1107526642 Use the output of the above command in the snmp query snmpwalk Os c public v 1 10 16 151 151 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 4 2 1 4 0 1107526642 mib 2 17 7 1 4 2 1 4 0 1107526642 Hex STRING F9 FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 MIB Support to Display the Available Memory
445. t1p priorities in the same group with equal bandwidth allocation ETS Operation with DCBx In DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices ETS configuration is handled as follows e ETS TLVs are supported in DCBx versions CIN CEE and IEEE2 5 e ETS operational parameters are determined by the DCBX port role configurations e ETS configurations received from TLVs from a peer are validated e Incase of a hardware limitation or TLV error the DCBx operation on an ETS port goes down e ETS operates with legacy DCBx versions as follows Inthe CEE version the priority group traffic class group TCG ID 15 represents a non ETS priority group Any priority group configured with a scheduler type is treated as a strict priority group and is given the priority group TCG ID 15 TheCIN version supports two types of strict priority scheduling Group strict priority Allows a single priority flow in a priority group to increase its bandwidth usage to the bandwidth total of the priority group A single flow in a group can use all the bandwidth allocated to the group Link strict priority Allows a flow in any priority group to increase to the maximum link bandwidth CIN supports only the default dot1p priority queue assignment in a priority group Hierarchical Scheduling in ETS Output Policies ETS supports up to three levels of hierarchical scheduling For example you can apply ETS output policies with the following configurations Prior
446. tacacsmethod tacacs Dell conf aaa authentication exec tacacsauthorization tacacs Dell conf tacacs server host 25 1 1 2 key Force Dell conf Dell conf tline vty 0 9 Dell config line vty login authentication tacacsmethod Dell config line vty end Specifying a TACACS Server Host To specify a TACACS server host and configure its communication parameters use the following command Enter the host name or IP address of the TACACS server host CONFIGURATION mode tacacs server host hostname ip address port port number timeout seconds key key Configure the optional communication parameters for the specific host port port number the range is from O to 65535 Enter a TCP port number The default is 49 timeout seconds the range is from O to 1000 Default is 10 seconds key key enter a string for the key The key can be up to 42 characters long This key must match a key configured on the TACACS server host This parameter must be the last parameter you configure If you do not configure these optional parameters the default global values are applied Example of Connecting with a TACACS Server Host To specify multiple TACACS server hosts configure the tacacs server host command multiple times If you configure multiple TACACS server hosts Dell Networking OS attempts to connect with them in the order in which they were configured To view the TACACS configuration use the show runnin
447. tal Unrecognized TLVs 0 Total TLVs Discarded 0 Next packet will be sent after 4 seconds The neighbors are given below Remote Chassis ID Subtype Mac address 4 Remote Chassis ID 00 00 c9 ad f6 12 Remote Port Subtype Mac address 3 Remote Port ID 00 00 c9 ad f6 12 Local Port ID TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 Configuring LLDPDU Intervals LLDPDUS are transmitted periodically the default interval is 30 seconds To configure LLDPDU intervals use the following command Configure a non default transmit interval CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode hello Example of Viewing LLDPDU Intervals Dell conf Dell conf protocol lldp Dell conf lldp show config protocol lldp Dell conf lldp fhello 5 180 Hello interval in seconds default 30 Dell conf 11dp hello 10 Dell conf 11dp show config protocol lldp hello 10 Dell conf lldp Dell conf lldp no hello Dell conf 11dp show config protocol lldp Dell conf 11dp Configuring a Time to Live The information received from a neighbor expires after a specific amount of time measured in seconds called a time to live TTL The TTL is the product of the LLDPDU transmit interval hello and an integer called a multiplier The default multiplier is 4 which results in a default TTL of 120 seconds e Adjust the TTL value CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode multiplier Return to the default multiplier value CO
448. tate group group id command Assign a port or port channel to the uplink state group as an upstream or downstream interface UPLINK STATE GROUP mode Uplink Failure Detection UFD upstream downstream interface For interface enter one of the following interface types e 10 Gigabit Ethernet enter tengigabitethernet slot port slot port range e 40 Gigabit Ethernet enter fortygigabitethernet slot port slot port range Port channel enter port channel 1 512 port channel range Where port range and port channel range specify a range of ports separated by a dash and or individual ports port channels in any order for example upstream gigabitethernet 1 1 2 5 9 11 12 downstream port channel 1 3 5 e Acomma is required to separate each port and port range entry To delete an interface from the group use the no upstream downstream interface command 3 Optional Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink state group that will be disabled Oper Down state if one upstream link in the group goes down UPLINK STATE GROUP mode downstream disable links number all e number specifies the number of downstream links to be brought down The range is from 1 to 1024 e all brings down all downstream links in the group The default is no downstream links are disabled when an upstream link goes down To revert to the default setting use the no downstream disable links command 4 Optional Enable au
449. tee means that the buffer manager does not reallocate the buffer to an adjacent congested interface which means that in some cases memory is under used Dynamic buffer this pool is shared memory that is allocated as needed up to a configured limit Using dynamic buffers provides the benefit of statistical buffer sharing An interface requests dynamic 342 Debugging and Diagnostics buffers when its dedicated buffer pool is exhausted The buffer manager grants the request based on three conditions The number of used and available dynamic buffers The maximum number of cells that an interface can occupy Available packet pointers 2k per interface Each packet is managed in the buffer using a unique packet pointer Thus each interface can manage up to 2k packets You can configure dynamic buffers per port on both 1G and 10G FPs and per queue on CSFs By default the FP dynamic buffer allocation is 10 times oversubscribed For the 48 port 1G card Dynamic Pool Total Available Pool 16384 cells Total Dedicated Pool 5904 cells e Oversubscription ratio 10 e Dynamic Cell Limit Per port 59040 29 2036 cells Figure 38 Buffer Tuning Points Deciding to Tune Buffers Dell Networking recommends exercising caution when configuring any non default buffer settings as tuning can significantly affect system performance The default values work for most cases As a guideline consider tuning buffers if traffic is bu
450. ter which a RADIUS host server is declared dead CONFIGURATION mode radius server deadtime seconds seconds the range is from 0 to 2147483647 The default is O seconds e Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the system and RADIUS server hosts CONFIGURATION mode radius server key encryption type key encryption type enter 7 to encrypt the password Enter O to keep the password as plain text key enter a string The key can be up to 42 characters long You cannot use spaces in the key e Configure the number of times Dell Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests CONFIGURATION mode radius server retransmit retries retries the range is from 0 to 100 Default is 3 retries e Configure the time interval the system waits for a RADIUS server host response CONFIGURATION mode radius server timeout seconds seconds the range is from O to 1000 Default is 5 seconds To view the configuration of RADIUS communication parameters use the show running config command in EXEC Privilege mode Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions use the following command e View RADIUS transactions to troubleshoot problems EXEC Privilege mode Security 205 debug radius TACACS Dell Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system TACACS client including support for login authentication Configuration Task List for TACACS The following list includes the con
451. the CLI If you do not configure the default VLAN 1 in the startup configuration using the wizard or CLI by default the VLAN 1 management interface gets its IP address using DHCP To configure a management interface use the following command in CONFIGURATION mode 1 Enter the slot and the port 0 Slot range 0 0 CONFIGURATION mode interface Managementethernet interface Interfaces 107 To configure an IP address on a management interface use either of the following commands in MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode 1 Configure an IP address and mask on the interface e ip address mask enter an address in dotted decimal format A B C D the mask must be in prefix format x INTERFACE mode ip address ip address mask 2 Acquire an IP address from the DHCP server INTERFACE mode ip address dhcp To access the management interface from another LAN you must configure the management route command to point to the management interface There is only one management interface for the whole stack To display the routing table for a given port use the show ip route command from EXEC Privilege mode Configuring a Static Route for a Management Interface When an IP address used by a protocol and a static management route exists for the sample prefix the protocol route takes precedence over the static management route To configure a static route for the management port use the following command in CONFIGURATION mode 1
452. the SAN fabric to which the FC port connects by entering the name of the FCoE map applied to the interface INTERFACE mode fcoe map fcoe map name tengigabitEthernet slot port fortygigabitEthernet slot port The FCoE map contains FCoE and FC parameter settings refer to FCoE Maps Manually apply the fcoe map to any Ethernet ports used for FCoE Name Server Each participant in the FC environment has a unique ID which is called the World Wide Name WWN This WWN is a 64 bit address A Fibre Channel fabric uses another addressing scheme to address the ports in the switched fabric Each port in the switched fabric is assigned a 24 bit address by the FC switch When the device logs into the switch fabric on a specific port with its WWN the switch assigns the port address to that port and the switch also maintains the correlation between the port address and the WWN address of the device on that port This function of the switch is implemented by using a name server a database of objects in which the fabric attached device registers its values FC ID 24 bit port address Consists of three parts Domain Address of the switch itself There are only 239 addresses available for switches in your SAN environment e Area Identifies a group of F Ports Each group of ports has a different area number even if there is only one port in the group e Port Provides 256 addresses for identifying attached N Ports and NL Ports The
453. the following displays Error Global pre defined buffer profile already applied Failed to apply user defined buffer profile on interface Gi 0 1 Please remove global pre defined buffer profile If the default buffer profile 4Q is active the system displays an error message instructing you to remove the default configuration using the no buffer profile global command To apply a predefined buffer profile use the following command Apply one of the pre defined buffer profiles for all port pipes in the system CONFIGURATION mode buffer profile global 10 40 Sample Buffer Profile Configuration The two general types of network environments are sustained data transfers and voice data Dell Networking recommends a single queue approach for data transfers Example of a Single Queue Application with Default Packet Pointers buffer profile fp fsqueue fp buffer dedicated queue0 3 queuel 3 queue2 3 queue3 3 queue4 3 queued 3 queue6 3 queue7 3 346 Debugging and Diagnostics buffer dynamic 1256 buffer profile fp fsqueue hig buffer dedicated queue0 3 queuel 3 queue2 3 queue3 3 queue4 3 queue5 3 queue6 3 queue7 3 buffer dynamic 1256 buffer fp uplink stack unit 0 port set 0 buffer policy fsqueue hig buffer fp uplink stack unit 0 port set 1 buffer policy fsqueue hig Interface range gi 0 1 48 buffer policy fsqueue fp Dell show run int Tengig 0 10 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 10
454. the port channel to an attached device Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN Verifying a Port Channel Connection to a VLT Domain From an Attached Access Switch On an access device verify the port channel connection to a VLT domain Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur use the following information NOTE For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact contact your Dell Networking representative Table 26 Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Action to Take Time Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message A syslog error message Depending on the traffic and an SNMP trap is and an SNMP trap is that is received the generated when the generated when the traffic can be offloaded VLTi bandwidth usage VLTi bandwidth usage inVLTi goes above the 80 goes above its threshold PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 289 Description Domain ID mismatch Dell Networking OS Version mismatch Remote VLT port channel status System MAC mismatch Unit ID mismatch Version ID mismatch VLT LAG ID is not configured on one VLT peer 290 Behavior at Peer Up threshold and when it drops below 80 The VLT peer does not boot up The VLTi is forced to a down state A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated A syslog error message is generated N A A syslog error message and
455. the way your switch allocates buffers from its available memory and helps prevent packet drops during a temporary burst of traffic The application specific integrated circuit ASICs implement the key functions of queuing feature lookups and forwarding lookups in hardware Forwarding processor FP ASICs provide Ethernet MAC functions queueing and buffering as well as store feature and forwarding tables for hardware based lookup and forwarding decisions 1G and 10G interfaces use different FPs You can tune buffers at three locations 1 CSF Output queues going from the CSF 2 FP Uplink Output queues going from the FP to the CSF IDP links 3 Front End Link Output queues going from the FP to the front end PHY All ports support eight queues four for data traffic and four for control traffic All eight queues are tunable Physical memory is organized into cells of 128 bytes The cells are organized into two buffer pools the dedicated buffer and the dynamic buffer e Dedicated buffer this pool is reserved memory that other interfaces cannot use on the same ASIC or by other queues on the same interface This buffer is always allocated and no dynamic re carving takes place based on changes in interface status Dedicated buffers introduce a trade off They provide each interface with a guaranteed minimum buffer to prevent an overused and congested interface from starving all other interfaces However this minimum guaran
456. thod only as a backup This method does not authenticate users The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell SSH You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines Enabling AAA Authentication To enable AAA authentication use the following command Enable AAA authentication CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable method list name default methodl method4 default uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in method list name character string used to name the list of enable authentication methods activated when a user logs in methodi method4 any ofthe following RADIUS TACACS enable line none If you do not set the default list only the local enable is checked This setting has the same effect as issuing an aaa authentication enable default enable command Security 195 Enabling AAA Authentication RADIUS To enable authentication from the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup use the following commands 1 Enable RADIUS and set up TACACS as backup CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs 2 Establish a host address and password CONFIGURATION mode radius server host x x x x key some password 3 Establish a host address and password CONFIGURATION mode tacacs server host x x x x key some password Togetenable authentication f
457. tiation on Ethernet Interfaces Setting Speed and Duplex Mode of Ethernet Interfaces By default auto negotiation of speed and duplex mode is enabled on 1GbE and 10GbE Ethernet interfaces on an Aggregator The local interface and the directly connected remote interface must have the same setting Auto negotiation is the easiest way to accomplish these settings as long as the remote interface is capable of auto negotiation K NOTE As a best practice Dell Networking recommends keeping auto negotiation enabled Auto negotiation should only be disabled on switch ports that attach to devices not capable of supporting negotiation or where connectivity issues arise from interoperability issues For 100 1000 10000 Ethernet interfaces the negotiation auto command is tied to the speed command Auto negotiation is always enabled when the speed command is set to 1000 or auto In Dell Networking OS the speed 1000 command is an exact equivalent of speed auto 1000 in IOS Interfaces 123 To discover whether the remote and local interface require manual speed synchronization and to manually synchronize them if necessary follow these steps 1 Determine the local interface status EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface status 2 Determine the remote interface status EXEC mode EXEC Privilege mode Use the command on the remote system that is equivalent to the above command 3 Access CONFIGURATION mode EXEC Privilege mode co
458. tication method and the server is not reachable Dell Networking OS allows access even though the username and password credentials cannot be verified Only the console port behaves this 194 Security way and does so to ensure that users are not locked out of the system if network wide issue prevents access to these servers 1 Define an authentication method list method list name or specify the default CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login method list name default methodl method4 The default method list is applied to all terminal lines Possible methods are e enable use the password you defined using the enable secret or enable password command in CONFIGURATION mode line use the password you defined using the password command in LINE mode e local use the username password database defined in the local configuration e none no authentication e radius use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius server host command e tacacs use the TACACS servers configured with the tacacs server host command 2 Enter LINE mode CONFIGURATION mode line aux O console 0 vty number end number 3 Assign a method list name or the default list to the terminal line LINE mode login authentication method list name default To view the configuration use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running config in EXEC Privilege mode NOTE Dell Networking recommends using the none me
459. tion move scenarios Prior to Dell Networking OS version 9 2 0 0 only ARP entries learned on VLT ports were synced between peers Additionally ARP entries resulting from station movements from VLT to non VLT ports or to different non VLT ports are learned on the non VLT port and synced with the peer node The peer node is updated to use the new non VLT port K NOTE ARP entries learned on non VLT non spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 285 Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches e Display information on backup link operation EXEC mode show vlt backup link e Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch EXEC mode show vlt brief e Display detailed information about the VLT domain configuration including local and peer port channel IDs local VLT switch status and number of active VLANs on each port channel EXEC mode show vlt detail e Display the VLT peer status role of the local VLT switch VLT system MAC address and system priority and the MAC address and priority of the locally attached VLT device EXEC mode show vlt role e Display the current configuration of all VLT domains or a specified group on the switch EXEC mode show running config vlt Display statistics on VLT operation
460. to INTERFACE configuration mode Example of Changing Command Modes Dell conf interface tengigabitethernet 0 2 Dell conf if te 0 2 The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode CONFIGURATION INTERFACE and so on without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command The following example shows the output of the do command Dell conf tdo show system brief Stack MAC 00 01 e8 00 ab 03 Stack Info Slot UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports 0 Member not present 1 Management online 1 0 Aggregator 1 0 Aggregator 8 3 17 38 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present Dell conf Configuration Fundamentals 29 Undoing Commands When you enter a command the command line is added to the running configuration file running config To disable a command and remove it from the running config enter the no command then the original command For example to delete an IP address configured on an interface use the no ip address ip address command K NOTE Use the help or command as described in Obtaining Help Example of Viewing Disabled Commands Dell conf interface managementethernet 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 ip address 192 168 5 6 16 Dell conf if ma 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 l interface ManagementEthernet 0 0 ip address 192 168 5 6 16 no shutdo
461. to a custom privilege level use the following commands You must be in privilege level 15 1 Assign a user name and password CONFIGURATION mode username name access class access list name privilege level nopassword password encryption type password secret Configure the optional and required parameters name enter a text string up to 63 characters access class access list name enter the name of a configured IP ACL privilege level the range is from O to 15 e nopassword do not require the user to enter a password e encryption type enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text password enter a text string secret specify the secret for the user Configure a password for privilege level CONFIGURATION mode enable password level level encryption mode password Configure the optional and required parameters level level specify a level from O to 15 Level 15 includes all levels e encryption type enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text e password enter a text string up to 32 characters long To change only the password for the enable command configure only the password parameter Configure level and commands for a mode or reset a command s level CONFIGURATION mode privilege mode level level command reset command Configure the following required and optional parameters mode enter a keyword for the modes exec configure interface line route map or
462. to recovery so that UFD disabled downstream ports in the uplink state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up UPLINK STATE GROUP mode downstream auto recover The default is auto recovery of UFD disabled downstream ports is enabled To disable auto recovery use the no downstream auto recover command 5 Specify the time in seconds to wait for the upstream port channel LAG 128 to come back up before server ports are brought down UPLINK STATE GROUP mode defer timer seconds Es NOTE This command is available in Standalone and VLT modes only The range is from 1 to 120 6 Optional Enter a text description of the uplink state group UPLINK STATE GROUP mode description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters Uplink Failure Detection UFD 269 7 Optional Disable upstream link tracking without deleting the uplink state group UPLINK STATE GROUP mode no enable The default is upstream link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink state group To re enable upstream link tracking use the enable command Clearing a UFD Disabled Interface in PMUX mode You can manually bring up a downstream interface in an uplink state group that UFD disabled and is ina UFD Disabled Error state To re enable one or more disabled downstream interfaces and clear the UFD Disabled Error state use the following command e Re enable a downstream interface on the switch router t
463. torm control command and re display its status Dell config terminal Dell conf Hno io aggregator broadcast storm control Dell conf end Dell show io aggregator broadcast storm control status Storm Control Disabled Flooded packets on all VLANs are received on a server Symptom All packets flooded on all VLANs on an Aggregator are received on a server even if the server is configured as a member of only a subset of VLANs This behavior happens because all Aggregator ports are by default members of all 4094 VLANs Resolution Configure a port that is connected to the server with restricted VLAN membership 332 Debugging and Diagnostics Steps to Take 1 Display the current port mode for Aggregator L2 interfaces show interfaces switchport interface commana Dell show interfaces switchport tengigabitethernet 0 1 Codes Untagged T Tagged Dot1x untagged X Dotlx tagged GVRP tagged M Trunk H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged U x G Name TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 802 10Tagged Hybrid SMUX port mode Auto VLANs enabled Vlan membership 0 Vlans U il T 2 4094 Native Vlanld 1 Assign the port to a specified group of VLANs vlan tagged command and re display the port mode status Dell conf tinterface tengigabitethernet 0 1 Dell conf if te 0 1 vlan tagged 2 5 100 4010 Dell conf if te 0 1 Dell show interfaces switchp
464. trol is enabled on PFC disabled interfaces 132 iSCSI Optimization e iSCSI session snooping is enabled e iSCSI LLDP monitoring starts to automatically detect EqualLogic arrays iSCSI optimization requires LLDP to be enabled LLDP is enabled by default when an Aggregator auto configures The following message displays when you enable iSCSI on a switch and describes the configuration changes that are automatically performed SSTKUNITO M CP SIFMGR 5 IFM ISCSI ENABLE iSCSI has been enabled causing flow control to be enabled on all interfaces EQL detection and enabling iscsi profile compellent on an interface may cause some automatic configurations to occur like jumbo frames on all ports and no storm control and spanning tree port fast on the port of detection Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information To display information on iSCSI optimization use the show commands detailed in the below table Table 10 Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information Command Output show iscsi Displays the currently configured SCSI settings show iscsi sessions Displays information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch that have been established since the last reload show iscsi sessions detailed session isid Displays detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch To display detailed information on specified iSCSi session enter the session s iSCSi ID show run iscsi Displays all globally configured non default iSCSI
465. trol plane information or data traffic Its use is restricted to health checks only e Virtual link trunks VLTs between access devices and VLT peer switches To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches you use a VLT port channel as shown in Overview The discovery protocol running between VLT peers automatically generates the ID number of the port channel that connects an access device and a VLT switch The discovery protocol uses LACP properties to identify connectivity to a common client device and automatically generates a VLT number for port channels on VLT peers that connects to the device The discovery protocol requires that an attached device always runs LACP over the port channel interface VLT provides a loop free topology for port channels with endpoints on different chassis in the VLT domain VLT uses shortest path routing so that traffic destined to hosts via directly attached links on a chassis does not traverse the chassis interconnect link VLT allows multiple active parallel paths from access switches to VLT chassis VLT supports port channel links with LACP between access switches and VLT peer switches Dell Networking recommends using static port channels on VLTi If VLTi connectivity with a peer is lost but the VLT backup connectivity indicates that the peer is still alive the VLT ports on the Secondary peer are orphaned and are shut down Software features supported
466. trunk for packets that would otherwise have been forwarded over the failed port PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator 283 channel This mechanism ensures reachability and provides loop management If the VLT interconnect fails the VLT software on the primary switch checks the status of the remote peer using the backup link If the remote peer is up the secondary switch disables all VLT ports on its device to prevent loops If all ports in the VLT interconnect fail or if the messaging infrastructure fails to communicate across the interconnect trunk the VLT management system uses the backup link interface to determine whether the failure is a link level failure or whether the remote peer has failed entirely If the remote peer is still alive heartbeat messages are still being received the VLT secondary switch disables its VLT port channels If keepalive messages from the peer are not being received the peer continues to forward traffic assuming that it is the last device available in the network In either case after recovery of the peer link or reestablishment of message forwarding across the interconnect trunk the two VLT peers resynchronize any MAC addresses learned while communication was interrupted and the VLT system continues normal data forwarding If the primary chassis fails the secondary chassis takes on the operational role of the primary e The SNMP MIB reports VLT statistics Primary and Secondary VLT Peers Primary and Sec
467. ts after a switch reboot If you enter the shutdown command on the interface DHCP transactions are stopped and the dynamically acquired IP address is saved Use the show interface type slot port command to display the dynamic IP address and DHCP as the mode of P address assignment If you later enter the no shutdown command and the lease timer for the dynamic IP address has expired the IP address is unconfigured and the interface tries to acquire a new dynamic address from DHCP server f you later enter the no shutdown command and the lease timer for the dynamic IP address has expired the IP address is released When you enter the release dhcp command although the IP address that was dynamically acquired from a DHCP server is released from an interface the ability to acquire a new DHCP server assigned address remains in the running configuration for the interface To acquire a new IP address enter either the renew dhcp command at the EXEC privilege level or the ip address dhcp command at the interface configuration level If you enter renew dhcp command on an interface already configured with a dynamic IP address the lease time of the dynamically acquired IP address is renewed 76 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP uo Important To verify the currently configured dynamic IP address on an interface enter the show ip dhcp lease command The show running configuration command output only displays ip address dhcp the currently assi
468. ts quietly leave groups and the router waits for a query response timer several times the value of the query interval to expire before it stops forwarding traffic To receive multicast traffic from a particular source a host must join the multicast group to which the source is sending traffic A host that is a member of a group is called a receiver A host may join many groups and may join or leave any group at any time A host joins and leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP querier The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets which is as illustrated below 96 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP FEEFEE Cone am verba bp Query Mey be sero or aya one by Hests for A MP arsi 1 bird taper ue GA veros 2 Uurrbertiz Bapor co deinen hor group pect quee Figure 10 IGMP Version 2 Packet Format Joining a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier e Responding to an IGMP Query One router on a subnet is elected as the querier The querier periodically multicasts to all multicast systems address 224 0 0 1 a general query to all hosts on the subnet A host that wants to join a multicast group responds with an IGMP membersh
469. ty LINE mode privilege level level level level The range is from O to 15 Levels O 1 and 15 are pre configured Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration Specify either a plain text or encrypted password LINE mode password encryption type password Configure the following optional and required parameters encryption type Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text password Enter a text string up to 25 characters long To view the password configured for a terminal use the show config command in LINE mode Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels To enable and disable privilege levels use the following commands e Seta user s security level EXEC Privilege mode nableorenable privilege level If you do not enter a privilege level the system sets it to 15 by default Move to a lower privilege level EXEC Privilege mode disable level number level number The level number you wish to set If you enter disable without a level number your security level is 1 RADIUS Remote authentication dial in user service RADIUS is a distributed client server protocol This protocol transmits authentication authorization and configuration information between a central RADIUS server and a RADIUS client the Dell Networking system The system sends user information to the RADIUS server and requests authentication of the user and password The RADIUS server returns one of the followi
470. uires no drop service while retaining packet drop congestion management for Local Area Network LAN traffic Data Center Bridging DCB 45 1 46 To ensure complete no drop service apply the same DCB input policy with the same pause time and dot1p priorities on all PFC enabled peer interfaces To configure PFC and apply a PFC input policy to an interface follow these steps Create a DCB input policy to apply pause or flow control for specified priorities using a configured delay time CONFIGURATION mode dcb input policy name The maximum is 32 alphanumeric characters Configure the link delay used to pause specified priority traffic DCB INPUT POLICY mode pfc link delay value One quantum is equal to a 512 bit transmission The range in quanta is from 712 to 65535 The default is 45556 quantum in link delay Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay DCB INPUT POLICY mode pfc priority priority range Enter the 802 1p values of the frames to be paused The range is from O to 7 The default is none Maximum number of loss less queues supported on the switch 2 Separate priority values with a comma Specify a priority range with a dash for example pfc priority 1 5 5 7 Enable the PFC configuration on the port so that the priorities are included in DCBx negotiation with peer PFC devices DCB INPUT POLICY mode pfc mode on The default is PFC mode is on Optional Enter a text
471. ular member interface You can also use the show running configuration interface port channel command in EXEC Privilege mode to view whether the mechanism to evaluate the utilization of the member interfaces of the LAG bundle is enabled The following sample output illustrates the portion of this show command Dell show running config int port channel 1 interface Port channel 1 mtu 12000 portmode hybrid switchport vlt peer lag port channel 1 no shutdown link bundle monitor enable Verifying LACP Operation and LAG Configuration To verify the operational status and configuration of a dynamically created LAG and LACP operation on a LAG on an Aggregator enter the show interfaces port channel port channel number and show lacp port channel number commands The show outputs in this section for uplink LAG 128 and server facing LAG 1 refer to the LACP Operation on an Aggregator figure show interfaces port channel 128 Command Example Dell show interfaces port channel 128 Port channel 128 is up line protocol is up Created by LACP protocol Hardware address is 00 01 e8 el el cl Current address is 00 01 e8 el el cl Interface index is 1107755136 nimum number of links to bring Port channel up is 1 ternet address is not set de of IP Address Assignment NONE n y In O DHCP Client ID lag128000le8elelcl E i e U 12000 bytes IP MTU 11982 bytes LineSpeed 40000 Mbit mbers in this channel Te 0 41 U Te 0 42 U Te 0 43 U
472. ult values for all RADIUS host are applied To specify multiple RADIUS server hosts configure the radius server host command multiple times If you configure multiple RADIUS server hosts Dell Networking OS attempts to connect with them in the order in which they were configured When Dell Networking OS attempts to authenticate a user the software connects with the RADIUS server hosts one at a time until a RADIUS server host responds with an accept or reject response 204 Security If you want to change an optional parameter setting for a specific host use the radius server host command To change the global communication settings to all RADIUS server hosts refer to Setting Global Communication Parameters for all RADIUS Server Hosts To view the RADIUS configuration use the show running config radius command in EXEC Privilege mode To delete a RADIUS server host use the no radius server host hostname ip address command Setting Global Communication Parameters for all RADIUS Server Hosts You can configure global communication parameters auth port key retransmit and timeout parameters and specific host communication parameters on the same system However if you configure both global and specific host parameters the specific host parameters override the global parameters for that RADIUS server host To set global communication parameters for all RADIUS server hosts use the following commands e Seta time interval af
473. um Frame Size Indicates the maximum frame size capability of the MAC and PHY LLDP MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support LLDP MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV The value of the LLDP MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2 octet bitmap each bit represents an LLDP MED capability as shown in the following table The possible values of the LLDP MED device type are shown in the following The Dell Networking system is a network connectivity device which is Type 4 When you enable LLDP MED in Dell Networking OS using the advertise med command the system begins transmitting this TLV 7 bits 9 bits 3 octets 1 octet 2 octets 1 octet Figure 24 LLDP MED Capabilities TLV Table 14 Dell Networking OS LLDP MED Capabilities Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 0 LLDP MED Capabilities Yes 1 Network Policy Yes 2 Location Identification Yes 3 Extended Power via MDI PSE Yes 4 Extended Power via MDI PD No 5 Inventory No 6 15 reserved No 168 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Table 15 LLDP MED Device Types LLDP MED Network Policies TLV 255 Device Type Type Not Defined Endpoint Class 1 Endpoint Class 2 Endpoint Class 3 Network Connectivity Reserved A network policy in the context of LLDP MED is a device s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and
474. umber from 1 to 23 as the number of hours Example of the clock timezone Command Dell conf Dell conf clock timezone Pacific 8 Dell Setting Daylight Savings Time Dell Networking OS supports setting the system to daylight savings time once or on a recurring basis every year Setting Daylight Saving Time Once Set a date and time zone on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one time basis To set the clock for daylight savings time once use the following command e Set the clock to the appropriate timezone and daylight saving time CONFIGURATION mode clock summer time time zone date start month start day start year start time end month end day end year end time offset time zone Enter the three letter name for the time zone This name displays in the show clock output start month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year start day enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year start year enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 start time enter the time in hours minutes For the hour variable use the 24 hour format example 17 15 is 5 15 pm end month enter the name of one of the 12 months in English You can enter the name of a day to
475. umber of port channel member interfaces in a Link Up state drops below the configured minimum number of members parameter If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink state group goes down either a user configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink state group that was down comes up the set of UFD disabled downstream ports which were previously disabled due to this upstream port going down is brought up and the UFD Disabled error is cleared If you disable an uplink state group the downstream interfaces are not disabled regardless of the state of the upstream interfaces If an uplink state group has no upstream interfaces assigned you cannot disable downstream interfaces when an upstream link goes down To enable the debug messages for events related to a specified uplink state group or all groups use the debug uplink state group group id command where the group id is from 1 to 16 To turn off debugging event messages use the no debug uplink state group group id command Foran example of debug log message refer to Clearing a UFD Disabled Interface Uplink Failure Detection UFD 267 Uplink Failure Detection SMUX mode In Standalone or VLT modes by default all t
476. upported on the Aggregator in Standalone Stacking and VLT modes To configure auto LAG use the following commands 1 Enable the auto LAG on all the server ports CONFIGURATION mode lo aggregator auto lag enable Dell config io aggregator auto lag enable To disable the auto LAG on all the server ports use the no io aggregator auto lag enable command When disabled all the server ports associated in a LAG are removed and the LAG itself gets removed Any LACPDUs received on the server ports are discarded In VLT mode the global auto LAG is automatically synced to the peer VLT through ICL message 2 Enable the auto LAG on a specific server port Interface Configuration mode auto lag enable Dell conf if te 0 1 auto lag enable To disable the auto LAG use the no auto lag enable command When disabled the server port is removed from the LAG and if the server port is the last member of the LAG the LAG itself gets removed Any LACPDUS received on the server port are discarded In VLT mode the interface level auto LAG configuration is not synced to the peer Only the global auto LAG is synced to the peer 3 View the auto LAG configurations EXEC mode show io aggregator auto lag status Dell show io aggregator auto lag status Auto LAG creation on server port s is enabled For the interface level auto LAG configurations use the show interface command Dell conf if te 0 1 no auto lag enable Dell conf if te 0 1 De
477. urce Address 10 11 1 1 e Type 0x22 Number of Group Records 1 Record Type 5 A ow Now 1 y Numbor of Sources 1 t Multicast Address 224 1 1 1 State change reports retransmiiod Source Address 10 11 12 Query Rotunanena Value 1 time at Urmobotos Report Interval M o0 o Figure 13 IGMP Membership Reports Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The below illustration shows how multicast routers track and refreshes the state change in response to group and specific and general queries e Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224 1 1 1 and that the included filter for 10 11 1 1 and 10 11 1 2 are no longer necessary The querier before making any state changes sends a group and source query to see if any other host is interested in these two sources queries for state changes are retransmitted multiple times If any are interested they respond with their current state information and the querier refreshes the relevant state information e Separately in the below figure the querier sends a general query to 224 0 0 1 e Host 2 responds to the periodic general query so the querier refreshes the state information for that group Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 99 Membership Queries Leaving and Staying vatana Gag Mae Segre Sow Bnew tutes arta tat SS _ ES ui 1 TT i M ms 64 s 1 y M bus Croup Aet hd bis ure i haber up Record 4 Number of Group Recor
478. ure Detection UFD chapter Ensuring the FN IOM system is in Standalone Mode To ensure that the FN IOM is in Standalone Mode use the show system stack unit 0 iom mode command Dell show system stack unit 0 iom mode Unit Boot Mode Next Boot 0 standalone f the FN IOM system is not in the Standalone Mode reset the system to its factory default state To reset the system use the restore factory defaults stack unit 0 clear all commana It brings the system in standalone preconfigured mode and sets all configuration settings to a known state Dell restore factory defaults stack unit 0 clear all Proceed with factory settings Confirm yes no y 24 Before You Start Configure Interfaces and Port Channel This section provides the commands for configuring port channels on common upstream switches that are connected to the FN IOM system Port FC Series FC IOA Port2 Server in FX2 E in FX2 Upstream Chassis Chassis Pons a Switch Port4 a Interfaces and Port Channels The previous illustration is applicable to the FN 410S and FN 410T servers If you are using the FN 2210S server in its default configuration you can only use the TenGigabitethernet 0 11 and TenGigabitethernet 0 12 in the uplink port channel Ports TenGigabitethernet 0 9 and TenGigabitethernet 0 10 are Fibre Channel ports By default on the FN IOM the external Ethernet ports are preconfigured in port channel 128 with LACP enabled Port chan
479. ve ETS allows different traffic types to coexist without interruption in the same converged link K NOTE The IEEE 802 1Qaz CEE and CIN versions of ETS are supported ETS is implemented on an Aggregator as follows e Traffic in priority groups is assigned to strict queue or WERR scheduling in a dcb map and is managed using the ETS bandwidth assignment algorithm Dell Networking OS de qeues all frames of strict priority traffic before servicing any other queues A queue with strict priority traffic can starve other queues in the same port e ETS assigned bandwidth allocation and scheduling apply only to data queues not to control queues e Dell Networking OS supports hierarchical scheduling on an interface Dell Networking OS control traffic is redirected to control queues as higher priority traffic with strict priority scheduling After control queues drain out the remaining data traffic is scheduled to queues according to the bandwidth and scheduler configuration in the dcb map The available bandwidth calculated by the ETS algorithm is equal to the link bandwidth after scheduling non ETS higher priority traffic e By default equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dotlp priority in a priority group e By default equal bandwidth is assigned to each priority group in the dcb map applied to an egress port The sum of auto configured bandwidth allocation to dotip priority traffic in all ETS priority groups is 100 e dotl
480. ve LACP B Passive LACP C Short Timeout D Long Timeout Aggregatable Link F Individual Link G IN SYNC H OUT OF SYNC Collection enabled J Collection disabled K Distribution enabled Distribution disabled M Partner Defaulted N Partner Non defaulted Receiver is in expired state P Receiver is not in expired state ort Te 0 12 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp ort State Bundle Actor Admin State ADEHJLMP Key 1 Priority 32768 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 32768 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State ADEGIKNP Key 33 Priority 255 152 Link Aggregation Multiple Uplink LAGs Unlike IOA Automated modes Standalone VLT and Stacking Modes the IOA Programmable MUX can support multiple uplink LAGs You can provision multiple uplink LAGs K NOTE In order to avoid loops only disjoint VLANs are allowed between the uplink ports uplink LAGs and uplink to uplink switching is disabled Multiple Uplink LAGs with 10G Member Ports The following sample commands configure multiple dynamic uplink LAGs with 10G member ports based on LACP 1 Bring up all the ports Dell configure Dell conf int range tengigabitethernet 0 1 56 Dell conf if range te 0 1 56 no shutdown 2 Associate the member ports into LAG 10 and 11 Dell configure Dell conf int range tengigabitethernet 0 41 42 Dell conf if range te 0 41 42 port channel protocol lacp Dell conf if
481. version 9 7 0 0 The MI O Aggregator is installed in a Dell PowerEdge M I O Aggregator For information about how to install and perform the initial switch configuration refer to the Getting Started Guides on the Dell Support website at http www dell com support manuals Though this guide contains information about protocols it is not intended to be a complete reference This guide is a reference for configuring protocols on Dell Networking systems For complete information about protocols refer to other documentation including IETF requests for comment RFCs The instructions in this guide cite relevant RFCs and Standards Compliance contains a complete list of the supported RFCs and management information base files MIBs K NOTE You can perform some of the configuration tasks described in this document by using either the Dell command line or the chassis management controller CMC graphical interface Tasks supported by the CMC interface are shown with the CMC icon CMC Audience This document is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring and maintaining networks and assumes knowledge in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking technologies Conventions This guide uses the following conventions to describe command syntax Keyword Keywords are in Courier a monospaced font and must be entered in the CLI as listed parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the C
482. vertise Advertise TLVs disable Disable LLDP protocol on this interface end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from LLDP configuration mode hello LDP hello configuration mode LDP mode configuration default rx and tx multiplier LDP multiplier configuration no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show LLDP configuration Dell conf if te 0 3 11dp Enabling LLDP LLDP is enabled by default Enable and disable LLDP globally or per interface If you enable LLDP globally all UP interfaces send periodic LLDPDUs To enable LLDP use the following command 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Enable LLDP PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP use the following command Disable LLDP globally or for an interface disable To undo an LLDP configuration precede the relevant command with the keyword no Advertising TLVs You can configure the system to advertise TLVs out of all interfaces or out of specific interfaces e f you configure the system globally all interfaces send LLDPDUS with the specified TLVs e f you configure an interface only the interface sends LLDPDUS with the specified TLVs e f you configure LLDP both globally and at interface level the interface level configuration overrides the global configuration 164 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP To advertise TLVs use the following commands
483. vious stack mastership is kept when a stack loses power As it reboots the election process will once again determine the Master and Standby switches As long as the priority has not changed on any members the stack will retain the same Master and Standby NOTE Each stack members role including the Master and Standby can be defined by the user at any time by setting the priority If the entire stack is powered OFF and ON again the unit that was the Master before the reboot will remain the Master after the stack resumes operation However when a stack is powered on all members are in sleep mode for 5 seconds while waiting on the previous Master to join the stack If the previous Master fails to join within 5 seconds the remaining members including the Standby elect a new Master Configuring Priority and stack group Perform the following steps to configure the priorities and stack groups for each of the switches 1 Set the priorities for the stack unit CONFIGURATION mode stack unit unit number priority 1 14 Dell conf stack unit 0 priority 12 Setting the priority will determine which switch will become the management Master switch The switch with the highest priority number is elected Master The default priority is O K NOTE It is best practice to assign priority values to all switches before stacking them in order to acquire and retain complete control over each units role in the stack 242 Stacking 2 Configure th
484. w linecard all command Dell conf tdo show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details grep 0 stack unit 0 stack port all 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts O Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts K NOTE Dell accepts a space or no space before and after the pipe To filter a phrase with spaces underscores or ranges enclose the phrase with double quotation marks The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text The following example shows this command used in combination with the show linecard all command Example of the except Keyword Dell conf do show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details except 0 Admin mode is On Admin is enabled Local is enabled Link Delay 65535 pause quantum Dell conf 32 Configuration Fundamentals The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text The following example shows this command used in combination with the show linecard all command Example of the find Keyword Dell conf do show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details find 0 stack unit 0 stack port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled Local is enabled Link Delay 65535 pause quantum O Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts Dell conf The no more command displays the output all at once rath
485. w tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports 1 Active U Te 0 33 10 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 VUE 11 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 vt 12 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 LE 13 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 JU 14 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 1 15 Active T Po128 Te 0 41 42 m Te 0 yad 20 Active U Po128 Te 0 41 42 U Te 0 1 Dell You can remove the inactive VLANs that have no member ports using the following command Dell configure Dell conf no interface vlan lt vlan id gt gt vlan id Inactive VLAN with no member ports You can remove the tagged VLANs using the no vlan tagged lt VLAN RANGE gt command You can remove the untagged VLANs using the no vlan untagged command in the physical port port channel VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms Virtual link trunk VLT The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches VLT backup link The backup link monitors the vitality of VLT peer switches The backup link sends configurable periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches 280 PMUX Mode of the IO Aggregator e VLT interconnect VLTi The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces e VLT domain This domain includes both the VLT peer devices VLT interconnec
486. wn Dell When no DCBx TLVs are received on a DCB enabled interface for 180 seconds DCB is automatically disabled and flow control is re enabled Lossless Traffic Handling In auto DCB enable mode Aggregator ports operate with the auto detection of DCBx traffic At any moment some ports may operate with link level flow control while others operate with DCB based PFC enabled As a result lossless traffic is ensured only if traffic ingresses on a PFC enabled port and egresses on another PFC enabled port 44 Data Center Bridging DCB Lossless traffic is not guaranteed when it is transmitted on a PFC enabled port and received on a link level flow control enabled port or transmitted on a link level flow control enabled port and received on a PFC enabled port Enabling DCB on Next Reload To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces come up with DCB enabled and flow control disabled use the dcb enable on next reload command Internal PFC buffers are automatically configured 1 Globally enable DCB on all interfaces after next switch reload CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable on next reload To reconfigure the Aggregator so that all interfaces come up with DCB disabled and link level flow control enabled use the no dcb enable on next reload command PFC buffer memory is automatically freed Enabling Auto DCB Enable Mode on Next Reload To configure the Aggregator so that all interfaces come up in auto DCB enable mode with DC
487. wn Dell conf if ma 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 Dell conf if ma 0 0 interface ManagementEthernet 0 0 no ip address no shutdown Dell conf if ma 0 0 show config no ip address show config Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the or help command To list the keywords available in the current mode enter at the prompt or after a keyword e Enter after a prompt lists all of the available keywords The output of this command is the same for the help command Dell start Start Shell capture Capture Packet cd Change current directory clear Reset functions clock Manage the system clock configure Configuring from terminal copy Copy from one file to another More e Enter after a partial keyword lists all of the keywords that begin with the specified letters Dell conf cl clock Dell conf cl Enter space after a keyword lists all of the keywords that can follow the specified keyword Dell conf clock summer time Configure summer daylight savings time 30 Configuration Fundamentals timezone Configure time zone Dell conf clock Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands The CLI is not case sensitive You can enter partial CLI keywords Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command For example you cannot enter c1
488. wn in the following illustration in addition to the basic TLV fields e Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI a unique number assigned by the IEEE to an organization or vendor e OUI Sub type These sub types indicate the kind of information in the following data field The sub types are determined by the owner of the OUI fnC0052mp 7 bits 9 bits 3 octets 1 octet 0 507 octets Figure 23 Organizationally Specific TLVs IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802 1 and 802 3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP the IEEE OUI is 00 80 C2 You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs Table 13 Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description Optional TLVs 4 Port description A user defined alphanumeric string that describes the port The Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV 5 System name A user defined alphanumeric string that identifies the system 6 System description A user defined alphanumeric string that identifies the system 7 System capabilities Identifies the chassis as one or more of the following repeater bridge WLAN Access Point 166 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Type TLV 8 Management address IEEE 802 1 Organizationally Specific TLVs 127 Port VLAN ID 127 Port and Protocol VLAN ID 127 VLAN Name 127 Protocol Identity IEEE 802 3 Organizationally Specific TLVs 127 MAC PHY Configuration
489. work VLAN IP address of the management port and log in to the switch to access the CLI Configuring and Bringing Up a Stack After you attach the 40G QSFP or direct attach cables in a stack of Aggregators to bring up the stack follow these steps K NOTE The procedure uses command examples for the stacking topology shown previously in this chapter Set up a connection to the CLI on an Aggregator as described in Accessing the CLI Log on to the CLI and enter Global Configuration mode Login username Password Dell gt enable Dell configure Configure the Aggregator to operate in stacking mode CONFIGURATION mode stack unit 0 iom mode stack Repeat Steps 1 to 3 on the second Aggregator in the stack Log on to the CLI and reboot each switch one after another in as short a time as possible EXEC PRIVILEGE mode reload NOTE If the stacked switches all reboot at approximately the same time the switch with the highest MAC address is automatically elected as the master switch The switch with the next highest MAC address is elected as standby As each switch joins the stack it is assigned the lowest available stack unit number from 0 to 5 The default configuration of each stacked switch is stored in the running configuration of the stack The stack unit ID numbers are retained after future stack reloads To verify the stack unit number assigned to each switch in the stack use the show system brief command
490. x enables debugging only for incoming packet traffic EXEC PRIVILEGE mode debug fip snooping all acl error ifm info ipc rx To turn off debugging event messages enter the no debug fip snooping command FIP Snooping 95 7 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP On an Aggregator IGMP snooping is auto configured You can display information on IGMP by using show ip igmp command Multicast is based on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address Hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group The internet group management protocol IGMP is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group Multicast routing protocols such as protocol independent multicast PIM use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table This chapter contains the following sections e IGMP Overview e IGMP Snooping IGMP Overview IGMP has three versions Version 3 obsoletes and is backwards compatible with version 2 version 2 obsoletes version 1 IGMP Version 2 IGMP version 2 improves upon version 1 by specifying IGMP Leave messages which allows hosts to notify routers that they no longer care about traffic for a particular group Leave messages reduce the amount of time that the router takes to stop forwarding traffic for a group to a subnet leave latency after the last host leaves the group In version 1 hos
491. xecute shell cmd command View the Multicast IPMC replication table from the bShell EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 ipmc replication View the internal statistics for each port pipe unit on per port basis EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 port stats detail View the stack unit internal registers for each port pipe EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 register View the tables from the bShell through the CLI without going into the bShell EXEC Privilege mode 338 Debugging and Diagnostics show hardware stack unit 0 5 unit 0 0 table dump table name Environmental Monitoring Aggregator components use environmental monitoring hardware to detect transmit power readings receive power readings and temperature updates To receive periodic power updates you must enable the following command e Enable environmental monitoring enable optic info update interval Example of the show interfaces transceiver Command Dell show int ten 0 49 transceiver SFP is present SFP 49 Serial Base ID fields SFP 49 Id 0x03 SFP 49 Ext Id 0x04 SFP 49 Connector 0x07 SFP 49 Transceiver Cod 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x20 0x40 0Ox0c 0x01 SFP 49 Encoding 0x01 SFP 49 BR Nominal 0x0c SFP 49 Length 9um Km 0x00 SFP 49 Length 9um 100m 0x00 SFP 49 Length 50um 10m 0x37 SFP 49 Length 62 5um 10m
492. y not bind id_rsa pub to RSA authentication while logged in via the console In this case this message displays Error No username set for this term Enable host based authentication on the server Dell Networking system and the client Unix machine The following message appears if you attempt to log in via SSH and host based is disabled on the client In this case verify that host based authentication is set to Yes in the file ssh_config root permission is required to edit this file permission denied host based If the IP address in the RSA key does not match the IP address from which you attempt to log in the following message appears In this case verify that the name and IP address of the client is contained in the file etc hosts RSA Authentication Error Security 213 Telnet To use Telnet with SSH first enable SSH as previously described By default the Telnet daemon is enabled If you want to disable the Telnet daemon use the following command or disable Telnet in the startup config To enable or disable the Telnet daemon use the no ip telnet server enable command Example of Using Telnet for Remote Login Dell conf tip telnet server enabl Dell conf Hno ip telnet server enabl VTY Line and Access Class Configuration Various methods are available to restrict VTY access in Dell Networking OS These depend on which authentication scheme you use line local or remote Table 21 VTY Ac
493. y whether members of the community may retrieve values in Read Only mode Read write access is not supported 22 31 23 SRPM1 P CP SNMP 6 SNMP WARM START Agent Initialized SNMP WARM START To create an SNMP community e Choose a name for the community CONFIGURATION mode snmp server community name Yo Example of Creating an SNMP Community To view your SNMP configuration use the show running config snmp command from EXEC Privilege mode Dell conf snmp server community my snmp community ro 22 31 23 RPM1 P CP SSNMP 6 SNMP_ WARM START Agent Initialized SNMP WARM START Dell show running config snmp snmp server community mycommunity ro Dell Setting Up User Based Security SNMPv3 When setting up SNMPv3 you can set users up with one of the following three types of configuration for SNMP read write operations Users are typically associated to an SNMP group with permissions provided such as OID view e noauth no password or privacy Select this option to set up a user with no password or privacy privileges This setting is the basic configuration Users must have a group and profile that do not require password privileges e auth password privileges Select this option to set up a user with password authentication e priv password and privacy privileges Select this option to set up a user with password and privacy privileges To set up user based security SNMPv3 use the following commands
494. z 2 10 1 2 1 3 CORE DUMP DIR FTP STK MEMBER 233 flO0cp vrrp 140522124357 Stkl acore CN enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 2 2 CORE DUMP DIR FTP STK MEMBER 10cp_ sysd 140617134445 Stk0 acore gz enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 3 1 1 Fri Mar 14 11 51 46 2014 enterprises 6027 3 10 2 10 1 3 1 2 Fri Nov 8 08 11 16 2013 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 3 1 3 Fri May 23 05 05 16 2014 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 3 2 1 Tue Jun 17 14 19 26 2014 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 4 1 0 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 4 1 2 1 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 4 1 3 1 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 4 2 1 0 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 5 1 1 flashmntr enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 5 1 2 l2mgr enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 5 1 3 vrrp Hex 76 72 72 70 enterprises 6027 3 10 1 2 10 1 5 2 1 sysd Hex 73 79 73 64 The output above displays that the software core files generated by the system 234 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 18 Stacking An Aggregator auto configures to operate in standalone mode To use an Aggregator in a stack you must manually configure it using the CLI to operate in stacking mode Stacking is supported only on the 40GbE ports on the base module Stacking is limited to six Aggregators in the same or different m1000e chassis To configure a stack you must use the CLI Stacking provides a single point of management for high availability and

Dell PowerEdge Configuration Guide for the M I/O Aggregator 9.9(0.0)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents